JP7384548B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, information regarding the number of balls hit (number of batted balls) and the number of prize balls (
A gaming machine that displays a base value) has been proposed.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 10-118314

However, there was a risk that accurate information could not be displayed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to display accurate information.

(α) Equipped with a firing device for firing game media into the gaming area, variable display of special identification information, and advantageous to the player based on the specific display result being displayed as the display result of the special identification information. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state,
variable means that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the game area can enter;
Provided in a flow path for discharging game media that have passed through any of the entry areas provided in the gaming area and game media that have not passed through any of the entry areas, and for discharging game media that have passed through the flow path. detectable detection means;
a payout means that pays out game media based on fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state; Predetermined information display means having a display area;
special information display means capable of displaying the special identification information;
A game control means having a variable control means capable of playing a round game for changing the variable means to the open state a predetermined number of times, and a determination means capable of determining whether or not the said variable means is in the advantageous state. ,
The variable control means starts the round game based on the display of the specific display result,
The determining means is configured to detect game media that have entered the variable means but have not yet been detected by the detection means after the predetermined number of round games have been completed and the variable means has changed to a closed state. is determined to be in the advantageous state until a predetermined period of time elapses until it is detected by the detection means,
The state when the predetermined period of time has elapsed is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed,
The predetermined information display means includes:
The display area includes a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
A plurality of types of the predetermined information corresponding to each of a plurality of calculation periods can be displayed as the predetermined information in the first display area,
Period information indicating which calculation period out of a plurality of calculation periods is included can be displayed in the second display area simultaneously with the predetermined information,
when a predetermined error occurs, displaying special information in the first display area and the second display area without displaying the period information and the predetermined information;
The game control means executes a process related to the display of the predetermined information display means and a process related to the display of the special information display means in one interrupt process,
It is characterized by
Other gaming machines are
It is equipped with a firing device (for example, a batted ball firing device, etc.) for firing a game medium (for example, a game ball, etc.) into a game area (for example, the game area 10, etc.), and variably displays special identification information. For the player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed as the information display result (for example, a derivation display of a confirmed special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol on the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B). A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.),
a variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the gaming area can enter;
Game media that have passed through any of the entry areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning opening 50A, second general winning opening 50B, third general winning opening 50C, fourth general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening) In order to discharge game media (game balls, etc. that have been taken into the out port 52) that have not passed through any of the entry areas (game balls, etc. that have entered any of the entry areas). (For example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the position where the game ball discharged from the opening 2A of the game board 2A can be detected, or as shown in FIG. 107(B), the position of the ball receiving member 1700. A detecting means (for example, out ball detector 710, etc.) that is provided at a position where game balls discharged from the opening 1701 can be detected and can detect game media passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D that become the general winning area, and the big winning hole) a payout means that pays out game media based on winning a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off) For example, the number of balls hit) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls won by winning each winning hole, etc.). a predetermined information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 107) having a display area capable of displaying (for example, performance information, etc. in FIG. 83);
special information display means capable of displaying the special identification information;
A variable control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 87) capable of playing a round game in which the variable means is changed to the open state a predetermined number of times, and whether the variable means is in the advantageous state or not. A determining means capable of determining (for example, a CPU 103 etc. that determines whether or not it is in a gaming state based on a probability change flag, a time saving flag, etc.), and a gaming control means having
The variable control means starts the round game based on the display of the specific display result (for example, controls the jackpot door from a closed state to an open state based on the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed). death,
The determining means is configured to detect game media that have entered the variable means but have not yet been detected by the detection means after the predetermined number of round games have been completed and the variable means has changed to a closed state. is detected by the detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, from timing t4 when the big prize opening door changes from the open state to the closed state to timing t5 when time T5 has elapsed) etc.), and it is determined that the state is in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the state control process in FIG. 101, the round playing flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 when the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses. etc.),
The state when the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, the state at timing t5, etc.) is the special state after the predetermined number of round games are completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the ending state in the image display device 5) the state in which the performance is being performed, etc.),
The information table means includes:
The display area includes a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
A plurality of types of the predetermined information corresponding to each of a plurality of calculation periods can be displayed as the predetermined information in the first display area,
Period information indicating which calculation period out of a plurality of calculation periods is included can be displayed in the second display area simultaneously with the predetermined information,
when a predetermined error occurs, displaying special information in the first display area and the second display area without displaying the period information and the predetermined information;
The game control means executes a process related to the display of the predetermined information display means and a process related to the display of the special information display means in one interrupt process,
It is characterized by
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.
The gaming machine of means C1 is
A firing device (e.g., a ball ejecting device, etc.) for ejecting a game medium (e.g., a game ball, etc.) to a game area (e.g., the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (e.g., first, second Derivation and display of confirmed special symbols that will become jackpot symbols and small winning symbols on the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation and display of determined decorative symbols that will become a jackpot combination on the image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the
a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the gaming area can win prizes;
a variable winning prize control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special drawing process shown in FIG. 87) capable of playing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state a predetermined number of times;
Game media that have passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning hole 50A, second general winning hole 50B, third general winning hole 50C, fourth general winning hole 50D, first starting winning hole) In order to discharge game balls, etc. that won in either the opening, the second starting prize opening, or the big prize opening) and the gaming media that did not pass through any winning area (game balls, etc. taken into the out opening 52). (For example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the position where the game ball discharged from the opening 2A of the game board 2A can be detected, or as shown in FIG. 107(B), the position of the ball receiving member 1700. A detecting means (for example, out ball detector 710, etc.) that is provided at a position where game balls discharged from the opening 1701 can be detected and can detect game media passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D that become the general winning area, and the big winning hole) A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7);
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 103 that determines whether or not it is in the gaming state based on the probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off) For example, the number of balls hit) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls won in each winning slot, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 107) capable of displaying performance information (for example, performance information in FIG. 83),
The variable prize control means is
Starting the round game based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, controlling the jackpot door from a closed state to an open state based on the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed),
The determining means is
Until a predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined number of round games have been completed and the variable winning means changes to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the big prize opening door changes from the open state to the closed state). (e.g., from timing t4 to timing t5 when time T5 has elapsed), the advantageous state is determined (for example, as shown in the state control process in FIG. 101, the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). At t5, the round game in progress flag is cleared to an off state, etc.).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The state when the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the state at timing t5, etc.) is as follows:
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, a state where an ending effect is being executed on the image display device 5, etc.).
According to this, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The detection means is removable (for example, the out-of-ball detector 710 is removable with a clasp 740, as shown in FIG. 103(B)).
According to this, it is possible to deal with the case even if the detection means is not provided. Also, maintenance becomes easier.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3,
The detection means includes:
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2, etc.) that forms a game area (for example, the out ball detector 710 is installed on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 107(B)). (It is configured as a unit that can be placed in
According to this, maintenance becomes easy. Also, it can be used in common with different models.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D) machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific period after the gaming medium enters the general winning area (1 minute, 2 minutes,
or 5 minutes) under the specified conditions (valid starting prize in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a specific performance (specific performance F (pre-reading preview performance), specific performance G (variable result preview performance)) when a ready-to-reach state is established;
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 47th to 49th presentation modes) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and a specific performance is performed after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It can increase the interest until the execution.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
Execution of a notification effect that specifies the state after the game medium enters the general winning area (one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning hole). The gaming machine is characterized in that it further includes means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
Furthermore, as a notification effect that specifiably notifies the state after the game medium enters the general winning area, it is possible to notify the player whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. This includes both performances that are difficult to grasp and performances that make it easy for the player to grasp whether a predetermined specific period has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, a sound effect is played for a relatively short period (for example, 0.5
As the latter effect, the character continues to be output on the image display device until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area. There is a performance that shows

The gaming machine of means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B2,
The notification performance is a performance that specifies whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to increase the interest of the game until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period varies depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period is 1 minute when character A appears, the display period is 2 minutes when character B appears, and the display period is 2 minutes when character C appears). (The period will be 5 minutes)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the aspect of the notification presentation.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the performance control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120) controls the performance control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120) to Select one of the specific periods of Execute the effect to be displayed).
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first presentation mode (for example, the display of character A) is more effective than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the rate of determination. Also, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second presentation mode (for example, the display of character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the rate of determination.
In addition, if there is a one-to-one correspondence between the specific period and the presentation mode of the notification effect (if character A is fixed at 1 minute, character B is fixed at 2 minutes, and character C is fixed at 3 minutes) ), the performance control means (for example, performance control CPU 120) determines any one of a plurality of predetermined performance modes based on the game medium entering the general winning area. It is preferable to perform a notification performance (a performance in which a character is displayed for a specific period) according to the determined performance mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
The variable display means is configured to display a starting condition (
A game ball wins a prize in the first starting prize opening (valid starting winning) when the number of first pending memories has not reached the upper limit, and a second starting winning when the number of second pending memories has not reached the upper limit. Based on the fact that the start condition (not being controlled to a jackpot game state and not executing the variable display of the special figure game) is satisfied after the game ball has entered the prize (valid start winning). It performs variable display using
The performance execution means executes a preview performance (in the startup winning memory display area 5H, a preview performance corresponding to the variable display game to be previewed) that previews the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. This gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 47th performance mode and the 49th performance mode) is characterized in that a pending change performance in which a display part is changed from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific performance.
According to this, by creating an interest in foretelling the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied, the entry of the gaming medium into the general winning area is triggered, and thereby the entry of the gaming medium into the general winning area is created. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine of means B5,
Pending information corresponding to a variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met) further comprising a pending information display control means (production control CPU 120) for displaying a display area) on a display device (image display device 5);
The preview performance is to foretell the display result of the variable display corresponding to the pending information depending on the form of the pending information (if the starting prize determination result designation command is a command that designates "jackpot", then the The display area corresponding to the command is changed from a normal mode (for example, blue or red) to a special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command specifying "miss". It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of foretelling the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, taking the entry of the game medium into the general winning area as an opportunity.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means specifiably notifies the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area by displaying an object (characters A to C) on the display device (by displaying an object (characters A to C) on the display device). Immediately after winning a prize, one of the characters A to C appears) Execute the notification effect,
The preview effect is an effect that can be recognized by the player when the object changes the mode of the pending information (the displayed character performs some action and the mode of the display part corresponds to the suspended special figure game). This is a gaming machine characterized by a production that changes the game from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it becomes possible to use a common object to indicate the entry of gaming media into the general winning area and the preview of the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not met, and the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, by creating an effect in which the form of the pending information changes as the display form of the object changes (for example, due to a predetermined action), the player can recognize when the object changes the form of the pending information. Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the specific period, the specific effect will not be executed (if the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the character display period, the specific effect F or G will not be executed).
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
There are multiple general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area into which the gaming medium has entered (the first general winning opening 50
If you win A or the second general prize winning slot 50B, the specific period can be 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general prize winning (Characters A to C can appear), but the third general prize winning slot 50C
Alternatively, if a prize is won in the fourth general winning hole 50D, only 5 minutes from the general winning can become a specific period (only character C can appear).
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B10 to B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D) machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Movement detection means capable of detecting player movements (operation buttons 30 and performance control CPU 120)
)and,
After the gaming medium enters the general winning area, when the motion detection means detects a player's motion (repeated hit operation, stop each symbol operation, stop all symbols operation), a specific performance (cut-in notice performance, pseudo-series performance) is activated. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 in a 50th performance mode to a 53rd performance mode), comprising: a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a preview performance, a chance preview performance). .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific performance is executed using the player's action as a trigger, so that the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area can be increased.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine of means B10,
Specify the state after the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 50th presentation form and the 51st presentation form, a button icon 400
Increasing 0, determine the preview performance ("cut-in", "pseudo-run", "chance eye") that can be executed every time a prize is won in the general prize opening in the 52nd performance form and the 53rd performance form, This gaming machine is characterized in that it further includes a notification effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a notification effect (displaying characters 4000a to 4000c according to the determination result).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of operation for making the specific effect possible (repeated hit operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation), the mode of the notification effect (characters 4000a for "cut-in", character 4000a for "pseudo series") This gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 4000b and 4000c for "chance" are different.
According to this, it is possible for the player to recognize which type of action is required to perform a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
The gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the gaming medium enters (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning hole 50A of the left gaming area 10A or When a prize is won in the second general winning hole 50B, the player is notified at a higher rate than when a prize is won in the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D of the right gaming area 10B. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13,
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The mode of the notification performance differs depending on which general winning area the gaming medium enters (in the 52nd presentation form and the 53rd presentation form, winning the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B) In this case, the character 4000a of "cut-in" and the character 4 of "pseudo-ren"
Either 000b can be displayed, and the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D
If you win a prize, the characters 4000a for "cut in" and the characters 400a for "chance"
0c).
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, if a player enters the general prize area in the normal state) Case (first general winning hole 50A or second general winning hole 50 in the left gaming area 10A)
(If you win a prize in B), than if you win in a general winning hole in a variable probability state or in a time saving state (if you win in the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D in the right gaming area 10B). (notifications are made at a high rate)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately vary the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15,
The mode of the notification performance differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize winning area (in the 51st performance form and the 53rd performance form, in the normal state, "cut-in")
The characters 4000a and 4000b of "pseudo-connection" can be displayed, and the characters 4000a of "cut-in" and the characters 4000c of "chance" can be displayed in the variable probability state or the time saving state. )
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately vary the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium enters the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th performance form and the 51st performance form, When you enter the winning slot twice or more, a pseudo-continuation announcement will become possible.
When you win in the general prize opening three or more times, the chance preview performance becomes possible.)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17,
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The execution rate of the specific performance differs depending on which general winning area the gaming medium enters (in the 52nd performance form and the 53rd performance form, the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B If you win, the preview performance will be executed at a higher rate than if you win in the 3rd general prize opening 50C or the 4th general prize opening 50D)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18,
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The type of specific performance that can be executed differs depending on which general winning area the gaming medium enters (in the 52nd performance form and the 53rd performance form, the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole If you win 50B, you can perform either a cut-in preview performance or a pseudo-series preview performance, and if you win the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D, you can perform a cut-in preview performance. (It is possible to perform any of the following: or a chance notice performance)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, interest can be improved by drawing attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19,
The execution rate of the specific performance differs depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd performance form and the 53rd performance form, if a prize is won in the general winning slot in the normal state) If you win the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B of the left gaming area 10A), if you win the general prize opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state (the third general prize opening of the right gaming area 10B) (If a prize is won in the winning slot 50C or the 4th general winning slot 50D), notification will be made to enable execution of the specific performance at a higher rate
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately vary the interest depending on the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20,
The type of specific performance that can be executed differs depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st performance form and the 53rd performance form, in the normal state, cut-in notice performance and pseudo-sequence (It is possible to execute either a preview performance, and in a variable probability state or a time shortening state, it is possible to perform either a cut-in notice performance or a chance notice performance.)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately vary the interest depending on the state of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B22 to B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific performance (specific performance C: point granting performance, specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: look-ahead preview performance);
When the variable display is being executed (within the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed, or within the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed or decided to be executed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not being executed (during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed and it has been decided to execute it). A gaming machine (a pachinko machine with a 27th to 30th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the specific performance is executed differs depending on when a gaming medium enters the general prize winning area (within a period in which the game is not performed) This is a gaming machine 1).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different depending on whether the variable display is being executed or not, thereby increasing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
The gaming machine of means B22,
The game machine further includes an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol). ,
In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 27th performance mode and the 29th performance mode), the specific performance is a performance that is not related to the display result of the variable display (specific performance C: point awarding performance). be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
The gaming machine of means B22,
The game machine further includes an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol). ,
The specific performance is a performance related to the display result of the variable display (specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: look-ahead preview performance), and when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area This is a game machine (Pachinko game machine 1 of the 28th performance mode and the 30th performance mode) characterized in that the game is not executed when a game medium enters the machine.
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific performance (specific performance C: point granting performance, specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: look-ahead preview performance);
When the variable display is being executed (within the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed, or within the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed or decided to be executed), the general winning area and when the variable display is not being executed (during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed and it has been decided to execute it). A gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with a 31st performance mode and a 32nd performance mode) characterized in that a different specific performance is executed depending on when a gaming medium enters the general prize winning area (within a period in which the game is not played). ).
According to this, the specific effect is different when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, so that it is possible to increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
The game machine further includes an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol). ,
When a game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, a performance related to the display result of the variable display (specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B)
: Pre-read preview performance) is executed as the specific performance,
When a gaming medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is not being executed, a performance (specific performance C: point awarding performance) that is not related to the display result of the variable display is executed as the specific performance. This is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with a 31st performance mode and a 32nd performance mode).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area, and even when the variable display is not executed,
To appropriately increase interest when game media enters a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th performance form to 32nd performance form),
The rate at which the specific effect is executed varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed (for example, when the special effect game is executed when winning in the general winning hole) classification as to whether or not it is being executed, classification as the number of reserved memories at the time of winning a prize in the general winning hole, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning in the general winning hole is a normal state, a variable probability state or a time saving state. (Execute specific effects at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to arouse interest in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further increase the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 27th performance mode to the 32nd performance mode),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, different specific performances are executed (for example, a special drawing game is executed when a prize is won in the general winning opening). The classification is whether or not the game is held, the number of stored memories at the time of winning a prize in the general winning hole, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning in the general winning hole is a normal state, a variable probability state, or a time saving state. (Execute different types of specific performances depending on the classification, etc.)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to arouse interest in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further increase the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B29 to B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), the winning rate at the starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and characters wearing clothes of different colors are displayed according to the calculated winning rate. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that executes a performance display has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to simply display information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the starting prize opening on the information display means, but also to make the information easier to visually recognize. Means B29
The invention according to means B39 was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to make it easier to visually confirm information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention related to means B29 is:
Entry areas into which game media (game balls) can enter (first starting prize opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D, etc.),
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Comprising a display means (image display device 5),
The information display means displays performance information (for example, a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, etc.) different from the entry information in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not obstructed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, each winning opening This gaming machine is characterized in that the number of winnings is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually confirm the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention related to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means is capable of displaying the entry information regardless of the form of the performance information (as illustrated in FIG. 42, regardless of whether the decorative pattern is variably displayed, Regardless of whether or not it is displayed variably, the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening,
The number of prizes won in the second starting prize opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and the displayed number of prizes can be updated according to the winnings in each winning opening)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized regardless of the form of the performance information.

The invention related to means B31 is
Entry areas into which game media (game balls) can enter (first starting prize opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D, etc.),
Error detection means (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.)
An abnormality detection sensor group 26),
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 5),
The information display means displays error information (for example, an error message) notifying the occurrence of the error in an area where visibility of the entry information is not obstructed (as illustrated in FIGS. 42 and 43, to each winning opening). This gaming machine is characterized in that the number of winnings is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α where the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually confirm the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention related to means B32 is
The gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 43, regardless of whether an error message is displayed, the general winning slot The number of prizes won in the first starting prize opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and the numbers are displayed according to the winnings in each winning opening. (You can update the number of prizes won)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention related to means B33 is:
Entry areas into which game media (game balls) can enter (first starting prize opening, second starting winning opening, first to
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) having a fourth general winning opening 50A to 50D, etc.),
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of gaming media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Comprising a display means (image display device 5),
The information display means displays a display result of a variable display executed based on the game medium entering the starting area (for example, a display result of a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) based on the entry information. (a second area β different from a first area α in which the number of winnings in each winning opening is displayed, as illustrated in FIG. 42). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually confirm the entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention related to means B34 is
The gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being performed (as illustrated in FIG. 42, regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is being displayed variably,
Regardless of whether or not the fourth symbol is displayed variably, the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. (The displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winnings in each winning slot.)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when variable display is being executed.

The invention related to means B35 is:
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34,
An operable operation means (operation button 30),
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. This gaming machine is characterized by further comprising: an effect control CPU (120) for setting whether or not to display winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention related to means B36 is:
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35,
An operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player;
aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 46, a performance control CPU 120 that sets the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 30); The gaming machine is characterized by further comprising:
According to this, it becomes possible to set the aggregation period according to the player's judgment.

The invention related to means B37 is:
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36,
Game state control means (game control microcomputer 100
),
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 45, the number of winnings in a low base state and the number of winnings in a high base state can be displayed separately. )
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the gaming state.

The invention related to means B38 is:
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means that executes variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B),
The gaming state control means has a low frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control targeting the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control targeting the second starting winning hole is not executed) and a high frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control targeting the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control targeting the second starting winning hole is not executed) and a high frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control targeting the second starting winning hole is not executed) in which the frequency of game media entering the starting area is different. 2) It is possible to control the high base state in which the high opening control targeting the starting prize opening is being executed.
The information display means displays the entry information regarding the period during which the frequency is controlled to be the low frequency state (such as the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 45) and the entry information regarding the period during which the frequency is controlled to the high frequency state. This gaming machine is characterized by being able to display information (such as the number of general winnings in a high base state as shown in FIG. 45).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the low frequency state and the approach information according to the high frequency state.

The invention related to means B39 is:
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38,
A notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 46, when the number of winnings per set aggregation period does not meet a predetermined standard value, a notification is made to that effect) This gaming machine is further equipped with a notification means (image display device 5) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily understand that the entry information satisfies the predetermined conditions.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Previously, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (Fig. 32, Fig. 33)
As shown in , when a player accepts the start of a game by inputting a password, the winning rate of the starting winning hole in the gaming machine is calculated, and characters wearing clothes of different colors are displayed according to the calculated winning rate. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that executes an effect display has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) to confirm information regarding the fact that the game medium has entered an entry area such as a starting prize opening. Means B40, Means B41
This invention was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to enable only persons other than the player (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) to confirm the information.

The invention related to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first starting prize opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D, etc.) into which gaming media (for example, game balls) can enter. A gaming machine 1),
a granting unit (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that grants a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the passage of the game medium through the entry area;
Specific operation means (for example, mode changeover switch 31, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player;
Cumulative value information regarding the cumulative value of gaming value awarded by the awarding means (for example, FIG.
7, the number of payouts from each general winning hole, the number of payouts from each starting winning hole, and the total number of payouts) (for example, the image display device 5);
The notification means reports the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 31 is operated and the maintenance mode is set, information on the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device). 5)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) can confirm the information.

Note that the "specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player" may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a clerk at a game parlor or an inspector/inspector of the game machine.

The invention related to means B41 is:
A gaming machine of means B40,
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) that executes a performance related to the game,
The notification means may perform the following operations according to the manner of the performance executed by the performance execution means.
Announce the cumulative value information (for example, display or output sound such that a character appearing during a preview performance or a reach performance reads out the information on the winning number management table)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine the information is based on the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B42 to B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the performance display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted up number reaches the number of triggers for execution determined by a lottery, the player is informed that a consecutive game in memory will occur. In the game machine disclosed in JP-A No. 2014-73187, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole, the number of balls entered is uniformly counted up by 1 and displayed. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further increase the interest when gaming media enters the general winning area. The inventions according to means B42 to B51 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and are aimed at increasing the interest of games in gaming machines having general winning areas.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting entrance entrance) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 levels to a maximum of 10 levels) that changes the effect mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120
) and,
Depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (such as within a period in which variable display of special symbols is being executed and within a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed, etc.),
The rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different (the rate at which the performance that increases the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 by one level is executed is different).
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 33rd performance mode to 37th performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance is different depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area, thereby increasing the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 5) displays a predetermined period of time (performance control CPU
120 (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the variable display period), the variable display (
variable display of decorative designs).
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (categorization into cases where the remaining time until the final decorative pattern is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and cases where it is less than 10 seconds) This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 34th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different.
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
The remaining period of the variable display that is being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (categorization into cases where the remaining time until the final decorative pattern is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and cases where it is less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result (jackpot symbol, losing symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is made to differ. It's okay. Specifically, if the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display Accordingly, the rate at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a jackpot symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a losing symbol). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
The gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 5) is configured to meet a start condition (the variable display based on the previous starting winnings ends) after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole). The variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern) is executed based on the fact that the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern) is established. ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol);
A preview performance (pre-read preview performance) that foretells that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is performed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (the variable display that is the target of the pre-read preview performance is executed). The advance notice performance execution means (performance control CPU 1) executed before
20) and further comprising:
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed (the target of the pre-read preview performance when the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine with the 35th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs depending on the number of variable displays until the variable display is executed. 1).
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance varies depending on the period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed. This can further enhance the interest of the performance.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed (the target of the pre-read preview performance when the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command) The performance in the specific performance is determined according to the number of variable displays until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the preview performance (jackpot symbol, losing symbol). The rate at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the number of times the variable display is executed until the variable display that is the target of the preview effect (the variable display that is the target of the pre-read preview) is set within a predetermined range. (for example, twice or less), the rate at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance will vary depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview performance (high if it is a jackpot symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and in the case of a missed pattern, at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44,
Further comprising a ready-to-reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a ready-to-reach effect in accordance with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
If the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball enters the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach variation), and after the execution of the reach effect. When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation),
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 36th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different.
According to this, the performance mode changes in a specific performance depending on when the gaming medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect and when the gaming medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45,
It has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium enters (if the game ball wins in either the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C, or the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D) This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 37th performance mode) characterized in that the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different depending on when a game ball wins a prize in any of the following.
According to this, the rate at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered, thereby making it possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting entrance entrance) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 levels to a maximum of 10 levels) that changes the effect mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Executable specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120
) and,
Depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (such as within a period in which variable display of special symbols is being executed and within a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed, etc.),
The stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) at which the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 is increased is different).
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with the 38th performance mode to the 42nd performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, the stage at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance is different depending on the state when the gaming medium enters the general winning area, thereby increasing the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 5) displays a predetermined period of time (performance control CPU
120 (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the variable display period), the variable display (
variable display of decorative designs).
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (categorization into cases where the remaining time until the final decorative pattern is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and cases where it is less than 10 seconds) This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 39th performance mode) characterized in that the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different.
According to this, the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific performance can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
The remaining period of the variable display that is being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (categorization into cases where the remaining time until the final decorative pattern is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and cases where it is less than 10 seconds) ) and the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (jackpot symbol, losing symbol), the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific production is made different. It's okay. Specifically, if the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display Accordingly, even if the stage at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance is different (for example, if it becomes a jackpot symbol, it changes by a large number of stages, and if it becomes a losing symbol, it changes by a smaller number of stages). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
The gaming machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 5) is configured to meet a start condition (the variable display based on the previous starting winnings ends) after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole). The variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern) is executed based on the fact that the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern) is established. ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol);
A preview performance (pre-read preview performance) that foretells that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is performed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (the variable display that is the target of the pre-read preview performance is executed). The advance notice performance execution means (performance control CPU 1) executed before
20) and further comprising:
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed (the target of the pre-read preview performance when the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the 40th performance mode) characterized in that the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs depending on the number of variable displays until the variable display is executed. 1).
According to this, the stage at which the performance mode changes in a specific performance differs depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed. This can further enhance the interest of the performance.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the preview performance is executed (the target of the pre-read preview performance when the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command) The performance in the specific performance is determined according to the number of variable displays until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the preview performance (jackpot symbol, losing symbol). The stages at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the number of times the variable display is executed until the variable display that is the target of the preview effect (the variable display that is the target of the pre-read preview) is set within a predetermined range. (for example, twice or less), the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the preview performance (for example, in the case of a jackpot symbol, It is also possible to change the number of steps by a large number of steps, and in the case of a missed symbol, change by a smaller number of steps.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49,
Further comprising a ready-to-reach effect execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a ready-to-reach effect in accordance with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
If the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball enters the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach variation), and after the execution of the reach effect. When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation),
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with a 41st performance mode) characterized in that the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different.
According to this, the performance mode changes in a specific performance depending on when the gaming medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect and when the gaming medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect. By having different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of a particular performance.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50,
It has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium enters (if the game ball wins in either the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C, or the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D) This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with a 42nd performance mode) characterized in that the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance is different depending on when a game ball wins a prize in any of the following.
According to this, the stage at which the performance mode changes in the specific performance differs depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered, thereby making it possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B52 to B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters the normal winning hole (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the performance display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted up number reaches the number of triggers for execution determined by a lottery, the player is informed that a consecutive game in memory will occur. In the game machine shown in Patent Document 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the winning hole. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, if the game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to understand this, but this is not taken into account in the prior art. The inventions related to means B52 to B56 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and their purpose is to make it possible to know that game media will not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
Variable display (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative patterns) when game media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that executes
and,
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
If the number of gaming media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number (
If the number of wins in the general prize opening is 0 during the 10 minutes during which it is detected that the game is being played, or the number of wins in the general prize opening during the 30 minutes during which it is detected that the game is being played is less than 3. A specific effect E that displays a specific effect (a notification image 2200, etc. including an image imitating the form of a general prize opening and the text "There is no general prize winning") on the image display device 5)
) A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the following.
According to this, it becomes possible for the player and the game parlor to understand that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means (effect that determines whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the gaming hall settings and player settings in the display setting table) control CPU 120),
further comprising a store clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 32) that accepts a setting operation by a store clerk;
The setting means performs a setting to permit execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation receiving means (specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize winning) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32). , to notify the general public that the number of prize winners is low).
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, the intention of the gaming hall can be reflected in whether or not to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
The gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (R
further comprising a winning number counter area) formed in the AM122,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not retained in the event of a power outage (the value in the winning number counter area is erased due to a power outage).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of approaches during a power outage.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54,
The rate at which the specific performance is executed differs depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific performance E is executed at different rates depending on the normal state and the variable probability state or time saving state).
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55,
Different specific performances are performed depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific performance E is performed in different ways depending on the normal state, variable probability state, or time saving state).
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific performance.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B57 to B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), the number of prize balls (granted value) obtained by entering the game medium into the jackpot hole during the execution of the jackpot game, A game machine has been proposed that executes an effect that displays a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (value given) obtained by entering a game medium into a normal winning hole (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the gaming parlor or the player is not reflected in whether or not to execute an effect when a gaming medium enters the general winning area. The inventions related to means B57 to B64 were made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the gaming hall and the players regarding whether or not to execute the effect when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
When gaming media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (by displaying the information of the number of winnings management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, by the setting of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30) Based on the settings, the object is increased each time a game ball enters the general prize opening, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening in the jackpot game state is displayed, specific effect A: variable result preview effect, specific effect B: pre-reading. a notification means (image display device 5) capable of executing a preview performance);
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising: setting means (a mode changeover switch 31, a display changeover switch 32, and an operation button 30) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the particular effect by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, the intentions of the gaming parlor and the players can be reflected in whether or not to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
Further comprising a store clerk operation reception means (mode changeover switch 31, display changeover switch 32) that accepts a setting operation by a store clerk,
The setting means performs a setting to permit execution of the specific performance when the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation reception means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, the number of prizes management table is set in the maintenance mode). A specific production A that displays information on the number of prizes entered into the general prize opening in the jackpot game state, which increases the number of objects each time a game ball enters the general prize opening based on the setting of the display changeover switch 32; : Enables execution of variable result preview performance, Specific performance B: Enables execution of look-ahead preview performance)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, the intention of the gaming hall can be reflected in whether or not to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
The gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
Further comprising a player operation reception means for accepting setting operations by the player,
The setting means performs a setting to permit execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is accepted by the player operation receiving means (based on the setting by the operation button 30 while the demo screen is displayed, Specific performance A: Variation result preview performance that increases the number of objects each time a game ball enters the slot, and displays the number of wins in the general prize opening in the jackpot game state based on the settings with the operation button 30 while the demo screen is displayed. (Specific performance B: Makes it possible to perform a pre-read preview performance)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59,
The specific performance specifies the number of game media entering the general winning area during a predetermined period (period controlled by the jackpot gaming state) (the number of winning balls entering the jackpot opening and the number of winning balls). This gaming machine is characterized by a performance that separately displays the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls, the number of winning balls entered into the general prize opening, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning balls.
According to this, it is possible to improve the gameplay during the predetermined period.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60,
The specific performance execution means executes the specific performance (executes the performances of the 25th performance form and the 26th performance form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. This is a gaming machine with special features.
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance execution means executes a different specific performance depending on the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes a performance of a 25th performance form or a 26th performance form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62,
The specific performance is a performance that specifiably notifies the number of game media entering the general winning area (the number of objects is increased each time a game ball enters the general winning opening),
When a game is not being played on the gaming machine (the variable display of decorative symbols is not being executed, and the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command are received for a predetermined period of time) A performance control CPU 12 that determines the end of the game based on the fact that the game has ended.
0), specifyably inform that the number of game media entering the general winning area in the specific performance is 0 (when a game end determination is made, the general notification displayed on the image display device 5 (Delete all objects equivalent to the number of prizes in the prize opening)
This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from knowing the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63,
The specific performance is a gaming machine characterized in that display information corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means B65 to B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in JP-A No. 2014-200305 (Paragraph 0208, Figure 59), when a game ball enters the general winning hole during a jackpot, one aspect of the starting memory display changes, and the starting memory display changes. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether a special figure variable display game corresponding to the display is a "win" or a "miss". In a gaming machine having such a general winning hole, there is room to further enhance the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning hole. The inventions according to means B65 to B77 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and are aimed at increasing the interest of games in gaming machines having general winning ports.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D) machine 1),
When gaming media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance),
A case where a game medium enters the general winning area during the first gaming state (normal state), and a case where a gaming medium enters the general winning area during the second gaming state (variable probability or time saving state). , the rate at which the specific performance is executed is different (in the normal state, the specific performance is executed at a higher rate than in the variable probability or time saving state).
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with first performance mode to fourth performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
When gaming media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: pre-read preview performance),
A case where a game medium enters the general winning area during the first gaming state (normal state) and a case where a gaming medium enters the general winning area during the second gaming state (variable probability or time saving state). , execute a different specific performance (in normal state, perform specific performance A, and in variable probability or time saving state, perform specific performance B)
This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 with fifth performance mode to twelfth performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
Gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (second performance form to fourth performance form, tenth performance form to
A pachinko gaming machine 1) with a twelfth performance mode,
When in the first gaming state (normal state), executing the specific performance when the number of entries of gaming media into the general winning area reaches a first number of entries;
When in the second gaming state (variable probability or time saving state), the specific performance is executed when the number of entries of gaming media into the general winning area becomes a second number of entries that is different from the first number of entries. This gaming machine is characterized by:
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
When gaming media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) that executes a specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance),
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), and in the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established)
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (after the reach variation state is established, the rate of execution is different than during the period other than the reach variation or before the reach variation state is established). (Specific effects are executed at a high rate)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 13th performance mode to 16th performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole) into which game media (gaming balls) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning holes 50A to 50D). machine 1),
When gaming media enters the starting winning area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5) that variably displays identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol);
a giving unit (game control microcomputer 100) that gives a specific value (prize balls, points) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: pre-read preview performance),
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), and in the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established)
A different specific effect is executed depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area (
After the reach state is established, specific performance A is executed, and before the reach state is established, specific performance B is executed.After the reach variation state is established, specific performance A is executed, and during a period other than reach variation or before the reach variation state is established. executes specific performance B)
This is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 with 17th performance mode to 24th performance mode) characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
The gaming machine of the means B68 or B69 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 14th presentation form to the 16th presentation form, the 22nd presentation form to the 24th presentation form),
During the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the specific performance is executed when the number of entries of gaming media into the general winning area reaches the first number of entries;
During the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or before the reach state of reach fluctuation is established),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second number of entries different from the first number of entries.
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 (second performance form, sixth performance form, tenth performance form to twelfth performance form, fourteenth performance form, eighteenth performance form, twenty-second performance form) A pachinko game machine 1),
It has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance is executed when a gaming medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B65 to B71 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth performance mode to the twelfth performance mode, the seventeenth performance mode to the twenty-fourth performance mode),
The variable display means is configured to meet the starting conditions (the variable display based on the previous starting winning has ended and a jackpot game state) after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The above identification information (first special figure,
2nd special image, decorative pattern) is displayed variablely,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player; )and,
Before the start condition is satisfied, a pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state (control to the jackpot gaming state based on the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of starting winning) further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not to
The specific performance execution means is
Based on the pre-start determination, the specific performance (specific performance B) is performed to foretell that the control will be in the advantageous state (pre-read preview performance) before the start condition of the target variable display is satisfied. This is a gaming machine that is characterized by executing as follows.
According to this, it is possible to generate more interest in a specific performance by foretelling that the control will be in an advantageous state before the variable display start condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first performance mode to the 24th performance mode),
The variable display means is configured to meet the starting conditions (the variable display based on the previous starting winning has ended and a jackpot game state) after the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The above identification information (first special figure,
2nd special image, decorative pattern) is displayed variablely,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player; )and,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means performs a start time determination to determine whether or not the control is controlled to the advantageous state (when starting the variable display of special symbols, the stored jackpot determination means Further comprising a game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether to control the jackpot game state based on random numbers,
The specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the start time determination, a performance (variation result preview performance) that foretells that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state is executed as the specific performance.
According to this, it is possible to make the user more interested in the specific performance by forewarning that the control will be in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B65 to B73 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third performance mode, the fifteenth performance mode),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the execution rate of the specific performance differs depending on the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning into the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 11th performance mode, the 23rd performance mode),
This gaming machine is characterized in that it executes different specific effects depending on the frequency of entry of gaming media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning into the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to generate interest in the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 4th performance form, 8th performance form, 12th performance form, 16th performance form, 20th performance form, 24th performance form) And,
It has a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 50A to 50D),
The specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance is executed based on the order in which game media enter the plurality of general winning areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to arouse interest in the order in which game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the 4th performance form, 8th performance form, 12th performance form, 16th performance form, 20th performance form, 24th performance form) And,
It has other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area,
The specific performance execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance is executed based on the order of entry of the gaming medium into the general winning area and the entry of the gaming medium into the other winning area in a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to create interest in the order in which game media enter the general winning area and other winning areas.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to means A1 to means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-117576, a game machine has been proposed in which a windmill and a large number of game nails are provided on the surface of a game board to change the downward direction and speed of a game ball. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of the winning opening and passing gate is
It varies depending on the adjustment of the game nails provided on the game board, and the payout rate of game balls may be designed by adjusting the game nails. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what adjustments had been made to the game nails, it was difficult to determine whether the payout rate would be as designed. The inventions according to means A1 to means A9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine in which it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) is
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the second starting winning hole, the special variable winning ball device 7 becomes the big winning hole, the normal winning ball device 6A becomes the first starting winning hole, and the general winning area. A gaming machine that pays out gaming value (e.g., game balls, slot machine medals, etc.) by winning into the general winning slots 50A to 50D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the active line of the slot machine, etc. The main board that controls the game (for example, the main board 11, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) is provided with predetermined information regarding the gaming value to be paid out (for example, the winning ratio, the winning ratio, the machine percentage, etc.). ) that can be displayed (e.g., display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and can be released by opening a door frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, a door opening required error such as Error 1 to Error 7 shown in FIG. 65), the display of the predetermined information is restricted (for example, the display of Yakuren (Renbi) Waku Ratio is stopped). It is characterized by
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. Further, when the error is canceled by opening the door frame, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the error (for example, error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65 that requires door opening, etc.) occurs, the above-mentioned restriction (for example, stopping the display of the winning combination (renbi) and winning ratio) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being viewed by the player.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
The gaming machine of means A1 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (for example, gaming machine frame 3, slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, a door opening required error such as Error 1 to Error 7 shown in FIG. 65) occurs. Then, the above-mentioned restriction (for example, discontinuing the display of Yakuren (Renbi) Waku Ratio) is carried out.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A3 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of the slot machine, etc.) is operated under the condition that the error (for example, the door opening required error such as Error 1 to Error 7 shown in FIG. 65) does not occur. , the predetermined information (for example, Yakuren (ren ratio), Yaku ratio, machine discount, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from viewing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
After the error (for example, error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 65 requiring door opening, etc.) is canceled, a predetermined period of time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation process in FIG. 63) is released. ) has elapsed before the specified information (for example, Yakuren (Renbi), Yakuhi, Machine Wari, etc.)
Display.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being viewed by the player.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) displays a plurality of pieces of the predetermined information (for example, yakuren (ren ratio), yaku ratio, machine split, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It is possible to switch the display for each time.
According to the above configuration, an increase in the number of members can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A6 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) displays the predetermined information (for example, the winning ratio, the winning ratio, the machine split, etc.) in a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls). 60,000 items) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (for example, the display monitor 29, the display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, The short-term winning ratio (ren ratio), short-term winning ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio), cumulative winning ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, information for each predetermined unit and cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.),
The information display means (e.g., display monitor 29, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is provided on the main board (e.g., main board 11, slot machine main board, etc.) and is attached to a caulked board case (e.g., board case). 201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (a) A diagram showing the number of winnings information managed by the number of winnings management table, and (b) a diagram showing the number of winnings information managed by the display control table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between game hall settings and player settings. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram when display settings are made using operation buttons that can be operated by a player. It is an explanatory diagram in the case of displaying objects corresponding to winnings in the general winning opening. It is an explanatory diagram in the case of displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing each performance performed according to a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation result preview performance and a look-ahead preview performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of first to fourth presentation forms. It is an explanatory view showing specific examples of the fifth to eighth presentation forms. It is an explanatory view showing specific examples of the ninth to twelfth presentation forms. It is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 13th presentation form to the 16th presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 17th presentation form to the 20th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing specific examples of the 21st presentation form to the 24th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a 25th presentation form and a 26th presentation form. It is a figure showing the number of winnings information managed by the number of winnings management table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of point giving performance. It is an explanatory view showing specific examples of the 27th presentation form to the 30th presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a 31st presentation form and a 32nd presentation form. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a gauge update performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 33rd presentation form to the 36th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the 37th presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the 38th presentation form to the 41st presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a 42nd presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a non-winning notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing specific examples of the 43rd presentation form to the 46th presentation form. It is a figure showing the appearance ratio of characters A to C in the 47th to 49th presentation forms. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing display periods of characters A to C in the 47th to 49th presentation forms. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the 47th performance form to the 49th performance form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a pending change performance in a 47th performance form. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change result notice performance in a 48th performance form. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing and execution period of each performance in the 47th performance form and the 48th performance form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a 50th presentation form and a 51st presentation form. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of continuous-hit operation notification and cut-in notice performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo continuous notice performance. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo continuous notice performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of all symbol stop operation notification and chance eye preview performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of all symbol stop operation notification and chance eye preview performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a 52nd presentation form and a 53rd presentation form. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of each preview performance for each general prize winning hole in the 52nd performance form and the 53rd performance form. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display area of each performance information in a setting to display winning number information. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode of an error message. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display area of each performance information in a setting where winning number information is not displayed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a method of setting a collection period. It is an explanatory diagram showing other examples of display areas of each production information in a setting to display number of winnings information and a setting to not display number of winnings information. It is an explanatory diagram showing other examples of display areas of each production information in a setting to display number of winnings information and a setting to not display number of winnings information. It is a configuration diagram showing in more detail various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM of the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a built-in ROM area in a CPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and an unused area program area in a built-in ROM area. 3 is a table showing call instructions used within the built-in ROM area. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another configuration of a used area program area and an unused area program area in the built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. FIG. (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams illustrating changes in display content on the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of Yakuren (Renbi) and Yakuren ratio related processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning combination (ren ratio)/winning ratio display control processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing. It is a table showing types of errors in gaming machines. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor, etc.; (B) is the time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. 3 is a time chart showing the relationship between display states such as It is a figure showing arrangement of each LED of a display part in a display monitor. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a main board on which display monitors are arranged in a first display monitor arrangement mode. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in an eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in a ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a feather-type variable winning ball device. It is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board, seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing an example of counters for the total number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired as an accessory, and the number of consecutive balls acquired as an accessory. (A) to (D) are simplified front views of modified examples of the main board. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method for aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method for aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method for aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method for aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a ring buffer format is used as a method for aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram regarding performance information. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram regarding performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special figure processing (special figure process processing). 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of state control processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big winning opening determination process. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of state control processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating state change switching waiting time and the like. This is an example of the configuration of an out-ball detector. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error notification processing. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of performance information update processing. It is an example of the arrangement position of an out ball detector.

As mentioned above, the entry of gaming media into the general winning area has a greater impact on the game than the entry of gaming media into the starting winning area, where a variable display of special symbols is executed by entering the gaming medium. is low. In addition, when the display result of the variable display of special symbols becomes a specific display result, the control is made to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but in this advantageous state, the game medium is not allowed to enter the specific winning area. Compared to traditional games, players have less interest in them, making it difficult to increase their interest. Due to such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained at the game parlor in such a way that it becomes substantially difficult for game media to enter the general winning area.

However, gaming machine manufacturers usually design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game nails be maintained in such a way that game media enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency at a predetermined frequency (passing the test). In order to increase player interest in the entry of gaming media into the general prize-winning field,
It is necessary to make players aware of the frequency with which game media enter the general winning area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further increase the interest when gaming media enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to increase the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. In addition, pachinko game machine 1
The game machine frame 3 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 3a which is openable and closable. The gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the outer frame by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable.
This outer frame is fixed to a so-called game island where a plurality of pachinko game machines are arranged side by side. By opening the gaming machine frame 3 with respect to the outer frame, a clerk or the like can visually check the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the inside of the gaming island.

The game board 2 has a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is fired into the game area 10 from a predetermined ball launcher. Furthermore, the gaming area 10 consists of a left gaming area 10A and a right gaming area 10B. The game area 10 is an area on the game board 2 through which a game ball can pass, and the game area 1
With the center of 0 as a reference, the left side is the left gaming area 10A, and the right side is the right gaming area 10B.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 10), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each include, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode). A special design (“special design”) that is multiple types of possible identification information (special identification information)
) is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display multiple types of special symbols consisting of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-".
It is not limited to symbols such as "". Below, the first special symbol display device 4
The special symbol variably displayed by A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game
Corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special figure and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, a decorative symbol display area is divided into a plurality of variable display parts, for example, three. Decorative patterns, each of which is a plurality of types of distinguishable identification information (decorative identification information), are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative symbols is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, “Left ”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5
At L, 5C, and 5R, variation of the decorative pattern (for example, scrolling display in the vertical direction) is started.
After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game,
“Left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5 in the image display device 5
At R, a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that is a variable display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In this way, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of ornamental patterns, each of which can be identified, is variably displayed, and a fixed ornamental pattern that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the identification information such as decorative patterns (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating the variable display.

In the image display device 5, display areas serving as each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are as follows.
The three regions may be provided adhered, separated, or capable of being adhered and separated. The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by a performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. The production control CPU 120 is the first
When the special symbol display device 4A is performing a variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 5 is caused to perform an effect display in conjunction with the variable display, and the second special symbol display device 4B displays the second special symbol. When the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the effect display in conjunction with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

For example, there are eight types of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Examples include numbers "1" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, and combinations of numbers, letters, or symbols with character images. may be a decorative image showing, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other arbitrary figure.) In addition to these eight types of decorative patterns, there are also decorative patterns (designs made up of the characters ``Takukoku'') that correspond to ``Tokukoku Jackpot'' (also referred to as ``2R Kokuhen Jackpot''), and blank patterns ( (symbols that do not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding pattern number is assigned to each decorative pattern. Note that the number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight types, and may be any number of types (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as jackpot combinations and losing combinations can be formed.

While the decorative pattern is changing, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
In 5R, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers flow from small to large in order from top to bottom, and when the decorative pattern with the maximum pattern number (for example, "8") is displayed, Subsequently, the decorative pattern with the smallest pattern number (for example, "1") is displayed.
Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the largest pattern number to the smallest pattern number. When the decorative pattern with the lowest number is displayed, the decorative pattern with the highest pattern number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right portion of the display screen of the image display device 5, fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B are provided that display a fourth symbol following decorative symbols, special symbols, and normal symbols to be described later. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed to derive the display result of the variable display. A variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A, and a derivation display of the display result of the variable display is performed. A fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols (however, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by specifying a variable pattern on the performance control CPU 120 side. (This is done by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing a performance using the image display device 5, for example, a performance in which the content of the performance, including the variable display of decorative patterns, momentarily disappears from the screen. The types of presentations are becoming more diverse. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, by further variably displaying the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5, the state of the fourth symbol can be checked to determine whether it is currently being variably displayed. This makes it possible to reliably recognize whether or not this is the case. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed in a constant motion, and is never removed from the screen or covered by a shielding object, so it can always be visually recognized.

Note that the fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol display area 5B for drawings may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol changes the fourth symbol display areas 5A, 5B to a predetermined display color (
For example, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is black) and is turned on (displayed) and turned off (non-displayed) at predetermined time intervals. This is achieved by continuing a repeated blinking state. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol are synchronized.
Synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Also, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the first
The fourth symbol display area 5A for special symbols lights up in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a jackpot (
display) remains. Note that the display color may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Also,
When a missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol remains lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) that reminds us of a missed symbol. Become. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

Also, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the second special symbol display device 4B
The fourth symbol display area 5B for special symbols lights up in a display color (for example, red) that reminds you of a jackpot (
display) remains. Note that the display color may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Also,
When a missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol remains lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) that reminds you of a missed symbol. Become. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a starting winning memory display area 5H is arranged. In the starting winning memory display area 5H, a pending memory display is performed that specifiably displays the variable display pending number (special figure pending memory number). Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B (starting winning). do. In other words, the starting conditions (also referred to as "execution conditions") for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or variable display of decorative symbols have been met, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is currently being executed. When the start conditions for starting the variable display game are not satisfied due to certain reasons or because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done.

As an example, the starting winning memory display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game for which the starting conditions were met first based on the occurrence of a starting winning. There is. Then, when the starting condition (first starting condition) of the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the display is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the starting condition (second starting condition) of the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B is satisfied based on the game ball entering the second starting prize opening, the display is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode is changed to red display. After that, when either the starting condition for the special pattern game using the first special pattern (first starting condition) or the starting condition for the special pattern game using the second special pattern (second starting condition) is satisfied, for example, The display in the leftmost display part is removed, and the display in each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that had changed to blue display or red display (for example, the rightmost display part among the display parts whose display color had changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a starting win occurs, the starting winning memory display area 5H displays pending information (objects indicated by circles in FIGS. 1, 31, etc.) corresponding to the special figure game to be executed based on the starting winning. New display control is performed. For example, the pending information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the starting conditions for the special figure game corresponding to the pending information are met (in the above example, this is also the order in which the starting conditions are met). When n pieces of pending information are displayed (n
When a new starting prize occurs during a period in which the special symbol game for the first time is on hold, the n+1th suspension information from the left will be newly displayed in correspondence with the new starting winning. and,
When the start condition for a special figure game that is on hold is met, the leftmost pending information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n≧2) pending information from the left is shifted one by one to the left. and will be displayed at the (n-1)th position.

Note that the order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are met is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur; the start condition for the special figure game regarding the second special figure is higher than the start condition for the special figure game regarding the first special figure. It may be established preferentially (so-called special figure 2 priority variation). In addition, on the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game regarding the first special figure is established with priority over the start condition of the special figure game regarding the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority variation). You can also do it.

In the starting winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the number of special symbols pending may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the number of special symbols pending. Along with the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or in place of the starting winning prize memory displaying area 5H, a display device may be provided to display the number of special symbols pending memory. In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the starting winning memory display area 5H, the first reservation is used to specify the number of special symbol reservations stored at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second reservation display 25B are provided. The first reservation display 25A specifiably displays the first reservation storage number as the effective starting winning ball number that has entered the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. The second reservation display 25B specifiably displays the second reservation storage number as the effective number of starting winning balls that have entered the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The first hold indicator 25A and the second
Each of the reservation indicators 25B is configured to include a number (for example, 4) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, "4") of each of the first and second reservation storage numbers, for example. Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a movable accessory 1000 is provided.

The movable accessory 1000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 1000 operates (rotates and lights up) when a performance that foretells a jackpot, for example, a fluctuating result preview performance or a look-ahead preview performance, which will be described later, is executed.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable prize winning ball device 6B is an electric ball device having a pair of movable wings that can be changed between a normal open state (vertical position) and an enlarged open state (tilted position) by means of a solenoid 27 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second starting prize opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning hole or does not enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in the normal open state which is difficult to do. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole by tilting control in which the movable wing pieces are in the tilting position when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. It is easy to expand and open.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). ), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). ), the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second starting port switch 22B. may be the same number or different numbers.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a solenoid 28 for the big winning opening door shown in FIG.
The machine is provided with a grand prize opening door which is driven to open and close by the door, and forms a grand prize opening which changes between an open state and a closed state by the great winning opening door. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 28 for the big winning hole door is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 28 for the big winning hole door is in the ON state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole. The game ball that has entered the big winning hole formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG.
Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15
) game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition have been met, the special figure game that was started earlier is still being executed, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot game state, etc. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first starting condition is met, the first starting condition based on the first starting condition is met.
If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the special figure is not satisfied, the first pending memory number is added (incremented) by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. be done.
In addition, when the second starting condition is satisfied, if the second starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern based on the second starting condition is not satisfied, the second pending memory The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special pattern game using the second special pattern is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is subtracted (decremented) by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When the second
The number of pending memories is decremented by 1. In addition, the addition value of the 1st pending memory number and the 2nd pending memory number may be called the total pending memory number, or the special figure pending memory number.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), there is a normal symbol display 2.
0 is set. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has multiple types of identification information different from the special symbol. A normal pattern (also referred to as a "normal pattern" or "ordinary pattern") that is variable is displayed (variable display). This kind of variable display of ordinary symbols is
It is called the Fuzu Game (also called the ``Fuzu Game''). The normal symbol display 20 is, for example, "
A plurality of types of normal symbols consisting of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. are variably displayed. Note that the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to one that variably displays numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-" as normal symbols; for example, "○" and "x". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting up the decorative lamps (or LEDs) shown, or by lighting up multiple decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left,""middle," and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be something. A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The standard figure reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of standard figures held as the effective number of passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 41A and 41B.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. In addition, there are four general winning holes 50A to 50D, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, as winning holes different from the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the big winning hole. A winning area is provided.

The general winning holes 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members protruding forward (to the player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives game balls flowing down from above through the opening, and although the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, two game balls smaller than the diameter of an individual. Therefore, two or more game balls are prevented from passing through the opening of the ball receiving member in a row in the horizontal direction. In addition, each general prize opening 50A ~
The distance between each ball receiving member provided with 50D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. In addition, a winning ball device for switching opening and closing of the openings of the general winning holes 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normal variable winning ball device 6B for switching opening and closing of the second starting winning hole) is not provided. It is always open. In addition, general prize openings 50A-5
Even if a game ball wins on 0D, neither the start condition for the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition for the variable display of the regular figure game are satisfied based on the win.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the winning of game balls in the general winning hole, but this is not limited to this. When a game ball enters the winning hole, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for controlling the opening and closing of the second start winning hole and a special variable for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning hole. Activating the winning ball device 7 to make it easier for the game ball to win into the second start winning hole or the big winning hole may be a specific value given when the game ball wins into the general winning hole.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning hole. For example, when a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C, 50% of the value is given to the player.
However, if a game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D, 10 prize balls will be awarded (that is, 10 prize balls of different sizes will be awarded). may be granted). In addition, the specific value given when a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C is a predetermined number of prize balls, but the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole When a game ball wins in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be activated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

Furthermore, different effects may be performed depending on the specific value that is given when a game ball enters the general winning hole. For example, when a game ball enters the general winning hole, Different effects are performed depending on when the game ball is awarded and when the variable winning ball device operates in response to the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening (i.e., when the type of specific value is different). Also good. In addition, there are cases in which 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls in the general winning hole, and cases in which 5 prize balls are given according to the winning of game balls in the general winning hole. (That is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different), different effects may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, winning of game balls to the first general winning hole 50A, second general winning hole 50B, third general winning hole 50C, and fourth general winning hole 50D is as follows. It is detected by the opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general winning port switch 24A, second general winning port switch 24B, third general winning port switch 24C, and fourth general winning port switch 24D, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected. is paid out as a prize ball.

In this way, in this embodiment, the winning opening switches corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 50A to 50D are provided, so that the game control microcomputer 10
0, it is possible to detect not only that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning hole, but also which general winning hole has a game ball won.

In addition, the structure is not limited to a configuration in which a different general winning a prize hole switch is provided for each general winning a prize hole, but a common general winning a prize hole switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning a prize holes. For example, a common general winning hole switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning hole provided in the left gaming area 10A has won) is provided for the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50B. , a common general winning hole switch (switch for detecting that a general winning hole provided in the right gaming area 10B has won) is provided for the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D. You can also do it. In addition, the 1st general prize opening 50A to the 4th general prize opening 50D
A common general winning hole switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in any of the general winning holes) may be provided for all the general winning holes.

At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in. The game balls taken into the out port are collected on the game island via a ball collection passageway (not shown) that communicates with the out port. The game balls that have entered each winning hole (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, big winning hole, first to fourth general winning hole) are collected through a winning ball collection gutter (not shown), It is designed to be collected at the game island via a collection path. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball recovery path. As a result, the out ball detector detects game balls that were hit into the game area 10 (game balls that did not win in any winning slot and were guided to the out slot, and balls that entered any winning slot and won a collection of winning balls). Game balls collected in the gutter) Detect all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the performance control board 12, so that the performance control CPU 120 tallies the number of game balls hit into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. In addition, if the out ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, each time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10), the performance control It may be possible to output a signal to increase the number of outs to the board 12 so that the performance control CPU 120 can count the number of outs in units of a fixed number (for example, in units of 10).

At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, there are speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc.
Further, a game effect lamp 9 is provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko game machine 1.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper tray 60 for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. It is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray 60, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by pressing or the like is installed.

A keyhole 61 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. By inserting a key corresponding to the keyhole 61 into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it becomes possible to open the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. Further, by inserting the key into the keyhole 61 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, it becomes possible to open the gaming machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built into the keyhole 61, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole 61 and rotated counterclockwise or clockwise and then released or pulled out, the keyhole 61 rotates in the opposite direction of the rotation. direction and return to neutral position. When the keyhole 61 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 3a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming machine frame 3 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. becomes possible. Also,
By opening the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including gaming nails and winning openings) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate jammed balls), A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32, which will be described later, can be operated.

Directly below the upper tray 60, a lower tray 62 is provided for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 60, and at the lower right side of the upper tray 60, a lower tray 62 is provided for storing game balls as game media toward the game area. A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to shoot the ball. For example, the ball-hitting operation handle 63 adjusts the rebound force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The batting operation handle may be provided with a single firing switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of the firing motor included in the batting ball firing device.

The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to one that can be pressed down or rotated, but may also be one that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or one that can be tilted, such as a lever type switch. It may be something that can be operated, or it may be something that can be pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by the player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. That is, the operation button 30 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation action by the player. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is detected by a press detection switch (not shown) that detects the press of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder (not shown) that detects the direction and amount of rotation of the operation button (jog dial) 30. (not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball that has passed through a first passage gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and a second passage gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B passes through the first passing gate 41A shown in FIG. The normal pattern starting conditions for executing variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 are detected by the corresponding first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the second passing gate 41B. After this is established, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game based on the satisfaction of the basic pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous general pattern game. Ru.

In this common symbol game, after a predetermined period of time, which is a common symbol variation time, has elapsed after the variation of the common symbol has started, a determined common symbol that is a variable display result of the common symbol is stopped and displayed (derivative display).
At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the symbol per ordinary symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "lost ordinary symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", enlargement opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilting position. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

The special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A is played using the first special symbol display device 4A.
After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball entering the starting prize opening being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, for example, the previous special figure game or jackpot game state has ended. The process is started based on the first start condition being satisfied. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has entered the second starting prize opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second starting condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, due to the completion of the previous special figure game or jackpot game state.

In a special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when a predetermined time that is the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the variable display result of the special symbol A confirmed special pattern (special pattern display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (missing symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss" symbol. ”
becomes. A specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) as a confirmed special symbol differs depending on the type of jackpot, and for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between a variable jackpot and a variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes ``jackpot'', the player is controlled to a jackpot game state as a specific state in which a round game (also simply referred to as ``round'') advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot game state that is controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the opening/closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 7 is held for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number of balls, which is the first period. A round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the big winning hole during the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated. Ru. In this way, the opening/closing board with the big prize opening in the open state during the execution of the round game catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the big prize opening, thereby opening the special variable winning ball device. 7 to a second state disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the jackpot state, the number of times the round game, which is the opening cycle of the jackpot opening, is executed is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpots may be provided that differ in the number of times the round game is executed.

After the jackpot state ends, time reduction control is executed to shorten the variable display time (special pattern fluctuation time) of special symbols in the special pattern game compared to the normal state, as one of the advantageous conditions for the player. It is controlled to a time-saving state where the time saving control is performed, and a variable-probability state where probability-variable control (probability-variable control) is performed in addition to the time-saving control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state that is different from a specific state such as a jackpot gaming state, a time saving state, and a variable probability state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which initialization processing is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state occurs when either of the following conditions is met first: the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the variable display result becomes a "jackpot". , just exit. In addition, in the variable probability state, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is further controlled to the jackpot game state in each special pattern game and variable display of decorative symbols is higher than in the normal state or time saving state. improves. This variable probability state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times).

A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends is also referred to as a variable probability jackpot. A jackpot (type) that is not controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot gaming state ends but is controlled to a time saving state is also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot.

In the probability change state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 20 controls the variation time of the common symbol in the common symbol game (the common symbol variation time) to be shorter than in the normal state, and the variable of the common symbol in each common symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be a "normal map hit" than in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becoming "a common map hit" The second starting condition is set by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening, such as control to make the tilting control time longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilting times compared to the normal state. Control is performed that is advantageous to the player by increasing the probability that the game will be established. In addition, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole in the variable probability state or the time saving state and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second starting winning hole becomes in the enlarged opening state is increased more than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the next The time it takes for the variable display results to become a "jackpot" is shortened. Therefore, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the jackpot game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

“Left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C provided on the image display device 5
, 5R, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of the figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. After the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R
During the period until the variable display ends due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern in , the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined ready-to-reach state. Here, the reach state refers to a decorative pattern that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (a "reach variable pattern"). ) refers to a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols form all or part of a jackpot combination and fluctuate synchronously. Specifically, "left", "
A part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "middle" and "right" (for example, "left" and "
In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, etc. on the "Right", the decorative patterns constituting a predetermined jackpot combination (for example, the decorative pattern showing the alphanumeric character "7") are still displayed in a stopped state. The remaining decorative pattern display areas (for example, the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) are in a display state in which the decorative patterns are changing, or the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L. , 5C, and 5R, in which all or part of the decorative symbols constitute all or part of the jackpot combination and fluctuate synchronously.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, and a character image (a performance image imitating a person, etc.) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.
By displaying , changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a video image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, you can create a production that is different from the one before reaching the reach state. Actions may be performed. The performance operations such as the display of character images, changes in the display mode of background images, playback display of moving images, and changes in the variation mode of decorative patterns,
This is called reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In addition, the reach effect includes not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the audio output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. to reach the reach state. It may also include operating in a different manner than the previous operating manner. As the performance motion in the reach performance, a plurality of types of performance patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") that differ from each other in operation mode (reach mode) may be prepared in advance. The possibility of a "jackpot" (also referred to as "reliability" or "jackpot reliability") is different for each reach mode. In other words, depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed, the variable display results may vary.
The possibility of hitting the jackpot can be varied. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" (jackpot reliability) becomes higher than when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbols may become a reach state, and the variable display result may become a "jackpot".
A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by changing the display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-connection" and "sliding" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the variation pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. It is determined whether or not.

Unlike variable display effects such as reach effects, "pseudo-run", and "sliding", during the variable display of decorative patterns, decorative patterns such as displaying effect images such as predetermined character images or message images may be used. Informs the player that the variable display state of decorative symbols may become a reach state or that the variable display result may result in a "jackpot" due to a performance operation different from the variable display operation of the symbols. A preview performance may be performed for this purpose.

When a special symbol that is a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state and the predetermined Confirmed decorative symbols that are non-reachable combinations may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of decorative symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "loss without reach") when the variable display result is a "loss".

When a special symbol that is a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special symbol game, this corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has become a reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. Then, after the ready-to-win effect is executed, or without the ready-to-reach effect being executed, a determined decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined ready-to-reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of decorative symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "lose". Note that the determined ornamental symbols that are a non-reach combination and the determined ornamental symbols that are a reach-losing combination are also collectively referred to as the determined ornamental symbols of a losing combination (non-specific combination).

When a special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming a reach state. Afterwards, the determined decorative symbols that result in a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.
Here, the determined decorative patterns that become the jackpot combination are, for example, "left" and "left" on the image display device 5.
The symbol number variably displayed in the "center" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is "1".
” to “8” are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is fine as long as it is suitable.

In addition, after the decorative patterns that become the jackpot combination are derived and displayed, a pre-reading function that foretells and informs you that pending data whose special pattern display result is a "jackpot" is stored during the execution of a round in the jackpot gaming state. A preview performance may be executed.

As mentioned above, the game area 10 consists of the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player can control the left game area 10A by adjusting the operation amount (rotation amount) of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob). It is possible to switch between left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is fired toward the player, and right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is fired toward the right gaming area 10B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the left gaming area 10A (left gaming area 10A
), the game ball enters the first starting prize opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is launched into the right game area 10B due to the arrangement of a game nail or game ball guiding member (not shown). It is now possible to win a prize. In addition, when the gaming state is normal, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (common symbol variation time) is longer than when the gaming state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit". Since the probability of
The percentage of game balls fired into the second starting winning hole that enters the winning hole is extremely low compared to the percentage of winning the first starting winning hole.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the game ball is placed on the left Compared to the case where a game ball is launched into the gaming area 10A, the percentage of game balls winning in the first starting prize opening is extremely low, or the game ball is no longer winning in the first starting winning opening. There is. Therefore, even if you hit right-handed in normal conditions, the percentage of game balls entering the starting winning hole (either the 1st starting winning hole or the 2nd starting winning hole) is lower than if you hit left-handed in normal conditions. This is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game ball enters the starting winning hole (either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Therefore, the player will play left-handed in the normal state.

In addition, the rate at which game balls fired into the right gaming area 10B pass through the second passing gate 41B is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown), so that the game balls fired into the left gaming area 10A pass through the second passing gate 41B. This is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The rate at which game balls fired into the right gaming area 10B enter the second starting prize opening in the open state is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guide members (not shown), etc. This is higher than the rate at which the ball enters the open second start winning slot.

In the probability variation state and the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol (common symbol variation time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "performing the common symbol" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, if you hit right in the variable probability state or time saving state, the game ball will start from the starting prize opening (first prize opening).
The percentage of winnings (from either the starting winning hole or the 2nd starting winning hole) is that if you hit left-handed in the variable probability state or time saving state, the game ball will win from the starting winning hole (the 1st starting winning hole or the 2nd starting winning hole). ) is higher than the winning percentage. Therefore, the player will play right-handed in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

In addition, the percentage of game balls fired into the right game area 10B that enters the open jackpot is as follows:
Due to the arrangement of game nails or game ball guide members (not shown), the percentage of game balls fired into the left game area 10A that enters the open jackpot is higher than the percentage. Therefore, the player will hit the right hand in the jackpot game state. In this way, the player plays left-handed in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the jackpot gaming state occurs, continues to play right in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the variable probability state or time saving state that does not involve the jackpot gaming state), the game returns to left-handed hitting.

In addition, the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is placed in the first
The percentage of winnings in the general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B depends on the position where the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50B are provided, and the position of the game nail or game ball guiding member (not shown). Depending on the arrangement, the game ball launched into the right game area 10B will enter the first general prize opening 50A.
Or it is higher than the percentage of winnings in the second general winning slot 50B. On the other hand, the right gaming area 10
The rate at which the game balls fired at B enter the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D provided in the right gaming area 10B is the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D.
Depending on the position where the is provided and the arrangement of game nails or game ball guide members (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 10A will enter the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50.
This is higher than the rate of winning D.

In addition, for some or all of the plurality of general winning holes (first general winning hole 50A and second general winning hole 50B) provided in the left gaming area 10A, only the game balls fired into the left gaming area 10A are It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball fired into the right gaming area 10B may not win, and a plurality of general winning openings (the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50C) provided in the right gaming area 10B may be used. 50D), it may be configured such that only game balls fired into the right gaming area 10B can win, and game balls fired into the left gaming area 10A cannot win.

In this way, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50B among the four general winning holes, and the jackpot game state and , In the variable probability state and the time saving state, since right-handed play is performed, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D among the four general winning holes. As the game area in which game balls are fired changes depending on the game state, the general winning opening where game balls are likely to win also changes. In addition, in the left game area 10A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general prize opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game where the game ball enters in the jackpot game state, the probability change state and the time saving state. In the area 10B, the frequency of winning in the general winning hole may be changed depending on the gaming state, such as providing a general winning hole in a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa).

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards, such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Also,
The pachinko game machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the production control board 12. In addition, pachinko game machine 1
Various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and the like. The power supply board is the main board 11
This is a board that supplies power to each board such as the production control board 12 and the like. The power supply board includes a main board 11, a production control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15.
It is also connected to other boards such as to supply power. The power supply board is provided with a power switch, and by turning on the power switch, the power is turned on and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, by turning off the power switch, power supply to each board is stopped. Further, the main board 11 includes a payout control board. Note that the payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 11. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is configured with a ball payout device (not shown), etc., in response to receiving a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

The main board 11 is a main control board, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 mainly has the function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, the function of inputting signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions,
A function to output and transmit a control command, which is an example of command information, as a control signal to a sub-side control board consisting of the production control board 12, etc., a function to output various information to the hall management computer, etc. We are prepared. In addition, the main board 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A.
Controlling the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by controlling the lighting/extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 2
It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/extinguishing/coloring of 0. The main board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 110 takes in signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (described in detail later) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. Although details will be described later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and is a relay board 15.
The image display device 5 and the speaker 8L receive the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the
. That is, the performance control board 12 controls the performance, such as the display operation on the image display device 5, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the lighting/extinguishing operation of the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is equipped with a function that determines the control content for causing the electrical components used to perform predetermined performance operations.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the production control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the production control board 12, the speakers 8L, 8R
It is equipped with a processing circuit that performs audio signal processing to output audio from the computer. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9, etc. based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit for driving.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first starting port switch 22A, a second starting port switch 22B, and a count switch 23.
, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D are connected to wiring that transmits detection signals from the switch.

Note that the first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, and the first starting port switch 2
2A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24
The A to fourth general prize opening switches 24D may have any configuration as long as they can detect game balls as game media, such as what is called a sensor. In addition, the main board 1
1 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20,
Wiring for transmitting command signals for display control of the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the standard hold display 25C, etc. is connected. Further, wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is connected to the main board 11.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 15, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass signals only in the direction from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents signals from being input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the effect control board 12 or relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

The relay board 15 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit is
A diode whose anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the production control board connector corresponding to the production control board 12, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode and the other end is grounded. (GND) and a connected resistor. With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the input of signals from the production control board 12 to the relay board 15 and allow signals to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the effect control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting control signals on the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent illegal signals from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such performance control commands include, for example, a game state designation command that specifies the game state (normal state, variable probability state, or time saving state), a fluctuation start command that designates the start of fluctuation in a special figure game, and a special command in a special figure game. Variation pattern specification command that specifies variation patterns such as symbol variation time and decorative patterns on the image display device 5; Variable display result notification command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative patterns; Decorative patterns on the image display device 5 A decorative pattern stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of , a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start or end of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end designation command, a game ball enters the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening. The starting winning command that is output when a game ball enters the general winning hole, the general winning hole designation command that is output when a game ball hits the general winning hole, the big winning hole winning command that is output when a game ball hits the big winning hole, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM that stores game control programs, fixed data, etc.
(Read Only Memory) 101, and RAM (Random A) that provides a work area for game control.
ccess Memory) 102, and a CPU (Ce
103, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 has a ROM
By executing the program read from the pachinko game machine 101, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. At this time, the CPU 103
A fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the RAM 102, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and stores it temporarily;
Variation data read operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored in CPU 103
A reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a transmission operation in which the CPU 103 outputs various signals to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. etc. will also be held.

In this way, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is connected to the ROM 101.
Since the game control is performed by executing the game control program stored in the game controller, hereinafter, what the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes (or processes) specifically means: The CPU 103 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on other boards other than the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 includes a production control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores production control programs and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 120. A RAM 122 to perform random numbers, a display control unit 123 to perform processes such as determining control contents of display operations in the image display device 5, and a random number to update numerical data indicating random values independently of the production control CPU 120. circuit 124
and I/O 125 are installed. As an example, in the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing processing for controlling the performance operation by the performance electric components. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 performs a fixed data read operation in which the performance control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, a variable data write operation in which the performance control CPU 120 writes various variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores it, and the performance control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. The CPU 120 for reading out various temporarily stored fluctuation data and controlling the performance is the I/O 12.
A reception operation in which input of various signals is received from the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and a transmission operation in which the production control CPU 120 outputs various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via the I/O 125 are also performed. .

The production control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 1000, etc. are connected. In addition, the performance control board 12 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, the production control board 12 has the position of the operation part (first
Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position), and wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operating section of the display changeover switch 32, which will be described later. It is connected.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 includes an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8
R, light emitters such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation buttons 30, movable accessories 100
0.Furthermore, in order to control performance operations using a performance device (electrical parts for performance) including movable members of performance accessories, multiple types of pattern data constituting a performance control pattern are prepared in advance. remembered.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG.
Based on the display control command from 0, etc., the content of control of the display operation in the image display device 5 is determined. For example, the display control unit 123 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to execute various effect displays such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in the reach effect. control. The display control unit 123
P (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (
Video RAM), LCD drive circuit, etc. may be included.

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 checks, for example, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, operation detection signals transmitted from the press detection switch and rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 31. It includes an input port for taking in various signals such as a signal for enabling and a signal for checking the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12. configured. For example, from the output port of the I/O 125, a video signal is transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) is transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command is transmitted to the lamp control board 14. (Illumination signals), etc., commands (drive signals) transmitted to the movable accessory 1000, etc. are output.

The audio control board 13 includes, for example, an input/output driver, an audio synthesis IC, an audio data ROM,
It is equipped with an amplifier circuit, volume, etc. As an example, in the audio control board 13, sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the production control board 12 is input to the audio synthesis IC via an input/output driver. The speech synthesis IC generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the voice signal to the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio data ROM stores control data according to the sound number data, and the audio synthesis IC reads the control data according to the sound number data to generate sounds and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data that chronologically indicates the output mode of audio and sound effects during a predetermined period.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with, for example, an input/output driver, a lamp driver, and the like. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input/output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled via the audio control board 13 to notify the abnormality by sound, and the lamp control board 14 is activated. It controls the lighting/extinguishing of the game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, etc. through the display control unit 123, and displays an abnormality notification image (error message) on the display area of the image display device 5 through the display control unit 123. Notify by displaying the information. The abnormality includes magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc., and is detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to sensors, and may include circuits for detecting abnormalities, various detection switches that do not correspond to sensors, and the like.
The abnormality detection sensor group 26 only needs to be composed of sensors for detecting abnormalities. One or more sensors included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared depending on each type of abnormality. What specifically the abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes may be determined based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities that occur when there is a fraudulent act on the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) and phenomena such as radio wave abnormalities) and phenomena that may hinder the progress of the game.
In particular, it refers to a phenomenon that requires notification to players and employees of game halls (pachinko parlors, etc.).

The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects predetermined radio waves (such as radio waves in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. Note that a known method can be used as appropriate to detect the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc. based on the output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that an abnormality has occurred is sent to the main board. 11 to the effect control board 12, and the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the image display device 5 to the display of an error message, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when an abnormality occurs, etc. An announcement will be made. For example, when an abnormality occurs, an image of the text "An error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 43(f).

Here, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, and other notification means not only indicate that an abnormality has occurred, but also indicate the type of abnormality, such as magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to specify whether an abnormality has been detected.

The notification of a magnetic anomaly is an abnormality notification that is performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality in which a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko game machine 1; in this case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected.
There are fraudulent acts in which a magnet is used to move a game medium and cause it to enter a winning hole, or a predetermined area is clogged with game media in order to guide the game medium to a winning hole. By reporting magnetic anomalies,
Prevent such acts from occurring. For example, one of the abnormality detection sensor group 26
A magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor. The CPU 103 determines the presence or absence of a magnetic abnormality by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force→existence of magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the magnetic abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, and the image display device 5 etc. is notified of the magnetic abnormality. For example, an image of the text "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, abnormality notification that can be performed in a pachinko game machine or the like in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. There is a fraudulent act in which a pachinko game machine is intentionally shaken to change the direction of flow of game media toward a winning opening such as a large winning opening. To prevent such acts from occurring by notifying vibration abnormalities. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. CPU103
determines whether there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. shows vibration → abnormal vibration). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, and the image display device 5 etc. is notified of the vibration abnormality. For example, an image of the text "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 5.

The notification of a radio wave abnormality is the notification of an abnormality that is performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko game machine 1, in which case there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By applying radio waves to the starting port switches (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch 23, etc., these switches can be turned on/off, thereby fraudulently causing winnings and winning balls. There is cheating to get. To prevent such acts from occurring by notifying radio wave abnormalities. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided. The CPU 103 determines whether there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicates reception of predetermined radio wave → radio wave abnormality exists). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the image display device 5 etc. is notified of the radio wave abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5,
An image of the text "A radio wave error has occurred." is displayed.

The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are both DIP switches (Dual
It is configured by an in-line package switch (in-line package switch) and is provided outside the gaming area of the gaming board 2. Mode changeover switch 31 and display changeover switch 3 configured with DIP switches
2, by switching the operation part between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a sliding type, by switching the position of the knob between one end side and the other end side), the production control CPU 1
The processing (control program) executed by the controller 20 can be switched. When the glass door frame 3a is closed to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front of the gaming board 2, so the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32. It becomes. In addition, when the glass door frame 3a is closed to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1), the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are operated by the player through the glass door frame 3a. It is not shown in FIG. 1 because it is installed in a position that cannot be visually recognized.

As mentioned above, the clerk at the gaming parlor inserts the key into the keyhole 61, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 provided on the game board 2 can be operated (DIP switch changeover). Then, a mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32
When this operation is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and the key is inserted into the keyhole 61 to close the locking device (not shown).

When the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the production control CPU 120 is in a low state, and when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the production control The voltage at the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High.
The production control CPU 120 determines that when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the operation part of the mode switching switch 31 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 displays information for the player (for example, demo screen, etc.), and does not display information on the number of winnings management table, which will be described later, on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the operation part of the mode switching switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 displays information for store staff (for example, It specifies that it is a maintenance mode for displaying the number of winnings in each winning opening, etc., and displays information on a winning number management table, which will be described later, on the image display device 5.

When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the production control CPU 120 is in a low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the production control The voltage at the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the production control CPU 120 indicates that the operation part of the display switching switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5. Identify that display permission has not been granted and provide information based on the display control table (described later).
It is prohibited to display on the image display device 5 information that can specify the number of prizes won in the general prize winning hole.
On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the operation part of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 is configured to enter the general winning slot. Specifies that permission to display the number has been given, and permits the image display device 5 to display information based on a display control table (described later) (information that allows identification of the number of winnings in the general winning opening). do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are
The mode changeover switch 31 and/or the display changeover switch 32 may be provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2.
In such a configuration, by rotating the gaming machine frame 3 forward with respect to the outer frame,
A mode changeover switch 31 and/or a display changeover switch 32 provided on the back side of the game board 2
becomes operable.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, there is a start winning command as described above. The starting winning command includes a starting winning opening designation command that indicates whether a starting winning has occurred in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a starting winning opening specifying command that indicates whether a starting winning opening has occurred in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There are starting winning determination result designation commands that indicate the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type determination result when the game ball wins.

The CPU 103 determines the effective starting prize of the game ball to the first starting winning hole, that is, the effective starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole, in a state where the first pending memory number corresponding to the first starting winning hole is less than the upper limit value. When a winning is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random numbers for determining a jackpot and random numbers for determining a jackpot type are stored in the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special drawing. It is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories (the first pending memory number after addition including the valid starting winnings), and a command for specifying the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number is
A starting winning determination is executed to determine whether or not it matches a jackpot determination value stored in a jackpot determination table according to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state).

In this start-up winning determination, if the random number for jackpot determination does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start-up winning determination result specifying command that specifies "miss" is set. If the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value in the jackpot judgment table,
Furthermore, it is determined which of the determination values stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol matches the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number. Then, a starting winning determination result designation command is set that specifies the jackpot type of jackpot corresponding to the matched determination value. For example, a command that specifies a "non-probable variable jackpot" or a command that specifies a "probable variable jackpot" is set as the starting winning determination result specifying command. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command ("first starting winning opening" designation) and starting winning determination result designation command are output to the production control board 12.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the starting winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first pending memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit (that is, the start winning of the game ball according to the first starting winning opening). When detecting an invalid starting prize (in which the prize ball is paid out but is not subject to the special drawing game), a command is set to specify the "first starting winning hole" as the starting winning hole designation command, and
As the starting winning determination result designation command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting winning. Then, set the starting winning opening designation command (“1st starting winning opening”)
designation) and a starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the production control board 12.

The CPU 103 determines the effective starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, that is, the effective starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a winning is detected, a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted random numbers for determining a jackpot and random numbers for determining a jackpot type are stored in the second random number in the random number storage area for the second special drawing. It is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories (second pending memory number after addition including the valid starting winnings), and a command for specifying the "second starting winning hole" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) random numbers for jackpot determination are
A starting winning time determination is executed to determine whether or not it matches a jackpot determination value stored in a jackpot determination table according to the current game state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state).

In this start winning determination, if the random number for jackpot determination does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result designation command that specifies "miss" is set. If the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value in the jackpot judgment table,
Furthermore, it is determined which of the determination values stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol matches the extracted (stored) random number for jackpot type determination. Then, a starting winning determination result designation command is set that designates the jackpot type "jackpot" corresponding to the matched determination value. For example, a command that specifies a "non-probable variable jackpot" or a command that specifies a "probable variable jackpot" is set as the starting winning determination result specifying command. Then, the set starting winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and starting winning determination result designation command are output to the production control board 12.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second pending memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit (that is, the start winning of the game ball according to the second starting winning opening). When detecting an invalid starting prize (in which the prize ball is paid out but is not eligible for the special drawing game), a command is set to specify the "second starting winning hole" as the starting winning hole designation command, and
As the starting winning determination result designation command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting winning. Then, set the starting winning opening designation command (“2nd starting winning opening”)
designation) and a starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the production control board 12.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for jackpot type determination extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the judgment result. Although we are trying to execute a preview preview, it is not limited to this type of format.
Based on the random number for determining a variable pattern extracted at the time of a starting prize, a variable display variation pattern corresponding to the starting winning may be determined, and a pre-read preview performance may be executed based on the determination result. For example, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a variable pattern of super reach, the pre-read preview effect will be executed at a higher rate than when the judgment result at starting winning is a variable pattern of non-reaching. That's good.

Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective starting winning of a game ball into the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a jackpot determining random number. It is stored together with the random number and random number for jackpot type determination in a storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number (the first pending memory number after addition including the valid starting winnings) in the random number storage area for the first special symbol. Further, when the CPU 103 detects an effective starting winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and converts the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern into a random number for determining a jackpot and a jackpot. Together with the random number for type determination, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number (the second pending memory number after addition including the valid starting winnings) in the random number storage area for the second special symbol.

Here, the ROM 101 includes a loss fluctuation pattern determination table in which a random number range corresponding to each of the loss fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8(A) is set, and a loss fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 8(B). A jackpot variation pattern determination table in which a random number range is set is stored.

When the judgment result of the starting prize winning judgment (display result specified by the starting winning judgment result specifying command) is "loss", the CPU 103 refers to the losing variation pattern judgment table and extracts (stored) ) The random number for determining a fluctuation pattern is determined in which random number range of the fluctuation pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is identified, and the identified fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". , "Normal reach is off", and "Super reach is off", a starting winning variation pattern judgment result designation command is set to specify which variation pattern it is.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the start-up winning determination (display result specified by the start-up winning determination result designation command) is either "non-probable variable jackpot" or "probable variable jackpot," the CPU 103 determines that the Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which fluctuation pattern's random number range the extracted (stored) random number for fluctuation pattern determination is included in, and identify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern determination. Then, a starting prize winning variation pattern determination result designation command is set to specify whether the identified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot".

In addition, when the CPU 103 detects an invalid starting winning, it sets blank data specifying that it is not a valid starting winning as a starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the set starting prize winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the performance control board 12 as a starting prize winning command, together with the aforementioned starting winning opening designation command and the starting prize winning determination result designation command.

The production control CPU 120 includes a starting winning opening designation command that specifies the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specifying command that includes valid data that is not blank data (and a starting winning opening that includes valid data that is not blank data). When receiving the winning winning variation pattern judgment result designation command), the starting winning winning variation pattern judgment result specification command (and the starting winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is stored in the first hold in the starting winning command storage area for the first special drawing. Store it in the storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the number of first reserved memories after addition including the valid starting winnings), and valid data that is not blank data and the starting winning opening designation command specified as "second starting winning opening". When receiving a starting prize winning determination result designation command (and a starting prize winning variation pattern determination result specifying command that includes valid data that is not blank data), the starting prize winning determination result designation command (and starting winning fluctuation pattern determination command containing valid data that is not blank data) is received. Result designation command) is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number (second pending storage number after addition including the valid starting winnings) in the starting winning command storage area for the second special symbol. The production control CPU 120 determines the first special feature before the start condition is established by checking the start winning time determination result designation command (and the start winning time variation pattern determination result designation command) stored in the start winning command storage area. By estimating the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure, it becomes possible to execute a pre-read preview performance.

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes a starting winning opening designation command that specifies the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result designation command that includes blank data (and a starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command that includes blank data). When receiving this, it is specified that an invalid starting winning has occurred in the first starting winning opening, and the starting winning judgment result designation command (and the starting winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specifying command) is specified for the first special drawing. It is possible to store the winning history for the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluding it from the execution target of the pre-read preview effect). When receiving the starting winning opening designation command specified by "Starting winning opening" and the starting winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and the starting winning fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command including blank data), the second
It is specified that an invalid starting winning has occurred in the starting winning opening, and the starting winning judgment result designation command (and the starting winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specifying command) is stored in the starting winning command storage area for the second special drawing. It is possible to store the winning history in the second starting winning opening in a winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it (excluding it from the execution target of the pre-read preview performance).

As a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when starting variable display of special symbols, the main board 11 determines a variation pattern according to the special symbol display result derived and displayed, and notifies the production control board 12 of the variation pattern. Outputs the fluctuation pattern specification command for The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores performance control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the performance control CPU 120 stores performance control data corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and performance control is executed according to the selected performance control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the CPU 103 generates a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for determining a jackpot type stored in the random number storage area for the first special symbol,
And among the random numbers for fluctuating pattern determination, read out the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot type determination, and the random numbers for fluctuating pattern determination in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories = 1), and read out the random numbers for determining fluctuating pattern, and The random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot type determination, and the random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, the read random number for jackpot determination is the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state)
A start-time determination is executed to determine whether or not the winning determination value matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the jackpot determination table.

In this start determination, if the random number for jackpot determination does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "miss", and also sets the random number for jackpot determination together with the jackpot determination value. It is determined whether the random number for fluctuation pattern determination read from the first storage area is included in the random number range of which fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern determination table for failure, and the random number corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern determination is determined. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, an "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, the read random number for jackpot type judgment is further stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol. Determine which of the criteria values match. Then, a variable display result notification command is set that specifies the jackpot type of jackpot corresponding to the matching judgment value, and the random number for judgment of the variation pattern read from the first storage area together with the random number for judgment of jackpot is The "jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined by determining which fluctuation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and identifying the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a variation start command that specifies the start of variation of the first special figure, the set variable display result notification command, and a variation pattern designation command that specifies the determined variation pattern.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the CPU 103 uses the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number storage area for the second special symbol,
And among the random numbers for fluctuating pattern determination, read out the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot type determination, and the random numbers for fluctuating pattern determination in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of pending memories = 1), and read out the random numbers for determining fluctuating pattern, and The random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot type determination, and the random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, the read random number for jackpot determination is the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state)
A start-time determination is executed to determine whether or not the winning determination value matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the jackpot determination table.

In this start determination, if the random number for jackpot determination does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 103 sets a variable display result notification command that specifies "miss", and also sets the random number for jackpot determination It is determined whether the random number for fluctuation pattern determination read from the first storage area is included in the random number range of which fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern determination table for failure, and the random number corresponding to the random number for fluctuation pattern determination is determined. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, an "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the random number for jackpot judgment matches the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, the read random number for jackpot type judgment is further stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type judgment table for the second special symbol. Determine which of the criteria values match. Then, a variable display result notification command is set that specifies the jackpot type of jackpot corresponding to the matching judgment value, and the random number for judgment of the variation pattern read from the first storage area together with the random number for judgment of jackpot is The "jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined by determining which fluctuation pattern is included in the random number range set in the pattern determination table and identifying the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs a variation start command that specifies the start of variation of the second special figure, the set variable display result notification command, and a variation pattern designation command that specifies the determined variation pattern.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a variation start command that specifies the start of variation of the first special figure, a variable display result notification command, and a variation pattern specification command, it selects production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, a final decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined in accordance with the variable display result notification command. Then, variable display of decorative symbols is started, and performance control is executed based on the selected performance control data. Along with this, among the starting winning determination result designation commands (and starting winning fluctuation pattern determination result designation commands) stored in the starting winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area (pending storage number In addition to deleting the start winning determination result specification command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) in the storage area corresponding to time-varying pattern determination result designation command) to the previous storage area one by one.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stores in the ROM 121 the timing at which the ready-to-win state is established corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and creates decorations so that the ready-to-win state is established at the timing at which the ready-to-win state is established corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols.
That is, the production control CPU 120 can grasp the timing of establishment of the ready-to-win state according to the fluctuation pattern.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a variation start command that specifies the start of variation of the second special figure, a variable display result notification command, and a variation pattern specification command, it selects production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, a final decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined in accordance with the variable display result notification command. Then, variable display of decorative symbols is started, and performance control is executed based on the selected performance control data. Along with this, among the starting winning determination result designation commands (and starting winning fluctuation pattern determination result designation commands) stored in the starting winning command storage area for the second special figure, the first storage area (pending storage number In addition to deleting the starting winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) in the storage area corresponding to time-varying pattern determination result designation command) to the previous storage area one by one.

In addition, when the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D detect that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, the game ball is placed in any of the general winning openings. A general winning a prize opening designation command for designating whether a prize has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the performance control board 12. That is, the first general winning port switch 24
When a game ball is detected by A, a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the first general winning hole 50A is output, and when a game ball is detected by the second general winning hole switch 24B, the second general winning hole designation command is output. When a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the winning hole 50B is output and a game ball is detected by the third general winning hole switch 24C, a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the third general winning hole 50C is output. When the command is output and a game ball is detected by the fourth general winning hole switch 24D, a general winning hole designation command that designates winning to the fourth general winning hole 50D is output.

Therefore, the production control CPU 120 can specify whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole and which general winning hole the game ball has won based on the received general winning hole designation command. . In addition, as described above, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the production control CPU 120 specifies which starting winning opening the gaming ball has won. It is designed to receive commands specified by the user. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 stores information that allows identification of the general winning opening where a winning occurred and information that allows identification of the starting winning opening where a winning occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122 in accordance with the order in which winning occurred. It is now possible.

The performance control CPU 120 selects the general winning hole (
Check which of the first general winning holes 50A to 4th general winning holes 50D is the general winning hole in which the game ball won, and also check whether the starting winning hole (the general winning hole where the game ball won) is specified by the received starting winning hole designation command. It is confirmed whether the starting winning hole (in which the ball won) is the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and the winning history of each general winning hole and each starting winning hole is stored in the RAM 122. For example, the second general winning hole 50B, the first starting winning hole, the first general winning hole 50A, the second starting winning hole,
When game balls win in the order of the third general winning hole 50C, it is called [second general winning hole, first starting winning hole, first general winning hole, second starting winning hole, third general winning hole]. History is RAM122
is stored in the winning history storage area.

In addition, if a winning in the starting winning opening and a winning in the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning determination result designation command. , it may be sent first with priority over the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by one of the first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B, and detection by any one of the first general winning port switch 24A to fourth general winning port switch 24D. If the detection is confirmed at almost the same time (for example, within the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 converts the starting winning opening specification command and the starting winning determination result specification command into the general winning opening specification command. It is best to give priority to sending it first. By using such a transmission order, when the production control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, it understands that it has already received the starting winning opening designation command and the starting winning determination result designation command. This is possible, and as a specific performance to be executed based on a winning in the general winning opening, it is possible to execute a pre-read preview performance based on the previously received startup winning determination result designation command.

In addition, if winnings to the general winning opening occur multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 100 shall transmit multiple general winning opening designation commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. do. For example, if the detection by the first general winning port switch 24A and the detection by the second general winning port switch 24B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, within the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 100 , a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning in a general winning hole where it is more difficult to win a prize may be sent first with priority. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be awarded differs depending on the general winning hole, the general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the general winning hole with a larger number of prize balls can be sent first with priority. good.

Further, when the count switch 23 detects that a game ball has entered the grand prize opening, a grand prize opening command that specifies that a gaming ball has won the grand prize opening is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the performance control board 12. is output to. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 is
Based on the received grand prize opening winning command, it is possible to identify the winning of the game ball in the grand winning opening, and the winning history is stored in the same manner as the winning history of the starting winning opening and the winning history of the general winning opening described above. It is possible to store the winning history in the big winning opening in the area.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes the jackpot opening winning command during the period from receiving the jackpot start designation command that designates the start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving the jackpot end designation command that designates the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to separately tally the number of times the command is received and the number of times the general winning opening designation command is received. As a result, it is possible to separately tally the number of wins in the jackpot and the number of wins in the general jack during the period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and the tally results are displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 5 can also be displayed.

Moreover, when the game ball is being launched into the game area 10, the game ball usually enters one of the starting winning hole, the general winning hole, and the big winning hole with a certain degree of frequency. If the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed and the game ball does not enter any of the starting winning hole, general winning hole, and big winning hole for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-gaming state where he or she is not playing a game. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). If not, it is possible to perform a game end determination to determine that the game has ended.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an example of the number of winnings information managed by the number of winnings management table stored in the RAM 122. In this winning number management table, the first general winning opening 50
The number of prizes won in each of the general winning holes A to 4th general winning hole 50D is stored. CP for production control
The U120 can total up the number of wins in each general winning hole for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot end designation command, the gaming state designation command, and the general winning hole designation command. Note that the gaming state specification command is sent at the timing when the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state specification command specifies the gaming state to be controlled; for example, it is sent when the jackpot gaming state ends or the time saving state ends. ), or at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol starts (the gaming state designation command in this case designates the gaming state when the special symbol game is executed).

In this example, the number of wins in the second general winning opening 50B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of wins in the normal state is 46, the number of wins in the jackpot game state is 2, and the number of wins in the variable probability state. is 1, and the number of prizes in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of wins during the left-handed hitting period is 46, and the number of winnings during the right-handed hitting period is 4. The total number of wins in the general winning slot is 108, of which 81 were won during the left-handed game period, and 27 were won during the right-handed game period.

In this way, along with the number of wins in each general winning slot, the number of wins in the left-handed playing period and the number of winnings in the right-handed playing period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 5 (or the number of wins in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The information is transmitted to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided as a card unit and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or is sent to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. By doing this, the game parlor can understand how easy it is for game balls to enter each general prize opening, which can be used to maintain the game nails. For example, if the number of winning game balls in a certain general winning hole is excessively large or small, it is assumed that the game nail near the general winning hole is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is carried out. It can be performed.

Winning number information in the winning number management table (number of winnings in each general winning slot, number of winnings in the general winning slot in each gaming state, number of winnings in the general winning slot during the left-handed and right-handed playing periods, and the number of winnings in the general winning slot) (including the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation section of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and is displayed on the image display device 5 when it is in the first position (in the case of gaming mode). Do not show. The clerk at the gaming hall switches the mode selector switch 31 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information on the winning number management table, performs maintenance of the gaming nails based on this information, and transfers the winnings to the general winning slot. To make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. After the maintenance is completed, the mode selector switch 31 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table is independent of the gaming state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot playing state), and also the execution state of the special pattern game (special pattern (Whether variable display is being executed or not, number of pending memories for special pattern games) and execution status of general pattern games (whether variable display of normal symbols is being executed, number of pending memories for general pattern games) Regardless of the situation, the image continues to be displayed on the image display device 5 while the operation section of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. However, the form is not limited to this, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be something that can be displayed on the image display device 5 depending on the gaming state, for example, when the mode changeover switch 31 is turned on. The operation part is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position.
Even if the position is set, it may not be displayed in the probability change state, time saving state, or jackpot game state.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be something that can be displayed on the image display device 5 depending on the execution status of the special figure game. For example, the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31
position, and the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed and can only be displayed during a period when the number of pending memories of the special symbol game is 0, and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position. However, it may not be displayed during a period when the variable display of special symbols is being executed or during a period when the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game is not 0. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be something that can be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution status of the Fuzu game.
For example, the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, and the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the display is possible only when the number of pending memories of the common symbol game is 0, and the mode switching is possible. Even if the operation part of the switch 31 is in the second position, the display may not be displayed during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or during the period when the number of pending memories of the common symbol game is not 0.

The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is determined by the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 (FIG. 5 (1)
) to (3) settings on the setting screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the gaming information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) installed in the gaming hall) after the gaming hall has closed. The number of winnings information for each gaming machine is stored in the gaming information management device for each business day. In addition, the number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table will be deleted (reset) if the winning history of the winning history storage area mentioned above is erased (reset) based on the execution of a specific performance corresponding to the winning history storage area. However, the information is not deleted even after the transmission to the gaming information management device is completed, or the reset operation by the clerk (for example, the operation button while the number of winnings information in the number of winnings management table is being displayed on the image display device 5) 3
0 operation)).

For example, in a state where the number of winnings information in the number of winnings management table is displayed on the image display device 5 (with the mode changeover switch 31 in the second position (display setting)), a clerk at a gaming parlor presses the operation button 30 in a predetermined manner. By pressing the button for a period of time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of wins for all items stored in the number of winnings management table (the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the total number of winnings for general winning openings) is set to 0.
It is possible to reset to

FIG. 3(b) is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 122. In this display control table, the first general winning hole 50
The number of prizes won in each of the general winning holes A to 4th general winning hole 50D is stored. CP for production control
The U120 can total the number of wins in each general winning hole based on the general winning hole designation command. In this example, the total number of wins in the general winning slot is 11, of which the 1st
The number of wins in the general prize opening 50A is 3, the number of prizes in the second general prize opening 50B is 5, the number of prizes in the third general prize opening 50C is 2, and the number of prizes in the fourth general prize opening 50D is 1. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 4, the winning number information in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed according to the total number of winnings) is displayed when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (display setting is displayed on the image display device 5 when the general winning number is set to be displayed using the operation button 30. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), the winnings on the display control table are Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Furthermore, even when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not made with the operation button 30 (in the case of non-display setting). In this case, the winning number information in the display control table is not displayed.

In other words, if the clerk at the gaming hall sets the display changeover switch 32 to prohibit the display of the number of winnings information, the number of winnings in the general winning slot will not be displayed regardless of the player's display setting operation. There is. Only when the clerk of the game parlor sets the display changeover switch 32 to permit display of the number of winnings information, the number of winnings in the general winning slot is displayed in accordance with the display setting operation by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance, specific performance B: look-ahead preview performance) is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning slot. As for the production, as shown in FIG.
It becomes executable when the execution setting of the specific effect) is performed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (execution not permitted), it depends on whether or not the operation button 30 is set to display the general number of winnings (execution setting of specific performance). Therefore, the specific performance is not executed (execution is prohibited). Furthermore, even if the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (execution permission setting), if the general winning number display setting is not performed using the operation button 30 (non-execution setting). The specific performance is not executed.

That is, when the clerk at the game parlor uses the display changeover switch 32 to set the execution of a specific effect to be prohibited, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation by the player. Only when the clerk at the game parlor uses the display changeover switch 32 to set permission for execution of the specific performance, the specific performance becomes executable in accordance with the execution setting operation by the player.

In this way, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening is as follows:
It also serves as a setting for whether or not to execute a specific effect, and the operating means for setting it are also common (
Game center side: display changeover switch 32, player side: operation button 30). Not only in this form, but also whether or not to notify the number of prizes won in the general prize opening and whether or not to enable execution of specific effects.
They may be set individually, or may be set using different operating means.

The winning number information stored in the display control table is determined by the setting state of the mode changeover switch 31, the setting state of the display changeover switch 32, and the display setting by the operation button 30 (FIG. 5 (1)
) to (3) settings on the setting screen), it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the winning number information (the number of winnings in each general winning opening and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is based on the winning history of the winning history storage area mentioned above, which corresponds to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not erased, and when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the game is over, for example, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. It is erased (reset to 0) when the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, one minute).

When the number of wins to each general winning hole and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game completion determination, the number of wins to the general winning hole displayed on the image display device 5 is reset to 0 based on the game end determination. The number of winnings will also be reset to 0. For example, on the screen in Figure 6, which will be described later,
The coin-shaped object (display corresponding to winnings) that was displayed to the right of the characters is no longer displayed, and the number of displayed objects becomes 0. In addition, when the number of wins to the general winning openings is not displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are used to determine the end of the game. If it is reset to 0 based on , then
When the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 5, the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table at that time is displayed. It turns out.

In addition, the clerk or the player at the gaming parlor can check the number of winnings information on the display control table on the image display device 5.
(objects equivalent to the total number of winnings are displayed), by pressing the operation button 30 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the display control It is possible to reset the number of prizes for all items stored in the table (the number of prizes for each general prize opening and the total number of prizes for the general prize openings) to 0, and accordingly, the number of prizes displayed on the image display device 5. The information on the number of prizes won is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are deleted).

As shown in FIG. 5, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 30 while displaying a demo screen that is not related to the progress of the special map game or the general map game.
A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of decorative symbols is not being executed, and the start winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and big winning opening command are not executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 In a state in which no data has been received for more than 1 minute), a demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the screen of FIG. 5(1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is being displayed.

On the screen shown in FIG. 5 (1), a message saying "Press the OK button to set the display of the number of general prizes won" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed below it.
An arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 30 is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 30 in accordance with the instructions, the selection screen shown in FIG. 5(2) is displayed. On the selection screen, select "Show"
An icon containing the text "" and an icon containing the text "Do not display" are displayed, and the message "Press OK after selecting with the jog dial" is displayed, and furthermore, after turning the operation button 30 (jog dial), An arrow will appear prompting you to press it.

If you want to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot, select the icon that includes the word "display" by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left, and then If the number of winnings is not to be displayed, select the icon containing the words "Do not display" by rotating the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right. In this example, an icon containing the word "display" is selected.

If you press the operation button 30 while selecting the icon that includes the words "Display" in Figure 5 (2), the message "Display the number of general winnings" will appear as shown in Figure 5 (3). A message is displayed and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 5(4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the number of winnings in the general winning hole can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can understand this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 6) stored in the display control table at the time the setting operation is completed is immediately displayed. Note that the total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may also do so.

On the other hand, if you press the operation button 30 while selecting the icon that includes the words "Do not display" in Figure 5 (2), the message "General winning numbers will not be displayed." will be displayed, and
Return to the normal demo screen in (4). By this setting operation, the number of winnings in the general winning hole will not be displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, that is, on the gaming hall side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transferred to the image display device 5.
Only when permission is given to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the screen for setting whether to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to 5(3) is displayed on the image display device 5. shall be displayed. When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, when the gaming hall has not given permission to display the winning number information stored in the display control table on the image display device 5, The screen itself, as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3), for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in Figure 4 above,
Regardless of the player's display setting/non-display setting, it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning hole is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 32.

In this way, the intentions of the gaming parlor and the players can be reflected in whether or not to display the winning number of game balls in the general winning opening. In this embodiment, only when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position) on the gaming parlor side, the player can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the gaming hall is given priority over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the game hall does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning slot, the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first
It is best to set it to the position (hidden position).

Furthermore, in a case where the intention of the gaming parlor is given priority over the intention of the player, even if the gaming parlor side sets the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 to the first position (non-display position),
Despite the fact that it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot regardless of the settings on the player's side, the player's side as shown in Figures 5 (1) to (3) If the setting screen is displayed, the player may mistakenly believe that he or she can display the number of winnings in the general winning hole through his or her own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, the display changeover switch 3 is
When the operation section 2 is set to the first position (non-display position) (when it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening regardless of the settings on the player's side), )～(
The setting screen on the player side as shown in 3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that ``the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side'' is not performed.

Display settings on the game parlor side (setting the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 to the second position) and display settings on the player side (clicking on the icon containing the words "Display" on the selection screen in Figure 5 (2)) If it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (by pressing the operation button 30 in the selected state), a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. "General prize"
characters are displayed. Then, general winning holes (1st general winning hole 50A to 4th general winning hole 50
When a game ball wins in D), as shown in FIG. 6(2), a coin-shaped object (win-corresponding display) is displayed on the right side of the words "general prize".

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 5 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 6(3), each time a game ball enters a general winning hole (first general winning hole 50A to fourth general winning hole 50D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is added by one. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. Also,
The coin-shaped object includes the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the general prize opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the general winning slot. In addition, the number of prize balls awarded when game balls win in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, big winning opening) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. shall be.

In this way, by displaying objects that correspond to the winnings of game balls in the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects displayed as the number of winnings increases, the player can It is possible to easily know that a game ball has won a prize and the number of game balls that have won a prize in the general winning hole.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that the game is over, as described above, the number of winnings of game balls in each general winning hole and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are 0.
With the reset, all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters "general prize winning" are erased, as shown in FIG. 6(4). In other words, it will be announced that the number of winnings to the general winning hole is 0.

In this way, when it is determined that the game is over, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening that has been announced is reset to 0 (general By setting a state where it is displayed that there are no wins in the winning slot), it is possible to prevent the number of winnings in the general winning slot from being grasped by players who play games with the gaming machine afterwards. .

In this embodiment, by making the conditions for determining the end of the game and the conditions for transitioning to the above-mentioned demo screen a common condition, when transitioning to the demo screen, the number of prizes won in the announced general prize opening is 0. It will be reset to . In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the notified number of wins in the general winning slot may be reset to zero.

As described above, when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). If the number of general winnings is set not to be displayed on the player setting screen (Figure 5), the display control that increases the number of objects displayed each time a prize is won in the general winning opening shown in Figure 6 will not be executed. . In these cases, the characters ``Number of general winnings'' shown in Figure 6 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is not displayed, regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (the total number of winnings in the display control table). Do not show.

In addition, if you increase the number of objects (normal objects) that are displayed each time a prize is won in the general prize opening, the screen will become difficult to see as the number of prizes increases, so if the number of regular objects reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object that includes the number "100" and has a different form from the normal object) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Thereby, a predetermined number of winnings and the corresponding number of winning balls can be notified in the display area of one special object without requiring a display area of a predetermined number of normal objects.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by 1 for each winning entry into the general winning opening, but the number of objects displayed is not limited to this form. Objects may be displayed depending on the number of prizes won. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one every five times a player wins a prize in the general prize opening.

In addition, the display settings on the game parlor side (the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position) and the display settings on the player side (including the word "display" on the selection screen in FIG. 5(2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening (by pressing the operation button 30 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 7, the period during which the jackpot gaming state is controlled , the number of prizes won in the general prize opening will be displayed together with the number of prizes won in the grand prize opening.

FIG. 7(1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to a jackpot gaming state. When the first round game starts, the words "Number of general winnings" are displayed, and on the right side, the number of winnings in the general winning slot in the jackpot game state is displayed, as well as the "Number of big winnings". are displayed, and on the right side thereof, the number of prizes won in the jackpot in the jackpot game state is displayed. In this example, the number of prizes won in the general winning hole in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the general winning hole is 10, so [0x10] is displayed. In addition, since the number of prizes entered into the jackpot in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot is 15, it is displayed as [0x15]. has been done. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening [0x10] and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning in the big winning opening [0x15] Since the total number of balls is 0, it is displayed as [Total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 7(2), as a result of playing the first round game, the game ball entered the grand prize opening (special variable winning ball device 7) seven times, and the general winning opening (first general prize opening 50A) Since the game ball has won once in the ~4th general winning opening 50D), the number of general winnings has been updated to 1 and the number of grand winnings has been updated to 7. In addition, the number of prize balls [1 x 10] awarded according to the winnings in the general prize opening,
[Total 115 balls] is displayed because the total number with the number of prize balls [7×15] awarded in response to winning in the grand prize opening is 115. In addition, the number of prize balls awarded according to winnings in the general prize opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls awarded according to winnings in the grand prize opening [7 × 1
5=105 balls] may be displayed individually.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7 (3), as a result of playing the 2nd to 15th (final) round games, in the jackpot game state, game balls are counted in the big winning hole (special variable winning ball device 7). 1
05 times, and the game ball has won a total of 3 times in the general winning hole (1st general winning hole 50A to 4th general winning hole 50D), the number of general winnings has been updated to 3, and the number of grand prizes has been updated to 105. ing. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls awarded according to winnings in the general winning hole [
3×10] and the number of prize balls awarded according to winnings in the grand prize opening [105×15], the total number is 1605, so it is displayed as [total 1605 balls].

In this way, the number of wins in the general winning slot during the period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled,
By displaying the number of wins in the grand prize opening separately from the number of wins, the player becomes interested not only in the number of wins in the grand prize opening but also in the number of wins in the general prize opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings in the grand prize opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, players can Players will be interested not only in the number of prize balls awarded in response to the winnings, but also in the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the general winning slot.

In addition, it is not limited to the number of wins in the general winning slot during the period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled,
The number of wins to the general winning opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 5. . In addition, the number of wins in the general winning opening during the right-handed playing period (jackpot gaming state, variable probability state, or time saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the number of general winnings during the left-handed playing period (normal state). The number of winnings may be displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the number of pending memories of the special symbol game) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position). If it is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (Figure 5), the number of winnings in the general winning slot during the period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled as shown in Figure 7 will be displayed. Display control will not be executed. In these cases, the "general number of prizes" shown in Figure 7
The number of winning balls in the general prize opening and the corresponding number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general prize opening during the period when the characters themselves are not displayed and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. and the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning balls in the grand prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 6, the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning hole is displayed on the object, but the image display device 5 displays the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole. You may choose not to display it. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 7, the number of prize balls (
10) and the example in which the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the general winning hole are displayed has been described, but these may not be displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, it is also possible to display only the number of prizes won in the general prize opening, and not to display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the general prize opening. . With this configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed during the design process of the gaming machine, the display information on the image display device 5 must also be changed in accordance with the change. This can prevent the situation from disappearing. Note that, on the contrary, only the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings in the general winning hole may be displayed.

In this embodiment, if the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the gaming parlor side, the player settings shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3) Although we have described an example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not informed that the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display), this is not limited to this case, and the display changeover switch 32 can be Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in Figures 5 (1) to (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display). The player may be notified of this fact.

In such a configuration, even if the player sets the number of wins to the general winning slot to be displayed on the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5 (1) to (3), C for production control
The PU 120 prevents the image display device 5 from displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening based on the fact that the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-displaying position) on the gaming hall side. (gives priority to game hall settings). At this time, a message may be displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to priority given to the game hall settings.

Note that when the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIG. 5(1) is displayed (the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display). However, the player's setting operation may be disabled. For example, Figure 5 (1)
Even if the operation button 30 is pressed on the player setting screen of , the screen does not move to the selection screen of FIG. Also good.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the gaming hall settings are given priority over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be given priority over the gaming hall settings. That is, regardless of whether the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. FIG. 5 can be displayed on the image display device 5.
On the selection screen in (2), press the operation button 30 while selecting the icon that includes the words "Display".
When you press , the number of prizes won in the general prize opening is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed), and the selection screen shown in FIG. 5 (2) includes the characters "Do not display". When the operation button 30 is pressed with the icon selected, the number of winnings in the general winning hole may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

Alternatively, the gaming hall setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening according to the order of received setting operations. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, giving priority to the setting operation accepted last (the latest setting operation). For example, the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 may be moved to the first position (
Even if the player settings screen shown in Figures 5 (1) to (3) is selected,
When the setting is made to display the number of wins in the general winning hole, the number of wins in the general winning hole is displayed (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). Furthermore, even if the number of winnings in the general winning opening is set not to be displayed on the player setting screen shown in FIGS. When set to (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is executed). On the other hand, even if the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the number of prizes won in the general prize opening can then be changed on the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3). When set not to display, the number of winnings in the general winning hole is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed). Also, Figure 5 (1) ~
Even if the player setting screen in (3) is set to display the number of wins in the general winning slot, if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is then set to the first position (non-display position) for,
The number of winnings in the general winning hole is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 6 and 7 is not executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, by operating the display changeover switch 32, the clerk at the game parlor can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5, and also allows the player to By operating the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot on the image display device 5. By operating the switch 32, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5, while the player side can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. It may also be possible to make it impossible to set whether or not to display (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, only on the gaming hall side,
It may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5.

In addition, on the contrary, by operating the operation button 30 by the player (and the clerk at the gaming hall), it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. On the other hand, it is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the game parlor side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided). In the case of such a configuration, players and game hall staff can perform common setting operations (operation button 3).
0 operation), it becomes possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the gaming parlor to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 5 through a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table is displayed on the image display device 5, but the number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table is displayed on the pachinko machine. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1
The information may be transmitted to a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 1 or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and displayed on an information display device. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to the information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the information management device receives the general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition,
Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the mode changeover switch 31, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 5), and the information display device and information management It may also be displayed only on the device.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 5 by setting the mode changeover switch 31, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 32. An example has been described in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 5, but in this way, the winning number information can be displayed without providing individual switches for controlling the display of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch may be provided to control the display of both the number management table and the display control table. For example, by setting the common switch to the display setting, the number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table and the number of winnings information stored in the display control table are both displayed on the image display device 5.
By setting the common switch to non-display, neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table is displayed on the image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In Figure 8 (A), special symbols (other than specific special symbols (jackpot symbols)) are shown as confirmed special symbols.
When the missing symbol) is stopped and displayed, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 1
00) is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 8(B),
When a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the main board 11
A jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by (gaming control microcomputer 100) is illustrated. Since the special figure variation time is determined for each variation pattern, the production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command can execute the production according to the special figure variation time.

Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that result in a non-reach performance mode, PX003 is a variation pattern that results in a normal reach performance pattern, and PX004 is a variation pattern that results in a super reach performance pattern. It is a fluctuating pattern. Among the jackpot fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that becomes a normal reach jackpot performance mode, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that becomes a super reach jackpot performance mode. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the battle performance is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, and the outcome suggests whether or not there will be a jackpot. Super reach is a fluctuation pattern P
In X004, a defeat effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a variation pattern of the super reach jackpot, a victory effect is executed in which the ally character wins against the enemy character.

As mentioned above, the production control CPU 120 is a game control microcomputer 100.
When the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed, a variable display result notification command and a variation pattern designation command are received. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed), a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) will be stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol of the variable display (i.e., the jackpot symbol). controlled by the gaming state)
It is now possible to perform a fluctuating result preview performance.

In the variation result preview performance shown in FIG. 9(a), speakers 8L and 8R say "Now is your chance!"
The first aspect is a variation notice performance in which only a voice performance is performed in which a voice is output, and the second aspect is in which a role performance in which the movable accessory 1000 moves (rotating motion and lighting) is performed together with the voice performance. It is possible to perform variable preview performances. Due to such a difference in performance mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The performance control CPU 120 performs a predetermined performance based on the random number for determining the preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution conditions for the specific performance (specific performance A: variable result preview performance) based on winning in the general prize opening are satisfied. Determine the mode of change result preview performance. Specifically, the timing when a game ball enters the general winning slot (timing when the winning conditions based on winning the general winning slot are met)
Then, the mode of the variation result preview performance is determined, and the variation result preview performance is executed in the determined mode. Furthermore, as will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (accompanying variable display of the decorative symbol) is not being executed, the execution of the variation result preview performance is suspended, or the variation result preview performance is suspended. Not executed.

For example, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies "miss", the audio production will be performed at a rate of 80%. A first type of variable preview performance with only a voice effect and an accessory effect is executed at a rate of 20%, and a second type of variable preview effect with a voice effect and an accessory effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specifies "jackpot", the audio performance will be performed at a rate of 25%. The first aspect of the variation preview performance with only the voice performance and the accessory performance is performed at a rate of 75%.

In addition, as described above, the production control CPU 120, when a valid starting prize is entered into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole in the game controlling microcomputer 100,
Receive the starting prize opening designation command and the starting prize winning determination result designation command. This results in
Before the special symbol start conditions are met, a notice is given that a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) will be stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol of a variable display that has not yet been executed (that is, it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). It is now possible to perform a look-ahead preview.

In the look-ahead preview performance shown in Figure 9(b), speakers 8L and 8R say, ``Your chance is almost here!
The first aspect is a look-ahead preview performance in which only the audio performance is performed in which a voice saying "" is output, and the second aspect is in which an accessory performance in which the movable accessory 1000 moves (rotating motion and lighting) is performed together with the audio performance. It is now possible to perform a look-ahead preview of the game. Due to these differences in performance,
It is possible to suggest the possibility that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display in which the starting condition is not satisfied even though the starting condition is satisfied.

The performance control CPU 120 performs pre-reading based on the random number for determining the preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 when the execution conditions for a specific performance (specific performance B: pre-read preview performance) based on winning in the general winning opening are satisfied. Determine the mode of preview performance. Specifically, at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning slot (timing when the winning conditions based on winning the general winning slot are met),
The mode of the pre-read preview effect is determined, and the pre-read preview effect is executed in the determined mode. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of pending memories is 0, execution of the pre-read preview performance is suspended or the pre-read preview performance is not executed.

For example, if the starting winning determination result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area does not include a starting winning determining result specifying command that specifies "jackpot" (all starting winnings specifying "miss"). (if it is a time judgment result specification command), the first mode of pre-reading preview performance with only audio performance is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with voice performance and character performance at a rate of 15%. Execute a look-ahead preview performance. On the other hand, if the starting winning determination result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area includes a starting winning determining result specifying command that specifies "jackpot", the voice production will be performed at a rate of 10%. 1st with only
A pre-read preview performance of the second mode is executed, and a pre-read preview performance of the second mode is performed with a voice performance and an accessory performance at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a specific performance based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole. A variable result preview performance that foretells whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed will be a jackpot symbol is executed as a specific performance A in this embodiment. In addition, the look-ahead preview performance that foretells whether the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not met will become a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the retained memory includes a symbol that has been determined to be a jackpot, will be used in this implementation. It is executed as specific performance B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of wins to the general prize opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to enable execution of a specific performance, and the number of prizes to the general prize opening is notified. When the settings have been made (when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position (execution permission setting) and the operation button 30 is used to change the general winning number display setting (specific performance execution setting). The performance control CPU 120 can execute the specific performance only when the specific performance is being performed.

As described above, each time the performance control CPU 120 receives a general winning opening designation command and a starting winning opening designation command, it stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific presentation. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to specific presentation A and a winning history storage area corresponding to specific presentation B are provided separately.
1st general winning hole 50A, 2nd general winning hole 50B, 1st starting winning hole, 2nd starting winning hole, 3rd
When a winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific presentation A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific presentation B are stored in the [first
General winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th
] The winning history will be stored.

In a performance mode in which only the specific performance A can be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A (at the timing when a winning occurs in any of the winning openings). ), it is confirmed whether or not the winning conditions have been met, and based on the fact that the winning conditions have been met, it is decided to execute the specific effect A. In addition, in a performance form that can only execute specific performance B, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B (at the timing when a winning occurs in any of the winning openings), a winning It is checked whether the conditions are satisfied or not, and execution of specific performance B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions are satisfied. In addition, in the performance form that can execute specific performance A and specific performance B, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance A and the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B (either (at the timing when a prize is won in the winning slot), it is checked whether the winning conditions corresponding to the specific performance A are satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A, and the system responds to the specific performance A. The system determines to execute specific performance A based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to specific performance B are satisfied, and checks whether the winning conditions corresponding to specific performance B are satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B. , the execution of the specific performance B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to the specific performance B are satisfied.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 sets a specific performance A execution flag when execution of the specific performance A (variation result preview performance) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, at the timing when the winning conditions are met, a variable display of special symbols (accompanying variable display of decorative symbols)
is being executed, as described above, determines the mode of specific performance A (sound performance only, or both sound performance and character performance) according to the variable display result, and displays the determined mode. The variation result preview performance is executed, and the specific performance A execution flag is erased. That is, the specific performance A is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole without suspending the variable result preview performance.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (accompanying variable display of the decorative symbol) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are met, there is no target for the variable result preview performance, so specific performance A is executed. is suspended and the specific effect A execution flag remains set.
The performance control CPU 120 can understand that the execution of the specific performance A has been decided because the specific performance A execution flag is set, but that the specific performance A has not been executed and is in a pending state. It becomes. Then, when the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol associated with this) is satisfied, the mode of specific performance A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the mode is set to a pending state. The specified performance A that has been set is executed, and the specified performance A execution flag that has been set is erased.

In addition, not limited to this form, if the variable display of the special symbol (accompanying variable display of the decorative symbol) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are met, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Even if the execution of the specific effect A is stopped without any delay and the variable display start condition is satisfied thereafter, the specific effect A may not be executed.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 sets a specific performance B execution flag when execution of the specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. If the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is met, as described above, 1 The mode of specific production B (audio production only, or both audio production and role production) is determined according to the above start-up winning determination result, and the pre-read preview production of the determined format is executed, and the specific production Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific performance B is executed at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole without suspending the pre-read preview performance.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories is 0 at the timing when the winning conditions are met, there is no target for the pre-read preview effect, so the execution of specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag remains set. state. The performance control CPU 120 can understand that the execution of the specific performance B has been decided because the specific performance B execution flag is set, but that the specific performance B has not been executed and is in a pending state. It becomes. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of a winning in the starting winning opening (when the number of pending memories is 1 or more), the mode of specific performance B is determined based on the starting winning determination result, The specific performance B that has been on hold is executed, and the specific performance B execution flag that has been set is erased.

In addition, not limited to this form, if the number of pending memories is 0 at the timing when the winning conditions are met, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then Even if the start condition is met and the number of pending memories is 1 or more, specific performance B
You may choose not to execute it.

In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (for example, when a power outage is detected), the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning history storage area (the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A) and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A. The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B) and the specific performance execution flags (specific performance A execution flag and specific performance B execution flag) are all erased. As a result, when a specific performance (variation result preview performance, pre-read preview performance) is being executed, or
Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped after the execution of the specific performance has been decided and the specific performance has not yet been executed, and the power supply is subsequently restarted, the specific performance may still be in progress. The specific performance that existed or the specific performance that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the winning history and the specific performance execution flag are erased, so that the specific performance is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions have been met based on the winning history since the power supply was started, a new specific effect is executed.

[First performance form]
In the first performance form shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120, when the game state is (1) normal state, places the game ball in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. The winning condition (referred to as the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins a prize. When the first winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific performance is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A (at least the winning history of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D that is the first winning condition) (including winning history for any of them) will be deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the CPU 120 every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. The winning condition (referred to as the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is met, it is determined whether or not the specific performance is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124, and execution of the specific performance A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time specific performance A is executed,
Winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance A (includes winning history in any of the first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D, which are at least the second winning condition)
will be deleted.

In the first performance form and the second performance form to fourth performance form described later, (1) the rate at which a specific performance is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in the general prize opening in the normal state is (2) )
The rate is higher than the rate at which a specific performance is executed based on a game ball winning a prize in a general winning hole in a variable probability state or a time saving state. In the variable probability state and time saving state, the player usually
Because I am more interested in the winning status of game balls in the second starting winning hole and the variable display of decorative symbols than in the winning status of game balls in the general winning hole, even if a specific performance is executed, it will not be the same as the normal state. It is difficult to generate the same interest as in the past. Therefore, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the execution rate of the specific performance is lowered compared to the normal state to suppress a decrease in interest in the specific performance.

Note that in the second to fourth performance forms described later, unlike the first performance form, whether or not to execute a specific performance is not determined based on a random number for determining execution of a specific performance. The second presentation form to the fourth presentation form, which will be described later, are all capable of executing specific presentations when the winning conditions are met, but the winning conditions in the (2) probability variable state or time saving state are (1) normal The number of winnings is required to be greater than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific performance in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific performance in the variable probability state or the time saving state.

In this way, by varying the execution rate of the specific performance depending on the gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest when a game ball enters the general winning hole. In addition, the first performance form to the fourth
Contrary to the example of the performance form, (2) the rate at which a specific performance is executed based on a game ball winning in the general prize opening in the variable probability state or the time saving state is determined by (1) the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening in the normal state. The rate may be higher than the rate at which a specific performance is executed based on a game ball winning a prize.

In addition, in the second performance form to the fourth performance form described later, similarly to the first performance form, when the winning conditions are met, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific performance based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance. You can do it like this. For example, in the second presentation form to the fourth presentation form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the variable probability state or time saving state are the same winning condition, and the first winning condition is the same. Like the performance form, by differentiating the lottery probability when the winning conditions are met in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning conditions are met in the variable probability state or short time state, the rate at which a specific performance is executed under normal conditions and the probability that the winning conditions are met in the variable probability state The rate at which the specific performance is executed in the state or the time saving state may be made to be different.

Further, the specific performance may be executed at different rates depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of the variable display or the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is a losing symbol, and when the starting prize is won, If there is a retained memory that was determined to be a jackpot, compared to a case where there is no retained memory that was determined to be a jackpot at the time of starting winning (a case where there is only a retained memory that was determined to be a loss at the time of starting winning), The specific performance may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times a specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, a specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type,
Alternatively, specific effects of different types may be executed only once for each type.

[Second performance form]
In the second performance form shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 controls two or more general winning openings among the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D when the gaming state is (1) normal state. A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established when a game ball enters each winning hole one or more times. When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 inputs each of the two or more general winning holes from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins twice or more. When the second winning condition is met, execution of specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

In this way, in the second performance form, as well as the third performance form and fourth performance form described later, the number of wins in the general prize opening required to execute a specific performance in the normal state and the probability variable state or By differentiating the number of winnings into the general winning slot required to execute a specific performance in a time-saving state, it is possible to create interest in the number of winnings of game balls into the general winning slot depending on the gaming state. .

In addition, in the second performance form, in order to execute a specific performance, the first general prize opening 50A~
The condition is that a game ball be won at least once in each of two or more general winning holes among the fourth general winning holes 50D. In this way, by making winning in each of the multiple general prize openings a condition for executing a specific performance, it is not only possible to determine whether or not the game ball wins in the general prize opening, but also whether the game ball wins in any of the general prize openings. You can make them interested in what they did.

In addition, in the second performance form, as well as the third performance form and fourth performance form described later, the start of the jackpot game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 has controlled the jackpot game state. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A and the specific performance B
It is assumed that all winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the winning history are deleted.

Furthermore, in the second presentation form, as well as the third presentation form and fourth presentation form described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on a change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state.
The first winning condition is not necessarily satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the variable probability state or the time saving state. The second winning condition is not necessarily satisfied based on the winning history only in the time saving state. In addition, the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, or the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state, and is not limited to this form. Also good. That is, it is checked whether the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and it is checked whether the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the variable probability state or the time saving state. You may want to check it.

[Third performance form]
In the third performance mode shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 controls the general winning openings (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50A to The winning condition (referred to as the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning hole 50D). When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. and,
Every time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the general winning openings (first general winning opening 50A to fourth general winning opening 50D) within 120 seconds.
A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of five times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

Here, the period of 120 seconds starts when the winning history for the first general winning slot is stored in the winning history storage area of specific presentation A (for example, the timer for specific presentation A reaches 120 seconds). set). If the winning conditions are not met within the 120 second period (specific production A
(when the timer times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific performance A is erased without executing the specific performance A. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are met within the 120 second period (
When the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for specific performance A times out), specific performance A is executed, and the winning history of the specific performance A in the winning history storage area is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency required to execute a specific performance in the normal state (the number of wins within a predetermined period), and the winning frequency required to execute a specific performance in a variable probability state or a time saving state (the number of wins within a specified period). By differentiating the number of winnings (number of winnings within), it is possible to create interest in the frequency of winnings in the general winning slot depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in the third performance mode, when a specific performance A is executed that targets the variable display that was being executed when winning the first general prize opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) (only for the first variable display period) In some cases, the winning conditions are met depending on the winning history), or a specific effect A is executed that targets a variable display that is different from the variable display that was executed when the first prize was won in the general winning slot during a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, like the third presentation mode, a specific presentation is executed when the number of winnings in the general prize opening during a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. The specific effect may be executed when the number of wins in the general winning hole during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of wins in the general prize opening reaches a predetermined number during the period during which the variable display of special symbols equivalent to the number of reserved memories is executed, The performance may be executed.

[Fourth performance form]
In the fourth performance form shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 selects the starting winning hole (either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) when the gaming state is (1) normal state. , the starting winning hole (either the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the general winning hole (any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D), and the game ball wins in this order. By winning a prize, the winning condition (referred to as the first winning condition) is established. When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), starting winning opening (first starting winning opening), (any of the winning opening and the 2nd starting winning opening), general winning opening (any of the 1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D), and the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening) General prize opening 50
D) The winning condition (referred to as the second winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in the following order. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of specific effect A is determined. and,
Every time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased.

In this way, the general winning opening and other winning openings different from the general winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening)
By executing a specific performance on the condition that the order of winnings in the starting prize openings is in a specific order, it is possible to change not only the winning status in the general winning opening but also the winning order in the general winning opening and other winning openings. can generate interest in

It should be noted that the number of consecutive winnings of game balls in the general winning opening and the number of consecutive winnings of gaming balls in other winning openings may be varied. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning in the starting winning hole three or more times in a row and then winning in the general winning hole two or more times in a row. Furthermore, the winning conditions may also be based on which of a plurality of general winning openings the player has won a prize, or which of the plurality of other winning openings has won a prize. For example, the winning condition is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in the order of the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, the first general winning hole 50A, and the second general winning hole 50B. Also good. In addition, the winning condition is not limited to the order in which a winning in the starting winning opening occurs and then a winning in the general winning opening. may also hold true.

Further, the winning condition may be established based on the winning order of game balls in a plurality of general winning holes being in a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the gaming state is (
2) In the case of a variable probability state or a time saving state, the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50
B. Furthermore, the winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball enters a plurality of general winning holes in the order of the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D. It's okay.

Alternatively, the winning condition may be established based on the winning order of game balls in a plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of game balls in one or more starting winning holes in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) normal state, the winning condition ( If the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) probability variable state or time saving state,
Game balls were won in the following order: 1st general winning hole 50A, 1st starting winning hole, 2nd general winning hole 50B, 3rd general winning hole 50C, 2nd starting winning hole, 4th general winning hole 50D. In this way, a winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) may be satisfied.

In addition, it is not limited to the order of entry into the general winning opening and the starting winning opening, but it is also possible to win based on the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the grand winning opening in a specific order. The conditions may be satisfied, such as entering the general prize opening and the first passage gate 41A or the second passage gate 4.
The winning condition may be established based on the order of entering 1B being a specific order. In addition, if a specific area is provided in which the type of jackpot (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball, the order of entry into the general winning hole and entry into the specific area is specified. The winning condition may be established based on the order.

In addition, in the first to fourth performance forms, an example was explained in which a variable result preview performance (specific performance A) is executed as a specific performance, but it is also possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance (specific performance B) as a specific performance. It's okay.

[5th performance form ~ 8th performance form]
In the fifth to eighth performance forms shown in FIG. 11, unlike the first to fourth performance forms, there are two types: (1) a normal state, and (2) a variable probability state or a time-saving state. , the winning conditions are not different and are common. In the examples of the fifth presentation form to the eighth presentation form, the first winning condition in the first presentation form to the fourth presentation form, that is, the winning condition adopted in the normal state, is set as a common winning condition. ing. (1) If the gaming state when the winning conditions are met is the normal state, a variable result preview performance (specific performance A) is executed as a specific performance, and (2) the game when the winning conditions are met. When the state is a variable probability state or a time saving state, a pre-read preview performance (specific performance B) is executed as a specific performance. As a result, the type of specific performance can be changed depending on the gaming state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and the type of specific performance that is executed based on the game ball entering the general winning slot. It can improve your interest.

In the fifth performance form shown in FIG. 11, the performance control CPU 120, when the winning conditions are satisfied,
The execution of the specific performance is determined at a rate of 50%. When the gaming state is (1) normal state, specific performance A is executed, and each time specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state is (2) variable probability state or time saving state,
Each time specific performance B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B are both erased. be done.

In the sixth performance form to the eighth performance form shown in FIG. 11, the performance control CPU 120 executes specific performance A if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) normal state; Every time specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance A, and
All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning conditions are met is (2) variable probability state or time saving state, specific performance B is executed, and each time specific performance B is executed, a game corresponding to specific performance A is performed. The winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B are both erased.

In addition, in the sixth presentation form to the eighth presentation form, the game control microcomputer 10
0, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is , and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B are all erased. Furthermore, in the sixth performance form to the eighth performance form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on a change in the gaming state. In addition, the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, or the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state, and is not limited to this form. Also good.

In addition, in the seventh performance mode, the specific performance timer is set to 120 seconds based on the winning history of the first general winning opening being stored in the winning history storage area of specific performance A and specific performance B. . When the specific performance timer times out, neither specific performance A nor specific performance B is executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of specific performance B are Both will be deleted. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are met before the specific performance timer times out, (1) In the normal state, specific performance A is executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of specific performance A and specific performance B are All winning histories in the winning history storage area are erased, and (2) in the case of variable probability state or time saving state, specific performance B
is executed, and both the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific performance A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific performance B are erased.

[9th performance form ~ 12th performance form]
In the ninth to twelfth performance forms shown in FIG. 12, unlike the first to eighth performance forms, there are two types: (1) a normal state, and (2) a variable probability state or a time-saving state. , the winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the fulfillment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) if the first winning condition is met in the normal state, the variable result preview performance (specific performance A) is executed as the specific performance, and (2) the second winning condition is executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state. If this is established, a pre-read preview performance (specific performance B) is executed as a specific performance. As a result, the execution rate of the specific performance and the type of specific performance can be varied depending on the gaming state when the game ball enters the general winning slot, and when the game ball enters the general winning slot. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance based on the above.

In the ninth performance mode shown in FIG. 12, the performance control CPU 120 places a game ball in either the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B when the gaming state is (1) normal state. Each time a prize is won, a prize winning condition (referred to as a first prize winning condition) is satisfied, and execution of specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific performance A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the CPU 120 every time a game ball wins in either the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D. The winning condition (referred to as the second winning condition) is satisfied, and execution of specific performance B is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

In the tenth presentation form shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is (1) normal state, the presentation control CPU 120 inputs one to each of both the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50B. A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is satisfied by winning the game ball more than once, and execution of specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific performance A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120
If the gaming state is (2) variable probability state or time saving state, a prize is won by a game ball winning in both the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D twice or more each. The condition (referred to as the second winning condition) is satisfied, and execution of specific performance B is determined. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

In addition, in the ninth presentation form to the twelfth presentation form, the game control microcomputer 1
Based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by 00, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is , and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific presentation B are all erased. Furthermore, in the ninth performance mode to the twelfth performance mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on a change in the gaming state. In addition, the winning history in the winning history storage area may be erased based on the transition from the normal state to the variable probability state or the time saving state, or the transition from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal state, and is not limited to this form. Also good.

In the eleventh performance form shown in FIG. 12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50A within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) normal state.
A winning condition (referred to as the first winning condition) is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three times or more in B, and execution of the specific performance A is determined. Then, each time specific performance A is executed, specific performance A
Only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the winning history is deleted. On the other hand, the production control CPU 12
0 is the third general winning hole 50C when the gaming state is (2) variable probability state or time saving state.
And the winning condition (second
) is satisfied, and execution of specific performance B is determined. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

In the eleventh performance mode, the timer for specific performance A is set to 120 seconds based on the winning history of the first general winning opening being stored in the winning history storage area of specific performance A. Then, when the timer for specific performance A times out, only the winning history of the specific performance A in the winning history storage area is erased without executing the specific performance A. On the other hand, when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for specific performance A times out, specific performance A is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of specific performance A is erased. In addition, the timer for specific performance B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area for specific performance B. When the specific performance B timer times out, only the winning history of the specific performance B in the winning history storage area is erased without executing the specific performance B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is met in the variable probability state or time saving state before the timer for specific performance B times out, specific performance B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of specific performance B is erased. be done.

In the twelfth performance form shown in FIG. 12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the first starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 50B, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. The winning condition (referred to as the first winning condition) is established when the game ball enters the winning hole in this order. When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. And specific performance A
Every time this is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the second starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 50C, and the fourth general winning opening. 50
A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established when the game balls enter the winning hole in the order D. When the second winning condition is met, execution of specific performance B is determined. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

As in the 9th presentation form to the 12th presentation form, the general winning hole (in the 12th presentation form, the general winning hole and the starting winning hole), which is the winning target of the game ball for executing the specific presentation, is set according to the game state. By varying the performance, specific effects can be executed appropriately depending on the gaming state. In addition, in the 9th presentation form to the 12th presentation form, the target winning hole that should be won in order to satisfy the first winning condition in the normal state, and the target winning hole that should be won in order to satisfy the second winning condition in the variable probability state or the time saving state. This example shows an example in which the target winning openings that should be won are all different, but it is not limited to this type of form. It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning into the second general winning hole 50B.

[13th performance form ~ 16th performance form]
The 13th performance form to the 16th performance form shown in FIG. 13 are the rate at which specific performance A is executed when the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is during the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach variation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is outside the period of (2) reach variation or before the establishment of the reach state in reach variation, the ratio is higher than the rate at which specific performance A is executed.

Here, (1) The period after the establishment of the reach state in the reach variation means, specifically, the period after the establishment of the reach state in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach), the period after the establishment of the reach state, the final stop This is the period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed.
(2) The period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is:
Specifically, the period excluding the period in which the variable display of the variable pattern with reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is being executed, or the start of the variable display of the variable pattern with reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period from then until before the reach state is established.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 13th presentation form to 16th presentation form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 1st presentation form to 4th presentation form, respectively. It has become. Regarding any production form, if the timing at which the first winning condition is met is during the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, the percentage of execution of specific production A is the same as the second winning condition. When the timing is established (2) outside the period of the reach variation or during the period before the establishment of the reach state in the reach variation, the rate of execution of the specific performance A becomes higher. In this way, by varying the execution rate of the specific performance depending on the gaming period when the winning conditions are met, it is possible to improve the interest when a game ball enters the general winning slot.

[17th performance form ~ 20th performance form]
In the 17th performance form to the 20th performance form shown in FIG. 14, the timing when the winning conditions are met is
(1) If it is a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the timing when specific performance A is executed and the winning conditions are met is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. If it is within the period, specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions for the 17th to 20th performance formats are the 5th to 8th performance formats, respectively.
These are the same winning conditions (common winning conditions) for the performance format. Regarding any performance form, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is during the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach variation, specific performance A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is outside the period of (2) reach variation or before the establishment of the reach state in reach variation, specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects depending on the gaming period when the winning conditions are met, it is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning hole.

[21st performance form ~ 24th performance form]
In the 21st performance form to the 24th performance form shown in FIG. 15, if the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is in the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach variation, the specific performance A
If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is outside the period of (2) reach variation or before the establishment of the reach state in reach variation, specific effect B is executed.

The first prize winning condition and the second prize winning condition in the 21st presentation form to 24th presentation form are the same as the first prize winning condition and the second prize winning condition in the 9th presentation form to 12th presentation form, respectively. It has become. Regarding any performance form, if the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is during the period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation, specific performance A is executed and the second winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the period of reach variation or before the establishment of the reach state in reach variation, specific effect B is executed. In this way, by varying the execution rate of specific performances depending on the gaming period when the winning conditions are met, and by executing different types of specific performances depending on the gaming period when the winning conditions are met,
It is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize opening.

[25th performance form and 26th performance form]
In the 25th presentation form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st presentation form to the 24th presentation form, the general winning openings (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D) are entered regardless of the gaming state or the playing period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three times or more. When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased. In addition, regardless of the gaming state or the playing period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the general winning hole (first general winning hole 50A to fourth general winning hole 50D) five times or more in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of specific performance B is determined. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

In the 26th presentation form shown in FIG. 16, unlike the 1st presentation form to the 24th presentation form, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50A to 4th general prize opening The first winning condition is established when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning hole 50D). When the first winning condition is met, execution of specific performance A is determined. Then, each time the specific performance A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance A is erased. In addition, regardless of the gaming state or playing period, if the game ball enters the general winning hole (1st general winning hole 50A to 4th general winning hole 50D) a total of 5 times or more within 120 seconds, a second prize will be awarded. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is met, execution of specific performance B is determined. Then, each time the specific performance B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance B is erased.

In this way, regardless of the gaming state or playing period, different effects are executed depending on the number of prizes won in the general prize opening and the frequency of winnings (number of prizes won within a predetermined period), thereby increasing the number of prizes won in the general prize opening. It is possible to create interest in the frequency of winnings. In this example, the performance mode (output sound) differs depending on the number of prizes won in the general prize opening and the frequency of winnings, and the variable display that is the target of the notice differs (Specific performance A: variable display being executed, Specific production B: variable display that is not executed), but is not limited to this, production that differs depending on the number of prizes won in the general winning slot and the frequency of winnings (whether or not it suggests the display result of the variable display) For example, it may be possible to perform a performance that foretells the display result of the variable display and a performance that is not related to the display result of the variable display, and a performance that differs in whether or not it suggests the gaming state (for example, a high probability It may be possible to perform a performance that notifies the game state and a performance that is not related to the gaming state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, and informs that a winning has occurred in the general winning opening and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is possible to identify in which of the starting winning holes the game ball has won, and by receiving the starting winning opening designation command, it can be determined that a winning has occurred in the starting winning opening and that the game ball has won in either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is possible to specify whether the ball has won a prize, and by receiving the grand prize opening command, it is possible to specify that a winning has occurred in the grand prize opening. Therefore, it is possible to store and update the number of winnings management table as shown in FIG. 17 as the number of winnings management table.

The second starting winning hole is formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to open (from the closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win, to the opening where the game ball can win or is easy to win) By switching to the state), the game balls can win prizes. In addition, the grand prize opening is formed by a special variable winning ball device 7, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open (from a closed state in which no game ball wins or is difficult to win, a game ball can win a prize or is easy to win). By switching to the open state), the game balls can win prizes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, the second starting winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 are classified as accessory winning holes in which game balls can be won by the operation of the accessory. On the other hand, the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50
The D and first starting winning holes are always open and are classified as non-accessory winning holes in which game balls can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory.

In the winning number management table of FIG. 17, the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D
, the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball wins in each winning hole (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole, the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the big winning hole). In the example 10, 10, 10
, 10, 2, 2, 15) are stored. Then, for each winning hole, the number of winnings, which is the number of times the game ball has won in the winning hole (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14,754, 315, 42
0) and the number of payouts obtained by multiplying the number of winnings by the number of prize balls (the total number of balls paid out when game balls entered the winning slot, in this example, 110,360,220,140,1508 ,63
0,6300) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings for each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14,754, 315, 420, respectively) relative to the total number of winnings for each winning opening (1572 in this example)
and (2) non-official prize openings (1st general winning opening 50A to 4th general winning opening 50D and 1st starting winning opening) to the total number of winnings for each winning opening (1572 in this example). (11)
+36+22+14+754), the ratio of the number of prizes (315+420) in the accessory prize openings (second starting prize opening and the grand prize opening), and (3) the total number of prizes in each prize opening (in this example, 15
72), the number of wins other than the big winning opening (11+36+22+14+754+315)
and the percentage of the number of winnings (420) in the big winning opening are stored.

In addition, as a payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts from each winning hole (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, respectively) to the total number of payouts from each winning hole (9268 in this example),
6300) and (2) the total number of payouts from each winning slot (9268 in this example).
The ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) of non-official prize openings (1st general prize opening 50A to 4th general prize opening 50D and 1st starting prize opening), and the ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) of non-official prize winning holes (2nd starting prize opening and big prize) The ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) for (3) the total number of payouts for each winning hole (9268 in this example), the number of payouts other than the big winning hole (110 + 360 + 2)
20+140+1508+630) and the percentage of the number of payouts (6300) from the big winning slot are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position (display position), the performance control CPU 120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on device 5. Therefore, the clerk at the game parlor will pay out the number of balls paid out as a result of the game balls entering the prize openings compared to the total number of balls (9268) that were paid out as the game balls entered the winning openings. The ratio of the number of balls (110+360+220+140+1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls paid out as a result of a game ball winning in the grand prize opening (6300) is compared to the total number of balls paid out as a result of a game ball winning in each winning opening (9268). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, if the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the production control CPU 120 shall notify that in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 17, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the second payout ratio to a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60
%), this shall be notified in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 17, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 5, and can display the comparison results with the predetermined first reference ratio and second reference ratio. It is possible to display the information in an understandable manner. In addition, the mode changeover switch 31
Regardless of the setting of When the demo screen is displayed, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of settings on the gaming parlor side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed depending on the gaming state, for example, they may be displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 calculates the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1.
and storing the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio in the gaming device;
It is possible to display it on a display device. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and in the information management device, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio of each gaming machine are transmitted. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on a display device.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 has the following functions for the production control CPU 120:
When outputting the general winning opening designation command, starting winning opening designation command, and big winning opening command, external output information corresponding to these commands includes information that a winning has occurred in the general winning opening and the first general winning opening. Information that can specify which of the 50A to 4th general winning openings 50D the game ball has won, information that a winning has occurred in the starting winning opening, and whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Information that can identify whether a prize has been won or information that can identify that a prize has been won in the big prize opening is collected from the corresponding gaming equipment (card unit, call lamp device), information management device (hall computer), etc. It shall be output to an external device.

This makes it possible to specify information equivalent to the general winning opening designation command, information equivalent to the starting winning opening designation command, information equivalent to the big winning opening command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that receives the information, it becomes possible to store and update a winning number management table of the form shown in FIG. 17 for each gaming machine. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, the first
It is possible to grasp whether the payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

Furthermore, regarding the aggregation period of the winning number information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if no settings have been made for the aggregation period, This is the period from when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings in each winning opening becomes 0), and the pachinko gaming machine 1
When the power supply is restarted, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is in a state of 0. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped,
The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

Winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko game machine 1 (Fig. 3 or Fig. 17)
The aggregation period for each item (value of each item) can be set by the amusement facility, for example,
Using the operation button 30, it is possible to set a totaling period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) regarding the gaming machine. In addition, in the gaming device (card unit or call lamp device), the clerk at the game parlor inputs the desired aggregation period using an input device, etc., and the input aggregation period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1, and the aggregation period is (RAM122
). In addition, in the information management device (hall computer), the gaming hall manager inputs a desired aggregation period using an input device, and the input aggregation period is applied to each pachinko game machine 1 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target). It is sent to the gaming machine 1),
It may be set as the aggregation period (stored in the RAM 122). Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 5, or a corresponding gaming device (card unit, call lamp device) and display on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and display on the display device of the information management device. .

In addition, the number of winnings in the number of winnings management table is determined based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the big winning opening command, which are output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In an external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17), by setting the aggregation period using the input device included in the external device, the information (values of each item in FIG. 3 or FIG. 17) can be set for each aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). It becomes possible to create a winning number management table and display it on a display device included in an external device. For example, if the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning number management table for each predetermined period regarding the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display a winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. becomes.

[27th performance form]
The above-mentioned specific performance A and specific performance B are both foretelling the variable display result in the special figure game depending on the performance mode, but they are executed in connection with the winning of the game ball into the general winning holes 50A to 50D. As a specific performance, it is also possible to perform a performance that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the regular figure game. In FIG. 18, a specific performance C (point awarding performance) is illustrated as a performance that is not related to the variable display result in the special pattern game or the variable display result in the general pattern game.

In the 27th performance form shown in FIG. 19 and the 29th performance form described later, the first general prize opening 50A
~ Every time a game ball enters one of the fourth general winning holes 50D, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific performance C based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124, and it is determined to execute it. A specific effect C is executed. By executing the specific effect C, the RAM 122
1 is added to the total points in the point storage area formed in , and an image 2000 including the characters "1 point" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

That is, each time a game ball wins in any of the first general prize opening 50A to the fourth general prize opening 50D, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to award one point. In this case, the performance form is such that a point award performance in which 1 point is awarded is performed.
Benefits are awarded to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, if the total points reach 5 (if you win 5 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. By having the two-dimensional code read (capturing) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that the player owns, the player can access the image providing server and download the desired standby image, etc. to the information terminal. . Furthermore, when the total points reach 10 (when the winner is won 10 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5. By having the two-dimensional code read (imaged) by the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that the player owns, the player can access the music providing server and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period); ), specific effect C will be executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) if it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), at a rate of 80%. Execute specific performance C. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special pattern game, and a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special pattern game or the decorative pattern on the image display device 5. By receiving the information from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed.

Note that, similarly to the specific presentation A and the specific presentation B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific presentation C is provided. Every time the specific performance C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance C (at least the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50, which are the winning conditions)
(including the winning history for any of D) will be deleted.

Here, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 122 will be 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (it will not be reset even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching the number (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and as the specific performance C is executed, it is added again by 1.

In the 27th performance form and the 29th performance form described below, (1) a specific performance is performed based on a game ball winning a prize in the general prize opening during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the pattern variation period); The execution rate is lower than (2) the rate at which specific effects are executed based on a game ball winning in the general winning hole during a period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). It is set. During the period (1), since the performance corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variable result preview performance) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the player usually does not win the general prize. Players are more interested in these performances, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than in the winning status of game balls placed in their mouths. Therefore, even if the specific performance is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (2), since the effect corresponding to the special figure game that would normally be of priority interest is not being executed, by executing the specific effect, the player I am in a situation where I am likely to become interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific performance at a higher rate than in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, as a specific performance, by executing a specific performance C (point awarding performance) that is not related to the variable display result in the special pattern game or the variable display result in the general pattern game, it is possible to Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a specific performance at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not lost. For example, if a performance related to the variable display result in a special symbol game is adopted as a specific performance, such as specific performance A, the timing when a game ball enters the general prize opening is the timing at which (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If it is a period in which the symbol fluctuation is not performed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is no target for the fluctuation result notice at this timing. Therefore, either the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the start conditions for the variable display related to the special drawing game are satisfied (general prize winning (The specific effect is not executed at the timing when a prize is won, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition regarding the special figure game is satisfied.) As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific performance may decrease, or the timing of winning a prize and the timing of execution of the specific performance may deviate, which may reduce interest. Such a problem can be avoided by employing, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the general figure game.

In addition, in the 27th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (symbol fluctuation (within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C is made executable only when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 27th presentation form, (1) identification is made based on the fact that a game ball has entered the general winning hole during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the performance is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific performance is executed based on the game ball winning the general prize opening during the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the pattern variation period). You may also set it so that it is also high.

[28th performance form]
In the twenty-eighth performance form, unlike the twenty-seventh performance form, it is not determined whether or not a specific performance is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 28th presentation form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period); ), specific performance A (variation result notice performance) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) if it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), , specific performance A
do not execute.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(a), the specific performance A is either a first mode in which only a voice effect is performed or a second mode in which a character effect is performed together with a voice effect. This is a variable result preview performance that suggests the possibility that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display where the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Also,
As shown in FIG. 9(b), the specific performance B is determined depending on whether the mode is the first mode in which only the voice effect is performed or the second mode in which the character effect is performed together with the voice direction. This is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests the possibility that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as a variable display result of a variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the specific performance C is
As shown in Figure 18, it is related to both the display result of the variable display regarding the special pattern game (whether it becomes a jackpot symbol or not) and the display result of the variable display regarding the general pattern game (whether it becomes a winning symbol or not). This is a performance in which players are awarded points according to their winnings in the general winning slot.

In this way, if the timing when a game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2), the specific performance A is not executed (as described above)
The process of "holding the execution of specific effect A and executing it when the variable display start condition related to the special figure game is met" is not performed, and only during the period (1), the specific effect is Performance A is now executed. Each time specific performance A is executed, specific performance A
The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the winning history (including at least the winning history in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which are the winning conditions) is erased.

In the 28th performance form, as a specific performance, by executing a specific performance A (variable result preview performance) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole, We are trying to increase interest in specific performances. However, if the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning hole is during the period when (2) the variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the notice of variation results at this timing. do not. In this case, the execution of specific effect A is temporarily suspended (specific effect A is not executed at the timing when a prize is won in the general winning slot), and then, when the start conditions for the variable display related to the special drawing game are met, the specified effect is If the performance A is executed, there is a risk that interest will be reduced due to the discrepancy between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance.
Therefore, in the 28th performance form, when a game ball wins in the general winning hole during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific performance A is not executed.

In addition, in the 28th performance mode, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and in the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In such a case, when a winning occurs in the general winning hole during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), execution of specific performance A is temporarily suspended (when a winning occurs in the general winning hole). Specific performance A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and thereafter, specific performance A is executed when the start condition for variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. In this way, the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole is during the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period) or during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Also, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at different rates.

In addition, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period), the special The execution rate of the specific effect A may be made to vary depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the ready-to-reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to use the confirmed decorative pattern as the jackpot pattern, the performance control CPU 120
The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%, and if it is determined that the confirmed decorative pattern is a missed pattern, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th performance form]
In the 29th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the number of pending memories (for example, the number of first pending memories and the number of second pending memories) (2) The number of pending memories is 0 but the period in which variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period). In some cases, specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (3) when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display of special symbols is not being executed. (outside the symbol variation period), specific performance C is executed at a rate of 80%.

In other words, if the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or at least it has been decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole (the above (
(1) or (2) period), specific performance C is executed at a rate of 20%, and at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. In addition, if there is no decision to execute the variable display of special symbols (if it is during the period (3) above),
Specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific performance C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance C (at least winning in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D, which is a winning condition) (including history) will be deleted.

In the 29th performance form, when a game ball enters the general winning hole, the variable display of special symbols is executed, or at least it is decided to execute the variable display of special symbols (see (1) above). or (2) period), the rate at which the specific performance is executed is when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. The rate is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when no decision has been made to execute it (during the period (3) above). During the periods (1) and (2), the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R are in a situation where the effects corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variable result preview effect or the pre-read preview effect) are being executed. , players are usually more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than in the winning status of game balls in the general winning slot. Therefore, even if the specific performance is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the effect corresponding to the special figure game that would normally be of priority interest is not being executed, by executing the specific effect, the player I am in a situation where I am likely to become interested in this. Therefore, (1)
By executing the specific performance at a higher rate than the period (2), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, as a specific performance, by executing a specific performance C (point awarding performance) that is not related to the variable display result in the special pattern game or the variable display result in the general pattern game, it is possible to Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a specific performance at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific performance is not lost. For example, if a prefetch preview performance that can be executed only when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, such as specific performance B, is adopted as a specific performance, the timing when a game ball enters the general winning slot is the number of pending memories. In the case of a period in which is 0, there is no target for pre-read notice at this timing. Therefore, either do not execute the specific performance (cancel the execution of the specific performance based on winnings in the general winning slot), or suspend execution until the number of pending memories reaches 1 or more (when a prize is entered in the general winning slot) (The specific effect is not executed at the timing, but is executed at the timing when the start condition for the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied.) As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific performance may decrease, or the timing of winning a prize and the timing of execution of the specific performance may deviate, which may reduce interest. Such problems can be avoided by employing, as the specific effect, a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the general figure game.

In addition, in the 29th performance mode, at the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed. (1) or (2) above.
(during the period of (3) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the decision to execute the variable display of the special symbol is not made (the period of (3) above). The specific effect C may be executable only when Also, contrary to the example shown in the 29th production form, whether the variable display of special symbols is executed at the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. Or at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (in the case of period (1) or (2) above), the rate at which the specific performance is executed is the same as when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific performance is executed when the specific performance is not executed and no decision is made to execute the variable display of the special symbol (during the period (3) above).

In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game starts (the timing at which the start condition is met) and the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning slot are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including at the same time) In this case, the specific effect may not be executed immediately, but may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the start of the variable display. According to this, even though the specific production is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is met (for example, in the case of specific production B or specific production C), immediately after the start condition is met. It is possible to prevent the user from being misled into thinking that the game is related to the special map game. In addition, the timing at which a game ball enters the starting prize opening (the timing at which the starting conditions are met) and the timing at which the gaming ball enters the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including at the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may not be executed immediately, but after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the number of pending memories has increased. According to this, even though the specific production is not related to the special figure game immediately after the starting condition is met (for example, in the case of specific production A or specific production C), immediately after the starting condition is met. It is possible to prevent the user from being misled into thinking that the game is related to the special map game.

[30th performance form]
In the 30th performance form, unlike the 29th performance form, it is not determined whether or not to execute a specific performance based on the random number for determining execution of a specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124. In the 30th production mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the number of pending memories (for example, the number of first pending memories and the number of second pending memories) (2) The number of pending memories is 0. If the total number of pending memories is 1 or more, specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of pending memories is 0. If is a period in which variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) a period in which the number of pending memories is 0 and variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If so, specific performance B
do not execute.

In this way, if the timing at which a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2) or (3), specific effect B will not be executed. (
The above-mentioned process of "suspending the execution of specific performance B and executing it when the number of suspended memories is 1 or more" is not performed, and only during the period (1), the specific performance B is suspended. Performance B is now executed. Every time specific performance B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to specific performance B (at least the first general winning opening 50A which is a winning condition)
(including the winning history in any of the fourth general winning openings 50D) is deleted.

In the 30th performance form, as a specific performance, specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) related to the variable display result of the special figure game that is on hold at the timing when a game ball enters the general prize opening is executed. I am trying to improve my interest in directing. however,
If the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning slot is during the period (2) or (3) when the number of pending memories is 0, there is no target for the pre-read notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of specific effect B is temporarily suspended (specific effect B is not executed at the timing when a prize is won in the general winning slot), and then, when the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more, specific effect B is suspended. If this is done, there is a risk that interest will be reduced due to the discrepancy between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance. Therefore, in the 30th performance mode, if a game ball wins in the general winning slot during the period (2) or (3) (period when the number of pending memories is 0), specific performance B is not executed. .

In addition, in the 30th performance mode, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1) (within the period with reservation memory). In this case, specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and in the case of period (2) or (3) (within a period without retention memory), specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You can do it like this. In the case of such a form, when a prize is won in the general prize opening during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reservation memory), the execution of specific performance B is temporarily suspended. (specific performance B is not executed at the timing when a prize is won in the general winning slot), and thereafter, when the number of pending memories becomes 1 or more, specific performance B is executed. In this way, the timing when the game ball enters the general winning slot is during the period (1) (within the period with reservation memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reservation memory). ), the specific effect B may be executed in both cases, and the specific effect B may be executed at different rates.

In addition, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1) (within the period with reservation memory), the reservation The execution rate of specific effect B differs depending on the variable display result of the special figure game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to suspended memory. You can do it like this. For example, when a starting winning determination result specifying command that specifies a "jackpot" is stored in the starting winning command storage area (i.e., a reserved memory in which the variable display result of a special drawing game becomes a jackpot symbol), the production control CPU 120 stores is present), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if the starting winning determination result designation command that specifies "jackpot" is not stored in the starting winning command storage area (i.e., (If there is no pending memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game is a jackpot symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st performance form]
In the 31st presentation form shown in FIG. 20, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed; (2) During the period when the variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), specific effect A (variation result preview effect) is executed at a rate of 100% (within the symbol variation period). In some cases, specific performance C (point awarding performance) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1) and when it is during the period (2), It is assumed that different types of specific performances are executed. Thereby, it is possible to arouse interest in the performance performed when a game ball enters the general winning hole, and it is possible to improve interest. In addition, each time a specific performance (Specific Performance A or Specific Performance C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50A that is a winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance is (including the winning history in any of the general winning openings 50D) is deleted.

In the 31st production form, by executing specific production A (variable result preview production) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole, Trying to improve your interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball enters the general winning hole is during the period when (2) the variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a target for the notice of variation results at this timing. do not. In this case, if no specific performance is executed, the frequency of execution of the specific performance will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of specific effects, specific effects A
The execution of is temporarily suspended (specific effect A is not executed at the timing when a prize is won in the general winning slot), and after that, specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display related to the special drawing game is satisfied. In this case, there is a risk that interest may be reduced due to the discrepancy between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance.

In the 31st production form, if a game ball wins in the general winning hole during the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period), instead of specific production A, variable display results in special pattern games or variable display results in general pattern games Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific performance of one type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is won in a general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

[32nd performance form]
In the 32nd performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the number of pending memories (for example, the number of first pending memories and the number of second pending memories) (2) If the total number of pending memories is 1 or more, specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of pending memories is 0. If it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period), specific production A (variation result preview production) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of pending memories is 0. , and in a period in which the variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), specific performance C (point awarding performance) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (1), when it is during the period (2), and ( Different types of specific effects are executed depending on the period 3). As a result, it is possible to arouse interest in the performance that is performed when a game ball enters the general winning slot.
It can improve your interest. In addition, each time a specific performance (specific performance A, specific performance B, or specific performance C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general prize that is a winning condition) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance is (including the winning history in any of the openings 50A to 4th general winning openings 50D) is deleted.

In the 32nd performance form, if the timing when a game ball enters the general prize opening is within the period (1), that is, when the target of the pre-read notice exists, then the specific performance B (pre-read notice If the period (2) is within the period (2), that is, if the target of the pre-read notice does not exist but the target of the variable result notice does exist, then the specific effect A (variable result notice effect) is executed.
is executed, and when it is the period (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-read notice nor the target of the variable result notice exists, specific effect C (point awarding effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting and executing a specific performance that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning slot, the enjoyment when a gaming ball enters the general winning slot can be appropriately improved. I try to let them do it. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific performance of one type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is won in a general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

In addition, in the 32nd performance mode, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing is determined. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is a subject for which the change result is to be announced, the pre-read preview effect is executed. That is, in the case where "both the subject of the variation result notice and the subject of the look-ahead notice exist", the look-ahead notice effect is executed with priority. Not limited to this form, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole, and when the variable display of special symbols is being executed at that timing, the variable result notice will be displayed. When the performance is executed and the variable display of special symbols is not executed at that timing, a pre-read preview performance may be executed. That is, when "both the subject of the variation result notice and the subject of the look-ahead notice exist", the variation result notice effect may be executed with priority.

[Modifications of the 27th performance form to 32nd performance form]
In the 27th performance mode to the 32nd performance mode, the execution ratio of the specific performance may be further varied depending on the state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. The "state" here is something that occurs as a result of a game on the gaming machine, and is a state based on the game on the gaming machine. The execution rate of the specific performance shall be varied depending on the classification of the state. For example, in the 27th production form, if the timing when a game ball enters the general prize opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, and the gaming state at that time is normal, the specific production will be performed at a rate of 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a probability variable state or a time saving state, a specific performance C is performed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole is outside the (2) symbol variation period, if the gaming state at that time is normal, specific performance C will be executed at a rate of 100%, If the gaming state at that time is a probability variable state or a time saving state, the specific performance C shall be executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further increase the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning hole.

Furthermore, in the 27th performance mode to the 32nd performance mode, the type of specific performance to be executed may be made different depending on the state when the game ball wins in the general winning hole. For example, in the 31st performance form, if the timing when a game ball enters the general prize opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, and the number of pending memories at that time is 0, then the specific performance A (variation result notice Performance) is executed, and if the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole is outside the (2) symbol variation period, if the number of pending memories at that time is 0, specific performance C (point awarding performance) is executed, If the number of pending memories at that time is 1 or more, specific performance B (pre-read preview performance) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further increase the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning hole.

In this way, the execution rate of a specific performance or the classification of the state for differentizing the type of a specific performance is (1) the gaming state is a normal state, or (2) the gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. or (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 0,
It is not limited to that. For example, the classification may be (1) a period after the reach state is established in a reach variation, or (2) a period before the reach state is established in a reach variation. Also, whether it is (1) a period in which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may also be a classification. Alternatively, the classification may be (1) a period in which a variable display without a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, good. Furthermore, both the execution rate of the specific performance and the type of the specific performance may be made different depending on the difference between these categories.

Similar to the other specific performances A and B that are executed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning slot, the execution or non-execution of the specific performance C (point awarding performance) is switched according to the display setting table in FIG. It looks like this. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is in the display setting (second position), and the display setting is made by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen in FIG. 5). It is only possible to do so if In this way, the intentions of the gaming parlor and the players can be reflected in whether or not to execute the specific effect C.

In addition, the specific performance C (point awarding performance) is not limited to the one where 1 point is awarded for each winning in the general prize opening, but 2 or 3 points are awarded for each winning in the general prize opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points awarded may differ depending on, for example, which general winning hole the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning hole, for example, The gaming state may be different depending on whether it is a normal state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, or the like.

In addition, in specific performance C (point awarding performance), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning in the general prize opening, for example, points are awarded according to winning in the starting prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded depending on the establishment of a ready-to-reach state.

[33rd performance form]
In FIG. 21, a specific performance D (gauge update performance) is illustrated as a performance in which the performance mode changes step by step according to the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole. As shown in FIG. 21, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is the image display device 5
This is an effect that allows the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 displayed on the screen to be changed in stages from a minimum of 0 levels to a maximum of 10 levels.

In the example of FIG. 21(a), in response to a game ball winning in any of the first general winning holes 50A to 50D, the filling area 2100a (black part in the gauge image) in the gauge image 2100 changes to 0 levels. (the white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (the black part occupies 1/10)
10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1)
. In addition, in the example of FIG. 21(b), in response to a game ball winning in any of the first general winning holes 50A to 50D, the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 changes from 0 to 3 levels (the black part occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 increases in accordance with the winning of game balls in the general winning hole and reaches 10 levels (the black part in the gauge image is 10
/10), a privilege will be given to the player. For example, similar to the above-mentioned specific performance C, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player can send the desired image or music to the image providing server or the music providing server. It can be downloaded from the providing server to an information terminal.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the 10th level, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 5.
A special music piece may be output as a GM. Alternatively, filling area 2100
A variable result preview performance may be executed to foretell the possibility that the display result of the variable display regarding the special figure game being executed at the timing when a reaches the 10th level will be a jackpot symbol,
At the timing when the filling area 2100a reaches the 10th stage, a look-ahead preview performance may be executed to foretell the possibility that the display result of the variable display regarding the reserved special symbol game will be a jackpot symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the 10th stage may be an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the general figure game, It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a common figure game. Moreover, the performance may be related to the gaming state, or may be the performance not related to the gaming state. Furthermore, a different effect may be performed each time the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches ten levels. Furthermore, different effects may be performed depending on the gaming state when the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the 10th level.

When the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 reaches the 10th level, a message to that effect is displayed on the image display device 5, audio is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., and then the gauge image 2100 The filling area 2100a in is reset to 0 level. After resetting, the gauge image 21 will be displayed again depending on the winning of the game ball in the general winning slot.
The filling area 2100a at 00 will increase.

In the 33rd performance form to 37th performance form shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first general prize opening 50A~
Every time a game ball enters any of the fourth general winning holes 50D, the level of the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 (hereinafter referred to as gauge level) is determined based on the random number for determining execution of a specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 124. ) is to be increased by one level, and if it is determined to be executed, the gauge level is increased by one level from the current level. That is, the first general prize opening 5
Every time a game ball enters one of the 0A to 4th general winning slots 50D, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one level.If you win the lottery, the gauge level Level increases by 1 level.

In the 33rd production form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period). ), the gauge level will increase by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) if it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level will increase by one level at a rate of 80%. The gauge level increases by one level. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special pattern game, and a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special pattern game and the decorative pattern on the image display device 5. By receiving the information from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed.

Note that, similarly to the specific performances A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D is provided. When the gauge level reaches level 10, we will notify you and give you special benefits (
For example, displaying a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or song, displaying a special character, outputting a special song, etc.), the winning history (at least the first general (including winning history of 10 or more times from the winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) is deleted.

In the 33rd presentation form, as well as the 34th presentation form, 36th presentation form, and 37th presentation form to be described later, (1) the general winning hole is opened during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period); (2) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on a game ball winning in the general prize opening is determined by (2) a game ball winning in the general prize opening during a period when variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period). is set lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on. During the period (1), since the performance corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variable result preview performance) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the player usually does not win the general prize. Players are more interested in these performances, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than in the winning status of game balls placed in their mouths. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in period (2), the effect corresponding to the special map game that would normally be of priority interest is not being executed, so by increasing the gauge level, the player I am in a situation where I am likely to become interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 33rd performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (symbol fluctuation (within the period), the gauge level will not be increased, and (2) if it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level will be increased. Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd performance form, (1) the gauge is calculated based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on a game ball entering the general winning slot during a period when variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). You may set it so that

[34th performance form]
In the 34th performance form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) a period in which variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period); ), the gauge level increases by one level 80% of the time. The timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is (2)
If the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) and the remaining time until the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display in the special symbol game is 10 seconds or more, 40 Gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of %. 1st general prize opening 50A~
The timing at which a game ball enters any of the fourth general winning holes 50D is within (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period), and as a result of the variable display in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation start command that specifies the start of variation in the special pattern game, and a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special pattern game and the decorative pattern on the image display device 5. By receiving the information from the game control microcomputer 100, it is possible to specify whether or not the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed is performed, and it is also possible to specify whether or not the variable display of special symbols is being executed (until the variable display of special symbols ends (the fixed special symbol is not displayed). It is possible to specify the remaining time (until it is stopped and displayed). For example, when a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation pattern specification command are received, the fluctuation time of the special symbol specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is set as the value of the fluctuation time timer, so that the performance control C
In the PU 120, the remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special pattern game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so in the performance control CPU 120, The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends (until the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notification to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 10 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 34th performance mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning the general winning hole when it is 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops. The rate is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed will be than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore,(
Even if the gauge level is increased during the period 3), it may actually spoil the interest of the specific performance. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so by increasing the gauge level, the player is likely to become interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 34th performance mode, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2), the gauge level may be increased. If it is possible and the period (3) is set, the gauge level may not be increased. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 34th performance form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball entering the general winning hole when it is 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole when less than 10 seconds are left until the symbols stop.

In addition, in the 34th performance mode, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the production control CPU 120 controls the first general winning slot 5.
If the timing at which a game ball wins in any of the 0A to 4th general winning openings 50D is during the period (2), and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols being executed becomes a jackpot symbol, The gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and at the same time, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. If the timing when the game ball wins is during the period (3),
If the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols being executed is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level will be increased at a rate of 30%, and if the display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level will be increased at a rate of 10%. You may also let them do so.

[35th performance form]
As described above, the specific performance B is exemplified as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the variable display result in the reserved special figure game. In the specific performance B shown in FIG. 9(b), does the starting winning determination result specifying command stored in the starting winning command storage area include a starting winning determining result specifying command that specifies "jackpot"? Based on whether or not the preview performance is performed, it is determined whether the performance mode of the pre-read preview performance is the first mode (voice performance only) or the second mode (voice performance and character performance). That is, in a look-ahead preview performance such as specific performance B, the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice (hereinafter referred to as target variation) is not notified to the player, and the player cannot grasp the target change. It has become difficult.

As a look-ahead preview performance, it is also possible to employ a performance that notifies target changes.
For example, as described above, the starting winning memory display area 5H includes a plurality of display areas whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game for which the starting conditions were met first based on the occurrence of a starting winning. is provided. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the starting winning determination result designation command, if the command designates "jackpot", the display part corresponding to the command is changed to the display part corresponding to the command designating "miss". It is possible to execute a pending change effect in which the part is displayed in a special manner (for example, gold) that is different from the body part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to a display part displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining number of variable displays to be executed before the target variation.

For example, when receiving a starting winning determination result designation command, if the command designates "jackpot", the display area corresponding to the command will be displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%,
The display area corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, if the command specifies "lost" when receiving the starting winning determination result designation command, 5
% of the display area corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode, and 95% of the time the display area corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. In this way, when a starting prize is won, if the display area corresponding to the retained memory caused by the starting winning is displayed in a special manner, the display area of the special aspect will be displayed every time the variable display game is executed (when the starting condition is met). When the start condition for the variable display game corresponding to the display part of the special mode (the variable display that is the target of the pre-read notice) is met, the display area of the special mode will move to the left. The display area disappears from the starting winning memory display area 5H. In such a mode, the pending change effect is executed during the period from the starting prize winning until the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning is satisfied.

That is, when the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied according to the order in which the start conditions of the variable display game are satisfied, the display part displayed in the special mode (
The normal mode display part that exists to the left of the display information corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is the target of the pending change production (display corresponding to the pending memory of the variable display that is not the target of the pending change production) The number of variable display games remaining until the variable display that is the target of the pending change performance is executed can be determined by the number of information).

Note that the timing for displaying the display part in a special manner is not limited to the time of starting winning. For example, the display area may be displayed in a normal mode when starting a prize, and after a predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to a special mode. The normal mode may be changed to the special mode at the timing when the timing shifts to the left. In these aspects, the period from the timing when the display part corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice changes from the normal state to the special state until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. This means that the pending change production is being executed for a period of time.

In the 35th presentation form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined when (1) the look-ahead preview presentation is not being executed and the target variation is also being executed. If it is a period in which there is no change (in a case where there is no display part of the special mode in the pending change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is when (2) the pre-read preview effect is being executed and the remaining number of variable displays until the target change is 2 or more. (If there are two or more special game games whose start conditions are met before the special game game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change performance)
, the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is when (3) the look-ahead preview effect is being executed and the remaining number of variable displays until the target change is 1. (If there is a special figure game 1 whose start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect), 2
Gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the execution period of the target change due to the end of the (4) advance notice performance (
During the period when the variable display is being executed based on the fulfillment of the special figure game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change production), the gauge level will increase by one level at a rate of 10%. do.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notification to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 10 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general prize opening when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change. The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general prize opening when the remaining number of variable displays is 1, (4) When the remaining number of variable displays until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) The rate is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game balls winning in the general winning slot during the period. During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the next target change than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Furthermore, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target fluctuation that is currently being executed than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), it may actually reduce the interest of the specific performance.
On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the target change is executed, so the player is likely to become interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 35th performance form, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2), the gauge level may be increased. If it is possible, and it is the period (3) or (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 35th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable display count until the target change It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of displays is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

In addition, in the 35th performance form, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is within the common period ((2), (3), (4)). ), the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in target fluctuation and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the production control CPU 120 controls the first general prize opening 50A.
~If the timing when a game ball enters any of the fourth general winning openings 50D is during the period (2), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a jackpot symbol, 70
The gauge level is increased at a rate of %, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the game is placed in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. When the timing when the ball wins is during the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, and the variable display result becomes a winning symbol. In this case, increase the gauge level by 20%,
If the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (4), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a jackpot symbol, 15 The gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%, and when the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th performance form]
In the 36th production form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) a period in which variable display of special symbols is not performed (outside the symbol fluctuation period); ), the gauge level increases by one level 80% of the time. Also, the first
The timing when a game ball enters any of the general winning holes 50A to 4th general winning hole 50D is
(2) If it is a period in which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 40%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during a period in which (3) variable display accompanied by reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 20%, and (4) if it is a period in which a variable display with reach effect (reach variation) is being executed, and if the reach state is reached. In the period after the establishment, the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%.

Furthermore, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notifications to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of two-dimensional codes for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 10 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 36th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball entering the general winning hole before the reach state is established in (3) reach variation is the same as the rate at which the gauge level increases after the reach state is established in (4) reach variation. The rate is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball hitting the winning slot. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed since the ready-to-win state is established than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-win state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than in the period (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 36th performance mode, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (3), the gauge level may be increased. If it is possible, and it is the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 36th performance form, the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period in which (3) reach variation is being executed and before the reach state is established is (4) ) The rate may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th performance form]
In the 37th presentation form shown in FIG. 23, the rate at which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning holes wins. If the timing when a game ball wins in either the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C is (1) during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period), , the gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is (1) during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period) , the gauge level increases by 1 level at a rate of 20%.

In addition, if the timing when a game ball wins in either the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C is during a period (2) during which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the first general prize opening 5
If the timing when a game ball wins in either 0A or the 4th general winning hole 50D is during the period when (2) the variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), the percentage is 80%. The gauge level increases by one level.

In addition, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notification to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 10 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases is different between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and furthermore, the rate at which the gauge level increases is different between the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole. The rate at which the gauge level increases is different between the case where the game ball wins in 50C and the case where the game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases differs depending on the general prize opening in which the game ball has won, the player becomes interested in which general prize opening the game ball has won, which increases interest. be able to.

For example, rather than winning a game ball to the second general winning hole 50B and third general winning hole 50C, which are provided near the center of the gaming area 10, the first general winning hole provided closer to the edge of the gaming area 10 If it is difficult to enter the game ball into the opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball enters the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. By making the rate higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the second general winning hole 50B and the third general winning hole 50C, the interest in winning a prize in the general winning hole, which is more difficult to win, can be increased. It is better to increase it.

In addition, in the 37th performance mode, when the game ball wins in the first general prize opening or the fourth general prize opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the game ball is placed in the second general prize opening or the third general prize opening. If the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Also,
Contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is 3
It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the general winning hole 50C.

[38th performance form]
In the 38th performance form to the 42nd performance form shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, it is not determined whether or not the specific performance is to be executed based on the random number for determining execution of the specific performance extracted from the random number circuit 124. Furthermore, in the 38th performance mode to the 42nd performance mode, the gauge level that increases in response to one winning in the general winning hole is not limited to one level. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the gauge level may be increased by three levels in response to one win in the general winning hole.

In the 38th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period); ), the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1), and (2) if it is a period in which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level increases by three levels. Increases (gauge +3).

In addition, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notification to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 4 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 38th presentation form, as well as the 39th presentation form, 41st presentation form, and 42nd presentation form to be described later, (1) the general winning hole is opened during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period); The number of gauge level stages that increases based on the game ball winning in (2) the game ball winning in the general prize opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) is set to be less than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on. During the period (1), since the performance corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variable result preview performance) is being executed by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the player usually does not win the general prize. Players are more interested in these performances, including the variable display of decorative symbols, than in the winning status of game balls placed in their mouths. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased by a large amount during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in period (2), because the effect corresponding to the special map game that would normally be of priority interest is not being executed, the gauge level is increased by a large amount, and the player are in a situation where they are likely to be interested in this. Therefore,
By increasing the gauge level more than in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 38th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (symbol fluctuation (within the period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%), and (2) the period when the variable display of special symbols is not executed ( (outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels may be set to, for example, 80% (the rate at which it is changed by only one level is 20%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 38th production form, (1) the gauge is determined based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The number of stages at which the level increases is greater than (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball entering the general winning slot during the period when variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). You may also set it so that it increases.

Further, it is assumed that there are cases in which benefits of different values are provided as benefits that are provided when the gauge level reaches the 10th level. For example, when the gauge level reaches level 10, there are cases where a two-dimensional code that allows downloading only images is displayed, and cases where a two-dimensional code that allows downloading images and music is displayed. At this time, the benefit value given to the latter is greater than the former. The number of stages by which the gauge level increases may indicate the amount of benefit value that will be given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages. For example, if the timing at which a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is (1) during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the pattern variation period); If the benefit value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%), and if the benefit value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more levels. For example, if the rate of increase is 40% (the rate of changing by one step is 60%), (2) If the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) and the bonus value is small For example, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is 50% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 50%), and if the benefit value is large, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is, for example, 80%. (The ratio of changing only one step may be 20%).

[39th performance form]
In the 39th performance mode, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) a period in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period); ), the gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge +3). The timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is (2)
During the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period), and when the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the gauge Level increases by 2 levels (gauge +2). 1st general prize opening 50A~
The timing at which a game ball enters any of the fourth general winning holes 50D is within (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period), and as a result of the variable display in the special symbol game. When the remaining time until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1).

Furthermore, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notifications to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of two-dimensional codes for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific production D (includes the winning history of at least 4 times from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 39th production form, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole when it is 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds before the symbol stops. The number of gauge levels is set higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball enters the general winning hole. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in how the fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed will be than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased by a large amount during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so by increasing the gauge level by a large amount, the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 39th performance mode, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2), the gauge level will be increased by two or more levels. For example, if the rate of change is 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), (
In the case of period 3), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to 20% (
The ratio of changing only one step may be 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball entering the general winning hole when it is 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is ( 3) The gauge level may be set to be smaller than the number of stages to which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball enters the general winning hole when it is less than 10 seconds before the symbols stop.

In addition, in the 39th presentation form, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is within a common period (either (2) or (3)). In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the production control CPU 120 controls the first general winning slot 5.
If the timing at which a game ball wins in any of the 0A to 4th general winning openings 50D is during the period (2), and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols being executed becomes a jackpot symbol, The gauge level is increased by 3 levels, and when the displayed result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 levels, while the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. However, in the case of period (3), if the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols being executed is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is increased by two levels, and if the display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased by two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one level.

[40th performance form]
In the 40th presentation form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined when (1) the look-ahead preview presentation is not being executed and the target variation is not being executed. If it is a period in which no special mode is displayed (in the pending change performance, there is no display part of the special mode, and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level increases by four levels (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is when (2) the pre-read preview effect is being executed and the remaining number of variable displays until the target change is 2 or more. (If there are two or more special game games whose start conditions are met before the special game game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change performance)
, the gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is when (3) the look-ahead preview effect is being executed and the remaining number of variable displays until the target change is 1. (If there is a special game whose start condition is met before the special game that corresponds to the display part of the special mode in the pending change production), the gauge level will increase by two levels. (Gauge +2).

In addition, if the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the execution period of the target change due to the end of the (4) advance notice performance (
During the period in which the variable display is being executed based on the fulfillment of the special figure game start condition corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change production), the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1) .

In addition, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notification to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least 3 times in the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) will be deleted.

In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increases based on the game ball winning in the general prize opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is (3)
When the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 1, the number of increases in the gauge level based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole, (4) When the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 0 ( The number of gauge level stages is set to be larger than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole during the execution period of target variation). During the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the next target change than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Furthermore, during the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target fluctuation that is currently being executed than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased by a large amount during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the target change is executed, so by increasing the gauge level by a large amount, the player is likely to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 40th performance mode, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (2), the gauge level will be increased by two or more levels. For example, if the ratio of changing is 80% (the ratio of changing only one step is 20%), and (3
) (4), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to 20, for example.
% (the ratio of changing only one step is 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 40th performance form, when (2) the number of variable displays remaining until the target change is 2 or more, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases is (3) the number of stages remaining until the target change The number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of variable display times is 1 may be set to be smaller than (4) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the target variation execution period.

In addition, in the 40th performance mode, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is within the common period ((2), (3), (4)). ), the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in target fluctuation and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the production control CPU 120 controls the first general prize opening 50A.
~If the timing when a game ball wins in any of the 4th general winning openings 50D is during the period (2), if the variable display result in target fluctuation becomes a jackpot symbol, the gauge level will be increased by 4 levels. , If the variable display result is a missed symbol, set the gauge level to 3.
If the timing of the game ball winning in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (3), the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes the jackpot symbol. In this case, the gauge level is increased by 3 levels, and when the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 levels, and the game ball is placed in any of the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D. If the winning timing is during the period (4), and the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set to 2.
The gauge level may be increased by one step, and when the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st performance form]
In the 41st production form, the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is determined by (1) a period in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period); ), the gauge level increases by 4 levels (gauge +4). Also, the first
The timing when a game ball enters any of the general winning holes 50A to 4th general winning hole 50D is
(2) If it is a period in which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach variation) is being performed, the gauge level increases by three levels (gauge +3).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during a period in which (3) variable display accompanied by reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level increases by two levels (gauge +3), and (4) it is a period in which a variable display accompanied by the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed, and the reach state is established. If it is a subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1).

Furthermore, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notifications to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of two-dimensional codes for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least three or more winnings from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) will be deleted.

In the 41st production mode, the number of gauge level stages that increases based on the game ball winning the general winning hole before the reach state is established in (3) reach variation is the same as the number of stages of the gauge level that increases after the reach state is established in (4) reach variation. The number of gauge levels is set to be larger than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed since the ready-to-win state is established than in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning hole. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased by a large amount during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be diminished. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the ready-to-win state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level by a large amount. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

In addition, in the 41st performance mode, if the timing when a game ball wins in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D is during the period (3), the gauge level will be increased by two or more levels. For example, let the ratio of change be 80% (the ratio of only one step change is 20%), and (4
), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to 20% (1
The rate at which only the steps are changed may be 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 41st performance form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the period when the reach variation is being executed and before the reach state is established is ( 4) The gauge level may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd performance form]
In the 42nd performance form shown in FIG. 25, the number of stages in which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning holes wins. 2nd general prize opening 50B
If the timing at which a game ball enters any of the third general winning openings 50C is during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 1.
Increases the level (gauge +1). On the other hand, if the timing at which a game ball wins in either the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is (1) during the period in which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within the pattern variation period) , the gauge level increases by 2 levels (gauge +2)
.

In addition, if the timing when a game ball wins in either the second general winning hole 50B or the third general winning hole 50C is during a period (2) during which variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period). , the gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, the first general prize opening 5
If the timing when a game ball wins in either 0A or the 4th general winning hole 50D is during the period (2) when variable display of special symbols is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period), the gauge level is 4. Increases by stage (gauge +4).

Furthermore, when the gauge level reaches level 10, notifications to that effect and special benefits will be given (for example, display of two-dimensional codes for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, etc.)
output of special music, etc.), the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance D (includes the winning history of at least three or more winnings from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) will be deleted.

In the 42nd production form, the number of increasing gauge levels is different between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and furthermore, the number of increasing gauge levels is different between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period. The number of increasing gauge levels is different depending on when a game ball enters the opening 50C and when a gaming ball enters the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening 50D. Since the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased differs depending on the general prize opening in which the game ball has won, the player is also interested in which general prize opening the game ball has won, improving interest. can be done.

For example, rather than winning a game ball to the second general winning hole 50B and third general winning hole 50C, which are provided closer to the center of the gaming area 10, the first general winning hole provided closer to the edge of the gaming area 10 If it is difficult to enter the game ball into the opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D, the gauge level increases when the gaming ball enters the first general winning opening 50A and the fourth general winning opening 50D. By making the number larger than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the second general winning hole 50B and the third general winning hole 50C, it is possible to prevent winnings in the general winning hole where it is more difficult to win. It's good to try to increase interest.

In addition, in the 42nd performance mode, when a game ball enters the first general winning hole or the fourth general winning hole, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to 80%, for example (the rate at which only one level is changed is 20%). %), and when a game ball enters the second general winning hole or the third general winning hole, the percentage of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the percentage of changing only one step is 80%). Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd performance form, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the first general winning hole 50A or the fourth general winning hole 50D is the second general winning hole. The gauge level may be set to be smaller than the number of stages to which the gauge level increases when a game ball enters the winning hole 50B or the third general winning opening 50C.

[Variations of the 33rd performance form to 42nd performance form]
Determine the criteria for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level in the 33rd to 37th performance forms, and the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th to 42nd performance forms. The classification that serves as the standard for this purpose is not limited to the above example.
For example, the classification for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the classification for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are: (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state; (2) whether the gaming state is the normal state; The classification may be based on whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Alternatively, the classification may be (1) whether the number of pending memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of pending memories is 0. Alternatively, the classification may be (1) a period in which a variable display without a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed. . moreover,
The classification may be (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect.

Although the gauge image 2100 is displayed even when the filling area 2100a is at the minimum level of 0, conditions for displaying the gauge image 2100 may be set. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state, the gauge image 2100 is displayed and an effect that increases the gauge level can be executed, but when the gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state, the gauge image 2100 is not displayed (the gauge The effect that increases the level may not be executed).

The display of the gauge image 2100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are performed during a period when a predetermined effect is being performed, and may not be performed during a period when the predetermined effect is not being performed. For example, the gauge image 2100 is displayed only during a period when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 is a predetermined background image (a predetermined performance stage period) when a game ball enters the general winning slot. Alternatively, the gauge level may be increased. In addition, only during the period when the display area in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special aspect), a game ball enters the general winning hole. When this occurs, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 is an RTC (not shown) provided on the production control board 12.
When executing a simultaneous performance (simultaneously executed at a predetermined time on gaming machines of the same model) at the timing when the real-time clock) reaches a predetermined time, general winning slots will be opened during the execution period of the simultaneous performance. When a game ball wins, the gauge image 2100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Moreover, when increasing the gauge level, a predetermined performance sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, different performance sounds may be output depending on the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when increasing the gauge level by three stages,
The volume of the performance sound may be increased compared to the case where the gauge level is increased by one level.

Further, it is preferable to output a sound effect that increases the gauge level at a different volume from the sound effect related to the special figure game and the effect sound related to the normal figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the regular figure game, but lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the performance sound that increases the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the performance sound related to the special figure game, but lower than the volume of the error sound that notifies a gaming machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be higher than the volume in the variable probability state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effects that change the appearance in stages according to the winnings in the general winning slot are not limited to specific effects such as special effects D that change the gauge level, but the appearance of the displayed character changes in stages. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character expands, or the items owned by the character change), and the number of characters that the player can select may increase in stages. Also good. Furthermore, the mode and position of the movable accessory may change in stages, and the color of the emitted light from the game effect lamp 9 may change in stages. Furthermore, the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R may change in stages.

Specific performance D (gauge update performance), like other specific performances A to C that are executed based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening, is switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 4. It looks like this. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is in the display setting (second position), and the display setting is made by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen in FIG. 5). It is only possible to do so if In this way, the intentions of the gaming parlor and the players can be reflected in whether or not to execute the specific effect D.

[43rd performance form]
The above-mentioned specific performances A to D are all performances that are executed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole, but the specific performance is executed when the game ball does not enter the general winning hole. You can also do it. For example, if the game ball does not win in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D during the 10-minute game period, the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 26, An image imitating the shape of the general prize opening and the message "No general prizes available.
It is possible to execute a specific effect E that displays a notification image 2200 etc. including the characters ``'' on the image display device 5.

In this way, a specific performance is not limited to a performance that is performed based on a game ball winning in the general winning slot, but also a performance that is performed based on the fact that a game ball does not win in the general winning slot (general winning slot). It may also be a production that suggests difficulty in winning the prize. That is, the specific performance may be any performance as long as it is a performance related to the game event of winning a game ball into the general winning hole (a performance executed in response to the occurrence of a game event or the non-occurrence of a game event).

In the 43rd performance mode shown in FIG. 27, the performance control CPU 120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball does not win in the general winning opening. CP for production control
U120 receives a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, When receiving either the command or the big winning opening prize command, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. If a general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed since the timer was set), the value of the non-winning determination timer is set to 10 minutes again, and the timer is set to 10 minutes. Start the timer.

On the other hand, if the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning opening designation command before the non-winning determination timer times out, as shown in FIG.
A specific effect E for displaying the notification image 2200 on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, specific production E
When executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is restarted. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 2200) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning hole.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 is configured such that the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed, and the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command are sent once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and updating of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the value of the timer is prevented from being updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of specific effect E) due to the non-winning determining timer timing out is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E will not be executed during the period when no games are being played (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited)
. In addition, when the update of the non-winning determination timer is not suspended, the performance control CPU 1
20 is capable of processing when the non-winning determination timer times out (specifically, execution of specific performance E in response to detection of time-out when the timer value becomes 0). Then, in a state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, if the production control CPU 120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command, , resumes updating the non-winning determination timer.

In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during the period when the player is playing the game (the end of the game has not been determined). When the number of winnings in the winning opening becomes 0, a timeout occurs (the performance control CPU 120 detects the timeout). As a result, when the player is playing a game, if no prize is won in the general prize opening for 10 minutes, the specific effect E is executed.

In addition, in the above performance mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 10. For example, a firing detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the gaming area 10, and it is determined whether the player is playing the game depending on whether the firing detection sensor detects the game ball or not. You can also do it. Furthermore, it may be determined whether the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the batting ball operation handle 63 is being operated (whether or not the firing motor included in the batting ball firing device is operating). good.

In this way, even though the player is playing the game, if no prize is won in the general prize opening during the predetermined period (10 minutes of playing period), the specific performance E is executed. To notify that no prize has been won in the general prize opening. By this notification, the player can understand that no winnings have been made to the general winning slot, and can use this information as a reference when playing a game (for example, as a basis for determining machine selection). In addition, in a gaming hall, by understanding the pachinko game machine 1 where the specific performance E is executed (or where the specific performance E is executed with high frequency), game nails can be set so that the frequency of winnings in the general prize opening will be higher. This makes it possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

In addition, if there is no winning in the general winning slot even though the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed, but because the player is not playing the game, If there is no winning in the general winning slot, the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (
By preventing the performance control CPU 120 from executing processing based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer), execution of the specific performance E is restricted.

In addition, even if it is determined that no winning has occurred in the general winning hole because the player is not playing a game, the specific effect E may be executed, and in this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that no winning has occurred in the general winning hole even though the player is playing the game.

[44th performance form]
The specific performance E is not limited to one that notifies that no prizes were won in the general prize opening within a predetermined period (the number of prizes won in the general prize opening was less than 1), It may be possible to specify that the number of winnings in the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. Fourth
In the 4 presentation mode, the presentation control CPU 120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the winning number of game balls that enter the general winning hole in a predetermined period. Production control CPU120
is a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and When any command of the big winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer and the timer is started. At this time, RAM
The value of the winning number counter area formed at 122 is set to 0. Then, each time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer setting), 1 is added to the value of the winning winning number counter area.

Then, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the performance control CPU 120 controls the specific performance E within a predetermined period. to notify that the number of prizes won is less than a predetermined number, and/or to notify the number of prizes won within a predetermined period. For example, the message "The number of general prizes in 30 minutes is less than 3." and/or "The number of general prizes in 30 minutes is only 1."
This message is displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that when the specific performance E is executed, the value of the winning number determination timer is set to 30 minutes again, and the timer is restarted. The specific performance E continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time since the specific performance E was started. On the other hand, if the value of the number of winnings counter area at the timing when the number of winnings determination timer times out is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, the number of winnings determining timer is activated without executing the specific performance E. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 is configured such that the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed, and the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command are sent once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If no message is received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and updating of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the value of the timer is prevented from being updated). When the update of the number of winnings determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the timeout of the number of winnings determining timer is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E will not be executed during the period when no games are being played (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited)
. In addition, when the update of the winning number judgment timer is not paused, the performance control CPU 1
20 is capable of processing when the winning number determination timer times out (specifically, execution of the specific performance E in response to detection of time-out when the timer value becomes 0). Then, when the production control CPU 120 receives any one of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening command while the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped. , resumes updating the winning number determination timer.

In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the end of the game has not been determined), and 30 minutes have elapsed during the period in which the player is playing the game. When this occurs, a timeout occurs (the timeout is detected by the performance control CPU 120). At the time of the timeout, the specific performance E is executed only if the number of wins in the general winning hole during the 30-minute game period is less than a predetermined number.

In addition, in the above performance mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 10. For example, a firing detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance of the gaming area 10, and it is determined whether the player is playing the game depending on whether the firing detection sensor detects the game ball or not. You can also do it. Furthermore, it may be determined whether the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the batting ball operation handle 63 is being operated (whether or not the firing motor included in the batting ball firing device is operating). good.

In this way, even though the player is playing the game, if the number of wins in the general winning slot during the predetermined period (30 minutes of playing period) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. hand,
It is reported that the number of prizes won in the general prize opening in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. By this notification, the player can understand that the frequency of winnings in the general winning slot is low, and can use this information as a reference when playing a game (for example, as a basis for deciding on machine selection). In addition, at the gaming hall, specific production E
By understanding the pachinko game machine 1 in which the specific effect E is executed (or in which the specific performance E is executed frequently), it is possible to take measures such as maintenance of the game nails so that the frequency of winnings in the general winning hole becomes higher. It becomes possible.

In addition, even though the player is playing a game, if the number of wins in the general winning slot in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, specific effect E will be executed, but the player will not be able to play the game. If the number of prizes entered into the general prize opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number due to the fact that ), the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

Note that the specific performance E may also be executed when it is determined that the number of prizes won in the general prize opening during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number due to the player not playing a game. In this case, the specific performance will be awarded at a lower rate than in the case where it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning slots during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game. E may be executed.

[45th performance form]
In the 43rd performance form and the 44th performance form, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the number of wins in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific effect E is executed regardless of the situation, the execution rate of the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 45th presentation form, the timing (
If the gaming state at the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out or the timing when the number of winnings determining timer times out is (1) normal state, execute specific performance E, and (2) in variable probability state or short time state. In some cases, the specific effect E is not executed.

In addition, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning slot within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the number of winnings determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the case of a variable probability state or a time saving condition, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. It's okay. In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at different rates depending on the gaming state when it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning hole within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th performance form]
In the 43rd performance form and the 44th performance form, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the number of wins in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Although the specific performance E is executed in a common manner regardless of the situation, the performance mode of the specific performance E may be made to differ depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning slot within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (timing when the non-win determination timer times out, timing when the number of wins determination timer times out) (1) When the state is normal, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output), and (2) when the state is variable probability or time saving state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode. It is designed to be executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is to notify the image display device 5 of the fact that the number of winnings in the general winning slot in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number, as well as to notify that fact. This is a mode in which notification is performed by audio output in which audio is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the second mode of specific effect E is a mode in which notification is performed only by image display and not by audio output.

In addition, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning slot within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, timing when the number of winnings determination timer times out) is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), (2)
In the case of a variable probability state or a time saving state, the specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%), for example. In this way, it is preferable to perform different types of specific effects E depending on the gaming state when it is determined that the number of wins in the general winning hole within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd performance form to 46th performance form]
The specific performance E executed in the 43rd performance form to the 46th performance form is the same as the other specific performances A to D that are performed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole, in the display setting table of FIG. 4. Execution or non-execution can be switched according to the following. Specifically, the display changeover switch 32 is in the display setting (second position), and the display setting is made by the player's operation (setting operation using the operation button 30 on the setting screen in FIG. 5). It is only possible to do so if In this way, the intentions of the gaming parlor and the players can be reflected in whether or not to execute the specific effect E.

For example, if the game hall side does not want the specific effect E to be executed, by switching the display changeover switch 32 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E will not be executed regardless of the player settings. . With this configuration, the intentions of the gaming hall side are prioritized and reflected in whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether to notify the difficulty of winning in the general winning slot. can be done.

In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd presentation form, the value of the winning number judgment timer and the value of the winning number counter area in the 44th presentation form, which are stored in the RAM 122, are both electronically stored. If the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the data is not backed up during a power outage and is deleted accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd performance mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th performance mode are both invalid states. The value of the timer is not referenced until the predetermined time is set by the performance control CPU 120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th performance mode becomes 0 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is resumed, addition starts again from 0. become. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control burden of having to provide backup means in case of power outage.

As in the 45th performance form and the 46th performance form, the execution rate of the specific performance E or the performance mode of the specific performance E is determined by (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2)
) The gaming state is not limited to whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. For example, the classification may be (1) whether the number of pending memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of pending memories is 0. Also,(
The period may be 1) a period after a reach state is established in a reach variation, or (2) a period before a reach state is established in a reach variation. Also, whether it is (1) a period in which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may also be a classification. In addition, (1) whether it is a period in which a variable display without pseudo continuous effects is being executed; (2)
The classification may be based on whether it is a period in which a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect is being executed.
Furthermore, (1) whether it is before the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, or (2)
The classification may be based on whether it is after the execution of a pseudo continuous effect in a variable display accompanied by a pseudo continuous effect. Furthermore, both the execution rate of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be made to differ depending on the difference between these categories.

Note that the specific performance E executed in the 43rd performance form to the 46th performance form is performed when the number of winnings in the general winning hole during a predetermined gaming period is less than a predetermined number. Not only in this form, but only in a specific general winning hole among the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D, and the number of wins in the specific general winning hole in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when there are fewer cases. For example, the first general prize opening 50A
Counting the number of wins in the general winning hole during a predetermined gaming period, targeting only the second general winning hole 50B and the third general winning hole 50C, which have a higher winning frequency of game balls than the fourth general winning hole 50D, The specific performance E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is less than a predetermined number.

In addition, in the 43rd performance form to 46th performance form, within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes)
If the number of prizes entered into the general prize opening is less than a predetermined number within a minute), specific performance E will be executed, but the period for determining the number of prizes entered into the general prize opening is limited to this. I can't do it. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, for example, it may be a period in which the variable display regarding the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). Further, the period may be a period in which the gaming state is controlled to a predetermined state, for example, a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (a period in which the game is played with left-handed players), a variable probability state, or a time saving state. It may also be a period in which the game is controlled by the state (a period in which the game is played with right-handed players).

Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls in the general winning hole in a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number.

(a) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning hole for a predetermined number of balls shot into the gaming area 10 is less than a predetermined number. While the firing motor included in the ball firing device is being driven, approximately 100 game balls are fired into the game area 10 in one minute. Therefore, for example, if the number of winnings in the general winning slot for 1000 balls hit (corresponding to a 10-minute playing period) is less than a predetermined number, the specific effect E may be executed. . In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning hole to the number of balls fired into the gaming area 10 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. It's okay.

In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning hole to the number of balls fired into the gaming area 10 is
Different types of specific effects may be performed depending on whether the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than a predetermined ratio. For example, if the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning hole to the number of balls fired into the gaming area 10 is low, character A will appear and the frequency of winnings to the general winning hole will be low. The character B
appears to notify that the frequency of winnings to the general winning hole is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning hole to the number of balls fired into the gaming area 10 is lower than the medium rate. If the percentage is high, the character C may appear to notify that the frequency of winnings in the general winning hole is at a high level.

(b) It may be determined whether the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning slot during a predetermined period is less than a predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general prize opening during a 30-minute playing period. If the number of prizes is less than 30 (corresponding to three winnings), the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, the predetermined number of balls fired into the game area 10 (
For example, it may be determined whether the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general prize opening (for example, 1,000 shots) is less than a predetermined number, and the number of prize balls fired into the gaming area 10 may be determined. The ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general prize opening to the number of balls struck is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, specific effect E is executed. It's okay. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole to the number of balls fired into the game area 10 is lower than a predetermined ratio, and when the ratio is higher than a predetermined ratio. It is also possible to perform specific effects in different ways depending on the case.

In this way, it may be determined whether the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole is less than a predetermined number. In addition, even in the case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general winning hole into which the game ball is won, such a form can be applied.

(c) It may be determined whether the number of wins in the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings in the starting winning opening (for example, 100), The ratio of the number of wins in the general winning hole to the number of wins in the starting winning hole may be calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole is less than the predetermined number for the predetermined number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the starting winning hole (for example, 10,000). It may also be determined whether the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole is smaller than the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the starting winning hole. The ratio of the numbers may be calculated, and when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio, the specific performance E may be executed. In addition, if the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole to the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the starting winning hole is lower than the predetermined ratio. Different types of specific effects may be performed depending on whether the ratio is greater than or equal to a predetermined ratio.

In addition, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during a predetermined period when the gaming state is normal (the number of prize balls paid out according to winnings in the starting prize opening and the number of prize balls paid out according to winnings in the general winning opening) Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to winnings in the general winning hole to the total number of prize balls paid out in , a specific effect E may be executed. Further, specific effects may be performed in different ways depending on the ratio.

(d) It may be determined whether or not the number of wins in the general winning slot is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine, and to execute the specific performance E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the gaming media used in the gaming machine,
Different predetermined numbers (for example, 2 times for 4 yen, 8 times for 1 yen, etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times for 4 yen/1000 yen, 8 times/1000 for 1 yen) yen, etc.) will be applied. In addition, different types of specific performances are performed depending on whether the ratio of the number of wins to the general winning slot to the amount consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than a predetermined ratio. You may also do this.

[47th performance form]
In the 47th production form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening, and within the period in which the character is displayed, the character is displayed in the first starting winning opening. Valid starting prize of the game ball (i.e. winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole when the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first starting winning hole is less than the upper limit value) and gaming to the second starting winning hole Based on the occurrence of any of the valid starting winnings of the ball (i.e., winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) , In the starting winnings memory display area 5H, a holding change effect is executed to change the display part corresponding to the held variable display game including the variable display game based on the valid starting winning that has occurred from the normal mode to the special mode. .

In addition, based on the occurrence of an effective start winning, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode. It is also possible to perform a change effect. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the displayed character performs an action such as raising a staff, and the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective starting winning occurs. may be displayed in a special mode instead of in a normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the pending information, there is pending information in a special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied).

Here, in the 47th performance form, and the 48th performance form and 49th performance form described later,
Every time a game ball enters any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole, the random number circuit 1
A random number for character determination is extracted from 24. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not to make a character appear, and if a character is to appear, which of characters A to C is to be made to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. 28. Determine according to the indicated percentage.

Note that the extraction of the random number for character determination by the performance control CPU 120 may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting random numbers for character determination on the condition that the jackpot game state is not controlled, it is possible to restrict characters from appearing during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled. . Further, by not extracting the random number for character determination after the ready-to-reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, it is also possible to prevent the character from appearing after the ready-to-reach state is established.

In the example of FIG. 28, when the production control CPU 120 receives a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the first general winning hole 50A, it decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 10%, It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when receiving a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the second general winning hole 50B, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 50%, and character A will appear at a rate of 35%. 10
It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of %, and it is decided to make character C appear at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the third general winning hole 50C, it decides not to make any character appear at a rate of 90%, and at a rate of 10%. It is decided to make character C appear in proportion. In addition, when receiving a general winning hole designation command that specifies winning to the 4th general winning hole 50D, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 75%, and character C will appear at a rate of 25%. I decided to let him do it.

That is, in this example, when a game ball wins either the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B provided in the left gaming area 10A, the third general winning hole 50B provided in the right gaming area 10B wins. Characters will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D. The player fires a game ball into the left gaming area 10A when the gaming state is in the normal state, and fires a game ball into the right gaming area 10B when the gaming state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or time-saving state.

In the 47th to 49th performance forms, a specific performance (specific performance F (pending change performance) , specific performance G (variable result preview performance using dialogue)), in these performance forms, when the gaming state is in the normal state, the performance is higher than when the gaming state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state. A specific performance can be executed based on the ratio.

In this way, the normal state is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the player's interest in the variable display of the game, for example, the special figure game, is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, the interest is increased.
On the other hand, the variable probability state and time saving state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's interest in the variable display of the game, for example, the special figure game, is high, so the frequency of appearance of characters and the frequency of execution of specific effects If the value remains high, it may even lead to a loss of interest. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the frequency of appearance of characters and the frequency of execution of specific effects are set low.

Note that the rate at which characters appear is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28, and even if game balls win in the same general winning hole, the rate at which characters appear may vary depending on the gaming state. If a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B, the character will appear at a rate of 50%, but if a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B in the probability variable state and time saving state, the character will appear at a rate of 10%. The characters may appear at a ratio of .

Further, the character may appear only in the normal state, and may not appear in the variable probability state or time saving state. In this way, "making the performance execution ratio in one state different from the performance execution ratio in the other state" includes making the performance possible only in one state, but not performing the performance in the other state. shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 28, the appearance ratio of characters in the variable probability state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 28, when a game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B. There is. In addition, if a game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50D, the third general winning hole 50D
Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A, the first general prize opening 5
If a game ball enters the second general winning hole 50B more frequently than 0A, and a game ball is launched into the right gaming area 10B, the game ball enters the third general winning hole 50C rather than the fourth general winning hole 50D. The frequency of balls winning is high. That is, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning hole where it is easy to win a game ball. In addition, on the contrary, when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize opening where it is easy for a game ball to win, the character will be won at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a prize in a general prize opening where it is difficult to win a game ball. It may be made to appear.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 28, the characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A and the second general winning hole 50B, which have a high frequency of winning game balls in the normal state, are: Characters A to C may be displayed if the game ball wins in the third general winning hole 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D, which have a high frequency of winning in the variable probability state and time saving state. The only character with is character C. In the variable probability state and time saving state, which are gaming states in which the interest in the game is higher than in the normal state, a situation occurs in which ``a character appears but the character display period elapses without a predetermined condition being met'', which increases the interest in the game. Therefore, only character C, which has the longest display period, is allowed to be displayed.

Note that the example shown in FIG. 28 is not limited to this, and even if game balls win in the same general winning hole, the characters that appear may differ depending on the gaming state. For example, the characters that appear in the normal state If a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B, there is a possibility that characters A to C will be displayed, but if a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B in the variable probability state or time saving state, the characters It may also be possible to allow only C to be displayed. Also, Figure 2
Contrary to the example shown in 8, the number of characters that may be displayed in the variable probability state and the normal state may be greater than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. .

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the display period of each character displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. It is assumed that all of the characters A to C are displayed on the image display device 5 immediately at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, by displaying the character immediately after the occurrence of a winning in the general winning opening, the player can easily understand that a winning has occurred in the general winning opening.

When character A is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) If the predetermined condition is not satisfied (valid start winning, reach state established) within 1 minute from the start of display, the character A is displayed from the start of display. Character A is deleted from the screen when one minute has elapsed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (pending change effect)) ), the specific performance G (variation result preview performance)) is completed, the character A is deleted from the screen.

The predetermined conditions in (1) are conditions related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (including conditions related to the effects performed as the game progresses). In addition, even if a valid starting winning occurs, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid starting winning becomes 1, the starting condition is met for that variable display game. Immediately after this, the start condition is satisfied (the suspension information is deleted), so it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the suspension change performance by the displayed character. Therefore, if the number of pending variable display games after valid start winnings is less than a predetermined number (1 in this example), the pending change effect is not executed, and the number of pending variable display games after valid start winnings is the predetermined number. (1 in this example), a pending change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may also be deleted when the state shifts to a jackpot game state or when the above-described performance control CPU 120 determines that the game is over. Further, it is assumed that the characters that were displayed on the image display device 5 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 was stopped are not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. In other words, it is assumed that no backup processing is performed to display the character displayed before the power cut off on the image display device 5 again after the power supply is resumed.

Note that execution of the specific effect F (reserved change effect) means that the character that appears performs a predetermined action (i.e., the appearance of the displayed object changes), This includes both cases in which the aspect of the corresponding display portion changes and cases in which it does not change. Furthermore, the timing at which the specific performance F (suspended change performance) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action, and specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, character A is used, but character B may appear or character C may appear in specific performance F (suspended change performance).The flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001 possesses each suspended memory. This is the timing at which an action performance in which the corresponding display area is covered has been performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action performance period has elapsed).

Furthermore, the fact that the specific effect G (variation result preview effect) is executed means that the character 3100 (character B in this example) that has appeared (character B in this example) is executed as shown in FIGS. 32(f) and (g). (Fluctuation result preview performance) When character A appears or character C
may appear) utters a predetermined line, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variable result preview effect) ends is when the character's line has been displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined line display (the period has passed) is the timing.

When character B is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (valid start winning, reach state established) within 2 minutes from the start of display, Character B is deleted from the screen when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (pending change effect)) ), the specific performance G (variation result preview performance)) is completed, the character B is deleted from the screen.

When the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, (1) If the predetermined conditions (valid start winning, establishment of a reach state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of the display, the character C is displayed from the start of the display. Character C is deleted from the screen when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (pending change effect)) ), the character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific performance G (variation result preview performance)) is completed.

In this way, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 5 based on the game ball winning in the general winning hole, so that the player can see the state after the game ball has won in the general winning hole. can be made aware of this. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which a specific performance can be executed if a predetermined condition is met, and even if the predetermined condition is met during a period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on this is not executed, the player recognizes that ``if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is being displayed, the specific effect will be executed,'' and plays the game in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. This increases the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed.

Furthermore, by varying the display period depending on the displayed character, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. After confirming the type of character, the player can grasp the display period of that character, that is, the period during which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute a specific performance. Thereby, it is possible to increase the interest until the specific performance is executed.

In addition, as mentioned above, the appearance rate of each character, that is, the set rate of the specific period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied, differs depending on the general winning opening, so the player can choose which general winning opening the game ball is placed in. You will be interested in whether or not you win.

(Specific example of specific performance F (suspended change performance))
In the 47th presentation form shown in FIG. 30, if a valid start winning occurs while any of the characters A to C are displayed on the image display device 5, the displayed character A pending change production with the following actions is executed. As mentioned above, the occurrence of a valid starting prize is the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning hole when the first pending memory number corresponding to the first starting winning hole is less than the upper limit value, and the second The winning of the game ball to the second starting winning hole occurs in a state where the second pending storage number corresponding to the starting winning hole is less than the upper limit value.

The performance control CPU 120 received a starting winning opening designation command specifying "first starting winning opening" or "second starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specifying command that includes valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of a valid starting prize. FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the pending change performance in the 47th performance form.

In FIG. 31(a), variations in decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) are being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are being stored in the pending memory. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number is 2. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the display area (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the starting condition is met first among the variable display games in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met. is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied second is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the production control CPU 120 decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the game ball winning the second general prize opening 50B (Fig. 2
8). In FIG. 31(b), based on this determination, the performance control CPU 120 displays a character 3000 (character A) holding a cane 3001 on the image display device 5.
It is assumed that character A appears on the screen immediately after winning a general prize.

Then, it is assumed that within one minute from the appearance of the character A, a valid starting prize enters the first starting winning hole and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Accordingly, in FIG. 31(c), the number of pending memories is 3.
The display area (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied third is displayed in the normal mode. The performance control CPU 120 detects the occurrence of a valid start winning, that is, the establishment of a predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, and determines whether to change the display area corresponding to each of the three pending memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Each determines whether

Here, the production control CPU 120 has a starting winning command storage area for the first special symbol and a second
Check each starting winning determination result designation command (containing valid data, not blank data) stored in the starting winning command storage area for special symbols. and,
As shown in FIG. 31(d), regarding the starting winning determination result specifying command that specifies "jackpot", the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command will not change at a rate of 20% as it is in the normal mode. On the other hand, regarding the starting winning judgment result specification command that specifies "miss", it has been decided that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command will be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 90%. Then, it is decided that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command will not be changed as it is in the normal mode.

In this example, regarding the starting winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game where the starting condition is satisfied first and second, the aspect of the display part corresponding to the command should not change as it is in the normal aspect. (No pending change), and only for the start winning judgment result designation command corresponding to the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied third, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command changes from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that the decision has been made to do so (with pending changes).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 controls the character 3000 as shown in FIG. 31(e).
(Character A) points the tip of the cane 3001 toward the starting winning memory display area 5H, and
An action performance is executed in which a display part corresponding to each suspended memory is surrounded by a flame 3002 emitted from the tip of 001.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(f), with the execution of this action performance, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the above-described determination regarding the left end and the second display area from the left. As for the third display part from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-described determination. When the action performance is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 3000 (character A) holding the cane 3001 and the flame 3002 emitted from the tip of the cane 3001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the change in the appearance of the display part accompanying this action production, for the player, character 3000 (character A) that appeared based on winning the general prize opening performed an action, and the third display part from the left. The user recognizes that the mode has changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and expects the variable display game to be executed three games after the variable display game currently being executed.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 31(c) and 31(d), regarding the starting winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games for which the starting condition is not satisfied, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed to normal. If it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no pending change), even after the action performance shown in FIG. 31(e) is performed, the three pending memories will be changed as shown in FIG. 31(g). All three corresponding retention sites remain unchanged in their normal state.

In this way, by executing the specific performance F (pending change performance) triggered by "the occurrence of a valid starting winning within the period in which the character is displayed," a valid starting winning occurs during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game is won, and it is possible to increase interest from the time a game ball enters the general winning hole until the execution of a specific performance. In addition, due to the performance structure in which the display result of the variable display game for which the starting conditions have not yet been met is announced in response to the event of winning a prize in the general prize-winning hole that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the game ball will be placed in the general prize-winning hole. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until the specific performance is executed.

Also, with the action of character 3000 (character A), the display mode of any of the display sections compatible with the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been met changes from the normal mode to the special mode. If so, it is possible to draw attention to whether the display mode of the display region changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, the effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (the appearance of character A) and the effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game where the starting conditions are not met (the action of character A) have a common object ( By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time a game ball enters the general winning hole until the specific performance is executed. Winnings to general prize openings that are not related to the progress of the variable display game and display results of the variable display game where the starting conditions are not met are suggested by a common object, so that the appearance and actions of characters are It is possible to increase player's interest.

Note that the specific performance F (pending change performance) is a variable display game ( The display results are announced targeting each of the pending variable display games, including the last variable display game for which the start condition was met, but the display results are not limited to this format, and the pending change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game in which the starting condition was finally met) that corresponds to the valid starting winning that triggered the trigger (valid starting winning that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met), The display result may be announced in advance. In addition, on the contrary, a variable display game corresponding to a valid starting prize that triggered the execution of the pending change effect (valid starting winning that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (finally, the starting condition It is also possible to target variable display games other than variable display games (in which variable display games have been achieved) and to preview the display results.

(Character deletion process)
Note that, similarly to the specific performances A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance F (pending change performance) is provided. When the specific performance F is executed, the performance control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and deletes the winning history (at least from the first general prize opening 50A to 4 (includes the winning history of one or more winnings in the general winning opening 50D and the winning history of one or more winnings in either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is deleted (winning history in Figure 30 reset conditions).

In addition, if the displayed character is erased after a predetermined display period has elapsed without specific effect F being executed, the winning history (at least (including the winning history of one or more winnings from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33(A) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when specific performance F (suspended change performance) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative symbol variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing of (1), general winning slots 50A to 50
Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in any of D, any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen.

When the displayed character is character A, character A disappears from the display at timing (2) when one minute has passed since the appearance without any valid starting winnings occurring. During this time, variable display 1 has ended and variable display 2 has started, but with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, character A is not hidden but continues to be displayed. There is. Note that if a valid start winning occurs within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A will be hidden after the action performance ends.

When the displayed character is character B, character B disappears from the display at timing (3) when two minutes have elapsed since the appearance without any valid starting winnings occurring. During this time, variable display 1 has ended and variable display 2 has started, and furthermore, variable display 2 has ended and variable display 3 has started. At the end of display 2 and the start of variable display 3, character B is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Note that if a valid start winning occurs within 2 minutes from the appearance of character B, character B will be hidden after the action performance ends.

When the displayed character is character C, character C disappears from the display at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without any valid start winnings occurring. In this example, since the valid start winning occurs at the timing (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of character C, the action performance is executed without the character being hidden, and the action At the timing (5) when the performance ends, the display area corresponding to one or more pending memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts,
Variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts, and then variable display 3 ends and variable display 4 starts.
However, with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, the character C is not hidden but continues to be displayed.

In this way, once a character is displayed, it will continue to be displayed until ``a predetermined condition is met'' or ``a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being met.'' ing. The character is then hidden at the earlier timing of either "the predetermined condition is met" or "a predetermined period passes without the predetermined condition being met".

[48th performance form]
In the 48th performance form shown in FIG. 30, a character is displayed on the image display device 5 based on a game ball winning a prize in the general winning hole, and within the period in which the character is displayed, a ready-to-win state is established. Based on this, lines are displayed according to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variable pattern with a reach state). That is, the character display control is the same as the 47th presentation mode, but the predetermined conditions that must be satisfied within the character display period and the type of specific presentation that is executed when the predetermined conditions are satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific performance G (variable result preview performance))
In the 48th effect form shown in FIG. 30, if a ready-to-reach state is established with any of the characters A to C being displayed on the image display device 5, a specific effect G is performed for the character being displayed. A variable result preview performance accompanied by dialogue display is executed. Production control CPU120
As mentioned above, it is possible to grasp the timing of establishment of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when a variable display game with a ready-to-reach state is being executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with a ready-to-reach state reaches a predetermined timing when the ready-to-reach state is established, it is determined that the ready-to-reach state has been established. If the character is grasped and the character is displayed at this time, it is possible to execute the specific effect G. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of the variation result preview performance in the 48th performance form.

In FIG. 32(a), variations in decorative symbols (for example, vertical scrolling display) are being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are being stored in the pending memory. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number is 1. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the performance control CPU 120 has decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball has won the first general prize opening 50A (Fig. 2
8). In FIG. 32(b), based on this determination, the performance control CPU 120 displays a character 3100 (character B) holding a cane 3101 on the image display device 5.
It is assumed that character B appears on the screen immediately after winning a general prize.

In FIG. 32(c), it is assumed that after the appearance of character B, the variable display of decorative symbols that was being executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" on the middle that results in a non-reach loss is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. no longer exists, and the leftmost display part is in a non-display mode.

It is assumed that within two minutes from the appearance of character B, a ready-to-reach state is established and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 32(e), when the reach state is established, "Reach!" appears at the top of the screen.
The characters 3050 are displayed. The performance control CPU 120 detects the establishment of a ready-to-win state, that is, the establishment of a predetermined condition in the state in which the character is displayed, and determines the speech of the character B.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game being executed is determined to be a jackpot combination or a losing combination. In addition, it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern specification command for a jackpot or a variation pattern specification command for a loss. .

As shown in FIG. 32(f), if it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, 25% of the characters who are displaying the line "Chance!" It is decided to display the line horizontally, and it is decided to display the line "Very hot!!" next to the currently displayed character at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a losing combination, it is decided that the line "Chance!" will be displayed next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%, and %, it is decided to display the line "Very hot!!" next to the currently displayed character.

In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to display the line "Very hot!!" next to the currently displayed character. Based on this determination, the performance control CPU 120 causes the character 3100 (character B) to wave up the cane 3101, as shown in FIG.
Enthusiasm! ! '' is executed. When the dialogue 3102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a character 3100 (character B) holding a cane 3101
) and the lines 3102 uttered by the character 3100 are erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the character 31 that appeared based on winning the general prize opening
From the lines of 00 (character B), it can be understood that as a result of the reach effect, there is a high possibility that the decorative symbols that will be the jackpot combination will be displayed at the final stop.

In this way, by executing the specific performance G (variation result preview performance) triggered by "achieving a reach state within the period in which the character is displayed", it is possible to determine whether the reach state is established during the character display period. It is possible to make the player interested in whether the game ball is winning or not, and it is possible to increase the interest from the time the game ball enters the general winning hole until the execution of the specific performance. In addition, with an event in which a prize is won in a general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time the ball enters the prize until the specific performance is executed. Also,
It is possible to draw attention to the lines of the character 3000 (character A), and it is possible to improve the interest of the character display performance.

In addition, the effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (the appearance of character B) and the effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game where the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's lines) are common objects. (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time a game ball enters the general winning hole until the specific performance is executed. The winnings in the general prize openings that are not related to the progress of the variable display game and the unconfirmed display results of the variable display game are suggested by a common object, so that players' It can increase interest.

In addition, in the 48th production mode, when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined mode, a specific production G in which the character utters a predetermined line is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, regardless of the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern.
Also, for example, when a predetermined preview performance different from the specific performance G (for example, a step-up preview performance executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, it may be triggered. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

In addition, in the 48th production mode, an example has been described in which a character is displayed based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole, regardless of the mode of variable display of decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed when a game ball enters the general winning hole is in a predetermined manner; for example, the character may be displayed when a game ball enters the general winning hole. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of decorative symbols being executed at the time of the game is in a reach state (the variable display game with the variable reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
Note that, similar to the specific performances A to D and the specific performance F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific performance G (variable result preview performance) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 120 erases the displayed character from the screen and executes the specific effect G.
The winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to (includes at least one winning history from the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth general winning opening 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30). .

Additionally, if the displayed character is erased after a predetermined display period has elapsed without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least (including the winning history of one or more winnings from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D) is deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 30).

FIG. 33(B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific performance G (variation result preview performance) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative symbol variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and among these, the reach effect is executed only in variable display 4, and the reach state is reached. It is assumed that the following holds true. When the variable display 1 is being executed, at the timing (11), the general winning slot 50A
-50D, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the game ball winning a prize in any one of the characters A to C.

When the displayed character is character A, character A disappears from the display at timing (12) when one minute has passed since the character appeared without establishing a ready-to-reach state. During this time, with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, character A is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Note that if the ready-to-reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A will be hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is character B, character B disappears from the display at timing (13) when two minutes have passed since the character appeared without establishing a ready-to-reach state. During this time, with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, as well as the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, character B is not hidden but continues to be displayed. Note that if the ready-to-reach state is established within two minutes from the appearance of character B, character B will be hidden after the dialogue display effect ends.

When the displayed character is character C, character C disappears from the display when five minutes have elapsed since the character appeared without establishing a ready-to-reach state. In this example, since the ready-to-reach state is established at timing (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of character C, the line display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this time, the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and
At the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden but continues to be displayed.

[49th performance form]
In the forty-seventh presentation form and the forty-eighth presentation form described above, an example is shown in which the specific presentation is executed as long as the predetermined conditions are met, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific performance of a corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the 49th performance form shown in FIG. 30, the specific performance F (pending change performance) is executed based on the occurrence of a valid start winning within the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Therefore, even if a valid start winning occurs during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific performance F (pending change performance) will not be executed. In addition, a specific performance G (variable result preview performance) is executed based on the establishment of a reach state within the period when character C is displayed, and if character A or B is displayed, Even if a ready-to-win state is established within this period, the specific performance G (variation result preview performance) will not be executed.

In this way, depending on the type of character displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole, the predetermined conditions for making it possible to execute a specific performance, and the predetermined conditions. The type of specific performance executed based on the establishment may be different.

Note that although the predetermined conditions for enabling specific effects to be executed are common regardless of the type of character being displayed, the specific conditions that are executed when the predetermined conditions are met depend on the type of character being displayed. The types of performances may be different. For example, if a valid start winning occurs during the period when character A or B is displayed, specific performance F (pending change performance)
is executed (specific effect G (variable result preview effect) is not executed), but if a valid start winning occurs within the period when character C is displayed, specific effect G (variable result preview effect) is executed. (Specific performance F (pending change performance) may not be executed).

Also, depending on the type of character displayed, the predetermined conditions for enabling the execution of a specific effect differ, but regardless of the type of character displayed, the predetermined conditions corresponding to each are satisfied. The types of specific performances may be the same. For example, if a valid start winning occurs within the period when character A or B is displayed, specific effect F (
Hold change effect) is executed (even if a reach state is established within that period, specific effect F will not be executed), but even if a reach state is established within a period when character C is displayed, a specific effect will not be executed. Performance F (pending change performance) may be executed (even if a valid start winning occurs within that period, specific performance F will not be executed).

In addition, during the period when the character is displayed, (1) If a valid start winning occurs before the reach state is established, a specific performance F (pending change performance) in which the displayed character takes an action will be activated. (2) If the reach state is established before the effective start winning, the character is deleted after executing a specific performance G (variable result preview performance) in which the displayed character utters a line. You may also delete it. In this way, there is a possibility that multiple predetermined conditions (1) and (2) will be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition that is satisfied first among the multiple predetermined conditions A specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

In addition, during the period when the character is displayed, (1) If a valid start winning occurs before the reach state is established, a specific performance F (pending change performance) in which the displayed character takes an action will be activated. (2) Even if the reach state is established before the effective start winning, the character will be deleted after executing the specific performance F (suspended change performance) in which the displayed character performs the action. You may also do so. In this way, there is a possibility that multiple predetermined conditions (1) and (2) will be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect will be executed when any of the predetermined conditions is met. You may also choose to execute it.

[Modifications of the 47th performance form to 49th performance form]
In the example of FIG. 29, if a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after a character is displayed, this will be used as an opportunity to erase the character before the end of the specific period. Although we have explained an example in which a character is displayed, it is not limited to this type of format. Even after a specific effect has been executed, a character may continue to be displayed until a specific period ends. good.

In this case, the specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, if character C is displayed based on winning a prize in the general winning slot, for 5 minutes while character C is displayed,
Even if a valid start winning occurs, the character C may continue to be displayed without disappearing from the screen, and the specific effect F (suspended change effect) may be executed every time a valid start winning occurs during that 5 minutes. .

In the example of FIG. 29, the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes,
5 minutes), but the display period of the character is not limited to this form, and may be, for example, a period until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times. The period may be until the end of the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed, or until the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state) when the character is displayed ends. It may also be the period of

Furthermore, there may be a character that is continuously displayed regardless of the display period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character will not be deleted until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Furthermore, before determining the type of character to be displayed, the display period of the character may be determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball enters the general winning slot, the performance control CPU 120 determines which period the character will be displayed for, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected 70% of the time, character B is selected 20% of the time, character C is selected 10% of the time, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If character B is selected 70% of the time, character A is selected 15% of the time, character C is selected 15% of the time, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C is 70
%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning hole the game ball has won, or depending on the gaming state.

In addition, the predetermined conditions that must be satisfied in order to enable the execution of a specific performance are not limited to the above-mentioned valid starting winnings and establishment of a reach state, but also the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, and a predetermined type of jackpot gaming state (
For example, the occurrence of a variable probability jackpot or a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state reaching a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number =
The number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled to a fixed variable state or time-saving state after the end of a jackpot gaming state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the jackpot gaming state is terminated, and the jackpot game state is controlled to a predetermined variable state (for example, a fixed variable state). The variable display game with the display result being a losing combination has been played a predetermined number of times in a row, the variable display game with the variable pattern of "non-reach"("no reach loss") has been played a predetermined number of times, and the number of pending memories is a predetermined number. Any other condition such as reaching a certain number, ie, a condition that is satisfied as a result of the game, may be used. In addition, the specific performance is not limited to the period when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, but the variable display of the special symbol (performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is executed during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled. It may also be carried out during a period when it is not.

In the 47th performance form and the 49th performance form, an example was shown in which the preview performance that foretells the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied is a pending change performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot pending, a performance using only audio or a performance using audio and the movable accessory 1000 may be performed. It may be a look-ahead preview performance in which the ratio of whether or not the game will be played is different, or it may be a chance preview performance as shown in the 50th performance form and the 51st performance form to be described later. Alternatively, it may be a countdown preview effect in which the player is informed of the number of variable displays remaining until the variable display that is the target of the pre-read preview.

In the 47th performance form and the 49th performance form, after a character is displayed based on a game ball winning in the general winning opening, an effective start winning occurs, and the displayed character changes to the state of pending information. Although we have shown an example of executing a pending change effect that changes the number of changes, the present invention is not limited to this type of implementation. Check the result specification command and the start prize winning variable pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game where the display result is a jackpot or a variable display game with a reach state, the percentage will be higher than when there is no variable display game. A character may also appear. Further, if there is a variable display game where the display result is a jackpot or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no variable display game. Furthermore, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game where the display result is a jackpot or a variable display game with a reach state. Then, when a valid start winning occurs after the character appears (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change performance that changes the form of the hold information.

In addition, in the 47th performance form to the 49th performance form, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled, the game ball is placed in the general prize opening. Even if the player wins a prize, the specific performance may be prevented from being executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness can be focused on the various performances (for example, fanfare performances, mid-round performances, ending performances, etc.) that are executed in conjunction with the control of the jackpot game state, and these various performances can be avoided. be able to.

In the 47th to 49th presentation modes, an example has been described in which a specific presentation is always executed if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period, but the present invention is not limited to these forms.
Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, if a predetermined condition is met within the display period of character A, a specific effect will be executed at a rate of 25%, and if a predetermined condition is met within the display period of character B, a specific effect will be executed at a rate of 50%. is executed, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of character C, the specific effect will be executed at a 100% rate. The execution ratio may be made different.

Here, in the 47th presentation form to the 49th presentation form, if a game ball wins in the general winning hole while a character is displayed, a new character will not be displayed based on the winning in the general winning hole. The characters that have already been displayed will continue to be displayed.
That is, when a game ball enters the general winning hole, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display a character and which character to display at the ratio shown in FIG. 28, on the condition that no character is displayed. The characters will be displayed based on that determination.

In addition, not limited to this form, if a character is displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning hole, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that is already displayed (
The character that was already displayed may be deleted), and a character based on a later general winning prize may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed and the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is better. If the display period is longer, it will continue to be displayed and the character based on the later general prize won will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, it will be displayed instead of the character based on the earlier general prize (already). The displayed character may be deleted) and a character based on a later general winning prize may be displayed.

In such a form, when displaying a character based on a later general winning prize instead of a character based on the previous general winning prize (delete the character that was already displayed), the display period of the character based on the later general winning prize The remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed may be added to (the period in which both are added is set as the display period of the newly displayed character).

In addition, in the 47th to 49th performance formats, if a game ball wins in the general winning hole within the character display period, a new character will not be displayed based on the winning in the general winning hole. , the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The period to be extended here (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period determined for the characters already displayed (for example, one minute if character A is displayed). Furthermore, even when a prize is won in the general prize-winning slot within the character display period, one of the characters is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. Display period (characters that are not displayed)
For example, 2 minutes for character B) may be added to the remaining display period of the character that is already displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, if a character is displayed when a game ball enters the general winning slot, the character will be displayed together with the character based on the general winning that has already been displayed (without erasing the character that was already displayed). Characters based on general winnings may also be displayed.
For example, if a game ball enters the general prize opening while character A is being displayed, and it is decided to newly display character B, a new character will be added to character A that has already been displayed. B may also be displayed on the image display device 5.

In this case, during the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize winning,
The period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize winning may be set as the common display period of both characters. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, a specific effect is executed and one or both characters are erased. Furthermore, if the common display period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied, both characters are deleted.

In addition, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined condition (for example, valid) corresponding to the first character is first set. When the first specific performance (for example, specific performance F (pending change performance)) is established based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the first character is deleted and only the second character is Next, a second predetermined condition (e.g., reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, and a second specific effect (e.g., specific effect G (variable result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition) When the preview effect)) is executed, the second character may also be erased. Here, the first character and the second character may be of the same type.

In such a case, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid starting prize), and in that case, both the first character and the second character In the state displayed on the image display device 5, the first specific performance by the first character and the second specific performance by the second character are performed based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid starting prize only once). Both effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Further, the first specific performance and the second specific performance may be the same type of performance (for example, specific performance F (pending change performance)), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are displayed on the image display device. 5, when the first predetermined condition corresponding to the first character (for example, valid start winning) is satisfied, a specific performance by type (specific performance F (pending change performance)) is executed, and the first When one character is deleted and only the second character is displayed, and the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific performance (specific performance F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the pending change effect)).

In addition, as in the 49th production form, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific production (specific production F) can be executed, and if the second character (character C) is displayed, the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in response to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state). In this case, only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 5 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, if the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) when the second specific performance is executed is higher than when the first specific performance is executed, the second character It shall be displayed with priority over characters. For example, when the first character is displayed, if it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning hole, the first character is deleted and the second character is displayed. shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, if the second character is being displayed, no control is performed to display the first character instead.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed simultaneously on the image display device 5, the first specific effect is executed in response to the establishment of the first condition, and the second character is
It is possible to execute the second specific performance depending on the establishment of the condition. However, if both the first specific performance and the second specific performance are performances for the same variable display game and their execution periods overlap (for example, they are both variable result preview performances for the same variable display game, and the reach (in the case where the second specific effect is executed immediately after the establishment of the state), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th performance form]
In the 50th performance mode shown in FIG. 34, each time a game ball enters the general winning hole, a new button icon 4000 is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 35, etc.), and the button icon 4000 that is displayed The type of specific performance that can be executed differs depending on the number of.
Here, each of the specific performances in this performance form is a performance that prompts the player to perform some kind of operation, and is a performance that can preview the display result of the variable display game based on the detected movement of the player. There are three types of specific performances: a cut-in preview performance (specific performance H), a pseudo continuous preview performance (specific performance I), and a chance preview performance (specific performance J).

The display information conditions in FIG. 34 are the button icons 40 necessary for each specific effect to be executed.
00, and unless at least the number of button icons 4000 shown in the display information conditions are displayed, each specific effect will not be executed. Specifically, the cut-in preview performance is not executed unless one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, the pseudo-continuation preview performance is not executed unless two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and the chance preview performance is not executed. It is not executed unless three or more button icons 4000 are displayed.

The button icons 4000 displayed on the image display device 5 can be displayed on the image display device 5 by increasing by 1 each time a game ball enters the general winning hole, up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5). Assume that there is. Then, when a specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific effect is determined from the number of displayed button icons 4000 before the execution of the specific effect.
The number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the display number of 00 will be displayed on the image display device 5 after the specific effect is executed. For example, when five button icons 4000 are displayed, if (1) cut-in preview effect (required number of button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed, the button icon after cut-in preview effect is executed. The display number of 4000 is 4, and (
2) When the pseudo consecutive notice performance (required number of displayed button icons = 2) is executed, the number of 4000 button icons displayed after the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice performance becomes 3, and (3) Chance notice performance ( When the required number of button icons to be displayed = 3) is executed, the number of 4000 button icons to be displayed after the execution of the chance preview effect becomes 2.

(Cut-in preview performance)
The cut-in preview performance provided as the specific performance H is a performance that foretells the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the contents of the characters displayed on the screen after the ready-to-reach state is established. As shown in FIG. 34, the cut-in preview performance is performed when (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed and (2) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined repeated tapping operation, and (3) the player can execute the predetermined repeated tapping operation.

Note that if a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern with a ready-to-reach state while no button icon 4000 is displayed, the continuous press operation related to the cut-in notice effect will not be notified, and the cut-in notice will not be displayed. The performance is not performed. In addition, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a ready-to-reach state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in preview performance is not notified, and the cut-in preview performance is not executed.

In addition, in the cut-in preview performance, the reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 30 multiple times, so the reach state is executed. The condition is that a variable display game is executed using a variable pattern. A specific aspect of the cut-in preview effect will be explained using FIG. 35.

In FIG. 35(a), variations in decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) are being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are being stored in the pending memory. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number is 1. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the first button icon 4000 at the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. In FIG. 35(b), the screen has been updated from a state in which no button icon 4000 is displayed to a state in which one button icon 4000 is displayed. In addition, as a total of one or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, characters 4000a of "cut-in" indicating that "a cut-in preview effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed.
is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a variable pattern involving a ready-to-reach state is executed.

In FIG. 35(c), it is assumed that the variable display of decorative symbols that has been executed has ended and the display result has been derived and displayed. Here, a combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" on the middle that results in a non-reach loss is derived and displayed as a determined decorative pattern.

Here, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a ready-to-reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. The confirmation is made based on the variation pattern designation command received from 100. If the variable display game to be started has a variable reach pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in preview performance is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35(d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. no longer exists, and the leftmost display part is in a non-display mode.

In a variable display game with a variable reach pattern, the performance control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 35 (
As shown in e), when the reach state is established, an effect is executed to display the characters 4080 "Reach!". Based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 35(f), in the center of the screen, in order from the top, the words "Continuously press!", multiple downward arrows, and the operation button 30 are imitated. Displays continuous hit suggestion information 4100 consisting of an image and a time bar indicating the remaining period during which the operation will be valid. Thereby, the player recognizes that he should press the operation button 30 successively.

Further, along with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 4100, the performance control CPU 120 erases one button icon 4000 required for executing the cut-in preview performance from among the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and as there is no longer an executable specific effect, the characters 400 of "cut in"
Delete 0a from the screen.

It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 4100 continuously presses the operation button 30 a predetermined number of times or more. The performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time after displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 4100. The time bar is 5 when displayed.
It is assumed that there are five stages among the stages, and the state decreases by one stage every second that elapses from the display. As shown in FIG. 35(g), the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation button 30 to be pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches the 0 stage out of 5 stages (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operations are performed, a cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 5.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 35 (h
), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stopping symbol of the jackpot combination, the words "Chance!" are displayed at a rate of 20%, and the words "Chance!" are displayed at a rate of 80%. heat!
! ” is decided to be displayed, and if the display result of the variable display game to be executed is the final stop symbol of a losing combination, the words “Chance!” will be displayed at a rate of 80%, and 20
It is decided to display the words "Kinnetsu!!" at a rate of %.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in preview effect that causes the image display device 5 to display a screen including the determined characters. In the example of FIG. 35(i), the characters 42 of “Kinnetsu!!”
00 is displayed in large size across the screen.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to operate within a predetermined period (
If the operation button 30 is not operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more within 5 seconds (for example, within 5 seconds), neither the words ``Chance!'' nor ``Very Hot!!'' will be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo serial trailer performance)
The pseudo-continuous preview performance provided as specific performance I is a re-variation in which decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are scrolled up and down again in one variable display game, making it appear as if they were displayed multiple times. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, a pseudo continuous symbol (in this example, composed of the characters "NEXT") is displayed as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in response to each symbol stop operation by the player. shall be temporarily suspended.

As shown in FIG. 34, the pseudo-continuous notice performance is as follows: (1) with two or more button icons 4000 being displayed, (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8 seconds or more. (3) When the player performs each predetermined symbol stopping operation, the player can execute the predetermined symbol stopping operation.

In addition, in the pseudo continuous preview performance, the player is required to operate the operation button 30 three times (perform each symbol stop operation three times) within the period in which one variable display game is being executed. The condition is to execute a variable display game that requires a certain amount of operation time and has a variation pattern that has a variation time longer than a certain period of time (in this example, 8 seconds). A specific aspect of the pseudo continuous announcement presentation will be explained using FIGS. 36 and 37.

In FIG. 36(a), variations in the decorative patterns (for example, vertical scroll display) are being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are being stored in the pending memory. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number is 1. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met.
It is assumed that the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the normal mode.

In addition, based on the fact that a game ball has won in the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D, one button icon 4000 is displayed on the left end of the screen, and a button icon 4000 is displayed that says ``cut after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is met''. ``Cut-in'' characters 400 indicating that the in-notice performance is now possible
0a is displayed.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 displays a second button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. In FIG. 36(b), the screen has been updated from a state where one button icon 4000 is displayed to a state where two button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of two or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, characters 400 of "pseudo series" indicating that "the pseudo series preview effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed.
0b is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here means that (1) two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, and (2) the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or more. be.

In FIG. 36(c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" on the middle that results in a non-reach loss is derived and displayed as a determined decorative pattern.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 100 whether or not the variable time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more, based on the establishment of the start condition for the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. If the variable display game to be started has a variable time of 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the pseudo continuous notice performance is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 36(d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, It is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous pattern (perform re-fluctuation) with a probability of 15%, and decide not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous pattern (perform re-variation) with a probability of 85%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-fluctuation) with a probability of 100%.

When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive symbols, the performance control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in response to each symbol stopping operation by the player, and , while determining the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R,
It is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous pattern in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

As mentioned above, upon receiving the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the production control CPU 120 selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command, and selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command, and also selects the production control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. A fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in response to each symbol stopping operation by the player are determined by the determined final pattern. The decorative pattern may be different from the "left" and "right" decorative patterns constituting the decorative pattern (final stop pattern), or may be the same.

When it is determined that the production control CPU 120 does not temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous pattern,
In response to each symbol stop operation by the player, the determined fixed decorative symbol ( It is decided to stop the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the final stop symbol, respectively. That is, when the re-fluctuation is not performed, it is decided to swing and stop the final decorative symbol (last stopped symbol) in response to each symbol stopping operation by the player.

In this way, once the presence or absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, FIG.
As shown in 6(e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, there is a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. The display area on the left end is in a non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the words "Press!", a downward arrow, and the operation button 30 are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in order from the top. Operation suggestion information 4 composed of simulated images
050 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that he should press the operation button 30 in order to stop the decorative symbols in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L.

In addition, along with the display of the operation suggestion information 4050, the performance control CPU 120 erases two button icons 4000 required for executing the pseudo-continuation preview performance from among the displayed button icons 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and as there is no longer an executable specific effect, the characters "cut in" 4000a
and the characters 4000b of "pseudo-ren" are deleted from the screen.

When the player recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and presses the operation button 30, the "left" decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 36(g). The decorative pattern ("1" in this example) is stopped swinging in the pattern display area 5L. The oscillating stop is a state in which the decorative pattern is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is not completely stopped and is oscillating (a state in which the final stop is not displayed). If it has been decided to stop the pseudo continuous pattern, the decorative pattern to be stopped swinging here is the "left" decorative pattern that constitutes the predetermined combination of temporary stop patterns, and the pseudo continuous pattern is to be stopped. If it has been decided not to stop the consecutive symbols, it is the "left" decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of predetermined fixed decorative symbols (final stopped symbols).

When the "left" decorative pattern is stopped swinging, the performance control CPU 120 then controls the display in FIG. 36 (
As shown in g), operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. Thereby, the player recognizes that he should press the operation button 30 in order to stop the decorative symbols in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R.

When the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R presses the operation button 30, the "right" decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 36(h). The decorative pattern ("2" in this example) is stopped swinging in the pattern display area 5R. If it has been decided to stop the pseudo continuous pattern, the decorative pattern to be stopped swinging here is the "right" decorative pattern that constitutes the predetermined combination of temporary stop patterns, and the pseudo continuous pattern is If it has been decided not to stop the consecutive symbols, it is the "right" ornamental symbol that constitutes a combination of predetermined fixed ornamental symbols (final stop symbols).

When the "right" decorative pattern is stopped swinging, the performance control CPU 120 then controls the display in FIG. 36 (
As shown in h), operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Thereby, the player recognizes that he should press the operation button 30 in order to stop the decorative symbols in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 4050 displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the production control CPU 120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol based on the table of FIG. The pseudo continuous pattern consisting of the characters "NEXT" is stopped swinging in the decorative pattern display area 5C. As a result, the predetermined combination of temporarily stopped symbols "left", "middle", and "right" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined period of time, the decorative pattern changes (for example, A re-variation is performed in which the vertical scrolling display is resumed. After re-variation, “
The combination of determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is displayed in the final stop display in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. I will do it.

On the other hand, if the production control CPU 120 has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol based on the table of FIG. 36(d), the "medium" The "medium" decorative symbols constituting the combination of final decorative symbols (final stop symbols) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 5C are stopped swinging. As a result, the predetermined "left" and "right"
The combination of "medium" determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) will be stopped swinging. and,
As shown in FIG. 37(l), after the rocking has stopped for a predetermined period, the decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is determined in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination will be displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game will be determined.

Note that the production control CPU 120 has also decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous pattern even if the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 4050. In this case, a predetermined combination of temporarily stopped symbols is displayed as a temporary stop and re-variation is executed. In other words, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbols, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically displayed as a temporary stop and the re-variation is executed even if no operation is performed. shall be.

In this example, if two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition is satisfied that the variable display game is executed according to a variation pattern with a variation time of 8 seconds or more, Although the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern involves a reach state (that is, regardless of the production mode of the specified variation pattern), the operation suggestion information 4050 is not limited to this format. The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 4000 are displayed and that the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern with a reach state. When setting such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a jackpot, the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is a miss. It's good to do this.

In addition, if the execution or non-execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is set in advance for each variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 100, that is, by the variation pattern designation command sent from the game control microcomputer 100. In a case where it is specified to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous pattern, the production control CPU 120 presses the button icon 40
Receiving a variable pattern designation command in which two or more 00s are displayed and the pseudo-continuous pattern is specified to be temporarily stopped (executing a variable display game using a variable pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice presentation); This may be used as an operation suggestion condition, and as in the example described above, two or more button icons 4000 are displayed regardless of the specified variation pattern, and the variable display game is executed for a variation time of a predetermined time or more. This may be used as an operation suggestion condition.

(Chance preview performance)
The chance eye preview performance provided as specific performance J is different from the display result of decorative symbols that become jackpot combinations as a display result of the variable display game that is executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead notice. By displaying the chance number, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the pre-read preview.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are displayed in the final stop in each of the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and the "left" ornamental symbol is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. By displaying even-numbered decorative symbols that are 1 larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are finally displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, the chances of "left", "middle" and "right"
The combination of decorative designs shall be completed.

That is, in this example, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols that are the chance is any one of "112", "334", "556", and "778". In response to the player's all-symbol stopping operation, it is possible to finally stop display a combination of decorative patterns that become a chance.

As shown in FIG. 34, the chance preview performance is as follows: (1) 3 or more button icons 4000
is displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a reach state is on hold, and none of the variable display games to be executed before the variable display game involve a reach state. , a notification is given to perform a predetermined all-symbol stopping operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined all-symbols stopping operation.

In addition, in the chance preview performance, in one variable display game, when the player operates the operation button 30 only once, the combinations of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols are oscillated. will be stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo continuous preview performance in which each symbol stop operation is required three times to stop the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols from swinging in one variable display game, The operation (stopping all symbols) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance preview performance will be explained using FIGS. 38 and 39.

In FIG. 38(a), variations in decorative patterns (for example, vertical scrolling display) are being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are being stored in the pending memory. number(
It is assumed that the total number of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number is 3. At this time, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met.
It is assumed that each display part (the left end, the second from the left, and the third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in a normal mode.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 stores the start winning time fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command stored in the starting winning command storage area for the first special symbol and the starting winning command storage area for the second special symbol. Check the starting prize winning variation pattern judgment result designation command, and select the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (leftmost display part) in which the start condition is met first among the 3 pending variable display games. is a non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display part from the left) in which the start condition is met is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is met third. It is assumed that the user knows that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the third display part from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

In addition, the game balls are placed in the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D multiple times (at least twice).
Based on winning a prize (more than 10 times), two button icons 4000 are displayed on the left edge of the screen, and a "cut-in" button is displayed indicating that "a cut-in preview effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is met." 4000a, and characters 4000b of ``Pseudo-continuation'' indicating that ``the pseudo-continuation notice performance becomes executable after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied'' are displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the third button icon 4000 on the left end of the screen based on the game ball winning in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. In FIG. 38(b), from the state where two button icons 4000 are displayed,
The screen has been updated to a state where three button icons 4000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of 3 or more button icons 4000 are displayed on the screen, characters 400 of "chance" indicating that "the chance notice performance will become executable after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" are displayed.
0c is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before 2000 involve a reach state.

In FIG. 38(c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 4000 is displayed, the variable display of decorative patterns that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, a combination of "5" on the left, "9" on the middle, and "6" on the middle that results in a non-reach loss is derived and displayed as a determined decorative pattern.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, that the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition has been satisfied is a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach state, and Among the 2 variable display games that are on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the leftmost display part) in which the start condition is met first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is met in the second place. Based on the fact that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the variation pattern of the reach, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the chance eye preview performance is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display game that is executed before the variable display game with the pending variable display pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). For each variable display game), it is decided to request the player to perform an operation to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the variable display game with the variable reach variation pattern that is on hold is a jackpot combination or a losing combination is determined by the starting winning determination result designation command or starting winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game. Confirm based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38(d), if the display result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player are Depending on the stop operation, the chance will be stopped at a rate of 75%, and at a rate of 25%.
If it is decided to stop non-chance moves (losing combinations other than chance moves) at a rate of In variable display games, in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols,
It is decided to stop the chances at a rate of 25%, and it is decided to stop the chances at a rate of 75%.

When it is decided to stop the chance eye, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5L, which constitute the chance eye, in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Odd-numbered ornamental symbols to be stopped at 5C and even-numbered ornamental symbols to be oscillated and stopped at the "right" ornamental symbol display area 5R are determined.

If it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols. , and in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the confirmed ornamental symbols (final stop symbols) that are not chance eyes are swung according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Decided to stop it. That is, in response to the player's all-symbol-stopping operation, it is decided to swing and stop the determined decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that will be a non-chance pattern.

In this way, once the presence or absence of a chance block stop and the stop symbol in the case of a chance block stop are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 38(e). As a result, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is met but the start condition is not met, and the third display part from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 38(f), the text 4200 "Stop all symbols!" is displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the text "Press!" is displayed downward in order from the top. arrow, and
Operation suggestion information 4050 consisting of an image simulating the operation button 30 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that he must press the operation button 30 in order to stop the decorative symbols in all the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. do. In addition,
In the chance eye preview performance, unlike the above-mentioned pseudo consecutive notice performance, by operating the operation button 30 only once, all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, ``left'', ``middle'', and ``right'' are displayed. 5
The decorative pattern is stopped at R.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 selects the three buttons necessary for executing the chance eye preview performance among the displayed button icons 4000 in conjunction with the display of the text 4200 "Stop all symbols!" and the operation suggestion information 4050. Delete icon 4000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 4000 becomes 0, and as there are no executable specific effects, characters 4000a for "cut-in", characters 4000b for "pseudo-connection", and characters 4000b for "chance" appear. The characters 4000c are deleted from the screen.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the characters 4200 and the operation suggestion information 4050 that say "Stop all symbols!" performs an operation of pressing the operation button 30.

At this time, if the performance control CPU 120 has decided to stop the non-chance roll based on the table of FIG. 38(d), as shown in FIG. 38(g), "
A combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that are not chance moves is oscillated in the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. make it stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(h), after the rocking stops for a predetermined period, the final decorative pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R The combination of symbols) will be finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game will be determined. Here, a combination of "4" on the left, "9" on the middle, and "7" on the right, which results in a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed as a determined decorative pattern for the non-chance game.

In addition, if the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 "Stop all symbols!" and the operation suggestion information 4050, the performance control CPU 120 If it has been decided to stop non-chance patterns in response to the all-symbol stop operation, a fixed decorative pattern that does not become a chance pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The combination shall be stopped from swinging.

Next, as described above, the production control CPU 120 determines the start conditions for the next variable display game based on the fact that it has been decided to request the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game as well. Even when the game is established, it is determined whether or not to stop the chance number in the same way as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 39(i), if the display result of the variable display game with a variable reach variation pattern that is on hold is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game where the start condition is met are In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance item at a rate of 75% and the non-chance item at a rate of 25%, and the displayed result of the variable display game with the pending reach variation pattern is a losing combination. In this case, in a variable display game where the start condition is met, it is decided that the chance eyes will be stopped at a rate of 25%, and the non-chance eyes will be stopped at a rate of 75%, in response to the player's operation to stop all symbols. decided to stop.

Furthermore, similarly to the previous variable display game, the performance control CPU 120 performs the player's all-symbol stopping operation when it is decided to stop the chance eye or when it is decided to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative patterns to be stopped from swinging is determined in accordance with the above.

In this way, once it is determined whether or not to stop the chance eye and the symbols to stop when the chance eye is stopped, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 39(j). As a result, there is only one variable display game in which the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not, and the second display part from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 39(k), characters 4200 and operation suggestion information 4050 saying "Stop all symbols!" are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player can move "left", "middle"
, recognizes that the operation button 30 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative patterns in all the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the text 4200 of "Stop all symbols!" and the operation suggestion information 4050 presses the operation button 30.

At this time, if the production control CPU 120 has decided to stop the chance roll based on the table of FIG. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the determined chance is made to stop swinging in the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(m), after the swing stops for a predetermined period, the final decorative pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of decorative symbols is determined. Here, the left is "1" as the confirmed decorative pattern for the chance,
The combination that results in a non-reach loss is derived and displayed, with "1" in the middle and "2" in the right.

In addition, if the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 4200 "Stop all symbols!" and the operation suggestion information 4050, the performance control CPU 120 Even if it has been decided to stop the chance eye in response to the all symbol stop operation, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop The combination of symbols) shall be stopped from swinging.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines that for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game with a variable reach pattern that is the target of the chance notice performance, it is determined that the player is required to perform an operation to stop all symbols. Therefore, when the start condition for the next variable display game is met, it is not determined whether or not to stop the chance. Then, as shown in FIG. 39(n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. no longer exists, and the leftmost display part is in a non-display mode.

In a variable display game with a variable reach pattern, the performance control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 39 (
As shown in o), when the reach state is established, an effect is executed to display the characters 4080 "Reach!".

In the 50th performance mode explained above, the cut-in preview performance, the pseudo-continuation preview performance, and the chance notice performance are all performed after the game ball enters the general winning slot, that is, when the button icon 4000 is In the displayed state, the game can be executed in response to a player's operation corresponding to each preview effect. In this way, by providing a specific performance that is executed on condition of the player's operation after the game ball enters the general winning slot, it is possible to increase the interest when the game ball enters the general winning slot.

In addition, a button icon 4000 is displayed on the screen every time a game ball enters the general winning slot.
By increasing, the player can recognize that the game ball has won in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole.

In addition, if the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in preview performance is met with one or more button icons 4000 being displayed, a notification will be made to prompt you to repeatedly press the buttons as an operation corresponding to the cut-in preview performance, and two or more button icons 4000 will be displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the pseudo-continuation notice performance is satisfied in the state where When the operation suggestion conditions for the preview performance are met, a notification is issued that prompts the player to stop all symbols as an operation corresponding to the chance preview performance, allowing the player to execute the specific performance by what kind of operation. It is possible to understand what is happening.

Furthermore, depending on the number of displayed button icons 4000, when the number of displayed buttons is 1 or more, the characters 4000a of "cut-in" are displayed, and when the number of displayed buttons is 2 or more, the characters 400a of "pseudo-connection" are displayed.
0b is displayed, and when the displayed number is 3 or more, the characters 4000c of "chance" are displayed, allowing the player to select the type of specific effect that can be executed according to the number of displayed button icons 4000. can be grasped. Thereby, it is possible to generate interest in the number of winnings of game balls that enter the general winning hole.

Note that, together with the type of specific performance that can be executed, the operation required to execute the specific performance may be notified. For example, depending on the number of displayed button icons 4000, when the number of displayed buttons is 1 or more, the word ``repeat'' is displayed next to the word ``cut-in'' 4000a, and when the number of displayed buttons is 2 or more, the word ``pseudo continuous'' is displayed. "Each pattern stop" next to the character 4000b
When the number of characters displayed is 3 or more, the character 4000c for "chance" is displayed.
By displaying the text "All symbols stop", the player can understand the operation required according to the type of specific performance that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is met, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8. In some cases, the duration may be longer than 1 second, and in this case, a notification (display of continuous hit suggestion information 4100) prompting a continuous hit operation to execute a cut-in notice effect and a stop operation for each symbol to execute a pseudo continuous notice effect is issued. The problem is which notification (display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) should be performed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the button icon 4000 required to execute the specific effect is executed with priority. Therefore, the notification that prompts the stop operation of each symbol to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect (requires 2 or more button icons 4000) is the notification that urges the continuous hit operation to execute the cut-in notice effect (requires 1 or more button icons 4000) shall be given priority over.

In addition, in a state where three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, when the start condition for the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is met, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and , There are cases where the variable display game that is on hold has a reach variation pattern, and in this case, an announcement (
(Display of operation suggestion information 4050 in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) and notification prompting the operation to stop all symbols to execute a chance preview effect (letters of "Stop all symbols!" in each variable display game) 4200 and display of operation suggestion information 4050) is the problem. In this case, the notification that prompts the operation to stop all symbols to execute the chance eye preview performance (requires 3 or more button icons 4000) is the notification that prompts the operation to stop each symbol to perform the pseudo consecutive notice performance (button icon 4000 is required) (requires 2 or more).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 4000 is the number of button icons 4000 required to execute a specific effect (1 for a cut-in preview effect, 2 for a pseudo continuous preview effect, 2 for a pseudo continuous preview effect, If the number is more than 3) in the case of visual notice performance, the number of button icons 4000 required to execute the specific performance is calculated from the number of button icons 4000 initially displayed.
The number of button icons 4000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 4000 will continue to be displayed even after the specific performance is executed.

For example, if a chance preview effect is executed while four or more button icons 4000 are displayed, one button icon 4000 remains to be displayed even after the chance preview effect is executed. The characters 4000a "CUT IN" remain displayed on the screen. Thereafter, when the variable display game with the variable reach pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in preview effect is satisfied, and a notification to prompt the repeat hit operation is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each specific effect are satisfied (button icon 4000
(in addition to checking the number of variables displayed in the variable display game, we also check the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game), but not only in this form, when the variable display game is being executed, operation suggestion conditions according to each specific production. It may be determined whether or not the following holds true. For example, CP for production control
The U120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the U120 displays consecutive hit suggestion information 4 for causing consecutive hits.
100 may be displayed. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether two or more button icons 4000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is displayed, operation suggestion information 4050 for causing each symbol stopping operation to be performed may be displayed. In addition, the production control CPU 120, at the timing when a valid start winning occurs,
Variable display games with reach status (including variable display games that correspond to the valid starting prize)
is on hold, and none of the variable display games executed before the variable display game involve a reach state, determining whether three or more button icons 4000 are displayed, If displayed, the characters 4200 and operation suggestion information 4050 "Stop all symbols!" for causing the user to perform an operation to stop all symbols may be displayed. That is, within the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition for the next variable display game to be executed), a predetermined A notification or a specific effect may be executed to the effect that an operation should be performed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole. In the case of a reach variation pattern, continuous hit suggestion information 4100 for causing repeated hits may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. In addition, at the timing when the button icon 4000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning hole, the performance control CPU 120 controls the amount remaining until the end of the variable display game being executed (derivation display of the display result). It is determined whether the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivation and display of the display result) is determined as the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). Operation suggestion information 4050 for causing each symbol stopping operation to be performed may be displayed at the timing when there are 10 seconds left. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the button icon 4000 to 3 based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning hole.
At the above timing, a variable display game with a reach state (including a variable display game corresponding to the valid starting prize) is on hold, and a variable display game to be executed before the variable display game. Determine whether any of them are not accompanied by a reach state,
If a variable display game with a reach state is on hold and any variable display game executed before the variable display game does not involve a reach state, in the variable display game being executed. , "Stop all symbols!" to perform the all symbol stop operation.
The characters 4200 and operation suggestion information 4050 may be displayed. That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 4000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition for the next variable display game to be executed),
A notification or a specific effect to the effect that a predetermined operation should be performed may be executed.

In addition, in the 50th performance mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying the user to perform a predetermined operation (repeated hit operation, stop operation for each symbol, operation for stop all symbols) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode, stop operation for all symbols, etc.). Although we have described an example in which a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation being performed, the operation suggestion condition is not limited to this type of form, and the operation suggestion condition may be, for example, a jackpot. Conditions related to the gaming state (for example, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, whether the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, and whether the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number, etc.) may be used. A specific performance may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in a gaming state. For example, when the number of button icons 4000 displayed reaches a predetermined number during a period in which the jackpot game state is controlled, a notification is sent to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Sometimes, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is a probability-variable jackpot, or whether the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state (however, the effect mode is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a variable probability state), the button icon 4
When the number of 000 displayed reaches a predetermined number, a notification is provided to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect is provided to notify whether or not the gaming state is a variable probability state. You may also execute the following.

In addition, in the 50th presentation mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 4000 is 1, a notification prompting a repeated tap operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in preview presentation is executed in response to the repeated tap operation. Although an example has been described, the button icon 40 is not limited to this form.
If the number of displayed 00 is not a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation will not be performed (for example, any operation of repeated hitting operation, stop operation of each symbol, or stop operation of all symbols) There may also be no notification to prompt the user), and the specific performance may not be executed (for example, any specific performance such as the cut-in preview performance, the pseudo continuous preview performance, and the chance preview performance may not be performed).

(Example of one-shot announcement)
In addition, in the 50th production mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the operation is performed three times for each area, but the final stop symbol ) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final decorative pattern (final stop pattern) according to the variable display result notification command, it displays the operation suggestion information 4050 in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, and presses the operation button 30. The left symbols constituting the final stop symbol are oscillated and stopped in response to the operation of the button 30, and then the operation suggestion information 4050 is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and the final stop is made in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. The right symbols that make up the symbol are made to stop swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 405 is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C.
0 may be displayed and the middle symbols constituting the final stop symbol may be made to swing and stop in response to the operation of the operation button 30. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the "left", "right", "middle" symbol display areas 5L, 5R, By sequentially stopping the same decorative symbols at 5C, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the operation.

In addition, in the "left", "right", and "middle" pattern display areas, a combination of special decorative patterns that is different from the usual combination of decorative patterns (for example, images of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8") is displayed. By stopping the variable display game, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and depending on the player's predetermined operation, the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot or a miss (or a probability-variable jackpot). It is also possible to perform a specific performance that notifies you of whether it will be a hit or a non-probable jackpot, etc.
For example, a special decorative pattern, which is an image imitating the operation button 30, is stopped in the "left" and "right" pattern display areas, respectively (or a normal decoration is displayed in the "left" and "right" pattern display areas). (the symbols are stopped), and an image of the words "Continuous Hit!" is stopped in the "Medium" symbol display area. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the text "Map!" performs a multi-pap operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, an image of the text "Jackpot!" or "Lose") is displayed on the image display device 5. ”) may be displayed.

In addition, in this case, depending on the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The proportion of display results that result in a jackpot (or the proportion that a variable probability jackpot occurs) may be different. For example, in the "Medium" symbol display area, an image of the words "Continuously press!" that suggests pressing the operation button 30 repeatedly several times is displayed. The display result may be more likely to be a jackpot when the image of the characters "Press and hold!", which suggests a single press operation, is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, a performance in which the display result of the variable display game is notified according to the player's operation without going through the reach state may be executed as a specific performance. Furthermore, during the period in which the variable display game 1 is being executed, the combination of special decorative symbols is stopped multiple times in the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, and the special decorative symbols are The player may perform a predetermined operation each time a combination is stopped. In this case, a preview effect suggesting the display result may be executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be announced according to the last predetermined operation. .

In addition, in the 50th performance mode, each symbol stop operation becomes effective on the condition that a prize is won in the general winning hole twice or more, and a pseudo consecutive notice performance is executed in response to each symbol stopping operation, We have shown an example in which the all-symbol stop operation is enabled on the condition of winning three or more times, and the chance eye preview effect is executed in response to the all-symbol stop operation.
The condition for the predetermined operation to be valid) may be the condition that a prize is won in the general prize opening four or more times.

[51st performance form]
In the 51st presentation form shown in FIG. 34, unlike the 50th presentation form, the specific presentation that can be executed differs depending on the gaming state. In the 51st performance mode, the cut-in preview performance that requires a continuous hit operation can be executed in any of the normal gaming state, variable probability state, and time saving state. On the other hand, pseudo-continuous notice performances that require each symbol stopping operation can only be executed when the gaming state is normal, and chance eye notice performances that require all symbol stopping operations can only be performed when the gaming state is a definite change state or a time-saving state. It can only be executed when

Note that in the cut-in preview performance and the pseudo continuous preview performance, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state, but in this case, the pseudo continuous preview performance that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for this purpose is given priority and prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game states are different between the pseudo consecutive preview presentation and the chance notice presentation, the operation suggestion condition will not be satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the chance notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so the characters 4000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-ren" The characters 4000b are displayed, but the characters 4000c for "chance" are not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 4000 displayed during the variable probability state or the time saving state is 3 or more, the pseudo consecutive announcement presentation is not executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state, so the word "cut-in" is displayed. 4000a and the characters 4000c for "Chance" are displayed, but the characters 4000b for "Pseudo-Run" are not displayed.

In this way, the type of specific performance that is notified, that is, the type of specific performance that can be executed, differs depending on the gaming status when the game ball enters the general winning hole, so that the game can be properly executed depending on the gaming status. It becomes possible to have different interests.

In addition, in this presentation mode, the preview presentation that requires a larger number of button icons 4000 is given priority, but this is not the only option. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition for a cut-in preview performance and the operation suggestion condition for a pseudo continuous preview performance are satisfied for the same variable display game, then if the operation suggestion condition for a cut-in preview performance and the pseudo continuous preview performance are satisfied, a preview performance with a higher probability of winning the jackpot (for example, a pseudo continuous preview performance) ) should be executed with priority.

[52nd performance form]
In the 52nd presentation form shown in FIG. 40, unlike the 50th presentation form and the 51st presentation form, the button icon 4000 is not displayed in response to the winning of a game ball to the general winning hole, and the button icon 4000 is not displayed in response to the winning of a game ball to the general winning hole. Whether or not to display any of the characters 4000a to 4000c for each winning prize, and
When displaying, the characters 4000a for "cut-in", the characters 4000b for "pseudo-ren",
and the characters 4000c for "chance" are to be displayed. FIG. 41(A) shows whether or not any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is to be displayed, and if it is to be displayed, which of the characters 4000a to 4000c is to be displayed, depending on the prize entered into each general winning slot. A display information determination table for determining the display information is shown.

When a game ball wins in the first general prize opening 50A, the production control CPU 120 receives 25
It is decided to display the characters 4000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of %, and it is decided to display the characters 4000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 75%. In addition, if a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B, characters 4000a to 4000c will be displayed at a rate of 50%.
It was decided not to display any of the above, and the word "cut-in" 4000a was displayed at a rate of 25%.
It is decided to display on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 4000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, if a game ball wins in the third general prize opening 50C, the character 400 will be awarded at a rate of 80%.
It was decided not to display any of 0a to 4000c, and "cut in" at a rate of 10%.
It is decided to display the characters 4000a on the screen, and it is decided to display the characters 4000c for "chance" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball enters the fourth general winning hole 50D, it is decided that none of the characters 4000a to 4000c will be displayed at a rate of 70%, and the characters 4000a for "cut in" will be displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display the characters 4000c on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Similarly to the above-mentioned 50th performance form and 51st performance form, when the variable display game with variable reach pattern is started with the characters 4000a of "Cut-in" being displayed, the continuous hit operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to the continuous tap operation, and a variable display game with a variable pattern with a variable time of 8 seconds or more is started with the characters 4000b of "pseudo continuous" being displayed. In this case, a notification is given to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuation notice effect is executed in response to each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is changed while the character 4000c of "chance eye" is displayed. If the display game is on hold and the variable display games executed before it are all non-reach variable patterns, a notification to perform an all-symbol stop operation will be sent, and the system will respond to the all-symbol stop operation. Execute a chance notice performance.

In the example of FIG. 41(A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed 100% of the time, and a game ball wins in the second general winning hole 50B. If a prize is won, one of the characters 4000a to 4000c will be displayed at a rate of 50%, and if a game ball is won in the third general winning slot 50C, the characters 4000a to 4 will be displayed at a rate of 20%.
If either 000c is displayed and a game ball wins in the 4th general winning slot 50C, 30
One of the characters 4000a to 4000c is displayed at a rate of %.

In this way, the rate at which the type of specific performance that can be performed is notified and the rate at which the specific performance can be executed differs depending on the general winning slot in which the game ball enters the prize. It is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether the game ball is entering the ball.

In addition, the game balls fired into the left gaming area 10A are more likely to enter the second general winning opening 50B than the first general winning opening 50A, and the gaming balls fired into the right gaming area 10B are more likely to enter the fourth general winning opening. 5
Assuming that it is configured so that it is easier to win in the third general winning hole 50C than in 0D, the general winning hole that is more difficult to win (the first general winning hole 50A in the normal state, the first general winning hole 50A in the variable probability state or the time saving state) When a game ball wins in the fourth general winning hole 50D), there is a high probability that the specific performance will be executed.

In addition, if a game ball wins in the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B,
There is a possibility that either the characters 4000a for "cut-in" or the characters 4000b for "pseudo-connection" are displayed, but the characters 4000c for "chance" are not displayed.
On the other hand, if a game ball wins in the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D,
There is a possibility that either the characters 4000a for "cut-in" or the characters 4000c for "chance" are displayed, but the characters 4000b for "pseudo-connection" are not displayed.

In this way, depending on the general winning hole into which the game ball enters, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of specific effect that can be executed differ, so that it is difficult to enter which general winning hole the game ball enters. It can draw people's attention to what they are doing and improve their interest.

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, the game ball is fired to the left gaming area 10A, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired to the right gaming area 10B, so the first general prize opening In the normal state in which a game ball wins in 50A or the second general winning hole 50B,
The percentage of displaying any of the characters 4000a to 4000c is higher than in the variable probability state or time saving state in which a game ball enters the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D, and the execution percentage of the specific effect is higher. It will be expensive.

Since interest tends to decrease when the gaming state is normal, the decrease in interest is prevented by increasing the rate at which characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which specific effects are executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state or the time saving state, the player's interest is directed to the special map game or the general map game, so the display of characters 4000a to 4000c or the execution of a specific effect based on the establishment of operation suggestion conditions are rather than the game. In some cases, characters 4000a to 40 may get in the way.
The rate at which 00c appears and the rate at which specific effects are executed are made lower than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately vary the interest of a game ball winning in the general winning hole depending on the gaming state.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41(A), when the gaming state is in the probability variable state or the time saving state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the specific effects are executed compared to when the gaming state is in the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41(A), the third
When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D, the character 40
00a to 4000c may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 41(A), the pseudo consecutive notice performance can be executed only when winning the first general winning hole 50A or the second general winning hole 50B, but similarly Alternatively, a specific performance may be provided that can only be executed when a prize is won in the fourth general winning hole 50D.

Also, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 41(A), as shown in FIG. 41(B), a game ball is won for each winning hole from the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c appear and the rate at which specific effects are executed are higher than when the game state at the time the game ball wins is the variable probability state or the time saving state. It is also possible to make it higher. In addition, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 41(B), when a game ball wins in each general winning hole in the variable probability state or in the time saving state, when a game ball wins in each general winning hole in the normal state The characters 4000a to 4000c may be displayed at a higher rate. Further, in FIG. 41(B), a specific performance that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, or a specific performance that can be performed only when the gaming state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. may be provided.

Note that this is not limited to the example in which the rate at which the characters 4000a to 4000c are displayed or the rate at which a specific performance is executed is varied depending on whether the gaming status is a normal status, a variable probability status, or a time saving status. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is being controlled, whether the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = end of the jackpot game state) Whether the number of successive jackpot game states (+1) that are later controlled to variable probability state or time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a losing combination has continued a predetermined number of times; Characters 4000a to 4000 are displayed depending on other conditions such as whether the game has been played a predetermined number of times in a row, whether the number of pending memories has reached a predetermined number, etc. The rate at which 4000c is displayed and the rate at which specific effects are executed may be varied.

[Display area of each image on the screen of image display device 5]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as follows.
Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 will be (X+1) pixels, and the maximum height will be (Y+1) pixels. Then, the coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 42(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a+1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as the vertices of the rectangular area defined as the second
Define area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β.
Furthermore, in this example, the second area β is wider than the first area α.

The first area α contains prizes related to the number of prizes won in each winning opening, such as the number of wins in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. Number information can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 42(a), the second area β includes an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 5A, 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a starting winning memory display area 5H. is provided. Note that in the examples of FIGS. 42 and 43, the second
Although the background image is visible in the area β, the background image is not visible in the first area α.

In this example, the entire background image stored in the ROM 121 as production data is
As shown in FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c), which will be described later, the overall width is (X+1) pixels, the overall height is (Y+1) pixels, and character D is climbing near the top of the mountain. This is an image of a character E climbing near the foot of a mountain. Figures 42(b)(c) and 43(e)
In the example (f), the area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates ( a+1,0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player.
Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a,
A rectangular area defined with Y) as its apex] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b)(c) and 43(e)(f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area is visible, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

In the examples of FIGS. 42(b)(c) and 43(e)(f), the first area α contains (1) "Today's number of general winnings" which is the total number of winnings in the general winning slots on that day. (2) "Today's number of navel wins" which is the total number of prizes won in the first starting prize slot on the day, and (3) "Today's number of winnings" which is the total number of prizes won in the second starting prize opening on the day. Three items are displayed: ``Number of Den Chew Prizes''.

In this embodiment, as described above, when a winning in the general winning hole occurs, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the game ball has won in any of the first general winning hole 50A to the fourth general winning hole 50D. A starting prize that specifies whether the game ball has won in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole when a winning in the starting winning hole occurs. Receives a specified command. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 can individually tally the number of prizes won in the general winning hole, the number of wins in the first starting winning hole, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning hole. In this example, (1) "Number of general prizes won today" is 70, (2) "Number of navel prizes won today"
is 521, and (3) "Number of Denchu prizes won today" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of wins in the general winning hole and the number of winnings in the starting winning hole so that they can be compared, it becomes possible to relatively understand the winning situation in each winning hole.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b) and 43(e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 5A, and the decoration is This is a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the starting winning memory display area 5H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one piece of pending information corresponding to the holding of one special symbol game. These images of the fourth symbol being variably displayed, the image of the decorative symbol being variably displayed, and the image of the pending information are all displayed only within the second area β.

It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth symbol, the display layer of the decorative symbol, and the display layer of the pending information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of one image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when one image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of one image is lower than the visibility of the other image. This means that display control takes priority over gender. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b)(c) and 43(e)(f), the area in which each image of the fourth pattern, decorative pattern, and reservation information is displayed and the background image are In this case, regarding the overlapping area, the fourth pattern, decorative pattern, and pending information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and reservation information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player's side).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display layer for error messages is assumed to be higher than the display layer for decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 43(f), the area where the decorative pattern is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap,
In this case, regarding the overlapping area, the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative pattern is easily visible (including visible), while the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible).
Display control is performed. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative symbols (on the player's side).

In addition, as a display control to make only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image is displayed as the background. The area corresponding to the first area α out of the entire area of the background image is not set as the display layer of the background image (i.e., [coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, It is also possible to use the image data of only a rectangular area defined with Y) as its apex.

Furthermore, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β out of the entire area of the background image visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set to the display layer of the background image (i.e. The entire background image (using image data of a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is the first image in a display layer higher than the display layer of the background image. By setting another background image (for example, a plain white image) for the winning number information in the area corresponding to area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be seen. You can also do it. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a separate background image (for example, a plain white image) for the number of winnings information is given a predetermined transmittance (the visibility of the image of the display layer below the display layer). , invisible when it is 0%), the image of the lower display layer can be made visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer can be made visible. The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Further, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not decrease due to the display of other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message, which does not have a display area in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. may also be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and the display layer for other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β) However, it may be arranged so that the visibility does not deteriorate.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information are all performed within the second area β, so these images Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 5, the number of wins in the general winning slot (``today's general winnings number'') and the first starting winnings may be displayed as the number of winnings information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of prizes entered into the opening (``today's number of bellybutton prizes'') and the number of prizes won into the second starting prize opening (``today's number of electric chew prizes'') is not obstructed. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information.

Then, in the image display device 5, when a winning occurs in the general winning opening while the fourth symbol is being displayed variablely, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the pending information is displayed, if a winning occurs in the general winning hole,
As shown in d), based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“Today's number of general winnings”)
) is updated. In this way, if a winning occurs in the general winning slot while the fourth symbol is being displayed variablely, the decorative symbol is variable, and the pending information is being displayed, the general winning that is displayed in the first area α will be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without hindering visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the pending information. Thereby, the player can easily understand that a prize has been won in the general winning hole and that the number of wins in the general winning hole has been updated as a result.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, the display result shown in FIG. 42 (
As shown in c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the decorative design also ends and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 5A remains lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of a miss (the display result is stopped and displayed), and as a confirmed decorative symbol, Missing symbols such as "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed), and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all of the decorative patterns (of the state) are displayed in the second area β, depending on whether these images are displayed on the image display device 5, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α As information, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening ("today's general prize winning number"), the number of prizes won in the first starting prize opening ("today's navel winning number"), and the number of prizes won in the second starting prize opening The visibility of the number (``today's number of Denchu winnings'') is not obstructed. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Then, in the image display device 5, when a winning occurs in the general winning hole while the fourth symbol is being stopped and displayed and the decorative symbol is being stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42(d), ,
Based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the general winning hole designation command, the number of wins in the general winning hole displayed in the first area α (``today's general winning number'') is updated. In this way, if a win occurs in the general winning hole while the fourth symbol is being stopped and displayed and the decorative symbol is being stopped, the number of wins in the general winning hole displayed in the first area α will be , updated without obstructing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily understand that a prize has been won in the general winning hole and that the number of wins in the general winning hole has been updated as a result.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 42(b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without hindering visibility, but the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated. Even when a winning occurs, as in the case of the general winning opening, a winning will be made to the first starting winning opening regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. numbers are updated without obstructing visibility. Also, when a winning occurs in the second starting winning hole, as in the case of the general winning hole, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings to the second starting winning opening is updated without hindering visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 43(e) and 43(f), when the performance control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, "Error has occurred") is displayed on the image display device 5. An image of the text "I have done so." is displayed. As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative pattern display layer. Therefore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative pattern is being variably displayed or when the decorative pattern is being stopped and displayed, the area where the decorative pattern is displayed and the error Regarding the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and to make the decorative pattern difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 43(b), when viewed from the player, the error message is placed in front (on the player's side) of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed (or the decorative pattern that is being stopped and displayed). appears to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43(f), since the error message is displayed within the second area β, depending on the error message being displayed on the image display device 5, the error message may be displayed within the first area α. The information on the number of prizes displayed in The visibility of the number of prizes entered into the 2-start prize opening (``today's number of electric chew prizes'') is not obstructed. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information without depending on the display of the error message.

Then, in the image display device 5, when a winning occurs in the general winning hole while the error message is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 43(g), the effect control CPU 1
20 receives the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (``today's general winning number'') is updated. In this way, if a prize is won in the general prize opening while an error message is being displayed, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening displayed in the first area α will be displayed without disturbing the visibility. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily understand that a prize has been won in the general winning hole and that the number of wins in the general winning hole has been updated as a result.

In addition, the examples in FIGS. 43(f) and (g) show examples in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without hindering visibility, but the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated. Even when it occurs,
As in the case of the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening is updated without hindering visibility, regardless of the display of the error message. Also, when a prize is won in the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered, regardless of the error message displayed, as in the case of the general winning opening. It will be updated without any trouble.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 43(f), the text "An error has occurred" is displayed to simply notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. However, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specification command. For example, when an abnormality detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred is received, the text ``A magnetic error has occurred.'' is displayed, and an abnormality detection specification command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is displayed. Sometimes, the text ``A vibration error has occurred.'' may be displayed, and when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave error has occurred, the text ``A radio wave error has occurred.'' may be displayed. .

In this example, as shown in FIG. 42(a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a+1 ,0) and coordinates (X,
Although the rectangular area defined by Y) as the vertex is defined as the second area β, the first area can display the number of winnings information, as well as the decorative pattern, the fourth pattern, pending information, and error messages. The second area is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap with each other on the screen.

(Display/hide setting of winning number information)
As explained in FIG. 4, the operation part of the display changeover switch 32, which is operated by opening the glass door frame 3a forward (operable by the staff at the amusement center but not by the player), is in the display position (second position). position), and when the setting screen for players (see Figure 5) is set to display the number of wins in the general winning opening by the player's operation, the general winning opening Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings etc. is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 are the display modes of the screen when the settings to display the number of winnings information are made in this way. In the first area α, not only the number of prizes won in the general winning hole, but also the number of prizes won in the first starting winning hole (so-called "belly button") and the number of winnings in the second starting winning hole (so-called "electronic chew"). The number shall also be displayed. That is, depending on the operation of the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning hole and the number of winnings in the second starting winning hole.

Here, as explained in FIG. 4, the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to non-display (
1st position), the operation button 30 can be used to press the operation button 30 to obtain information on the number of prizes (the number of prizes in the general prize opening, the number of prizes in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) ) The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of whether or not the setting to display is made. Furthermore, even if the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the display setting (second position), if the operation button 30 is not set to display the winning number information (in the case of non-display setting) ), the winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

The examples shown in FIGS. 44(b) and 44(c) are the display modes of the screen in a state where the setting is such that the number of winnings information is not displayed, and the setting is made so that the number of winnings information is not displayed. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening (
The number of prizes won in the so-called "belly button" and the number of prizes won in the second starting prize opening (so-called "electronic chew") are also not displayed.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings information according to the setting operations on the gaming parlor side and in accordance with the setting operations on the player side, it is possible to ,Also,
Information on the number of winnings can be displayed according to the player's judgment.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), (b), and (c), when the number of winnings information is set not to be displayed, the error message display area 5E,
The fourth symbol display areas 5A, 5B, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and starting winning memory display area 5H are common. In other words, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and pending information displayed in the second area β are determined by the settings for displaying the number of winnings information and the number of winnings. The setting does not change even if the information is not displayed.
This simplifies display control associated with setting changes for setting whether or not to display winning number information.

On the other hand, when the winning number information is set not to be displayed, as shown in FIGS. 44(a), (b), and (c), when the winning number information is set to be displayed (display examples in FIGS. 42 and 43). Unlike, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. Figure 44(a) (
b) In the example of (c), of the entire area of the background image [a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices], the area corresponding to the first area α [ a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices], and an area corresponding to the second area β [
A rectangular area defined with coordinates (a+1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 44(a), (b), and (c), the player uses
, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices can be visually recognized, and the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image are The character E included in the rectangular area defined as is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of specific images (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and pending information), the settings to display the number of winnings information and the display of the number of winnings information can be set. While reducing the control burden by not changing (uniforming) the settings, other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting to display the number of winnings information and the setting to not display the number of winnings information. By making the range different, it is possible to improve the interest when the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(b), in the image display device 5, variable display of the fourth symbol,
Even if a prize is won in the general prize opening while variable display of decorative symbols and pending information are being displayed, the number of prizes information is not displayed as shown in FIG. 44(d). Due to this, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening is not displayed. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 44(c),
In the image display device 5, even if a winning occurs in the general winning hole while the fourth symbol is being displayed in a stopped state and the decorative symbol is being stopped and displayed, the winning will occur as shown in FIG. 44(d). Since the number information is set not to be displayed, the number of prizes won in the general prize opening is not displayed.

Note that the examples in Figures 44(b), (c), and (d) show examples in which the number of wins in the general winning hole is not displayed even when a winning in the general winning hole occurs. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening will not be displayed even if a winning occurs in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening will not be displayed. Also, the number of prizes won in the second starting prize opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening according to the player's operation.

(Each item of prize winning information)
FIG. 45 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. In addition, Figure 4
Items 5 are all related to the number of wins in the general winning slot, but similarly, items related to the number of wins in the first starting winning slot and the number of winnings in the second starting winning slot. Items related to can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "today's general number of winnings (referred to as A1)" which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning slot since the gaming machine was powered on. When the power is turned on, the production control CPU 120
A1 can be totaled by setting the value of the general prize winning counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 and adding 1 to the value of the general winning prize counter every time a general winning opening designation command is received. There is.

Furthermore, it is possible to display "today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the gaming machine was powered on. The production control CPU 120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and changes the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. The total number of outs can be counted by adding 1 at a time, and A2 can be counted by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "today's general prize ball number (assumed to be A3)" which is the total value of the prize ball number awarded based on winnings in each general prize opening since the power is turned on of the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to display "today's general prize ball ratio (assumed to be A4)" which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the gaming machine was powered on.

The ROM 121 contains the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening 50A to the fourth starting winning opening.
The number of prize balls determined for each winning hole of the general winning hole 50D and the big winning hole is stored. The performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and each time a general winning hole designation command is received, the general winning hole designation command is specified. A3 can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole to the value of the general prize ball counter. In addition, CPU120 for production control
When the power is turned on, the value of the prize ball counter stored in the RAM 122 is set to 0, and the starting prize opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the winning to the big prize opening are designated. Each time a grand prize opening command is received, the total number of prize balls can be tallied by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter.
A4 can be counted by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of balls awarded.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies whether the current gaming state is a low base state or a high base state by specifying the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins prizes in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the number of winnings information in the high base state (C1 to C4) can be classified and tabulated.

Specifically, it is possible to display "the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)", which is the total number of wins in each general winning hole in the low base state, and the total number of wins in each general winning hole in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general number of winnings in the high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total number of winnings.

When the power is turned on, the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize winning number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize winning number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0.
shall be set. Then, during the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is increased by adding 1 to the value of the low base medium general winning number counter every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period in which the game state specified by the received game state designation command is either a variable probability state or a short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is calculated each time a general winning opening designation command is received. C1 can be totaled by adding 1 at a time.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio in low base state (referred to as B2)" which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning ratio in a high base state (referred to as C2)".

It is assumed that the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base mid-out number counter and the value of the high base mid-out number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0 when the power is turned on. In the normal state, the number of outs during low bases can be totaled by adding 1 to the value of the number of outs during low bases counter each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. B2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of outs during low bases. On the other hand, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the number of outs in high bases can be totaled by adding 1 to the value of the number of outs in high bases counter each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. C2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of outs during high bases.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball number in low base state (referred to as B3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to each general prize opening in low base state, and It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)", which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in each general prize opening in the state.

When the power is turned on, the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0.
shall be set. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole specified by the received general winning hole designation command is calculated using the low base medium general prize ball number counter. By adding it to the value, B3 (``Number of general prize balls in low base state'') can be totaled, and the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either a variable probability state or a time saving state. During the period, by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole specified by the received general winning hole designation command to the value of the general prize ball number counter during high base, ”) can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in low base state (referred to as B4)" which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in low base state, and the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in high base state. C
It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in a high base state (assumed to be C4)" which is a ratio of 3.

When the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 sets both the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 to 0. . In the normal state, each time a starting winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a big winning opening command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening specified by each command is calculated for the low base medium prize. By adding it to the value of the pitch counter, it is possible to total the number of winning pitches in low base, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of winning pitches in low base, B4 ("low base state") can be calculated. It is now possible to compile the general prize ball ratio. On the other hand, in the variable probability state or time saving state, each time a starting winning opening designation command, general winning opening designation command, and big winning opening command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening specified by each command is increased. By adding it to the value of the base medium prize pitch counter, it is possible to tally the number of high base medium prize balls, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base medium prize balls, C4 ("high base medium prize pitch number") is calculated. It is now possible to compile the general prize ball ratio in the base state.

In this way, since it is possible to compile information related to the number of wins in the general winning slot for each gaming state, the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is high base state (probability variable state or time saving state), attention is paid to items C1 to C4. Become.

In addition, when the gaming state is a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α, but does not display the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is the high base state , C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, items B1 to B4 and C1
Although the items from ~C4 are displayed in the first area α, in the low base state, the items from B1 to B4 are displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items from C1 to C4, and in the high base state The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of information on the number of prizes won during the set period)
In addition, the production control CPU 120 is capable of compiling the information on the number of prizes won in the period set by the player, and calculates the total number of prizes won in each general prize opening in the set period, ``Number of general prizes in the set period ( D1)" can be displayed in the first area α.

When a totaling period is set according to a player's operation as shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize winning counter during the set period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and also performs the totaling. The value of the timer is set to a set period (aggregation period according to the player's operation), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winnings counter during the set period is incremented by 1, and when the aggregation timer times out (when the set aggregation period has elapsed), the general winnings during the set period are determined. The value of the number counter is displayed as D1 in the first area α.

Note that the total timer is updated during a period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the last detection signal was received from the out ball detector), while during a period when the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the last detection signal was received from the out-of-ball detector, the total timer may be stopped without being updated. In this way, a period in which game balls are not shot into the game area 10 may be excluded from the total period.

In addition, when the tally timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize winning counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again to 0 during the set period (player's (according to the operation) and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, each time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winnings counter during the set period is added, and when the aggregation timer times out again (when the set aggregation period has elapsed again), the value of the general winnings counter during the setting period is added. The value is displayed in the first area α as D1. In this way, D1 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed for each aggregation period set by the player.

Furthermore, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio for the set period (referred to as D2)" which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine during the set period. The production control CPU 120 has a RAM 12
When the value of the general number of wins during the setting period counter stored in 2 is set to 0, the value of the number of wins during the setting period counter stored in the RAM 122 is also set to 0, By adding 1 to the value of the out number counter during the set period each time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, it is possible to total the number of outs during the set period. D2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of D1.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the set period (referred to as D3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in each general winning hole in the set period. In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio for the set period (referred to as D4)" which is the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls for the set period.

When a totaling period according to a player's operation shown in FIG. 46, which will be described later, is set, the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, and The value of the aggregation timer is set to a set period (aggregation period according to the player's operation), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time a general winning hole designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole specified by the general winning hole designation command is added to the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period, and the total timer starts. The value of the general prize ball counter during the set period when timed out (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

Additionally, when the tally timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the tally timer is reset again to 0 during the set period (player (aggregation period according to the operation), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period is added, and when the aggregation timer times out again (when the set aggregation period has elapsed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed as D3 in the first area α. In this way, D3 corresponding to each aggregation period set by the player is displayed.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122 to 0, the production control CPU 120 also sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 122. The value of is set to 0, and each time a starting winning opening designation command, a general winning opening specification command, and a big winning opening command that specifies winning in the big winning opening are received, the winning opening specified by each command is set to 0. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls during the set period to the value of the number of prize balls during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be totaled by calculating .

In addition, since the general winning hole designation command received by the production control CPU 120 specifies which general winning hole the game ball has won, the production control CPU 120 specifies the general winning hole from the first general winning hole 50A to the first general winning hole 50A. The number of prizes entered into each of the four general prize openings 50D is tallied individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are tallied for each general prize opening.
It is possible to display the total value in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of wins in the general winning slot shown above, each item related to the number of wins in the first starting winning slot described below, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning slot. Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined depending on the gaming state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of wins in the general winning slot shown above, each item related to the number of wins in the first starting winning slot described below, and
Among the items related to the number of prizes entered into the second starting prize opening, which one is to be displayed in the first area α is determined by operation on the game hall side (for example, operation using the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30). The selection may be made possible by the player's operation (for example, an operation using the operation button 30).

In addition, each item related to the number of wins in the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening described below, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. Regarding each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the reference value is stored in the ROM 121 in association with each item. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the standard value of that item, and if the total value has not reached the standard value, , as shown in FIG. 46 (4) to be described later, it is possible to display a message informing that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of that item. . As a result, the player selects a gaming machine by understanding whether the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value compared to the standard value of the item. (Whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine in question)
It can be used as a basis for judgment.

Next, a method for setting the aggregation period will be explained using FIG. 46. For example, the aggregation period setting screen in FIG. 46 further sets an aggregation period when the selection screen in FIG. A screen that is displayed when a selection screen is displayed for the user to select whether or not to do so, and the selection to set an aggregation period is made on that selection screen (if the intention to set an aggregation period is confirmed). shall be.

On the setting screen of FIG. 46(1), a message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 30 is displayed below it. On the settings screen,
An icon containing the text "10 minutes", an icon containing the text "30 minutes", and an icon containing the text "60 minutes" are displayed, and the message "Select with the jog dial and then press the OK button" is displayed. Furthermore, an arrow is displayed to prompt the user to press the operation button 30 (jog dial) after rotating it.

To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, rotate the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the words "10 minutes" and then press the operation button 30. The period is 10 minutes.'' is displayed, and the aggregation period is 10 minutes.
minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. In addition, when setting the aggregation period to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 46(1), if you press the operation button 30 with the icon containing the characters "30 minutes" selected, As shown in “The setting period is 3
It's 0 minutes. ” message is displayed and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, D1
The setting period for ~D4 is 30 minutes. In addition, when setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, rotate the operation button 30 (jog dial) to the right to select the icon containing the words "60 minutes" and then press the operation button 30. A message "The setting period is 60 minutes." is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the set period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 46, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(3), in the first area α, the number of wins in the general winning slot per 30 minutes is displayed as "the number of general winnings in the set period (D1)". In the example in Figure 46 (3), 30 is stored as the standard value for the number of wins in the general prize openings per 30 minutes, whereas the aggregate value of the number of prizes in the general prize openings per 30 minutes is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, no notification is given that the total value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG.
0 is stored, whereas the total value of the number of wins in the general prize opening per 30 minutes is 29, so the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a message indicating that the total value has not reached the standard value (a message saying "It is below the standard value (30 times/30 minutes)") is displayed.

(Items related to the number of prizes entered into the starting prize opening)
In addition, since the production control CPU 120 receives a starting winning hole designation command that specifies which of the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole has won when a winning occurs in the starting winning hole, Using the same method as the aggregation process when receiving a general winning slot designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning slots won a prize, "Number of winnings in today's 1st starting winning slot (A1)" is calculated. "Equivalent)", "Ratio of winnings in today's first starting winning slot (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in today's first starting winning opening (equivalent to A3)", and "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winnings in today's first starting prize slot to today's total number of prize balls (
``Number of prizes won in today's 2nd starting prize opening (corresponding to A1)'', ``Ratio of winnings in today's 2nd starting prize opening (corresponding to A2)'', ``Today's number of prizes won in the 2nd starting prize opening (corresponding to A2)'' 2. The number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the starting prize slot (equivalent to A3)" and "Today's 2nd prize ball number against today's total number of prize balls.
The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winnings in the starting prize opening (equivalent to A4)" is totaled,
It can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "Number of wins to the first starting winning hole in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Ratio of winnings to the first starting winning hole in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "Number of winnings to the first starting winning hole in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "Number of winnings to the first starting winning hole in the low base state (corresponding to B2)" The number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the first starting prize opening (corresponding to B3)", and "the number of prize balls awarded in the first starting winning opening in the low base state relative to the number of prize balls awarded in the low base state""Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings (corresponding to B4)", "Number of prizes to the second starting prize opening in a low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting prize in a low base state" Ratio of winnings to the winning opening (corresponding to B2),""Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B3)," and "Number of prize balls awarded in the low base state based on winnings to the second starting winning opening (corresponding to B3)." The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the second starting prize opening in the low base state to the number of prize balls awarded (corresponding to B4)" can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. It is.

In addition, "Number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", "Ratio of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)", "Number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)" The number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the first starting prize opening (corresponding to C3)", and "the number of prize balls awarded in the first starting winning opening in the high base state relative to the number of prize balls awarded in the high base state" ``Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings (corresponding to C4)'', ``number of winnings to the second starting prize opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)'', and ``second starting prize in the high base state'' Ratio of winnings to the winning opening (equivalent to C2),""Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)," and "Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)." The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the second starting prize opening in the high base state to the number of prize balls awarded (corresponding to C4) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. It is.

In addition, "Number of wins in the first starting prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D1)", "Ratio of winnings in the first starting winning hole in the setting period (equivalent to D2)", "First starting winnings in the set period""Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the opening (equivalent to D3)" and "Awarded based on winning in the first starting prize opening in the set period for the number of prize balls awarded in the set period""Ratio of the number of prize balls won (equivalent to D4)", "Number of prizes won in the second starting winning hole in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "Ratio of winnings in the second starting winning hole in the setting period ( (equivalent to D2)”,
“Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the second starting winning slot during the set period (equivalent to D3)
”, and “ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the second starting prize opening during the setting period to the number of prize balls awarded during the setting period (equivalent to D4)”. , can be displayed in the first area α.

(Yakuren (ren ratio), display of yaku ratio)
In addition, in the game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 also controls each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, etc.). The number of game balls entering the area (also referred to as the "entering area") is counted. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is capable of displaying predetermined information such as the winning ratio and the winning ratio on the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 provided on the main board 11.

As mentioned above, gaming machine manufacturers usually design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test).
Furthermore, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is checked to see what kind of adjustments have been made and whether the gaming media are entering the general winning area as frequently as designed as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. below,
The display of the ratio of accessories, etc. will be explained. Hereinafter, the display of the tally of game balls, the proportion of accessories, etc. on the main board 11 will be explained.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 49 is a board that performs control regarding games. The main board 11 is shown in FIG.
1A, it is enclosed in a board case 201, and a display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back side of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 is placed in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. This is the front of the game machine 1, and is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 contains information regarding winnings in the game, such as the number of prize balls that land in the first starting winning hole (belly button), the number of winning balls that hit the second starting winning hole (electronic chew), and the number of winning balls that hit the second starting winning hole (electronic chew). attacker)
The number of prize balls that land in the winning hole (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the percentage of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( continuous ratio) (%
), Displays the winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the big winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is supposed to be done. Yakuren (ren ratio) is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) (the number of consecutive prize balls acquired below) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) out of the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) (the number of balls won as prize balls below) This is the proportion that The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is:
The number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker), the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew), and those other than the grand prize opening (attacker) and the second starting prize opening (electronic chew). This is the sum of the number of prize balls that land in the winning holes (first starting winning hole, general winning hole). In addition, the big prize opening (attacker) and the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball changes as the width through which the game ball can pass changes. be. Also, there is a big prize opening (
The winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electronic chew) are fixed accessories, and the width through which the game ball can pass is fixed. The expected winning percentage is a fixed value.

The method of aggregating and calculating information regarding winnings in games is as follows:
The number of prize balls (general prize ball number) for winning the starting hole (belly button) and the general winning hole (sode), and the number of prize balls for winning the second starting winning hole (electronic chew), which is the ordinary electric prize ball. number (Electric Chew Prize Ball Number), Special Electric Award Ball Number (Attacker Prize Ball Number) which is the number of prize balls that hit the big prize opening (attacker)
Total. The total is considered as one set, and 10 sets, or 60,000 Yakuren (
Calculate the consecutive ratio (%) and yaku ratio (%). In addition, the number of prize balls that enter the first starting hole (belly button) and the general winning hole (sode) to be tallied (general prize ball number), the number of ordinary electric ball prize balls (electronic chew prize ball number),
The number of special electric award pitches (attacker award pitch number) is recorded in a ring buffer, which has a recording capacity for at least 11 sets, and is updated every set.
Furthermore, it stores a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 11 sets of 66,000 items, and calculates the cumulative Yakuren (ren ratio) (%) and Yaku ratio (%) within the range of these values. It can be calculated.

The display monitor 29 displays the 60,000 yakuren (ren ratio) (%), yaku ratio (%), and the cumulative yakuren (ren ratio) (%) and yaku ratio (%) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 The display can be switched every second). That is, four displays can be switched and displayed using one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of prize balls won by winning the first starting hole (belly button) and the winning ball winning the second starting winning hole (electronic chew) are totaled as the game progresses. The number of prize balls depending on the prize and the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) will change. Then,
For example, if you reflect the number of winning balls after displaying the 60,000 Yakuren (Ren ratio) (%) on the 60,000 Yaku Ratio (%) that is displayed afterwards, the 60,000 Yakuren (Ren ratio) (%) will be reflected. The role of (
There is a risk that a discrepancy will occur between the consecutive ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces.
Therefore, the number of prize balls that land in the first starting hole (belly button), the number of prize balls that land in the second starting hole (electronic chew), the number of prize balls that land in the big winning hole (attacker), and the total number of prize balls. The number is input and the total is calculated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, 60,000 Yakuren (Ren ratio) (%)
This kind of discrepancy can be avoided by doing this at the same time as the display timing, etc.).

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls that land in the second starting winning hole (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the big winning hole (attacker) are calculated as follows. A method of calculating the accessory ratio (winning ratio (%)) when the total number of accessory balls acquired is 42,000 will be explained. In the following explanation, the total number of balls acquired refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Further, the number of bonus balls acquired refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media enter prizes in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. Therefore, Yakuren (ren ratio) can be calculated using the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio is
It can be determined using the following equation (2).
Yakuren (ren ratio) = [Number of consecutive Yakuba balls acquired / Total number of acquired balls] × 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive balls acquired + number of balls acquired) / total number acquired] × 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of acquired balls is 42,000, the accessory ratio is calculated by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 (0.70, rounded down to three decimal places).
However, since microcomputers used in gaming machines cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of acquired balls is 1
Multiply by 00 to get 4,200,000. Then, divide this 4,200,000 by 60,000.
As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, if you want to obtain the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point, 1
Just multiply it by 000.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, calculate the total number of prize balls to 10
Divide by 0 to get 600. Then, divide 42,000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%.
That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, in order to obtain the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but in order to calculate the long-term accessory ratio, a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, the number of balls acquired is 3.
00A410h is stored in the byte storage area.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method that is a simplified version of the second calculation method will now be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h to make the total number of prize balls 00EAh.
, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the number of balls acquired as an accessory, 00A410h, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down, and the number of balls acquired as an accessory is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, similarly to the second calculation method above, divide the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100)
and calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From the 78 found here, the accessory ratio is found to be 78%.

Although the third calculation method facilitates calculations on a microcomputer used in a gaming machine, an error of +12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of bonus balls acquired are both 10 times the error, the error will be +1%. In other words, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and the value approximates the original value.

Further, the board case 201 is made of a translucent material, so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) into which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for dissipating heat from the electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged in a position where the heat radiation holes are not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. Note that "directly in front" here means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.

Further, the board case 201 is provided with a sticker for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 11. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG.
For example, when the display monitor 29 is placed in the center of the main board 11, other electrical components may be placed in a second part of the main board 11 that is different from the first part (for example, around the periphery of the main board 11). , a hole, a heat radiation hole, and a seal may be arranged at a portion of the board case corresponding to the second portion of the main board 11. In particular, the heat radiation hole is preferably provided near the display monitor 29 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiation hole be arranged at a position that is not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, since visibility on the display monitor 29 is not obstructed, it is easy to confirm information regarding winnings.

Further, it is preferable to prevent the wiring from overlapping a portion of the board case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 11. Specifically, the part of the board case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 11 should not overlap with the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. Make it. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being obstructed by the wiring.

In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying errors in the gaming machine, but in order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display on the display monitor 29, it must be placed a predetermined distance away or placed near other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so that they are sandwiched between them. The other electronic components mentioned here are preferably large control components such as a CPU, for example.

In addition, there is a storage area in which information regarding winnings in games is stored (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information regarding winnings in games stored in ring buffers with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls, The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, but may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further explained later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated and initialized if an abnormality is detected, or if the value of the number of balls acquired as an accessory is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls stored,
If an event that cannot occur under the circumstances is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls consecutively acquired is larger than the value of the number of balls acquired, the memory area where information related to winnings in the game is stored. Initialization processing may also be performed. Further, an abnormal count error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while or after the abnormal count error display or warning display is performed. The abnormal count error display and warning display will be further explained later.

To calculate the winning ratio (%), for example, the total number of balls acquired is 34,321, and the number of balls acquired as accessories is 19,876.
If the number is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 19876 by using 34321 as a divisor.
19876/34321=0.57912..., and it is calculated that the winning ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculations using decimal points, so the following calculation formula is used. 198
In the division of 76/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475... Since the fractions below the decimal point are rounded down, a 57% hand ratio (%) is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be nothing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (all values except the most significant bit are 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are each 32799. If you calculate this using the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if you replace it with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, you will get 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is +0.3%.
The error will be. For example, if you round down the decimal point and perform the calculation, the accurate value is 69.9%.
, if the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, then 69% →
It is conceivable that a 1% error will be displayed on the display at 70%, but even with a 1% error on the display, the error is very small. can be displayed.

Furthermore, when using the above calculation method, the total number of pitches acquired is divided by 100, so if the total number of pitches acquired is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when the number is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. When it is less than 10,000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error becomes. Therefore, the total number of balls acquired is more than a certain number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits)
) is totaled by the counter, the display monitor 29 shows Yaku Ratio (%), Yaku Ren (Ren Ratio) (%
) is not displayed, or even if it is displayed there is a possibility that the error may be large. You can.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the Yaku Ratio (%) and Yakuren (Ren Ratio) (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched at a predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate.
In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to Denchu or Attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the winning ratio (%) after 30 seconds.
If it is displayed as a value of consecutive winnings (%), there is a risk that the values of winning ratio (%) and consecutive winnings (%) will deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the winning ratio (%) and the winning ratio (ren ratio) (%) be calculated within the same interruption and the calculated values are displayed sequentially.

Furthermore, if the number that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case 10
99 may be displayed instead of 0. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51(A), numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed as part of the upper two digits.

In addition, in the above calculation method, an example was shown in which the total number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired as accessories, and the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories were added to the counter, but the calculation method is as follows: The installed sensor detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection results, the number of prize balls for each prize is individually tallied, and then a counter for the number of prize balls won and a counter for the number of consecutive prize balls won. You may calculate the value to be aggregated into . In addition, based on the detection results, a sensor installed individually on the attacker and a sensor installed after the discharge passages from which the game media won by the attacker and the game media won in the electric chew are discharged merge. The value to be added to the counter for the number of balls acquired as an accessory and the counter for the number of consecutive balls acquired as an accessory may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio will be specifically explained. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which the winning of game media is detected by sensors provided on each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the number of prize balls for each is individually tallied based on the detection results.

A display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 of the gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 1, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 (see FIG. 1) provided in the gaming machine frame 3, as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board 2, there is a main board 11.
In addition to the above, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a firing control board are also provided. The main board 11 is the main board 11
It is arranged at a position that does not overlap with other peripheral boards. Note that the main board 11 may overlap each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main board 11 may be stacked on top of each peripheral board.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a big winning number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 21A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winnings counter is
The second starting port switch 22B is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected.

The first general prize winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general prize winning port switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 24B. The third general winning a prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning a prize opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning a prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning a prize opening switch 24D. The big winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

Further, a clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is placed on the back side of the game board 2 in a position that cannot be easily operated by an employee or the like. By operating the clear switch, data used for winning combinations (renbi) and winning ratios stored in the RAM 102, which will be explained later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of Yakuren (Renbi) or Yaku ratio has to be recalculated, such as when a problem occurs in the calculation of Yakuren (Renbi) or Yaku ratio. It is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for normal calculation of yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio. Furthermore, when the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 is an RTC 106
The current time can be detected by The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, etc. by performing initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the operating hours of the gaming hall.

The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201, as shown in FIG. 51(A). A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and unauthorized acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "crimped board case").

Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a seal 11S is attached to the board case 201 to prove that the main board 11 is enclosed. For example, the seal 11S is pasted across the removed portion of the board case 201. The seal 11S is located at a distance from the main board 11, and the display monitor 29
The display monitor 29 is placed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29 . In this way, the display monitor 29 is placed in a position where it is not hidden by the seal 11S.

The display monitor 29 includes four-digit display sections: a first display section 29A, a second display section 29B, a third display section 29C, and a fourth display section 29D. The first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29D are
Both are composed of 7 segments formed by 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display sections 2
Each of the display sections 9A to 29D can be lit or blinked in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

The display monitor 29 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 51(B). The aggregation period is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B of the upper two digits, and the third display section of the lower two digits is displayed.
Numerical values are displayed in percentages on the display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. In display No. 1,
Short-term winning ratios are displayed, and in display No. 2, short-term winning ratios are displayed. Display No.3
, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed.

The short term here means a period during which the number of prize balls paid out (number of acquired balls) was 60,000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period since the start of calculation of Yakuren (ren ratio) and Yaku ratio, or the total period after once resetting the calculation of Yakuren (Ren ratio) and Yaku ratio. do.

In addition, in the above example, the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the yakuren (ren ratio) may be the ratio of the number of prize balls that hit the jackpot during the jackpot game state to the total number of prize balls. In addition, the winning ratio is the total number of prize balls, and the winning ratio is the number of prize balls that enter the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the winning number of winning balls during the jackpot gaming state among the total number of prize balls. It is also possible to use the ratio of the number of prize balls resulting from winning the prize.

When the display No. 1 short-term winning ratio is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B, and when the display No. 2 short-term winning ratio is displayed, "y6.""y7." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B. In addition, when the display No. 1 short-term yakuren (ren ratio) is displayed, the short-term yakuen ren (ren ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B, When the display No. 2 short-term role ratio is displayed,
The short-term winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B, and the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, "A7." is displayed on the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B. In addition, when the total cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed, the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D,
When the total cumulative winning combination (ren ratio) is displayed as a percentage (% display) and the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. is displayed as a percentage (% display).

In calculating the winning ratio and winning ratio, the main board 11 uses the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the game ball that entered the fourth general winning opening from the first general winning opening. The number of visitors is being counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the first gate switch 21A.
and second gate switch 21B, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port switch 22
B, the count switch 23, and the status confirmation process of checking the status of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) of the first general winning a prize opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning a prize opening switch 24D.

In this process of checking the status of each switch, it is determined which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When a detection signal is output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first starting port switch 22A, Second
When a detection signal is output from the starting port switch 22B, the values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, a big winning is determined. When the values of the number counters are added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D, By adding the values of the first general winnings counter, the second general winnings counter, the third general winnings counter, and the fourth general winnings counter, the number of game balls entering each entry area (to each winning opening) (number of winning game balls). Note that the value of each counter is R
It is stored in AM102.

In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together with a series of processes for checking the status of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status confirmation process). ), without running a separate aggregation program, that is,
The number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of programs to be executed.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning hole based on the aggregated number of winning balls in each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of prize balls in the RAM 102 for each winning hole. let The number of prize balls due to winning of game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out in one winning to the winning hole by the number of winnings to the winning hole. The number of prize balls awarded by winning game balls is as follows:
It is determined in advance for each prize opening.

The number of prize balls for each winning hole classified here is as shown in Figure 52.
Prize balls for winning from the general winning hole to the 4th general winning hole (Sode)), 1st starting winning hole prize ball (1st prize ball)
This is the number of prize balls (prize balls that land in the starting prize opening (belly button)), regular electric prize balls (prize balls that land in the electric chew), and special electric prize balls (prize balls that land in the attacker). . Also, RAM10
2 also remembers the total number of balls awarded. Note that the CPU 103 separately tallies the number of winning game balls in the general winning hole and the number of winning game balls in the first starting hole, but the number of winning game balls in the general winning hole and the first starting hole The number of winning game balls may be totaled together. In addition, the number of prize balls for the general winning hole prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting hole prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls for the general winning hole prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting hole prize ball are calculated separately. may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls that enter each winning hole for each number of 6000 winning balls. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls that have won in each winning hole for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. 0th
The 11 storage areas from the storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can easily store up to 6000 pieces of data.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. The storage area for the total and cumulative total for 10 sets consists of a maximum of 3 bytes of counters, so 2
It is possible to store 56×256×256=16777216 data, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be stored with plenty of room.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a winning ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and total cumulative winning ratios and winning combinations (renbi). The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and winning ratio (ren ratio) for the 10 sets and the total cumulative amount based on the number of prize balls based on the winning number of game balls in each prize opening for the 10 sets and the cumulative total. , are stored in the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio storage area that stores the winning ratio and winning combination (renbi) for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. The Wakuren (Renbi) Waku Ratio storage area that stores the Wakuren (Renbi) and Wakuren (Renbi) of the 10 sets and the total amount is each made up of a maximum 1-byte counter. If the 10 sets and the total cumulative winning ratio and winning combination (ren ratio) are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be explained. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 includes the above-mentioned built-in register,
It has a memory space for accessing ROM 101, RAM 102, etc. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 53, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are
16 from 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter) in the memory space
It is allocated to the built-in ROM area of KB area. The CPU 103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

Also, the address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are FE00H to F in the memory space.
It is allocated to the built-in register area of EBFH. The CPU 103 reads data from the built-in registers and writes data to the registers via this built-in register area.

Further, the address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are F000H to F000H in the memory space.
It is allocated to the 3FFH RWM area (built-in RAM area). The CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from or write data to the RAM 102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFF
FH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are considered unused areas.

Further, specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, a used area program area, a used area data area, an unused area program area, and an unused area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. Further, a free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, free areas are allocated between the used area data area and the unused area program area, and between the unused area program area and the unused area data area. The CPU 103 specifies this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101.

Among these, the used area program area is composed of instruction data (opcodes) corresponding to multiple types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data of game-related programs related to the progress of is stored. The game-related programs stored in the usage area program area include a game control program, which is a program for controlling games, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special symbols, general symbols, etc. There is.
These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the usage area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game,
This is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a jackpot lottery program for lottery for transition to a jackpot game state.

The unused area program area includes instruction data (opcodes) for the CPU 103 to calculate the winning ratio and winning ratio, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data of a program for calculating and displaying the yakuren (renbi) and the winning ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the yakuren (renbi) and win ratio related program) is stored. Yakuren (renbi) yaku ratio related programs include a yakuren (renbi) yaku ratio calculation program to calculate yakuren (renbi) and yaku ratio, and a monitor that displays yakuren (renbi) and yaku ratio. 29 is included. The unused area program area stores a winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program and a winning winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program. The yakuren (renbi) yakuren ratio calculation program is a program different from the progression of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the unused area program area will be further explained. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of a used area program area and an unused area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 55, the used area program area includes game-related programs such as "switch input processing", "digit output processing 1", "jump processing to unused area (digit output processing 2)", and "error detection processing". ``Random number update processing'' ``Special figure processing'' ``Public figure processing'' ``Information output processing'' ``Prize ball processing'' ``Test terminal processing'' ``Solenoid processing'' Each program of ``jump processing to ratio calculation processing'' is stored. In addition, in the unused program area, Yakuren (
Programs for ``digit output processing 2'', ``jump processing to used area (error detection processing)'', and ``hand ratio calculation processing'' are stored. In the CPU 103, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt processing. In addition, in digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2, the first special symbol display device 4A is activated by dynamic lighting.
, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the LEDs in the display monitor 29
Display. However, instead of dynamic lighting, static lighting may be used.

Among these processes, the program that performs "digit output processing 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "digit output processing 2" corresponds to the yakuren (renbi) hand ratio display output program. . In addition, "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter referred to as
Also referred to as "game progress control processing." ) corresponds to the game control program, and the program that performs the "winning ratio calculation process" corresponds to the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program. The yakuren (renbi) yaku ratio calculation program calculates yakuren (renbi) and yaku ratio, and also calculates the display pattern when displaying the calculated yakuren (renbi) and yaku ratio on the display monitor 29, in other words. and,
The light emission pattern of a plurality of LEDs (first segment SG1 to seventh segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 67) on the display monitor 29 is determined.

The used area data area stores reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the used program area. Further, data used for displaying the winning ratio and the winning ratio are temporarily stored in the unused data area. For example, the unused area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total cumulative winning combination (renbi) winning ratio storage area. In addition, the unused area data area includes an active buffer with a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a 1st storage area to a 1st storage area.
A ring buffer with a 0 storage area, a storage area for the total number of prize balls for each winning opening (for 10 sets), and a storage area for 10 sets of winning combinations (renbi) winning ratios are provided.

Note that in this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) , management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the RAM corresponding to multiple consecutive addresses in the RAM control area
It is divided into 1-byte units and stored in the storage area of M102.

In addition, a used area program area in which a special symbol display output program and a game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 103, a winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program, and a winning winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program are stored. A different upper address (starting address) is set for each of the stored unused area program areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the upper address of the subroutine in the used area program area where the special symbol display output program and game control program are stored is "00".
It is. The upper address of the subroutine in the unused area program area where the Yakuren (renbi) winning ratio display output program and the Yukuren (renbi) winning ratio calculation program are stored is "01".
It is said that In this way, the upper address of the program stored in the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used area program area.

As call commands for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Furthermore, for programs stored in the unused program area, only "CALLmn" is used, and "CALLF" is never used. The special symbol display output program and game control program stored in the usage area program area are "CALLF" or "
CALLmn", but here it is called "CALLF". In addition, the Yakuren (Renbi) Wakuren ratio display output program stored in the unused area program area and the Yakuren (Renbi) Wakuren (
The winning ratio calculation program is called by "CALLmn" and is never called by "CALLF". Comparing these call instructions, “CALLF” is similar to “CALL
This is a calling command with a shorter tone and lighter capacity than "mn".

Further, the CPU 103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing an upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without using the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, when calling a program stored in the used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set, and when calling a program stored in an unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set. Ru. In this way, the Q register can set a fixed value to the upper address of the used area program area, and then set a fixed value to the upper address of the unused area program area and execute the program in the unused area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of programs in interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 will be explained. In principle, the CPU 103 executes programs in the order of addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 55, when executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then executes the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Execute. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In “digit output processing 1”, the CPU 103
Processing is executed to output digit signals regarding the special symbols, regular symbols, etc. obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the regular symbol display 20, etc.

After executing "digit output processing 1", the CPU 103 jumps from the used area program area to the unused area program area, and executes "digit output processing 2" according to the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program. . When jumping from the used area program area to the unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In digit output processing 2, the CPU 103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 29 digit signals regarding the winning combination (ren ratio), winning ratio, etc. obtained in the previous routine. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are executed successively.

After performing digit output processing 2, the CPU 103 jumps from the unused area program area to the used area program area and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from an unused area program area to a used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the processing according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special symbol processing", "common symbol processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing" and "solenoid processing". ”, “memory display processing”, and “error notification processing” are executed sequentially. The CPU 103 generates digit signals for special symbols, common symbols, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 103 executes the "error notification process", and when the process according to the third program is completed, jumps from the used area program to the unused area program, and executes the "error notification process" according to the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program. Execute "ratio calculation process". The CPU 103 performs “role ratio calculation processing”
Accordingly, the Yakuren (Renbi) and Yaku Ratio are calculated, and digit signals regarding Yakuren (Renbi), Yaku Ratio, etc. are generated. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt processing, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of special symbols and common symbols on the normal symbol display 20 and the display of winning combinations (renbi) and winning ratios on the display monitor 29 are executed.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the unused area program area in the built-in ROM area will be explained. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing another configuration of the used area program area and the unused area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, Figure 5
As shown in Figure 7, the program area includes ``switch input processing,'' ``error detection processing,'' ``random number update processing,'' ``special figure processing,'' ``general figure processing,'' ``information output processing,'' ``prize ball processing,'' and ``examination. Terminal processing, Solenoid processing, Memory display processing, Error notification processing, Digit output processing 1
” programs are stored. Further, in the unused program area, programs of "digit output processing 2" and "winning ratio calculation processing" are stored.

Next, the execution order of programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 in this example will be explained. Referring to FIG. 57, in executing the program, the CPU 103 first executes "switch input processing" in the used area program area, and then,
Processing according to the third program is performed. In the processing according to the game control program, the CPU 103 performs "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special symbol processing", "common symbol processing", and "information output processing".
"Prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", "solenoid processing", "memory display processing", "error notification processing"
are executed sequentially. The CPU 103 generates digit signals for special symbols, regular symbols, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 then executes "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program.
Execute. In "digit output processing 1", the CPU 103 outputs digit signals for special symbols, regular symbols, etc. obtained in the previous routine to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the regular symbol display device 20. Execute processing to output to etc. However, it is also possible to output a digit signal for the special map, general map, etc. obtained in this routine.

Then, the CPU 103 directly moves to the unused area program area and executes "digit output processing 2" according to the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program. CPU103
In the digit output processing 2, a process is executed to output to the display monitor 29 digit signals regarding the winning combination (ren ratio), winning ratio, etc. obtained in the previous routine. Therefore, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are executed successively.

Thereafter, after performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 103 executes the "winning ratio calculation process" according to the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program. The CPU 103 calculates the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio by the "winning ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal regarding the winning combination (ren ratio), the winning ratio, etc. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 103 ends.

In this way, the CPU 103 executes "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" in one interrupt processing, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B,
The display of special symbols and regular symbols on the normal symbol display 20 and the display of yakuren (renbi) and yakuza on the display monitor 29 are executed.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and unused area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 55 is assumed to be area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. 57 is assumed to be area configuration pattern B. In addition, the configuration of the used area program area and unused area program area in the built-in ROM area is the same as that shown in FIG. 55 except for the jump processing between the used area program area and the unused area program area. Let it be C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 58(A), in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 103, the special symbol display output program → the combination of winnings (continuous ratios) and the ratio displaying output program → the game control program → Processing is executed in the order of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program. In addition, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of the consecutive ratio) winning ratio calculation program.
In addition, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the special symbol display output program → the game control program → the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program → the winning winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program Processing is executed in this order. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 58(A) is called the first interrupt processing, the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 58(B) is called the second interrupt processing, and the interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 58(C) is called the second interrupt processing. The processing is called third interrupt processing.

Next, the control by the main board 11 to display the winning combination and winning ratio on the display monitor 29 will be explained. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items regarding the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio. FIG. 59(A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 59(A), when the display on the display monitor 29 starts, the No. 1 short-term contract is first displayed. The No. 1 short term yakuren (ren'i) display is displayed in green. In the display of No. 1 short-term role (ren ratio), Figure 59 (
As shown in B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the character "y" is displayed on the second display section 29B.
The characters “6.” are displayed. In addition, the short-term role ratio (ren ratio) is displayed on the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D. For example, if the short term yakuren (ren ratio) is 41%, the third display section 2
The characters "4." are displayed on 9C, and the characters "1." are displayed on the fourth display section 29D.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. Display N
The display of o2's short-term role (ren ratio) is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term winning ratio in display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 59 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display section 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29
In D, the short-term role ratio is displayed. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the characters "4." are displayed on the third display section 29C, and the characters "3." are displayed on the fourth display section 29D.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. Display No. 3, the total cumulative role (ren ratio), is displayed in red. In display No. 3, the total cumulative Yakuren (Renbi), as shown in FIG. .” is displayed. In addition, the third display section 2
9C and the fourth display section 29D, the total cumulative Yakuren (Renbi) is displayed. For example, if the total cumulative role ratio is 58%, the characters "5." are displayed on the third display section 29C, and the fourth display section 2
The character "8." is displayed on 9D.

When display No. 3 continues to be displayed for 30 seconds, the total cumulative hand ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display No. 4 of the total cumulative hand ratio is displayed in red. In display No. 4, the total cumulative hand ratio display,
As shown in FIG. 59 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display section 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display section 29B. In addition, the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D
The total cumulative hand ratio is displayed. For example, if the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the third display section 29C
The characters "6." are displayed on the fourth display section 29D, and the characters "8." are displayed on the fourth display section 29D.

When display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (B-5).
The short-term yakuren (ren ratio) of . Thereafter, the display of the short-term winning combination (ren ratio) of display No. 1 to the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the color of the display, only the short-term winning combination of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 to the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term winning combination (ren ratio), short-term winning ratio, total cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio), and total cumulative winning ratio every 30 seconds.

Furthermore, the content displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the above content and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display section 29A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display section 29B to fourth display section 29D.
Characters are displayed on the display section 29B, and the first display section 29A, the third display section 29C, and the fourth display section 2
A numerical value may be displayed on 9D.

Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display section 29A to fourth display section 29D, and predetermined proportions, divisions, etc. may be indicated using only the numerical values. Alternatively, two of the first display section 29A to fourth display section 29D
Characters may be displayed at one location and numerical values may be displayed at the other two locations. Alternatively, a numerical range of characters may be set, and only the characters may be displayed on the first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" may be displayed as "Q", and "61" to "100" may be displayed as "R". Furthermore, the characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may also be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Furthermore, symbols without meaning may be displayed instead of characters.

Furthermore, when displaying numerical values and the like on the display monitor 29, the colors and display modes may be changed depending on the displayed numerical values. For example, when displaying the role ratio,
If the displayed winning ratio is less than a predetermined value, it will be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it will be displayed in "red".
It may also be displayed as . Further, if the displayed winning ratio is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the display may be lit up, and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed blinking. For blinking display, please
Any one of the display sections 29A to 4th display section 29D may be blinked. For example, the entire first display section 29A to fourth display section 29D may be blinked, or two of the first display section 29A and the second display section 29B, or the third display section 29C and the fourth display section 29D may be blinked. It is also possible to make two of them blink. The display section that is not blinking may be turned on or off.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000 balls, the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and total cumulative total for 10 sets, and the memory area for storing the winning ratio and winning ratio (ren ratio) for 10 sets and total cumulative amount are updated respectively. .

For updates in the active buffer and ring buffer, the 0th
The numerical value stored in the storage area is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, the number of prize balls of the general winning hole prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", and "36", respectively.
Assume that the numbers are "225,""87,""66,""117,""45," and "21." At this time,
When the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning hole prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is set to "27", "81", and "1", respectively.
20,” “36,” “225,” “87,” “66,” “117,” “45,” and “21.” Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 49 includes a door open sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a. Opening the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by someone other than an employee. Therefore, in this embodiment, the door open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a is used as the abnormality detection sensor group 2.
It is included in 6. The door open sensor transmits an open signal to the main board 11 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a.

There are two types of door opening: normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee, and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, door opening is detected assuming an abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a. Furthermore, even if the glass door frame 3a is normally opened by an employee, the door opening will be detected, but the employee may not be aware of the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Since there are many cases, it is possible to prevent any particular problems from occurring.

Next, control regarding the display of winning combinations and winning ratios executed on the main board 11 will be explained. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets interrupts to be prohibited and then performs necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board starts, the data used to display the yakuren and yaku ratios stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. Ru. RAM10
The data used for displaying the winning combinations and winning ratios stored in the unused area of 2 and other areas are cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, register settings of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 are performed. After performing the initial settings, CPU10
3 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. Yakuren (renbi) and win ratio related processing are executed by this timer interrupt process. In addition, among the Yakuren (Renbi)/Ren ratio related processes, the Yakuren (Renhi) winning ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S209 in FIG. 64), and the Yakuren (Renbi) win ratio display output program is executed in the other processes A winning ratio calculation program is executed. The winning ratio calculation process in the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program also includes other processing of calculating the winning combination (renbi) and winning ratio. However, in the winning ratio calculation process, the processing of calculating the winning ratio (ren ratio) and the winning ratio is performed, and even if a program corresponding to other processes in the winning ratio calculation program is prepared separately. good.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of Yakuren (Renbi) and Yakuren ratio related processing. Main board 1
1, as shown in FIG. 61, it is determined whether an abnormal operation has been detected in the winning combination/winning ratio related processing (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, if a clear switch operation signal has been transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), preparations are made to display a warning (step S102), and step S
Proceed to step 103. Further, if the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S103).
Winning information is that a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, and first general winning port switch 24A to fourth general winning port switch 24D. obtained by.

Next, it is determined whether the current time is within business hours (step S104). Whether the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by the RTC 106. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, if an open signal is not output from the door open sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the attacker receives a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a situation in which it is impossible to win in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls to be fired is 100 per minute, for example, the upper limit of 100 per minute can be determined as appropriate. More specifically, when the unit time is 1 second, the predetermined number of pitches is 5.
or, if the unit time is 10 seconds, the predetermined number is 30. The unit time is R
Measured by TC106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

As a result, if the attacker does not receive more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (
In step S106; NO), a prize ball number addition process is performed to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S103 (step S107). Note that the prize ball number addition process is performed when no warning display preparation is performed. Here, if the warning display preparation is being performed, the winning combination (ren ratio)/winning ratio related process is immediately ended. In the prize ball number addition process, the 0th ball number shown in FIG.
General winning hole (sode), general winning hole (belly button), ordinary electric prize ball (denchu) in the storage area
, add the number of each prize ball of the special electric role prize ball (attacker).

In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning hole (sode), general winning hole (belly button), ordinary electric prize ball (denchu), special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each number of prize balls. Here, if the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches the predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is transferred to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. move it. Also,
The numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. Also, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer=0) (step S108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed up (step S108
;NO), the Yakuren (Renbi)/Yakuren ratio-related processing is immediately terminated. Furthermore, if the calculation timer has timed up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer=2000 ms) (step S109).

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding up in step S107 is the number of calculation executions (step S110). The number of calculations to be executed can be an appropriate number, but for example, it may be used as a criterion for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The total prize ball is 600
The number may be slightly less than 0, for example 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of balls to be paid out from 6000 balls.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the number of calculated executions (step S11
0; NO), the Yakuren (Renbi)/Yakuren ratio related processing is ended. Further, when the number of prize balls is the number of calculated executions (step S110; YES), the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated (step S111). Here, short term role ratio (ren ratio), short term role ratio, cumulative role ratio (ren ratio) (
The total cumulative role ratio (total cumulative role ratio) and the total cumulative role ratio (total cumulative role ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term role ratio, the short-term role ratio, the cumulative role ratio, and the cumulative role ratio are all calculated within the same interruption. Thereafter, preparations are made to display the winning combination (renbi) and the winning ratio (step S112), and the processing related to the winning combination (renbi) and the winning ratio is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step S104 that it is not during business hours (step S104; NO
), if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO
), if it is determined in step S106 that the attacker has won a predetermined number of game balls or more per unit time (step S106; YES), preparations are made to display an abnormal count error (step S113).

Next, the winning combination (ren ratio)/winning ratio display control process will be explained. Figure 62 shows the
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 62, in the winning combination (continuation ratio)/winning ratio display control process, it is determined whether the preparation for displaying the winning combination (continuation ratio)/winning ratio is completed (step S201). If it is determined that the preparation process for displaying the winning combination (renbi) and winning ratio has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether the abnormal count error display preparation has been completed (step S202).

As a result, if it is determined that preparations for abnormal count error display have been completed (step S20
2; YES), an abnormal count error is displayed (step S203). The abnormal count error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, the top two digits on the display monitor 29 are “E” and “R.”
” and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Also, when displaying an abnormal count error, other display devices, such as the image display device 5 and the first special symbol display device 4A,
A predetermined abnormal count error display may be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, etc., or the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Or speaker 8L,
A predetermined alarm sound may be generated from 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a seven-segment display provided on the main board 11 for displaying errors in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

Once the abnormal count error is displayed, the Yakuren (Renbi)/Yaku ratio display control process is ended. Further, if it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not preparations for displaying an abnormal count error have been completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not preparations for displaying a warning have been completed (step S204).

As a result, if it is determined that the warning display preparation has been completed (step S204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be made to be different from other displays as appropriate. For example, the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 can display "E" and "R", and the lower two digits can display "0" and "6". At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or the display color of the display monitor 29 may be changed to indicate that a warning is to be issued. Alternatively, the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29 may be increased for display. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display be made more conspicuous than other displays. Note that after displaying the abnormal count error, the process may proceed to determining whether warning preparations have been completed (step S204). Here, if it is determined that the warning preparation has been completed (step S204; YES), an abnormal count error display and a warning display will be performed. In order to display the abnormal count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 29, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeatedly displayed at intervals of several seconds, for example, every 5 seconds. Further, it may be displayed using other display methods.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning display may be displayed on other display devices, such as the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Or speakers 8L, 8
A predetermined warning sound may be generated from R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be made on a seven-segment display provided on the main board 11 for displaying errors in the gaming machine. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

Once the warning is displayed, the Yakuren (Renbi)/Yakuren ratio control process is ended. Also, step S20
If it is determined in step 4 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S204; NO), the winning combination/winning ratio control process is also terminated.

Further, if it is determined that preparations for displaying Yakuren (Renbi) and Yaku ratio display are completed (step S201;
If YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S206). In the display restriction confirmation process,
A process is executed to determine whether or not to restrict the display of winning combinations and winning ratios. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether a door opening required error has been detected (step S301). The door opening required error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 3 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. Errors occurring in the gaming machine 1 other than the abnormal count error include, for example, various errors shown in FIG. 65. Each of these errors will be briefly explained.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer, for example. The magnet error can be cleared by turning off the power switch. Also,
Security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Abnormal prize ball error The abnormal prize ball error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number of abnormal prize balls, for example, 2000 or more. The abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball that is paid out when game balls have won in excess of the count number of the big winning hole. The prize ball abnormality error can be canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize Ball Error A prize ball error is an error that occurs when a prize ball is not put out even though it is detected that a game ball has entered the winning hole. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch or an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error can be canceled by eliminating the error that occurred, such as by canceling the error.
Error 4: Out of Ball Error The out of ball error is an error that occurs when the out of ball is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 2 when the winning of the game ball in the winning hole is detected. The out-of-ball error is an error that is canceled when the supply of game balls is started.
Error 5: Radio wave abnormality error A radio wave abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a radio wave abnormality. Radio wave abnormality error is
This is an error that can be cleared by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by communication failure between the main board 11 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card unit error A card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 11 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 11 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full Tank Error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray (upper tray or lower tray) from which game balls are paid out becomes full and it becomes impossible to pay out game balls. The full tank error is canceled when the game balls are removed from the tray from which the game balls are paid out and the tank is no longer in a full state.
Error 9: Accessory object first activation error Accessory object first activation error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when starting an accessory object for the first time. The accessory first activation error is canceled by pressing the operation button 30.
Error 10: Unauthorized winning error The unauthorized winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball enters a grand prize opening that is not in operation. In the gaming machine 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is the only big winning hole, so the illegal winning error is not detected, and is an error that occurs in a gaming machine with two or more big winning holes.
When an unauthorized winning error is detected, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer, for example. The unauthorized prize winning error is canceled after a predetermined period of time, for example, 3 minutes, has elapsed since the security information was output.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM Abnormal Error An RTC-SRAM abnormal error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, when an abnormality in the RTC is detected, and when a backup failure is detected. The RTC-SRAM abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined period of time, for example 60 seconds, has elapsed since its occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on.
When a RAM clear error is detected, security information is output from the main board 11 to the hall computer, for example. The time during which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined period of time, for example, 31 seconds, has passed since it occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error A vibration detection device abnormality error is an error detected when vibration occurs in the gaming machine.
The vibration detection device abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined period of time, for example 60 seconds, has passed since the occurrence.
Error 14: Door Open Error The door open error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 3a is opened from the gaming machine frame 3 or when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. The door open error is canceled when the open glass door frame 3a or gaming machine frame 3 is closed.

Among these errors, Errors 1 to 7 are door-opening errors that require opening the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 3 in order to cancel the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 do not require opening the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 3 in order to cancel the error, and are not errors that require door opening. Error 14 is a door opening error, so the gaming machine frame 3
Determining whether or not it is necessary to open the system is an unnecessary error.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether a door opening required error has been detected, in other words, whether any door opening required error from error 1 to error 7 has been detected (step S3
01). If a door opening required error is detected (step S301; YES), it is determined whether a door opening required error flag is set (step S302).

Here, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S302; N
O), a door opening required error flag is set (step S303). Further, if the door opening required error flag is set (step S302; YES), the step S300 is continued.
Proceed to step 4.

Next, it is determined whether a measurement timer is set (step S304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time for which the restriction on the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio is continued after the door opening required error is canceled. Note that the measurement timer is a timer that measures time when it is set, and does not measure time when it is reset.

After the door opening required error is canceled, the time to continue restricting the display of winning combinations (renbi) can be set to, for example, the time required to cancel the door opening required error, or a period longer than that time to some extent. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Moreover, it is good also as a long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required to cancel the door opening required error may be set uniformly or may be set depending on the type of the door opening required error. For example, errors 1, 2, and 5, which can be canceled by turning off the power switch, shorten the time required to cancel the door-opening error, and error 3, the prize ball error, which requires eliminating the error that has occurred, etc. The time required to clear the door opening required error may be increased.

If it is determined in step S304 that the measurement timer is set (step S304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S305). If it is determined that the measurement timer has not been set (step S304; NO), the process directly advances to step S306. The state in which the measurement timer is set when the door opening required error is detected is a state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once canceled. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S305, if the door opening required error is detected again while the measurement timer is measuring time, the door opening required error detected later is canceled. Time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Next, it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S30).
6). As a result, if the door opening required error flag is set (step S306; Y
In ES), a combination of combinations of combinations and combinations of combinations is executed (step S307), and the display restriction confirmation process is ended. Also, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S30
6; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is ended. For example, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio is stopped.

If it is determined in step S301 that a door opening required error has not been detected (step S301; NO), it is determined whether a door opening required error flag is set (step S308). As a result, if it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S308; NO), the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S308, if it is determined that the door opening required error flag is set (step S308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is cleared. (Step S309). Subsequently, it is determined whether a measurement timer is set (step S310).

If the measurement timer has not been set (step S310; NO), the door opening required error has just been canceled. In other words, this flow is executed only after the door opening required error is cleared. At this time, a measurement time t (measurement timer=t) is set in the measurement timer (step S311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time during which the restriction on the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio is continued after the door opening required error is canceled.

Next, it is determined whether the measurement timer has timed up (t=0) (step S
312). Furthermore, if the measurement timer is set in step S310 (step S3
10; YES), it is directly determined whether the measurement timer has timed out (t=0) (step S312).

If step S311 is passed, the measurement timer has not reached 0 (time has not expired) (step S312; NO), and the process directly proceeds to step S306. Further, after the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S310 that the measurement timer is set (step S310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases as the flow loops, and when time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set, it is determined that the measurement timer has timed up.

Next, it is determined whether the measurement timer has timed up (t=0) (step S
312). Here, if the measurement timer has timed up (step S312; YES)
), the measurement timer and door opening required error flag are cleared (step S313). Further, if the measurement timer has not timed up (step S312; NO), the process directly advances to step S306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag.

If step S313 is not passed, the door opening required error flag has not been cleared, so it is determined in step S306 that the door opening required error flag is set (
Step S306: YES). Therefore, the display restriction of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio will be executed. If the process goes through step S313, the door opening required error flag is cleared, so in step S306 it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S306; NO). Therefore, the restriction on displaying the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio will not be executed. In this manner, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the display restriction of the winning combination (renbi) combination. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, the error is detected while the door must be opened, and from the time when the door must be opened error is canceled until the measurement time (= the time during which the restriction on the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio display continues) has elapsed. At the time, the display of the winning combination (renbi) is restricted, and at other times, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio is not restricted.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not to execute display restriction based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S206 (step S207). the result,
If display restriction is to be executed (step S207; YES), display restriction is to be executed (step S207; YES).
208), restricting the display of winning ratios. Then, the winning combination (ren ratio)/winning ratio display control process ends.

If the display restriction is not to be executed (step S207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S209), and the winning combination/winning ratio display control process is ended. The display switching control process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of display switching control processing. As shown in FIG. 64, in the display switching control process, first, the display monitor 2
It is determined whether or not short-term yakuren (renihi) is displayed in 9 (step S401). If the short term yakuren (ren ratio) display is being performed (step S401; YES), it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short term yakuren (ren ratio) display was started. (Step S4
02). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example 30 seconds (30000ms).
It can be done. Further, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds, such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or may be longer than 30 seconds, such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S402; NO),
The display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term yakuren (renbi) display will continue. Also, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S402; YES)
), short-term role ratio display control is performed (step S403), and the display switching control process is ended.
In the short-term winning ratio display control, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after starting the short-term winning ratio display.

If it is determined in step S401 that the short-term winning ratio is not displayed (step S401; NO), it is determined whether the short-term winning ratio is being displayed (step S404). . If the short-term winning ratio display is being performed (step S404; YES), it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term winning ratio display was started (step S405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S405; NO),
The display switching control process ends. Upon completion of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display continues. Further, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S404; YES),
Cumulative winning combination (ren ratio) display control is performed (step S406), and the display switching control process is ended.
In the cumulative Yakuren (renratio) display control, the cumulative Yakuren (renratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the cumulative Yakuren (renratio) display is started. .

In addition, if it is determined in step S404 that the short-term winning ratio display is not being performed (step S404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning ratio display is being performed (step S407). . If the cumulative total is displayed (step S407; YE
In S), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying the cumulative winnings (step S408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S408; NO),
The display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative yakuren (ren ratio) display continues. Also, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S408; YES)
), the cumulative winning ratio display control is performed (step S409), and the display switching control process is ended.
In the cumulative winning ratio display control, the cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after starting the cumulative winning ratio display.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S407 that the cumulative winning ratio is not displayed (step S407; NO), it is determined whether the cumulative winning ratio is being displayed (step S410). . If the cumulative winning ratio display is being performed (step S410; YES), it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative winning ratio display was started (step S411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S411; NO),
The display switching control process ends. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative yakuren (ren ratio) display continues. Also, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S411; YES)
), the short term yakuren (ren ratio) display control is performed (step S412), and the display switching control process is ended. In the short term yakuren (ren ratio) display control, the short term yakuren (ren ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 29, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the short term yaku ren (ren ratio) display. . In this way, the display switching control process ends.

In the short-term winning ratio display control in step S403 above, digit output processing 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, the cumulative winning ratio display control in step S406, the cumulative winning ratio display control in step S409, and the short-term winning ratio display control in step S412.
Also in the display control (continuous ratio), digit output processing 2 by the second program is executed.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, the digit output processing 1 and the digit output processing 2 are made common,
Digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are executed in one cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103. One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 103 is approximately 4 ms, and the time required for game progress control processing (gaming control program) is, for example, approximately 2 ms.

FIG. 66(A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor, etc., and FIG. 66(B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. 3 is a time chart showing the relationship between the display state of the monitor and the like; Here, in the first cycle, a symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) and "y" on the display monitor 29 (SEG2), and in the second cycle, the symbol (character) corresponding to "y" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1), Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is to be displayed on the symbol display device 4A and a symbol (character) corresponding to "6." is to be displayed on the display monitor 29.

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 58(C), the game progress process ( The game control program) is executed. Therefore, there is a difference of about 2 ms between digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and digit output processing 2 (Renbi (Renbi) winning ratio display output program), as shown in FIG. 66(A). As a result, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1) clearly displays "0".
” is displayed, but a display problem has occurred on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). The problem with the example of trying to display a character equivalent to "y" on the display monitor 29 is as follows.
Specifically, it is as follows. First display section 29A to fourth display section 2 in display monitor 29
9D has 7 segments and 8 LEDs arranged in the lower right dot as shown in Figure 67.
It is equipped with If these LEDs are 1st segment SG1, 2nd segment SG2, 3rd segment SG3, 4th segment SG4, 5th segment SG5, 6th segment SG6, 7th segment SG7, and dot SG8, then 3rd segment SG3, 4th segment SG4, 6th segment SG6, 7th segment SG
7 will be displayed faintly. This problem occurs, for example, because the control that does not turn on the display monitor 29 in the cycle before the first cycle has passed through to the first cycle. Regarding the character corresponding to "6." displayed in the second cycle, the second segment SG2, fourth segment SG4, sixth segment SG6, and seventh segment SG7 were clearly displayed, but the first segment SG1, 5th segment S
G5 and dot SG8 are displayed in a lighter manner. This problem also occurs because, for example, the control that caused the LED corresponding to the character "y" to light up on the display monitor 29 in the first cycle has passed through to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 66(B), digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) is followed by digit output process 2 (winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program). . For this reason, there is almost no difference between digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and digit output processing 2 (winning combination (renbi) combination ratio display output program), and as shown in FIG. 66(B). As shown in , there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first period, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (SEG1). Furthermore, all characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed on the display monitor 29 (SEG2). In this way, in the first interrupt processing, the display monitor 29
It is possible to prevent display problems on the LEDs.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term winning ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative winning ratio, and the cumulative winning ratio. . Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 that controls the game so that visibility is not obstructed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstruction nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewed visually. Therefore, visibility on the display monitor 29 can be prevented from being obstructed. Moreover, the main board 11 is
The heat radiation holes provided in the board case 201 are arranged at positions that are not directly in front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from becoming difficult to see due to the heat radiation holes. Therefore, visibility to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obstructed.

Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from becoming difficult to see due to peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, visibility to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being obstructed.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the winning ratio and winning ratio regarding the relationship between the prize ball paid out by passing the electric chew or attacker and the prize ball paid out by passing the general prize opening. can do. Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information, such as short-term contribution (ren ratio) and cumulative award ratio (ren ratio), at predetermined intervals. Therefore, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information regarding a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the Yakuren (Renhi) (Short-term Yakuren (Renhi)) and Yaku-ratio (Short-term Waku Ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000. It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of a period corresponding to a certain unit, such as a number of 6000 pieces. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the period in which the number of prize balls is 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1,000 or 10,000. Alternatively, the unit may be time instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be set to an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 29 displays an image of each award ball (renhi) (short-term award ball) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6,000.
In addition to ren ratio) and yaku ratio (short-term yaku ratio), cumulative yaku ren (ren ratio) and cumulative yaku ratio are displayed by switching. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term winning combination (ren ratio), short-term winning ratio, and cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio), cumulative winning ratio, etc. for each predetermined unit. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 housed in a caulked board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 29.

The gaming machine 1 also includes a detection means for detecting fraud that prevents proper predetermined information from being displayed. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning game balls in excess of the allowable number of winnings. Game machine 1
The system operates during business hours of the game hall, and counting prize balls outside of business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is used for playing games with the door frame closed, and counting the prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be fraudulent.

Further, during a game with the game machine 1, the game ball cannot be launched at a speed exceeding a certain speed.
For example, game balls can be fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls in one minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, 100 pieces per minute, or 12 pieces per minute.
If winnings of more than 20 game balls are detected within a second, the probability that fraudulent activity has occurred becomes extremely high.

In the gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, prize balls are awarded if it is not during business hours, if the glass door frame 3a is not closed, or if a predetermined number of game balls or more are won by the attacker per unit time. Eliminates addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information on Yakuren (Renbi), Yakurai (Renbi), etc. due to these frauds. Incidentally, fraud may be detected based on the number of balls paid out per unit time instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number or more of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Furthermore, the ring buffer is provided with a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. will be deleted. Therefore, since data is erased in predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

Note that when moving the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented.

When data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity, and it is also possible to calculate yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio using a large amount of data.

Note that when erasing data in the ring buffer, it is possible to erase not only a portion of the data in the 10th storage area, but also all of the data in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area. good. In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be better prevented. Furthermore, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to predetermined conditions. For example, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased at the beginning of business hours, and then some data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Also, the above example describes the movement of data in the ring buffer, but
Similarly, some or all of the data may be erased in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, such as the total sum.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, each data of short-term winning ratio (ren ratio), short-term winning ratio, cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio), and cumulative winning ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. Note that the period for displaying each data may not be 30 seconds, but may be any appropriate period. For example, it may be set every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be set every hour. In addition, the displayed data is short-term role ratio (ren ratio), short-term role ratio, cumulative role ratio (ren ratio),
It may be data other than the cumulative hand ratio data, or it may be only a part of these data.

In addition, when displaying the data of Short-term Yakuren (Ren Ratio), Short-term Yakuren Ratio, Cumulative Yakuren (Renbi), and Cumulative Yaku Ratio every 30 seconds, regarding Short-term Yakuren (Renbi), other data will be displayed. The displayed data is different from that of the previous one. Specifically, the data for Short-term Yakuryoku (Renbi) is shown in red, and other data is shown in green. Therefore, it is possible to make the user aware that new data is to be displayed from the Short-Term Yakuren (Renbi).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated in the event that a problem occurs in the calculation of Yakuren (ren ratio) or Yaku ratio. If this switch is operated, the data on the yakuren (ren ratio) and the yaku ratio can be tampered with, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 1, this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, so that fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B,
Count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24A, second general winning port switch 24B
Based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signals from the third general winning port switch 24C and the fourth general winning port switch 24D, the winning combination (continuation ratio) and winning ratio are calculated. For example, by using a sensor (count switch 23) installed individually on the attacker and a sensor installed after the discharge passages from which the game media won by the attacker and the game media won in the electric chew merge, Based on the detection results, when the yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio are calculated by adding up the numbers to the counter for the number of balls acquired as an accessory and the counter for the number of consecutive balls acquired as an accessory, it is possible to identify which prize opening the payout is from. There is a risk that calculation of Yaku Ratio and Yakuren (Ren Ratio) may become complicated. On this point, the first
Starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24A, second general winning port switch 24B, third general winning port switch 24C,
The fourth general winning opening switch 24D detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, the winning combination (ren ratio) and winning ratio are calculated, and the game media is sent to each winning opening. The number of prize balls can be determined based on the winnings. Therefore, the yakuren (ren ratio) and the yaku ratio can be calculated easily and with high accuracy.

Further, when a door opening required error occurs, it becomes necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the main board 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is
For example, it is also visible to a player located outside the gaming machine 1.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio on the display monitor 29 is restricted. Therefore, even if the door opening required error occurs and the display monitor 29 becomes visible from the outside of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the winning combination (continuation ratio).

Further, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio on the display monitor 29 is restricted when a door opening required error occurs. Therefore, even when the display monitor 29 becomes visible to the player from the outside of the gaming machine 1 due to the occurrence of the door-opening error, it becomes necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3. It is possible to prevent the display of Yakuren (Renbi) Yakuren ratio from being seen.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the winning combination (continuation ratio) winning ratio on the display monitor 29 is restricted, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game When the machine frame 3 is opened, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio on the display monitor 29 may be restricted. If the display monitor 29 is restricted from displaying the winning combination winning ratio when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened after the door opening required error has occurred, the player will not be able to see the winning combination winning ratio. Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the winning ratio from being seen.

In addition, the display monitor 29 is limited to displaying the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio for a predetermined period of time after the door opening required error is canceled, and more specifically, it is measured by a measurement timer after the door opening required error is canceled. will run until the specified duration has elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door opening required error is canceled, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state even though the door opening required error is canceled. At this time, the display monitor 29 can be viewed by the player and the like from outside the gaming machine 1. In this regard, by continuing to restrict the display of winning combination winning ratios until the duration time measured by the measurement timer has elapsed after the door opening required error is cleared, it is possible for players from outside the gaming machine 1 to It is possible to prevent the display of Yakuren (Renbi) Yakuren ratio from being seen.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is cleared, but the duration is measured after the door opening required error is cleared and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. You can also measure it. The duration time in this case may be set uniformly regardless of the type of error requiring door opening, or may be set depending on the type of error requiring door opening. Alternatively, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening required error is cleared.

The door opening required error described above is just one example, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, if the error cancellation methods are different and errors 1 to 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 3, these may be treated as errors other than the door opening required error. Conversely, if errors 8 to 13 are errors that cannot be cleared without opening the gaming machine frame 3, these may be treated as door opening required errors. In addition, errors other than those shown in Fig. 65, such as errors in which game balls cannot be fired from the batted ball launcher, errors in which ball lending is not possible, errors in which the game board moves, etc., can be resolved by releasing the door. It may be set as an error. Furthermore, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 to clear the error, the detection of the error is often detected outside of business hours of the gaming hall, such as an abnormality in the display of the image display device 5. In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside of business hours, such as a ROM check screen error, an electric chew or big prize opening not opening, etc., it may be treated as an error other than the door opening error.

Furthermore, in the above-described gaming machine 1, the mode of display restriction is the suspension of display, but the display may be restricted in other modes. For example, the display of the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio may be made thinner or smaller, or the display monitor 29 may display a different display from the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio. As a display different from the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio, an error display may be displayed, or a display such as, for example, all the segments are lit.

In the gaming machine 1 described above, since the main board 11 and the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the Although the display of the winning ratio (continuous ratio) is limited, other aspects may be used. For example, the main board 11 may be provided on the surface of the game board 2 at a position where it is no longer visible from the outside of the game machine 1 due to the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 29 is also the surface of the game board 2, and when the glass door frame 3a is closed, the display monitor 29 is also the surface of the game board 2.
It may also be provided at a position where it cannot be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, instead of restricting the display of the winning combination (ren ratio) when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the display of the winning combination ( It is also possible to limit the display of winning ratios (continuous ratios). In addition, regarding the continuation of restrictions on the display of Yakuren (Renhi) Waku ratio, etc.,
Instead of requiring opening/closing of the glass door frame 3a as a condition, opening/closing of the glass door frame 3a may be used as a condition.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the CPU 103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the used area program area of the built-in ROM area, and stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the unused area program area, and stores the hand-ratio display output program in the unused area program area. and a yakuren (renhi) yaku ratio display program are stored. In this way, by storing the special symbol display output program and the game control program, and the yakuren (renbi) winning ratio display output program and the yakuren (renbi) winning ratio display program in different areas, This makes it easier to test programs related to games. Further, in the CPU 103, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common and executed by one interrupt processing. Therefore, digit output processing can be simplified.

Further, in order to make digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 common, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are executed successively. Specifically, Figure 58
As shown in (A), in the first interrupt process, the special symbol display output program → Yakuren (Renhi)
The programs are executed in the order of winning ratio display output program → game control program → winning combination (ren ratio) winning ratio calculation program. In addition, in the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the game control program → special symbol display output program → the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program → the winning winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program The program is executed in this order. Therefore, in both the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, there is a gap between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the winning combination (renhi) role ratio display output program (second interrupt process). The game control program (game progress control process) and the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation program (winning winning combination (renbi) winning ratio calculation process) are not included. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent delays in the digit output processing 2, etc., malfunctions in the LED display on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the display monitor 29 can be avoided. This makes it possible to clearly display designs, characters, etc.

Note that when digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, as shown in FIG. 58(A)
It is sufficient that the execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 58(B) or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 58(B) is included. For example, any program may be executed before or after the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

Moreover, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after the game control program is executed, the winning combination (continuation ratio) winning ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, before calculating the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio, processing related to the main parts of the game such as lottery for transition to the jackpot gaming state is executed. Therefore, delays in gaming can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the winning combination (renbi) winning ratio display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after the special symbol display output program is executed and before the yakuren (renbi) winning ratio display output program is executed, specific programs such as the game control program and the yakuren (renbi) winning ratio calculation program, etc. I try not to run it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions in the LED display on the display monitor 29.

Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area are called using the short tone "CALLF". On the other hand, a call is made using "CALLmn" to the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio display output program and the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio calculation program stored in the unused area, and the tone is changed. Calls with the short "CALLF" are never made. Therefore, the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the winning combination (renbi) hand ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 is determined by the winning combination (renbi) hand ratio calculation process in the non-use area. Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio calculation program and Yakuren (Renbi)
The winning ratio display output program is a program that has nothing to do with the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for programs unrelated to the progress of the game, waste in program processing can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the unused area, a call is made with "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, so in the used area, a call can be made with "CALLF", which has a short tone. Therefore, it is possible to use short-sounding and highly versatile commands such as "CALLF" for the game control program executed in the used area.

Further, the CPU 103 is equipped with a Q register, and since a program is called by the Q register, a program can be called without specifying an upper address. However, because the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be usable in the unused area program area.
There was a possibility that the versatility would be reduced.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 103 is "00", the upper address of the unused area program area is "01", and the upper address of the unused area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. The address is different. Further, when calling a program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to a fixed value "00". Therefore, when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the Q register can be used, so that the program stored in the used area program area can be called simply by specifying the lower address. Further, since the upper address of the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the used area program area, calling of the program stored in the unused area program area by the Q register is prevented. Furthermore, when calling a program stored in the unused area program area, the Q register is set to a fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused program area, the Q register can be used even in the unused program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 is located at the center of the back side of the main board 11.
Although the main board 11 is placed in front when viewed visually, a display monitor may be placed so that it can be easily viewed from an oblique direction. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described regarding the manner in which display monitors are arranged so as to be easily viewed from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as "display monitor arrangement manner").

Note that the first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main board 11 similar to the main board 11 shown in FIG. 51(A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all main boards 11 have the same structure. Further, similar to the example shown in FIG. 51(A), the main board 11 is housed in a board case 202. Furthermore, in the description of the first to ninth display monitor arrangement modes, left and right are based on the direction in which the main board 11 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens from the outer frame is the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 1 is placed on the back side of the main board 11.
29A is provided, and a display monitor 130A is provided on the base member 129A.
The display monitor 130A is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129A and the main board 11.

The base member 129A has a triangular prism shape with a right triangular bottom, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled part of the right-angled triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism formed by the base member 129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main board 11, and A side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 11 . The side surface of the triangular prism (hereinafter referred to as the "sloped surface") including the side opposite the right-angled portion of the right triangle is arranged in a direction that is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The display monitor 130A is provided on an inclined surface of the base member 129A. The display monitor 130A is arranged obliquely with respect to the back surface of the main board 11. Figure 69 is
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. Figure 69
As shown in , when the gaming machine frame 3 to which the main board 11 is attached is opened from the outer frame 3A, the display monitor 130A is located in the open area between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is placed so that it faces the front when viewed from the front.

The display monitor 130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. It is located in For this reason, when clerks, etc. check the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, they do not have to open the gaming machine slot 3 wide, but only open it slightly. You can check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

[Second display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 70(A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70(A), in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129B is provided on the back side of the main board 11, and a display monitor 130B is provided on the base member 129B. The display monitor 130B is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129B and the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 50, the main board 11 is a game board 2 provided in a gaming machine frame 3 (see FIG. 2).
is attached to the back of the The base member 129B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main board 11. Moreover, the main board 11 and the base member 129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. Display monitor 130B is provided on the side surface of base member 129B. For this reason, the display monitor 130B is configured such that the surface on the side of the open part of the door frame in the upright part of the main board 11 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 faces the open part of the door frame. It is located. Further, the display monitor 130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 11.

The display monitor 130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 11 and facing in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main board 11.
Further, the main board 11 is attached to the back surface of the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the game machine.
For this reason, when clerks, etc. check the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, they do not have to open the gaming machine slot 3 wide, but only open it slightly. You can check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

Note that in the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 129A and 129B are housed in the board case 202, but even if the base members 129A and 129B are formed to protrude to the outside of the board case 202. good.

[Third display monitor arrangement]
FIG. 70(B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 70(B), in the third display monitor arrangement mode, an embedded inclined surface 11K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 11. The buried inclined surface 11K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 11.

The buried inclined surface 11K is formed as a part of the printed base material on the main board 11.
A display monitor 130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 11K of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 11K, so that when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130C can be viewed from the front from the open part between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. It is placed to face. Further, the main board 11 and the display monitor 130C are housed in a case 202.

The display monitor 130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. It is located in For this reason, when clerks, etc. check the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, they do not have to open the gaming machine slot 3 wide, but only open it slightly. You can check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

[Fourth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71(A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71(A), in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129D from a first base member 129D1 to a fourth base member 129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 11. A first display monitor 130D1 to a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided to each of the first base member 129D1 to fourth base member 129D4. A display monitor 130D is formed by the first display monitor 130D1 to the fourth display monitor 130D4. The display monitor 130D is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main board 11.

The first base member 129D1 to the fourth base member 129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be explained using the first base member 129D1. The first base member 129D1 has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom. This first base member 12
9D1 has the same shape as the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has the same size as the four 7 segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 51(A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 has a size equivalent to the size of one 7 segment and the lower right dot. The first display monitor 130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129D1 is capable of displaying one seven segment and a lower right dot.

The first base member 129D1 is disposed at a position slightly to the left of the approximately central position in the height direction of the back surface of the main board 11. The second base member 129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 129D1, and the third base member 129D3 is arranged on the right side of the second base member 129D2, which is the opposite side to the left side where the first base member 129D1 is arranged. It is located in The fourth base member 129D4 is arranged on the right side of the third base member 129D3, which is the opposite side to the left side where the second base member 129D2 is arranged. In this way, the first base member 1
The fourth base members 29D1 to 129D4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 130D3 and a fourth display monitor 130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 129D3 and the fourth base member 129D4. Contents corresponding to the first display portion 29A of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51(A) are displayed on the first display monitor 130D1 provided on the first base member 129D1.

The second display monitor 130D2 provided on the second base member 129D2 has a display shown in FIG. 51(A).
Contents corresponding to the second display section 29B of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 2 are displayed. Contents corresponding to the third display portion 29C of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51(A) are displayed on the third display monitor 130D3 provided on the third base member 129D3. Contents corresponding to the fourth display portion 29D of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51(A) are displayed on the fourth display monitor 130D4 provided on the fourth base member 129D4.

The display monitor 130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the open part between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. It is located in For this reason, when clerks, etc. check the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, they do not have to open the gaming machine slot 3 wide, but only open it slightly. You can check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 71(B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 71(B), in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 129E from a first base member 129E1 to a fourth base member 129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 11. First to fourth display monitors 130E1 to 130E4 are provided to the first to fourth base members 129E1 to 129E4, respectively. A display monitor 130E is formed by the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4. The display monitor 130E is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 129 and the main board 11.

The first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 all have the same shape as the first base member 129D1 to the first fourth base member 129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 are the first display monitors 130D provided on the first base member 129D1 to the first fourth base member 129D4.
Similar to the first to fourth display monitors 130D4, they are provided on the first to fourth base members 129E1 to 129E4, respectively.

The first base member 129E1 is arranged above the substantially central position of the back surface of the main board 11 in the width direction. The second base member 129E2 is arranged below the first base member 129E1, and the third base member 129E3 is arranged below the second base member 129E2. The fourth base member 129E4 is arranged below the third base member 129E3. thus,
The first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially vertical direction. In this way, the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 129E1. Similarly, on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 129E2, the third base member 129E3, and the fourth base member 129E4, a second display monitor 130E2 and a third display monitor 130E3 are provided.
, and a fourth display monitor 130E4 are provided, respectively. First base member 129E1
～First display monitor 130E1 provided on the fourth base member 129E4～Fourth display monitor 1
30E4 includes the first display section 29A to the fourth display section 29 of the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 51(A).
The contents corresponding to D are displayed. Further, since the first base member 129E1 to the fourth base member 129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth base member 130E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.
Display monitors 130E4 are also arranged vertically. Therefore, the first display monitor 130E1
- The four-digit display on the fourth display monitor 130E4 is arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The four-digit displays on the first display monitor 130E1 to the fourth display monitor 130E4 may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode faces the front when viewed from the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame. It is located in For this reason, when clerks, etc. check the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, they do not have to open the gaming machine slot 3 wide, but only open it slightly. You can check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

[Sixth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72(A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72(A), in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129F is provided on the top surface of the board case 202 that accommodates the main board 11, and a display monitor 130F is provided on the top surface of the base member 129F. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F is arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130F may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 129F has four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (Fig. 51
(See (A)). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 202.
It is equipped with B. The base member 129F is the board case body 202A of the board case 202.
The board case 202 is provided so as to straddle the board case 202B and the lid body 202B.

The display monitor 130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the board case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 by only slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs the work of checking the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the slot 3 for the gaming machine greatly, but only opens it slightly. Confirmation work can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the winning ratio.

[Seventh display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 72(B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 72(B), in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129G is provided on the top surface of the board case 202 that accommodates the main board 11, and a display monitor 130G is provided on the top surface of the base member 129G. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130G is arranged in a line in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130G may be arranged horizontally. Similar to the base member 129F of the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 129G straddles the board case body 202A and the lid body 202B of the board case 202.
02.

The base member 129G has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom, and is arranged so that its height direction runs along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. The right-angled part of the right-angled triangle forming the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side, which is the opposite side to the left side, which is the side on which the gaming machine frame 3 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 129G is an inclined surface that descends from the side (right side) opposite to the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 3 opens toward the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens. A display monitor 130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the board case 202 and arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 3 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 by only slightly opening the gaming machine frame 3. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs the work of checking the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the slot 3 for the gaming machine greatly, but only opens it slightly. Confirmation work can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the winning ratio.

Further, the upper surface of the base member 129G on which the display monitor 130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided is directed from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens toward the side where the gaming machine frame 3 opens. It is a slope that descends. Therefore, when viewing the display monitor 130G from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130G can be easily viewed. Therefore, confirmation of the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio can be performed more easily.

[Eighth display monitor arrangement]
FIG. 73(A) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73(A), in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129H is provided on the left side of the board case 202 that accommodates the main board 11, and a display monitor 130H is provided on the left side of the base member 129H. It is being The 4-digit display on the display monitor 130H is as follows:
are arranged vertically. The four-digit display on the display monitor 130H may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, the display monitor 130H provided on the left side of the base member 129H has four 7 segments and a dot on the lower right (Fig.
1(A)). The board case 202 includes a board case main body 202A and a lid body 20.
2B. The base member 129H is connected to the board case body 202 of the board case 202.
A and the lid 202B are provided in the board case 202.

The display monitor 130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the board case 202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 by opening the gaming machine frame 3 only slightly.
The entirety of H is visible. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs the task of checking the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, the clerk, etc. does not open the slot 3 for the gaming machine greatly, but only opens it slightly and the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio increases. Confirmation work can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the winning ratio.

[9th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 73(B) is a perspective view of the main board on which display monitors are arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 73(B), in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 129I is provided on the right-hand side of the board case 202 that houses the main board 11, and a display monitor 130I is provided on the right side of the base member 129I. It is provided. The base member 129I is similar to the base member 129F of the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and includes the board case body 202A of the board case 202 and the lid body 2.
02B in the board case 202.

The base member 129I has a triangular prism shape with a right triangle bottom, and is arranged so that its height direction runs along the depth direction of the gaming machine 1. The right angle part of the right triangle forming the base of the triangular prism is located on the right side. Therefore, the left side surface of the base member 129I is an inclined surface that approaches the right side from the top to the bottom. A display monitor 130I is provided on this inclined surface. The four-digit display on display monitor 130I is arranged vertically. The four-digit display on display monitor 130I may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the board case 202, and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 130 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 1 by opening the gaming machine frame 3 only slightly.
The entire I is visible. Therefore, when a store clerk or the like performs the work of checking the Yakuren (Renbi) winning ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the slot 3 for the gaming machine greatly, but only opens it slightly. Confirmation work can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the winning ratio.

Further, the left side surface of the base member 129I on which the display monitor 130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided is an inclined surface that approaches the right side as it descends. Therefore, when viewing the display monitor 130I from the side where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the display monitor 130I can be easily viewed. Therefore, confirmation of the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio can be performed more easily.

In addition, the display monitors 13 arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode
All of 0A to 130I may be provided in an adjusting means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame. The adjustment means includes, for example, a fixed part fixed to the base members 129A to 129I or the buried inclined surface 11K, and a mounting part that is movable with respect to the fixed part, and the display monitors 130A to 130I are attached to this mounting part. It is sufficient if either one of them is attached. The adjustment means may be a manual type that can be operated by a clerk or the like by opening the gaming machine frame 3, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjustment means. But that's fine. In addition, if it is an electric type, it may be operated by a person who can operate it from an office or the like via a communication device or the like.

The movable range of the attachment portion may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, or a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Alternatively, the movement range may be a combination of movement ranges associated with these movements. A display monitor 130 is used as an adjusting means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the gaming machine frame 3 and the outer frame.
By providing A to 130I, it is possible to make adjustments according to the wishes of the gaming hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed.

Note that in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above, the arrangement of display monitors is shown respectively, but these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode may be combined to arrange the display monitors from the top surface to the left side surface of the board case 202.

[Game machine equipped with a feather-shaped variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special figure game) that performs a variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special figure game) becomes a jackpot, the jackpot game state is controlled. I explained about the DigiPachi type gaming machine. On the other hand, it is also used as a so-called Hanemono type game machine in which the jackpot game state is controlled by the game ball passing through a specific area (V area) provided inside the variable prize winning ball device with a feather type that can be opened and closed. good.
Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a game machine of the Hanemono type will be explained. Hereinafter, the differences between the Hanemono type and the gaming machine 1 described above will be mainly explained, and common explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a feather-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 75 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board, viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko game machine 501 has a glass door frame 502 formed in the shape of a frame. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 503 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 502. At the bottom of the batted ball supply tray 3, a batted ball supply tray 503 is provided.
a ball receiving tray 504 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball-striking device; and a ball-striking operation handle (operating knob) that adjusts the speed at which the ball-launching device fires game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls).
505 is provided.

By rotating the operation knob 505, the player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball firing device. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the ball launcher gradually increases, and when it exceeds a predetermined speed, the fired game ball enters the left side area of the game area 507 from above through the ball hitting rail. When the operation knob 505 is further rotated to the right, the fired game ball enters the right side area of the game area 507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while rotating the operation knob 505 to the right, the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball launcher can be adjusted, and the area into which the game ball is hit can be adjusted. .

A game board is removably attached to the back side of the glass door frame 502. Note that the game board is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-like body. Furthermore, a game area 507 is formed on the front side of the game board, which is divided by guide rails.

A feather-shaped variable prize winning ball device 520 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 507. Below the feather type variable winning ball device 520, a variable winning ball device 515 that forms a first starting winning hole 511, a second starting winning hole 512, and a third starting winning hole 513 is provided. The winning ball that entered the first starting winning opening 511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 511a, and the winning ball that entered the second starting winning opening 512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 512a. guided by. Further, the winning balls that have entered the third starting winning opening 513, which can be won by the variable winning ball device 515 being in the open state, are detected by the third starting opening switch 513a and guided to the back side of the game board. The variable winning ball device 515 is opened by the solenoid 515a. Hereinafter, the first starting winning hole 511, the second starting winning hole 512, and the third starting winning hole 511, the second starting winning hole 512, and the third starting winning hole
The starting winning hole 513 is collectively referred to as the "starting winning hole", or the starting winning hole 511, 512, 51
It is sometimes expressed as 3. In addition, a first starting port switch 511a and a second starting port switch 512
a and the third starting port switch 513a may be collectively referred to as "starting port switch" or may be expressed as starting port switches 511a, 512a, and 513a. When a game ball enters the starting prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls, for example, five game balls, are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the starting winning hole may be common or may be different for each starting winning hole. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 511 and the second starting winning opening 512 is set to five, and the number of prize balls when a gaming ball enters the third starting winning opening 513 is set to five. The number of payouts may be two.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole and is detected by the starting opening switch, the vane type variable winning ball device 520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. Due to the opening/closing control, the left open door 576A on the left side moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 576B on the right side moves to the right from the initial position, so that the vane type variable winning ball device 520 enters the open state. , left open door 57
6A and the right open door 576B return to their initial positions, the vane type variable winning ball device 520 enters the closed state. In this way, depending on the winning detection of the starting port switch, the feather type variable winning ball device 5
The state in which 20 performs an opening operation is called a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the feather-type variable winning ball device 520 may be referred to as an accessory. Furthermore, the game board is provided with various accessories, and hereinafter, when we say "accessories", we mean the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520.

An effect display device 509 such as an LCD that displays an effect is provided on the back side inside the feather-type variable winning ball device 520. The performance display device 509 variably displays (variably displays) performance symbols as identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 509 has three variable display parts (symbol display areas), for example, "left", "middle", and "right".

A special symbol display 508 that variably displays special symbols as identification information is provided on the right side of the feather-type variable winning ball device 520. The special symbol display 508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 508, there is provided a special symbol starting memory display 518 consisting of four LEDs that displays the effective number of winning balls that have entered the starting winning hole, that is, the starting memory number. The special symbol starting memory display 518 displays the number of starting memories up to 4 in order of winning. The special symbol starting memory display 518 increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 every time there is a valid starting winning in the starting winning openings 511, 512, 513. Then, each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 508, the number of LEDs in the lit state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off).
In this example, the special symbol start storage display 518 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the special symbol display 508. In addition, as will be described later, since the starting memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 509, it is not necessary to provide the special symbol starting memory display 518.

On the left side of the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520, there is a normal symbol display 51 that variably displays normal symbols.
0 is set. When a game ball passes through the gate 532 provided on the right side of the game area 507 and is detected by the gate switch 532a, a normal symbol (
In this example, variable display (number display using 7 segment LEDs) is started. In this embodiment, in the case of a win, "7" is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and in the case of a loss, "7" is stopped and displayed.
7" will be stopped and displayed. In the case of a win, the variable winning ball device 7 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. Note that the probability of winning a normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 510, a normal symbol start memory display 541 is provided which has a display section with four LEDs that displays the number of balls that have passed through the gate 532. Each time the gate 532 is passed, the normal symbol start memory display 541 increases the number of LEDs lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 510 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 515, there is provided a jackpot opening in which an opening/closing plate 516 is opened by a solenoid 521 in a specific gaming state (jackpot playing state). Opening/closing plate 51
6 is a means for opening and closing the big prize opening. The winning ball that entered the grand prize opening is the count switch 52
Detected at 3. When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls, for example 15, are paid out as prize balls.

Decorative lamps are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 507 and are displayed on and off during the game, and at the bottom there is an out port 526 for collecting game balls that do not win.

Furthermore, two speakers 527 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper sides of the outside of the game area 507. On the outer periphery of the gaming area 507, there are a top frame lamp 528a and a left frame lamp 528b.
and a right frame lamp 528c. Furthermore, each structure (
Decorative LEDs are installed around the vane-type variable winning ball device 520, etc.). Ceiling lamp 5
28a, the left frame lamp 528b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the gaming machine.

The game ball fired from the ball launcher passes through the ball rail and enters the game area 507, and then falls through the game area 507. When a batted ball enters the starting prize opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, if the state is such that variable display of symbols can be started, the special symbol will begin to be displayed variably on the special symbol display device 508, and the production symbol will be displayed on the production display device 509. starts variable display. If the state is not such that variable display of symbols can be started, and the starting winning memory number, which is the reserved memory of variable displaying of special symbols on the special symbol display 508, is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by 1. That is, the number of lit LEDs in the special symbol start memory display 518 is increased by one.

The variable display of special symbols ("0" to "9") on the special symbol display 508 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. The special symbol at the time of stopping is the jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically,
For example, if it is "3", "7"), the game shifts to the first jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state that is started without passing through the starting operation state) of the jackpot gaming states. Also, if it is a small winning symbol (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it will shift to the starting operation state. do. In the starting operation state, when a game ball wins a prize in a special area provided inside the vane type variable prize winning ball device 520, the game moves to a second jackpot game state (a jackpot gaming state that is started after passing through the starting operation state). . Note that the gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state is a normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state ends, the variable winning ball device
15 is easily opened). In the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 515
can be continued until it is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and the variable winning ball device 515 is opened 10 times.
If the conditions for transitioning to the jackpot gaming state are met before the 0th release, the gaming state will be
The time saving state shifts to the jackpot game state. Further, if the variable winning ball device 515 is opened 100 times without satisfying the conditions for transition to the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the gate 532 is provided on the right side of the gaming area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when controlled to shorten the time,
In order to pass the game ball through the gate 532, fire the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 507 (
So-called right-handed batting) is more advantageous. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment,
The grand prize opening is provided on the right side of the gaming area 507. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, in order to make the game ball enter the big prize opening, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the game area (
So-called right-handed batting). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the player is not in the time saving state or in the jackpot game (in the normal state), the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the gaming area 507 (so-called left-handed hitting).

Further, a left gate 517 is provided on the left side of the game area 507, and a game ball passing through the left gate 517 is detected by a left gate switch 517a. In addition, the gaming area 507
A right gate 519 is provided on the right side, and a game ball passing through the right gate 519 is detected by a right gate switch 519a.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined game state transition is performed, control is performed to change the game state based on the game ball passing through the left gate 517 and the right gate 519.
Specifically, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is started immediately when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed or when a game ball enters the specific winning hole 566 in the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520. Instead, a jackpot game is started based on the game ball passing through the gate.
In addition, in this embodiment, since the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the gaming area 507 (during the jackpot game, the jackpot is hit to the right), the jackpot is won based on the game ball passing through the right gate 519. The game begins. Note that the jackpot game is not started based on the game ball passing through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519, but when a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, or when a specific winning ball in the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520 is activated. A jackpot game may be started immediately when a game ball enters the mouth 566, or a jackpot game may be started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the jackpot game is finished, the state is shifted to a state where a new variable display can be started based on the game ball passing through the left gate 517 or the right gate 519. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the game ball is hit to the left in the normal state and to the right in the time saving state, when the game ball is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the left gate 517. Based on this, the state is shifted to a state in which a new fluctuation display can be started, and when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, the state is shifted to the time saving state based on the game ball passing through the right gate 519, and the new fluctuation display is changed. It will be moved to a state where it can start displaying. In addition, left gate 5
17 or the right gate 519, the transition to a state where a new variable display can be started is not made, but when the jackpot game is finished, or after a predetermined period of time after the jackpot game is finished. It may also be possible to transition to a state where a new variable display can be started when the time has elapsed.

Next, the feather type variable winning ball device 520 will be explained. Feather-shaped variable winning ball device (accessory)
520, when the left opening door 576A and the right opening door 576B are opened by driving the opening/closing motor 575, the game ball is allowed to enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 520 passes through the passage port 57 and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 520. In addition, in FIG. 75, a state in which the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 520 (it is difficult to enter) is shown by a solid line, and the left open door 576A and the right open door 576B are closed. A state in which 576B is opened and the game ball can enter (easily enter) the accessory 520 is shown by a virtual line.

A left movable member 577 and a right movable member 578 are provided on both the left and right sides of the accessory 520, respectively. The movable part of the left movable member 577 is the left movable part 577A, and the movable part of the right movable member 5
The moving part at 78 is the right movable part 578A. The left movable part 577A is moved by the left movable part drive solenoid 577B, and the right movable part 578A is moved by the right movable part drive solenoid 578B.
driven by The left movable part 577A and the right movable part 78A each move in the vertical direction.

A specific winning opening 566 forming a specific area is provided at the bottom of the accessory 520. In addition, at the back of the position where the specific winning opening 566 in the accessory 520 is provided, an exit opening is provided, and inside the accessory 520, there is a passage for distributing game balls to the specific winning opening 566 or the exit opening. It is provided. The specific winning hole 566 is provided with a specific area switch 566A, and the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 566 is detected by the specific area switch 566A, and the game ball that entered the winning hole is detected by the losing area switch. be done. Specific winning opening 5
66 and the winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls, for example 10, are paid out as prize balls. Note that the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the specific winning hole 566 and the winning hole may be the same or different. for example,
The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the specific winning hole 566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters a winning hole may be three. Furthermore, when a game ball enters a missed opening, no prize balls may be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

The game ball that entered the accessory 520 enters the specific winning hole 566, and the specific area switch 566
On the condition that it is detected in A, it becomes possible to shift to the second jackpot gaming state. Also, accessory 5
If the game ball that enters into the 20 slot enters the winning slot, it will not be possible to shift to the second jackpot game state.

An example of how the game progresses in this gaming machine 501 will be explained. In the gaming machine 501, in the normal state, if a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning hole 511, the second starting winning hole 512, and the third starting winning hole 513, it will be a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss. A lottery (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "jackpot lottery") is performed to determine the winning number. As a result of the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a small win, or a loss. Then, variation (variable display) of the special symbols and production symbols is started, and the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 508.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the symbol (
After stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the gaming state is transferred from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state (first jackpot gaming state). In the jackpot game state, the opening and closing of the jackpot opening is controlled by the opening/closing board 16 16 times (16 rounds, the allowable opening time for one round is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot,
The accessory 520 is not controlled to be in the open state. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the accessory 520 may be controlled to be in an open state.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a small hit, the symbol (
After the symbol corresponding to the small win is stopped and displayed, the accessory 520 is controlled to be in the open state and the starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 520 is in an open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times the device is in the open state (the number of times it is opened) is one, two, or three times. In the starting operation state, a game ball wins the accessory 520, and when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 566 and is detected by the specific area switch 566A, a V winning occurs. When a V winning occurs, the gaming state is shifted to a jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state). The game ball enters the gap and V
If no winning occurs, the game does not shift to the second jackpot game state. In other words, it goes out of alignment and maintains its normal state.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a loss, the symbol (
After stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the miss, the accessory 520 is not controlled to be in the open state. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

Note that the jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, once the special symbols have finished changing, the game goes directly to the 16-round jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the jackpot game ends. Later, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (on the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is the normal state).

There are three types of small winnings: the first small winning to the third small winning. The first small win is a small win in which the accessory 520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small win is a small win in which the accessory 520 opens twice, and the third small win is a small win in which the accessory 520 opens twice. 520 is a small win that opens three times. Moreover, in the case of a miss, the accessory 520 does not perform the opening operation.

In addition, the second jackpot when the accessory 520 performs an opening action in the first small win or the second small win and wins a V prize becomes a non-time saving jackpot, and after the second jackpot game state ends, the second jackpot is transition to state. Further, the second jackpot when a V prize is won when the accessory 520 performs an opening operation in the third small win becomes a time-saving jackpot, and after the second jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the time-saving state.

The gaming machine 501 also includes a main board 11 and a display monitor 29 provided in the gaming machine 1 described above.
A main board and a display monitor similar to the above are provided, and this main board calculates the winning ratio and the winning ratio, and displays the calculated winning ratio on the display monitor. The display monitor is placed on the main board in front of the main board when viewing the main board so that visibility is not obstructed. This point is similar to gaming machine 1 described above. In addition, the calculation procedure, display procedure, etc. of Yakuren (Renbi) and Wakuren ratio are explained in the gaming machine 1 above.
It is similar to

The winning combination (ren ratio) and winning ratio in the gaming machine 501 can be determined using the above equations (1) and (2). The number of winning prize balls in the game machine 501 is determined by the winning of the game balls in the special winning opening 566 and the winning opening in the variable winning ball device 515, the feather-type variable winning ball device 520, and the big winning opening that includes the opening/closing plate 516. Refers to the total number of game balls that are paid out.

In addition, when the first jackpot game state is being executed, the number of consecutive winning prize balls in the gaming machine 501 is the number of game balls paid out when the game ball enters the jackpot with the opening/closing plate 516. Refers to the total number. In addition, when the second jackpot game state is executed, the opening/closing plate 516
It may be the total number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball into a big winning hole (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big winning hole winning"), or it may be the total number of game balls paid out by winning a big winning hole. , Winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening 566 and the winning opening in the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520 at the time of the V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "trigger winning") It may also be the total number of game balls paid out.

In the opportunity winning, "the time of V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot gaming state" may be the time when the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520 is opened when the V winning occurs, or the time when the V winning occurs. It may include a series of openings caused by winning a prize in the starting winning hole that triggered the opening of the vane type variable winning ball device. For example, the third starting winning hole 5 in which the number of times the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520 is opened is three times.
The feather type variable winning ball device 520 is released by winning the game ball to 13, and when there is a V winning at the time of the release, the opportunity prize is determined by specifying the feather type variable winning ball device 520 when it is opened three times. It is also possible to win the game ball into the winning hole 566 and the winning hole.

In addition, when the number of consecutive winning prize balls is the total number of game balls paid out by winning the big prize opening and winning the opportunity, winnings to the specific winning opening 566 and the winning opening of the feather type variable winning ball device 520 will be the opportunity winning. Whether or not this happens depends on whether or not the V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot gaming state occurs. Therefore, the total number of game balls paid out by winning the specific winning hole 566 and the winning hole of the feather-type variable winning ball device 520 (hereinafter referred to as "temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball number") is temporarily stored, and the second jackpot game When the V winning that triggered the transition to the state occurs, the number of temporary memory opportunity winning balls is added to the number of consecutive winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out by the trigger winning. good. The timing of adding the temporary memory chance winning prize balls to the number of consecutive winning prize balls may be set to an appropriate timing. For example, the timing may be to shift to the second jackpot game state and count the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening, or to count the number of winning game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening. When starting, the timing may be while or after counting the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening, and immediately before displaying the yakuren (ren ratio) on the display monitor 29.

Further, after storing the temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball, if the V winning prize that triggered the transition to the second jackpot game state does not occur, the temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball may be erased. When a game ball wins in the specific winning hole 566, the V that triggered the transition to the second jackpot gaming state
Since a winning has occurred, essentially, the total number of game balls paid out by winning on the exit of the feather-type variable winning ball device 520 may be temporarily stored. The determination that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second jackpot gaming state does not occur can be determined, for example, by determining that the V winning has not occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since the feather-shaped variable winning ball device 520 was opened. can do.

Also, the winning combination (ren ratio) and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor are the short-term winning combination (ren ratio), the short-term winning ratio, the cumulative winning ratio (ren ratio), and the cumulative winning ratio. etc. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the gaming machine 1 described above. Furthermore, the display monitor may be arranged in any of the various manners described in connection with the manner in which it is attached to the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 501 described above is a gaming machine including a feather-type variable winning ball device 520. In a gaming machine equipped with such a vane-type variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination and winning ratio are displayed on the main board. Further, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so that visibility is not obstructed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstruction nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 501 equipped with the feather-type variable winning ball device 520, the winning combination and winning ratio are calculated in a different manner from the gaming machine 1. Even in the gaming machine 501 equipped with such a feather-type variable prize winning ball device 520, the winning combination and winning ratio can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor attached to the main board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 501, among the starting winning openings that open and close the vane type variable winning ball device 520,
A variable winning ball device 515 is used as the third starting winning hole 513, but the starting winning hole is only one that is not provided with a variable winning ball device like the first starting winning hole 511 and the second starting winning hole 512. It may be. Further, the starting winning hole may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning hole 513.

Note that the number of prize balls paid out when game balls enter the third starting winning hole 513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used for calculating the winning ratio, but The number of prize balls paid out by the winning of game balls into the starting winning hole 512 is not added to the number of winning prize balls and the number of consecutive winning prize balls.

In addition, in the gaming machine 501, a jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the starting prize hole, but even if a game ball enters the starting prize hole, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 52
It is also possible to adopt a mode in which a 0 release operation is performed. Further, instead of the jackpot lottery, a lottery may be performed for the number of times the variable winning ball device 520 is opened, or a jackpot lottery and a variable winning ball device 520 may be held.
It is also possible to perform both a lottery for the number of openings. In addition, in the lottery for the number of openings, 1 time,
In addition to randomly selecting the number of times such as 2 times, 3 times, etc., 0 times may be included in the number of times of opening.

In addition, the gaming machine 501 is set to a jackpot gaming state (a first jackpot gaming state and a second jackpot gaming state), and the gaming machine 501 includes a blade-type variable winning ball device 520 and an opening/closing plate 516.
There is a large prize opening with a. On the other hand, an embodiment may be adopted in which a jackpot game state is set and only a feather-type variable winning ball device is provided without providing a jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game state, the feather-shaped variable winning ball device opens and closes,
What is necessary is to perform an opening operation for a certain period of time.

Further, in an embodiment in which only the feather-type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a condition for continuing the jackpot game state. For example, when transitioning to a jackpot game state, the highest continuation round may be set, and continuation of the next round may be determined if a V prize is won during one round.

(Modified example regarding display control and display items of winning number information)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which items related to the number of wins in the general winning hole, the first starting winning hole, and the second starting winning hole can be displayed in the first area α. For example, items related to the number of times game balls have passed through the gates 41A and 41B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 41A and 41B, the main board 11 sends a passing gate designation command that specifies which gate the game ball has passed through.
(Microcomputer 100 for game control) to production control board 12 (CPU 1 for production control)
20), the production control CPU 120 can total the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 41A and 41B and display it in the first area α.

For example, by using the same method as the aggregation process when receiving a general winning slot designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning slots a prize has been won, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), Gate passage ratio (corresponding to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (
(corresponding to C1), the gate passage ratio in the high base state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passing ratio in the set period (corresponding to D2), and calculate the first It can be displayed in area α. Further, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 41A and 41B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) In addition, since the performance control CPU 120 receives the grand prize opening winning command from the gaming control microcomputer 100, it is possible to total the number of prizes won in the grand winning opening.
The number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the grand prize opening can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by using the same method as the aggregation process when receiving a general winning slot designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning slots won a prize, "Number of prizes won in today's big winning slots (A
1)", "Ratio of winnings in today's grand prize opening (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in today's grand prize opening (equivalent to A3)", "Today's winning ratio ``Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the total number of prize balls entered into today's grand prize opening (equivalent to A4)'', ``Number of prize balls entered into the grand prize opening during the set period (equivalent to D1)'' )”, “Ratio of winnings to the big winning opening during the set period (
(equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the grand prize opening during the set period (D
(equivalent to D4)" and "ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the big prize opening during the set period to the number of prize balls awarded during the set period (equivalent to D4)". Then, the first
It can be displayed in area α.

Here, "ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's total number of prize balls entered into today's grand prize opening (equivalent to A4)" and "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded in the set period" If the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the big prize opening during the set period (equivalent to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (e.g. 60%), we will notify you to that effect. You may also do so. For example, a message may be displayed in the first area α that reads, “The ratio of big winning openings to prize balls exceeds the standard value (60%).”

In addition, the number of prize balls awarded based on winnings in the second starting winning hole, which is controlled to open and close by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the number of prize balls that are opened and closed by the special variable winning ball device 7, relative to the total number of winning balls. The ratio of the total number of prize balls awarded based on winnings to the big winning hole is a predetermined ratio (for example, 7
0%), a notification may be provided to that effect. For example, the first area α
A message such as "The ratio of prize balls exceeds the standard value (70%)" may be displayed.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side, the performance control CPU 120 responds to each command received from the game control microcomputer 100 when a game ball enters each entry area. An example has been described in which the number of game balls entering each entry area is totaled based on the number of game balls entering each entry area.
The game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 side tallies the number of game balls entering each entry area, or the performance control CPU 120 calculates the game control microcomputer 100 when a game ball enters each entry area. It is also possible to total the number of game balls entering each entry area based on each command received from the player 100.

In addition, the microcomputer 100 for game control or the CPU 1 for performance control on the main board 11 side
The total number of game balls entering each entry area (the value of the counter corresponding to each switch) in step 20 is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 and can be displayed on the image display device 5. For example, by outputting a command specifying the total number of entries into each entry area from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can control the number of entries into each entry area based on the command. It is possible to specify the number of entries and display it in the first area α.

Note that the number of entries into each entry area counted by the game control microcomputer 100 is displayed on a display device provided on the main board 11, such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to have it displayed. In addition, when the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning opening to the number of winnings in the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined standard ratio, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B display This may be notified by performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. Note that the display device provided on the main board 11 on which the totaled results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. It may also be a display device provided exclusively for. Further, the display device may be in any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, or a light guide plate.

The value of each counter (the number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 102 is, for example,
A reset operation for resetting the gaming status flag (a flag corresponding to the gaming status to enable the gaming control microcomputer 100 to specify the variable rate status, time saving status, etc.) stored in the RAM 102 is performed by the gaming parlor ( For example, when played by a clerk), the image is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, or is output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control board 12, and the image is displayed. It may be displayed on the device 5 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 11. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 2, and uses the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 3 to rotate the game board 2 forward relative to the game machine frame 3. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, information on the number of winnings (D1 to D
4) can be displayed in the first area α, but the aggregation period is set in advance in the gaming machine regardless of the player's operation (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is memorized). (or is set by operation on the gaming parlor side), and information on the number of winnings (corresponding to D1 to D4) in the set aggregation period may be displayed in the first area α. . For example, if the number of wins in general prize openings per 60 minutes is totaled and the total value is displayed in the first area α, the total value is less than a predetermined standard value (for example, 60 times/60 minutes). In such a case, notification to that effect may be provided.

(5) Furthermore, if a winning in a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period of time, this may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of wins to the general winning slot has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message saying "No general winnings for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be settable by operation on the game parlor side (for example, operation using the display changeover switch 32 and operation button 30), or may be set by operation on the player side (for example, operation using the operation button 30). It may also be possible to set it by

(6) The above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine equipped with a distribution device in which the ratio of winnings to the starting winning hole and the general winning hole is a specific ratio (for example, 1:1). , information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings in each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, JP 2014-
The gaming machine disclosed in No. 117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by the sorting device are alternately distributed to the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It is also possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the sorting device to the starting winning hole and the general winning hole. The above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the sorting device distributes game balls alternately to the starting winning hole and the general winning hole, and the number of winnings information related to the number of winnings to each winning hole is first stored. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins in the general winning slot is automatically determined according to the number of winnings in the starting winning slot, the ratio of the number of winnings in the general winning slot to the number of winnings in the starting winning slot is displayed as shown above. There's no need to do it.

(7) In FIG. 46, the aggregation period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the aggregation of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You can do it like this. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the first area α
The number of prizes won in the general prize opening displayed on the screen is reset to 0, and then the performance control CPU 1
Each time 20 receives a general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

Further, the once set aggregation period may be changed in accordance with a player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a reset operation to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes before the set period elapses in order to quickly know the aggregation results. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to see the aggregation results for a longer period, players performed a reset operation before the set period elapsed to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the once set aggregation period may be extended in response to a player's operation after the set period has elapsed. For example, after the set aggregation period of 10 minutes has elapsed and the aggregation results for that 10 minutes are displayed, the player performs an extension operation to see the aggregation results for a longer aggregation period. Extend the aggregation period by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, you will get both the aggregation results for 10 minutes and the aggregation results for 60 minutes including that 10 minutes).
You can do it like this.

(8) In addition, in the demo screen displayed on the image display device 5, or in the first area α while the game is being played (in the state where the end of the game has not been determined and the demo screen is not displayed). , an image may be displayed to explain which of the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole each winning hole provided on the game board surface is. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in each winning hole may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the gaming hall settings are given priority over the player settings, but conversely, the player settings may be given priority over the gaming hall settings. That is, regardless of whether the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5 (2) can be displayed on the image display device 5.
) When the operation button 30 is pressed while selecting the icon containing the words "Display" on the selection screen, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). , if the operation button 30 is pressed while selecting the icon containing the words "Do not display" on the selection screen in FIG. 5(2), the winning number information will not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the display control in FIG. ).

Alternatively, the gaming hall settings and the player settings may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of received setting operations. That is, the setting operation accepted last (the latest setting operation) may be given priority in determining whether or not to display the winning number information. For example, even if the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is subsequently displayed on the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3). When set, the number of winnings information is displayed (display control shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). Furthermore, even if the number of winnings information is set not to be displayed on the player setting screen shown in FIGS. In this case, the winning number information is displayed (the display control shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is executed). On the other hand, even if the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 is set to the second position (display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. In this case, the winning number information is not displayed (the display control shown in FIG. 44 is executed). Also, Figure 5 (1) ~
Even if you set the number of winnings information to be displayed on the player setting screen in (3), if you subsequently set the operation section of the display changeover switch 32 to the first position (non-display position), the number of winnings information will be displayed. The number information is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 44 is executed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by operating the display changeover switch 32, a clerk at the gaming parlor can set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5. By operating , it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5 . However, the present invention is not limited to this type of configuration. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5, the player cannot set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5 (for example, FIG. 5 (1) to (3) without providing a setting screen on the player side. In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not the winning number information is to be displayed on the image display device 5 only on the gaming parlor side.

In addition, on the contrary, by operating the operation button 30 by the player (and the clerk at the gaming parlor), it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5; It is also possible not to provide a means for only the player to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 (for example, the display changeover switch 32 is not provided). In the case of such a configuration, the player and the clerk at the gaming hall can set whether or not to display the number of winnings information on the image display device 5 through a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 30). . In this way, the player and the gaming parlor may be able to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 5 through a common setting operation.

(10) In addition, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) explained in FIG. is displayed on the image display device 5 only in the maintenance mode where is in the display position (second position), and the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 5. That is, the information may be handled in the same way as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 3(a).

In this way, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings in each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) explained in FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 5 only when the game is played, and that the player cannot normally see it. For example, a state in which the player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which the end of the game has not been determined (a state in which a special map game is being executed, a state in which a general map game is being played, etc.) This is information that is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the state in which the game is being executed and in the jackpot game state. It may be possible to display the information only for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when an operation is performed to stop the power supply to the gaming machine. good.

(11) In addition, information on the number of prizes entered into each winning hole (general winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, etc.) as explained in FIG. It may also be possible to display it on the image display device 5 in this mode as well. In the case of such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the gaming mode, the winning number information can be displayed only in the first area α. Information on the number of prizes won may be displayed. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between a period in which no games are being played and a period in which there is a possibility that games are being played.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, information on the number of prizes won for all the items that have been tallied is displayed, whereas in the gaming mode, only some items (items set by the operation of the gaming hall or the player) or Information on the number of prizes won (predetermined main items) may be displayed.
That is, the items of winning number information to be displayed may be different between a period in which no games are being played and a period in which there is a possibility that games are being played.

(12) In addition, in the game mode, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the determination that the game has ended, it is possible to display the winning number information in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, during a period in which it is determined that the game is in progress without being determined to end the game, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between a period in which it is determined that no game is being played and a period in which it is determined that a game is being played.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the determination of the end of the game, information on the number of winnings for all items that have been aggregated is displayed, whereas the determination of the end of the game has not been performed and the number of winnings is displayed. During the period determined to be medium, information on the number of prizes won for some items (items set by the operation of the gaming parlor or the player, or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the items of winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on a period in which it is determined that no game is being played and a period in which it is determined that a game is being played.

(13) In the above embodiment, specific images (error message, fourth pattern, decorative pattern,
Regarding the display position and display range (image size) of the number of winnings information (and pending information), the display position and display range (image size) do not change between the setting to display the winning number information (Figs. 42 and 43) and the setting to not display the winning number information (Fig. 44). On the other hand, for other images (background images), the visible range is different depending on the setting to display the number of winnings information and the setting to not display the number of winnings information. Regardless of the format, as shown in Figure 47, settings to display the number of winnings information (Figure 47 (a))
Even if the display position and display range (image size) of all images, including the background image other than the number of winnings information, are made the same by setting the number of winnings information to not be displayed (Fig. 47(b)). good. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden due to display/non-display settings of winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative pattern are
Setting to display the number of winnings information (Figures 42 and 43) and setting not to display the number of winnings information (Figure 44)
), but the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be changed depending on the display/non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the decorative pattern display area 5 in the setting (FIG. 48(a)) to display the winning number information
In the setting (Fig. 48(b)) that does not display the winning number information than the intervals of L, 5C, and 5R,
The intervals between the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the entire screen may be used to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. In this example, the decorative pattern display area 5L when the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, if you do not want to display the number of winnings information,
Variable display or static display of decorative patterns in area α may be allowed. In this way, the entire screen may be used to perform the effects to increase interest.

(15) In the above embodiment, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified as errors of the gaming machine, but the errors of the gaming machine are not limited to these, but the errors of the gaming machine include an abnormality in opening the front door, an abnormality in the payout mechanism. (Prize ball abnormality, etc.), illegal prize winning abnormality in the grand prize opening (abnormality in which a winning in the grand prize opening is detected even though the grand prize opening is not open), or malfunction of various parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1 etc. may be used.

[Other variations]
This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. In addition,
The control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above performance forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above performance forms and the modification shown in the following modification example may be combined arbitrarily. The controls and configurations of the gaming machines may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flowing direction of the game balls, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 41B are placed in the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. It is assumed that it is possible to win either prize. By having such a configuration,
Even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 41B in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by expecting to win a prize in the general prize opening provided downstream of the gate 41B. Furthermore, the game balls that did not pass through the gate 41B may win in either the third general winning hole 50C or the fourth general winning hole 50D at a higher rate than the game balls that passed through the gate 41B. . By adopting such a configuration, even if the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 41B is low in a variable probability state or a time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize to be won in the general prize opening provided downstream from the gate 41B. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. Furthermore, by executing a specific performance based on winnings in the general winning slot, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, executing a specific performance at different rates depending on the gaming state includes being able to execute the specific performance only in a certain gaming state and not executing the specific performance in other gaming states. . Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect can be executed at a different rate depending on the gaming period.
This also includes not executing a specific performance during other game periods.

In the above embodiment, performing the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state means that the effect can be executed only in the first state. The second state also includes not performing the performance. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes, in addition to the above-mentioned classification according to the gaming state, the classification according to the number of pending memories, and the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game classification according to the type of fluctuation pattern (for example, classification according to whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display being executed is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach effect), , classification as to whether the variable display variation pattern being executed is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-coupled effect),
Classification according to specific performance timing (for example, classification before or after the establishment of a reach state in a fluctuating pattern that involves a reach performance, or before execution of a pseudo-continuous performance in a fluctuation pattern that involves a pseudo-continuous performance) There are classifications such as whether it is before or after execution).

In the first performance form to the twelfth performance form, the specific performance may be executed only in one of (1) the normal state, and (2) the variable probability state or the time saving state. For example, (1
) The specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state. In addition, in the 13th to 24th performance modes, either (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) the period outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. The specific effect may be executed only in one case. For example, (1) a specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, and (2) a specific effect can be executed outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. You may choose not to perform the performance.

In the first performance form to the twelfth performance form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) normal state, or (2) variable probability state or time saving state, the execution rate of the specific performance and the execution rate are determined. Although the type of specific performance is different, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific performance and whether to execute the specific performance based on the performance execution conditions common to when the gaming state is in the normal state. The type may be determined, or whether or not to perform a specific performance and the type of specific performance to be performed may be determined based on performance execution conditions common to when the variable probability state or time saving state is in place. . In addition, the classification of the gaming state is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) variable probability state or time saving state, for example, (1) high base state, (2)
It may be classified as whether it is in a high base state, or (1) whether it is in a jackpot gaming state;
(2) The classification may be as to whether or not the game is in a jackpot gaming state.

In the 13th performance form to the 24th performance form, the gaming period is (1) the period after the establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation, or (2) the period outside the period of the reach fluctuation or before the establishment of the reach state in the reach fluctuation. Depending on the period, whether or not to execute a specific performance and the type of specific performance to be performed are determined, but the game is not limited to such a division of the gaming period, for example,
(1) Is the period in which the number of pending memories is 1 or less, (2) Is the period in which the number of pending memories is 2 or more,
(1) Is it the period during which the variable display of decorative designs is being executed?
(2) The classification may be based on whether it is a period in which variable display of decorative symbols is not being performed.

Also, whether it is (1) a period in which a variable display without a reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a reach effect (reach variation) is being executed. It may also be a classification. Alternatively, the classification may be (1) a period in which a variable display without a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed, or (2) a period in which a variable display with a pseudo-coupling effect is being executed. . Furthermore, even if the classification is (1) before the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, good.

In the first to fourth production forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth production forms, only one of specific production A and specific production B can be performed as a specific production, but both specific production A and specific production B can be executed. may be executable. That is, when the winning conditions are met, one of the variable result preview performance and the look-ahead preview performance that meets the predetermined conditions is executed (for example, if the number of pending memories is 1 or less, the variable result preview performance is executed However, if the number of pending memories is 2 or more, a prefetch preview effect may be executed), or both may be executed at the same time. For example, if the look-ahead preview performance is a performance that changes the aspect of the display information (display part) corresponding to the suspended memory, the above-mentioned variable result preview performance (sound performance only, or audio performance and role performance) The pre-read preview performance can be executed at the same time, and the player can understand that both the fluctuation result preview performance and the pre-read preview performance have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display or the start winning determination result. For example, if the display result of the variable display that is being executed when the winning conditions are met is a jackpot symbol, the variable result preview effect is executed with priority, and the display result of the variable display that is being executed when the winning conditions are met. If there is a pending memory that is a missed symbol but is determined to be a jackpot in the starting winning determination, it is preferable to execute the pre-read preview performance with priority.

In the above embodiment, only during the period when the production control CPU 120 determines that the game is in a non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed), the operation button 30 is used to set whether or not to display the number of winnings. Although we have explained examples in which this is possible, it is not limited to such a form, and can be applied regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot gaming state), and also depending on the execution situation of the special pattern game (special pattern whether the variable display of normal symbols is being executed, the number of pending memories of the special pattern game), the execution status of the general pattern game (whether the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, the number of pending memories of the general pattern game) ), it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings using the operation button 30. That is, even during a period in which a game is being played, for example, a period in which a variable display of decorative symbols is being executed or a period in which a jackpot game state is being controlled, whether or not to display the number of winnings can be determined by using the operation button 30. It may also be configurable. In such a configuration, if the number of winnings in the general winning slot is set to be displayed, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot gaming state), the special prize Game execution status (
Whether or not the variable display of special symbols is being executed, the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game), the execution status of the general symbol game (whether the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being performed, the pending memory of the general symbol game) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of stored prizes.

In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 32 can be operated, so the game hall side can operate the display changeover switch 32 as long as the glass door frame 3a can be opened. , it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The present invention is not limited to this form, and the period during which setting operations can be performed at the game parlor side may be limited. For example, in a configuration where the display changeover switch 32 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot on the gaming hall side, in the setting screen shown in FIGS. 5(1) to (3), Selection and determination are made using the operation button 30. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, variable probability state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or the execution state of the special pattern game (whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed or not), , the number of pending memories for the special pattern game) and the execution status of the general pattern game (whether or not the variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of pending memories for the general pattern game). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled, the period when the probability change state or the time saving state is controlled, the period when the special drawing game is being executed, the period when the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game is not 0, etc. The setting screens shown in 5(1) to (3) may not be displayed, and setting operations on the gaming parlor side may be prohibited.

In the above embodiment, only when the player sets the display changeover switch 32, which cannot be operated, to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot on the gaming hall side (setting the operation unit to the second position). , a setting screen (Fig. 5 (1) to (3)) is displayed so that the player can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning slot. Regardless of the form, the configuration does not include a display changeover switch 32 that can be operated only by the gaming parlor side, so that both the player side and the gaming parlor side can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. A common setting screen (similar to those shown in Figures 5 (1) to (3) screen) may be displayed. In a configuration that displays such a common setting screen, even if a game hall clerk sets the number of wins in the general winning hole not to be displayed, the player can subsequently display the number of winnings in the general winning hole. If the setting is to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 5 by applying the settings received later.

In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening is set to be displayed by switching the display changeover switch 32 that can only be operated by the gaming hall side (the operation part is set to the second position), and when the In the case where the number of winnings in the winning openings is set to be displayed, common information (for example, the number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table and the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 5. You may also let them do so. In such a configuration, the display changeover switch 3
Even if the common information is set not to be displayed by switching 2, if the common information is subsequently set to be displayed by operating the operation button 30, the later accepted settings will be applied. Accordingly, common information may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the above embodiment, a limit may be set on the period (gaming state) during which the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, during the period when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the final decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a variable probability state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the gaming hall side determines in which period (gaming state) the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed or not displayed. It may be settable, or it may be settable by a setting means (eg, operation button 30) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player or a personal identification ID registered on a website) using the operation button 30. By doing so, it is possible to compile gaming data including the number of winnings in the general winning slot after inputting the player ID, and by operating the operation button 30 when ending the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game data compiled from after the input of the player ID may be output to the image display device 5 as a two-dimensional code. By capturing an image of a two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and gaming data) with an information terminal that has a two-dimensional code reading function, the player can scan the two-dimensional code and the information management server connected to the Internet. The gaming data identified from the two-dimensional code is added to the gaming data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID identified from the two-dimensional code, and the gaming data identified from the two-dimensional code is added to the gaming data stored in the information management server. The gaming data managed by will be updated. The player is
Since it is possible to access the information management server using an information terminal and check the player's own stored gaming data (gaming data associated with the player ID), it is possible to ascertain the number of winnings in the general winning slot. becomes. In such a form, setting means on the gaming hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 32
), or may be settable by a player's setting means (for example, the operation button 30).

In the case of such a configuration, a benefit may be given to the player in accordance with the number of wins in the general winning openings stored for each player ID in the information management server. for example,
When the number of wins in the general winning slot exceeds a predetermined number, the player with that player ID may be given a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on an information terminal as a benefit. . Further, points may be awarded to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning slot, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. It may also be possible for the player to exchange some or all of the points he/she owns for rewards.

In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the number of wins in the general winning hole, but it does not display the number of winnings in the general winning hole, but the game ball wins in the general winning hole. It may also be something that notifies you of what has happened. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or voice may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. You can also do it. In the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole can be set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 32) on the gaming hall side. It may be possible, or it may be possible to set it by the player's setting means (for example, the operation button 30).

(1) In the pachinko game machine 1, the winning situation in the general winning hole may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays the number of prizes won in each general prize opening and the frequency of winnings (the ratio of the number of prizes won in the general prize opening to the number of balls fired into the gaming area, or the number of general prizes won per hour). The number of winnings in the general winning opening) may be displayed, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed depending on the number of winnings in the general winning opening or the frequency of winning. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be announced by voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. By providing such audio notification, it becomes easier for games and the like to grasp the frequency of winnings in the general winning hole. Furthermore, when a prize is won in the general prize opening, the ball-hitting operation handle, the operation button 30, etc. may be vibrated. By using such a sensory notification, it becomes easier for games etc. to grasp the frequency of winnings in the general winning hole.

The number of wins and the frequency of winnings in each general winning slot can be displayed on the image display device 5, and also output to a management device such as a hall computer that is communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to manage the number of prizes won in each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for maintenance of gaming machines.

(2) In the pachinko game machine 1, a sound effect may be output when a game ball enters a general winning opening, and the sound effect is different from that when a winning opening is made in other winning openings such as the starting winning opening. It would be good to have it output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning hole. Further, in such a configuration, when a prize is won in a specific general winning hole, the sound effect may not be output.

(3) In the pachinko game machine 1, the execution rate and performance mode of the preview performance may be changed based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative pattern variable display that is executed after a game ball enters the general winning hole,
It is preferable that the execution rate or performance mode of the preview performance is changed, and the changed execution rate or performance mode is continued until the preview performance is executed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable number of times of display.

(4) In the pachinko game machine 1, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative pattern variable display that is executed after a game ball enters the general winning hole, and is executed for a predetermined period of time, for example, a predetermined number of variable displays. Until then, it is best to have the changed music continue. Further, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific song (for example, a jackpot song) may be output. In addition, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole, or that the number of winning game balls in the general winning hole has reached a predetermined number, the player can play from among a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be made selectable.

Furthermore, the music being played may be continuously output based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole. For example, when the jackpot game state is controlled, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening, the jackpot music may be continuously output even after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, a stage change may be performed to change the background image of the decorative pattern and the music (BGM) based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the general winning hole. Note that the destination stage (background image and music) may be changed depending on which of the plurality of general winning slots the player wins.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the specific performance executed based on winning in the general prize opening is a variable result preview performance and a look-ahead preview performance related to the display result of the special drawing game. The specific performance is not limited to such a form, and may be a performance that is not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, it may be possible to display a general winning hole among a plurality of general winning holes in which no game ball has won, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole, a character appears.

(6) In the pachinko game machine 1, even though the game ball is launched into the game area,
If a game ball does not enter the general winning hole for a predetermined period, or if the frequency of winnings in the general winning hole is less than a threshold value, the image display device 5 displays that no winnings have occurred in the general winning hole. It is also possible to perform a specific notification such as. In addition, even though the game ball is launched into the gaming area, if the game ball does not enter only a specific general winning hole among the multiple general winning holes for a specified period of time, or if the game ball does not enter a prize in a specific general winning hole. If the frequency is less than the threshold, specific notification may be executed, such as displaying on the image display device 5 that no winnings have occurred in the specific general winning hole.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when simultaneous effects are executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of wins in the general prize opening until the simultaneous effects are executed, or all at once A specific performance may be executed in response to winnings in the general prize opening during the performance period. Also,
The decorative pattern may change, the stop pattern may change, or a sliding performance may be performed in response to a winning in the general winning hole during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

(8) In the pachinko game machine 1, each time a game ball enters the general winning slot, the image display device 5
The number of objects displayed may be increased one by one to make it easier to recognize the winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, only the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole is cumulatively added, and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole is accumulated. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying "Over 100 shots!" on the image display device 5 may be executed. In addition, if the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning slot reaches a predetermined number is during the period when a gaming machine error is being notified based on fraud detection or malfunction detection, The notification of a game machine error is displayed with priority over the specific performance, and the specific performance that has been put on hold is executed after the notification of the game machine error ends.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning sound is output every time a game ball enters the general winning opening, and when a gaming machine error is being notified, the gaming machine error notification sound is used rather than the winning sound. It may be possible to give priority to output. Also, each time a game ball enters the general winning slot, a winning display is displayed on the image display device 5, and when a gaming machine error is being notified, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may also let them do so.

(10) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning opening and the winning of game balls in the general winning opening. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above may be added and displayed on the image display device 5 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state]. When using such a configuration, the displayed
When the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole is added to [Number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state], the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls in the big winning hole is added, and the game to the general winning hole is also added. It is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out is added based on the winning balls. In other words, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be made larger in appearance. In addition, the [Number of prize balls paid out in jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of game balls to the big winning opening, and [Number of prize balls paid out in jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of gaming balls to the general winning opening. The display may be updated in accordance with the timing of individual winnings, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko game machine 1, the number of prize balls may be varied depending on the general winning opening. For example, when game balls win in the first general winning hole 50A and second general winning hole 50B in the left gaming area 10A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning hole in the right gaming area 10B When game balls win in 50C and the fourth general winning hole 50D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko game machine 1, an effect may be executed to encourage a game ball to enter the general prize opening. For example, in a form such as the sixth presentation form, the seventh presentation form, and the fourteenth presentation form, in which a specific presentation is executed by placing a game ball into each of a plurality of general winning holes, The image display device 5 notifies the general winning holes among the general winning holes in which no game ball has entered a prize, and executes an effect that suggests the player to aim for the general winning hole in which the game ball has not entered a prize. It is better to make it . In addition, in a form such as the 8th performance form and the 16th performance form where a specific performance is executed based on the game balls winning in a specific order in a plurality of winning holes, the winning hole to be won and It is preferable that the order in which the prizes should be won be notified by the image display device 5 so that the player can understand the order. For example, in order to execute specific performance A of the eighth performance form, first, "Aim for the first general prize opening!" is displayed, and the first
After the winning in the general winning opening 50A is confirmed, next, the message "Aim for the first starting winning opening!" is displayed, and after the winning in the first starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, the message "Aim for the first starting winning opening!" is displayed. Aim for the general winning hole!'' is displayed, and after the winning in the second general winning hole 50B is confirmed, the specific performance A is executed.

(13) In addition, if the gaming area 10 is provided with a guide route for game balls heading towards the general winning opening, and the entry sensor is configured to detect when a game ball enters the guide route, Based on the detection of the game ball by the entry sensor, an effect may be executed to notify in advance that the game ball will enter the general winning hole. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss winning the game ball into the general winning hole. In addition, a certain period of time is secured from when the game ball enters the general winning slot until the prize ball is paid out.
It is also possible to perform an effect based on winning of a game ball to the general winning hole within the period.

(14) If a stage on which game balls can roll is provided below the image display device 5, an entrance to a general prize opening and a guide route connected to the general prize opening is provided on the stage. The configuration may be such that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general prize opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) An effect may be performed in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 5 is updated every time a prize is won in the general prize opening. For example, a character grows each time a prize is won in a general prize opening, and when a predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the character grows to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (granting benefits, etc.) is executed. You can do it like this. In addition, each time a prize is won in the general prize opening, a performance is performed in which the gauge increases, and when a predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion performance (granting of benefits) is performed. etc.) may be executed. In this type of performance, different objects are displayed depending on the general winning hole, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning hole is updated. It is also possible to do so.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific performance to be executed (fluctuation result preview performance, look-ahead preview performance) differs depending on the gaming state when the winning conditions are met, and also the type of specific performance that is output from the speakers 8L and 8R Although an example in which the sounds are different has been described, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be made to differ depending on the game state. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the effects of the game effect lamp 9 and the music being played are often flashy to increase interest compared to the normal state, so the mode of the specific effect is also more It may be arranged in a flashy manner that is easy for players to understand.

(17) Even though a certain number of game balls have been fired into the gaming area 10, if the number of wins in the general prize opening or the frequency of winnings does not meet the standard value, the player will normally be informed. It is also possible to notify information about the gaming machine that is difficult to access, such as the latent probability change state and limiter.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which a specific effect is executed immediately after the winning conditions are met, but if the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of pending memories (first pending memory If the winning condition is satisfied in a state where the sum of the number and the second pending storage number) is also 0, neither the fluctuation result preview performance nor the pre-read preview performance can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to perform an effect (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of a specific song) that is not related to the display result of the special figure game as the specific effect.

(19) Also, if the winning conditions are met when the variable display of the special drawing is not executed and the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first and second reserved memories) is 0, Alternatively, execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of pending memories becomes 2 or more. In other words, the specific performance is not executed immediately based on the fulfillment of the winning conditions, but the specific performance that has been put on hold is executed based on the establishment of the starting conditions for the special drawing game or the establishment of the starting conditions for the special drawing game. You may also choose to execute it.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of prizes entered into the general winning hole during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball will not be won into the general winning hole (for example, "The number of winnings into the general winning hole is small"). It is also possible to display a message on the image display device 5. Here, only during the maintenance mode in which information for clerks (number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table) is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, general information is displayed on the image display device 5. It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball will not win in the winning hole. A clerk at the game parlor can check whether there is any abnormality in the winning status of game balls in the general winning hole by firing game balls into the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. In addition, irrespective of the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, if the number of winnings in the general winning hole during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 5 will display that no game balls will be won in the general winning hole. You can also do it. In addition, in the same way as the display control of the number of winnings in the general winning opening, based on the settings by the display changeover switch 32 and the operation button 30, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the general It is also possible to display on the image display device 5 that the game ball does not win in the winning hole.

(21) In the above embodiment, if the number of prizes entered into the general winning hole during a predetermined period is greater than the predetermined number, a message stating that excessive game balls have entered the general winning hole (for example, "The number of winnings into the general winning hole" A message "The number of prizes won is too large" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Here, only during the maintenance mode in which information for clerks (number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table) is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 31, general information is displayed on the image display device 5. It is preferable to display on the image display device 5 that an excessive number of game balls have been won in the winning hole. A clerk at the game parlor can check whether there is any abnormality in the winning status of game balls in the general winning hole by firing game balls into the game area 10 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the number of winnings information stored in the number of winnings management table of the production control board 12 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the gaming information management device that manages gaming information, and the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the production control board 12 is transmitted. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to this form, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a general winning signal when it detects winning of a game ball to the general winning opening (for example, outputs a signal of one pulse for each winning). By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of wins to the general winning hole for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. The gaming information management device also provides game information such as the number of wins to the general winning slot per predetermined period (for example, one hour) and the number of winnings to the general winning slot per predetermined number of balls struck (for example, 6000 balls). Alternatively, the winning rate to the general winning hole (the number of winnings to the general winning hole divided by the number of balls hit) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the performance control CPU 120 increases the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 5 each time a prize is won in a general prize opening. The aspect of the object displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed every time a prize is won in the winning hole. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 5 may change depending on the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information of the number of winnings management table is displayed on the image display device 5 as information for store staff (for example, the number of winnings in each winning slot, the number of payouts, etc.) Although we have described an example in which notification is made using
The notification may be made by voice using L/8R, or by controlling the lighting/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, or 7 segments. In addition, the format is not limited to reporting all information on the number of winnings management table, but only information on winning slots where the number of payouts, winning ratio, etc. are not within a predetermined standard range (or within the standard range). You can do it like this.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the number of winnings management table is used as information for store staff (for example, the number of winnings in each winning slot, the number of payouts, etc.) as shown in FIG. Although an example has been described in which notification is made (displayed) in a manner unrelated to the performance executed in the game, the notification is not limited to this type of form, and the notification may be made in a manner corresponding to the manner of the performance performed in the game. good. By being notified in a manner that corresponds to the presentation aspect, compared to the case where the information is only reported using table data as shown in Figure 17, it is easier to simply check the notification manner to see which type of device the information is for. can be easily understood. Note that the performance executed in the game may be any kind of performance, such as a demonstration screen performance, a preview performance, a reach performance, a jackpot performance, etc., and is not limited to the performance displayed on the image display device 5, but may include audio It may also be an effect using lamps. In addition, notification in a manner that corresponds to the aspect of the performance means, for example, a character appearing during a preview performance or a reach performance may output a display or sound that reads out the information on the winning number management table, or the presence or absence of a change may be output. Regardless, the resident character displayed on the image display device 5 and giving a preview, game explanation, etc. may output a display or sound such that the information on the winning number management table is read aloud. Further, the information on the number of winnings management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, information for clerks (for example, the number of wins and payouts to each winning slot, etc.)
A mode changeover switch 31 operated to display information on the winning number management table as
An example has been described in which the operating means such as the above is provided in a position that cannot be operated by the player and can only be operated by the staff at the gaming parlor. It may also be provided in a position that is inoperable and can only be operated by a person concerned with the game machine, such as an inspector, inspector, or manufacturer. Further, it may be provided at a position that can be operated by anyone other than the above-mentioned players.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes was used as the storage area for storing information regarding winnings in games, but counters of up to 3 bytes and counters of up to 4 bytes were used. It is also possible to provide At this time, two types of winning ratio (%) and winning ratio (%) are displayed on the display monitor 29 from the total number of balls won of the gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method for doing this is not limited to the method described above, but may be as follows. As shown in Figure 76, a counter consisting of a maximum of 4 bytes allows
When calculating the total number of balls acquired, number of balls acquired as accessories, and number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories, the top 16
Computations may be performed using bits. By the way, with a 4-byte counter, if we assume that the number of balls acquired per day is 30,000, then 4294836225 (4 bytes) / 30
000 (number of balls acquired per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075/
365 days = approximately 392, which is enough to cover 392 years' worth of data.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG.
may be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a main board 11C without a display monitor,
A display board 11D may be provided separately from the main board 11C, and the display monitor 29 may be provided on the display board 11D by connecting the main board 11C and the display board 11D with a harness 11E. In this case, calculation of the winning ratio and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 and reception of data used for these calculations are performed on the main board 11C. The main board 11C sends the calculated yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio, as well as information regarding the control for displaying these, to the display board 11D using the harness 11E.
Send via. The display board 11D may display the yakuren (ren ratio) and the yaku ratio on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main board 11C.

Further, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are mounted in a board case 201 which is a caulked board case.
It is stored in A. Similar to the board case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A), a caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201A. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11C and the display board 11D are completely enclosed in the board case 201A, thereby preventing unauthorized acts on the main board 11C. Also, in the board case 201A, like the board case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A), holes and heat radiation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the display substrate 11D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B, which is a caulked substrate case, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the display substrate 11D may be enclosed in a substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in a substrate case 201B. In this example, the display board 11D is connected to the main board 11C by a harness 11E. In addition, the board case 20
Also in 1C, holes and heat radiation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided, similar to the board case 201 shown in FIG. 51(A). These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Note that the board case 20 enclosing the display board 11D
1C may not be a caulked board case, but may be a caulked board case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a label is pasted on the surface of the board case 201 shown in FIG. 50(A), and a record of caulking use is written on the label 11R. Good too. Here, the label 11R may be placed in a position that partially hides the display monitor 29. In this way, since a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden by the label 11R, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, the player cannot easily see the yakuren (renbi) or the yakuza ratio. Can be done. Moreover, even when pasting the label 11R, it may be pasted at a position that does not hide the display monitor 29.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a movable accessory, the grand prize opening (
Electric accessories such as attacker) and second starting prize opening (electronic chew) are used, but instead of these electric accessories, so-called mechanical accessories that open and close using the weight of the game ball are used as movable accessories. Good too. In addition, a 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29.
Instead of 7 segments, a dot display, a display screen, etc. may be used. Also, instead of LED,
It may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device, a fluorescent display tube, or the like. Furthermore, although the display monitor 29 is provided with a four-digit display section, that is, a first display section 29A to a fourth display section 29D, the number of digits is not limited to four digits, and may be any other number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits, or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, such as the display of the winning ratio or winning ratio. We may take measures such as resolving the error. For example, in order to pay out game balls, a replenishment mechanism that replenishes game balls (supply balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 2. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 may be opened to clear the ball jam and clear the error. In cases where the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the yakuren (ren ratio) or yaku ratio on the display monitor 29 may be etc. may not be displayed.

In addition, in order to avoid displaying yakuren (renbi), yaku ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 at this time, it is necessary to check that no error has occurred in the display of yakuren (renbi), yaku ratio, etc. may be made a condition. Here, errors regarding the display of yakuren (renbi), yaku ratio, etc. are, for example, shown in Figure 6.
3, detection of an abnormal operation as determined in step S101, acquisition of winning information during business hours as determined in step S104, and detection of a predetermined number of prizes or more for an attacker per unit time as determined in step S106. good. By making it a condition that no error occurs in the display of such Yakuren (Renbi) or Wakuren ratio, players can
It is possible to prevent situations in which information such as consecutive ratios and yaku ratios are seen.

In addition, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the glass door frame 3a or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened to release the error, and after the error release is completed, the user's role on the display monitor 29 is It is also possible to wait for a predetermined period of time, for example, one minute, before displaying the winning combination, hand ratio, etc., and to display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After the occurrence of an error is resolved, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely removed, and similar errors often occur one after another. By displaying the yakuren (ren ratio), winning ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, even when such an error occurs, information such as the yakuren (ren ratio) and the winning ratio can be displayed to the player. You can prevent the situation from being seen. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be longer than one minute, such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or shorter than one minute, such as 30 seconds. Further, the predetermined time may be set depending on the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball jam in the replenishment mechanism and the case of a failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period for the ball jam in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

The main board 11 is also provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, such as a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying errors. It is preferable that this error indicator is placed at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 is placed on the right ⅓ of the main board 11, and the error indicator is placed on the right side of the main board 11.
It may be arranged at the left ⅓ position of 1. Furthermore, in order to make it easier to understand the display monitor 29, where the display monitor 29 is located on the main board 11 may be printed in text on the board case 201, or a sticker may be pasted on the board case 201. You can leave it there. Further, the display monitor 29 may be provided on a payout control board that is a part of the main board 11.

(29) In the above embodiment,
Using a pachinko machine as an example, we explained that the winning ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor.
) or yakuren (ren ratio) (%) may be calculated and these values may be displayed on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, similar to the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 described above.

In slot machines, yakuhi and yakuren (renbi) are, for example, payouts of gaming value (gaming value, hereinafter also referred to as ``medals'') that accompany the progress of slot machine games, which are the bonuses installed in the slot machine. It is calculated based on whether the slot machine is in operation or not, and whether the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first type special accessory.

For example, as accessories, the first type special accessory, the second type special accessory, and the ordinary accessory are set,
If a slot machine is not equipped with a Type 1 special accessory as an accessory, but only other accessories such as a normal accessory, the winning ratio is the action of the accessory relative to the total number of medals paid out. Calculated based on the number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the 1st type special accessory and no other accessories than the 1st type special accessory, the total payout of the medals will be It is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory.

An example of a method for calculating yakuren (ratio) (%) in a slot machine will be described below. Here, an example will be described in which the first type special accessory is set in a special game state and only the first type special accessory is mounted as an accessory. In the slot machine, it is possible to start changing the symbols by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated depending on the result of the fluctuation of the symbols. Winnings in slot machines include bonus wins that involve giving gaming value, replay wins that allow symbols to start changing without setting the number of bets, and transition to a special gaming state that increases the probability of winning bonuses. There is a bonus prize. Here, the yakuren (ren ratio) (%) in a slot machine is the cumulative amount of gaming value obtained by winning awards as a result of symbol fluctuations during a period in which symbol fluctuations are performed a predetermined number of times. (equivalent to the total number of balls acquired in the above-mentioned pachinko machine), the cumulative amount of gaming value obtained as a result of winnings as a result of symbol fluctuations during the period of transition to the special gaming state (equivalent to the above-mentioned number of balls acquired) (equivalent to the number of consecutive winning balls in a pachinko game machine). For example, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained during the period in which the symbols change 6,000 times, is 16,000, the award will be awarded during the period when the special gaming state is entered. If the number of medals obtained is 9000, then 9000
0.56 obtained by dividing by 16,000 is yakuren (ren ratio) (%).

Further, the main board of the slot machine is provided, for example, at the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board when viewed from outside the slot machine is different from that of the gaming machine 1. Since reels and the like are housed in the outer frame of a slot machine, the outer frame of a slot machine is often larger than that of a pachinko gaming machine. Furthermore, due to its structure, the main board of the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (on the inside surface of the back plate material). For this reason, when the door frame of a slot machine is opened, it is highly likely that the light will not reach the main board sufficiently. (numbers, characters, etc.), it is preferable to display them brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged on the main board provided at the back of the outer frame so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction. An arrangement that is easily visible from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement that faces the front when viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame when the door frame is opened from the outer frame. By arranging the display monitors in this way, store staff, etc.
When performing the work of confirming the winning ratio (consolidated ratio), the store clerk, etc. can do the work of confirming the winning ratio (consolidated ratio) by only slightly opening the slot 3 for the gaming machine, without opening it wide. . Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the Yakuren (Renbi) Yaku ratio.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, when viewed from the open part between the door frame and the outer frame and facing the front, it has an inclined surface like the base member 129A shown in FIG. The display monitor may be attached to an inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame.
Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed in the main substrate. In addition to these, a display monitor may be provided on any of the base members 129A to 129I on which the display monitors 130A to 130I described above are provided. In addition, when a display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and display monitor may be housed in a board case, or the display monitor may be placed outside the board case that houses the main board. may be provided.

Moreover, these display monitors may be provided in an adjustment means that allows adjustment of the installation angle of the display monitors with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Since the display monitor is provided in the adjustment means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, the slot machine can be adjusted according to the wishes of the gaming hall where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. Further, the adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

Note that although the main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, it may be provided at another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side or the left side when viewed from the player's side inside the outer frame. If it is installed on the right side of the outer frame, it will be installed on the side corresponding to the open part between the door frame and the outer frame, so if the display monitor is installed on the main board, it will be easier to see the display monitor. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine as well, the main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame, similar to the pachinko gaming machine. However, slot machines do not have anything comparable to the game board of pachinko machines, and the door frame has a viewing window to make the reels visible.
The main board may be provided at a position avoiding this viewing window. Also, in a pachinko game machine, instead of providing the main board on the back side of the game board, the main board may be provided at the back of the outer frame or on the left and right sides, as in a slot machine.

Although we have shown an example in which the calculated winning ratio (%) and winning ratio (%) are displayed on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board, the payout control is not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another substrate such as a board, a game board surface, a frame for a game machine (underframe), or the like. In addition, it is not limited to those equipped with a dedicated display monitor for displaying yaku ratio (%) and yakuren (ren ratio) (%), but also existing display devices (for example, image display device 5, Predetermined information such as winning ratio (%) and winning ratio (ren ratio) (%) may be displayed using a 7-segment display in a slot machine, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, etc.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine described above, the predetermined information is the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio (cumulative winning combination (ren ratio) and cumulative winning ratio), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the predetermined information may be the number of game balls to be paid out (=number of prize balls). In addition, in slot machines, machine discount (= (number of medals paid out / number of medals inserted)
x100) or the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games and for each predetermined number of inserted medals. In addition, predetermined information such as yakuren (ren ratio), yaku ratio, machine discount, etc. can be displayed for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 60 games.
00 games, and predetermined information for each number of games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

Further, some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. Settings refer to numerical values that divide the probability in slot machines into stages, for example, 6 from setting 1 to setting 6.
There are stages. The information displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information, such as yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio, may be displayed for each setting, or when displayed for each setting, the settings may also be displayed. Good too.

Furthermore, some slot machines allow one game to be executed with different numbers of medals inserted (number of bets). For example, the number of coins to be inserted (bet number) for one game is 1 to 3.
One game can be played by selecting one of the medals and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as the winning ratio and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of coins inserted (number of coins bet). There are also slot machines in which the required number of coins to be inserted (number of coins to bet) differs depending on the gaming state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of coins to be inserted is two when the gaming state is during bonus, and the required number to be inserted is three when the gaming state is not during bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as a winning combination or a winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted coins.

In addition, in slot machines, predetermined information includes not only the yakuren (ren ratio) and yaku ratio that are calculated based on normal yakuza and special yakuza, but also, for example, the slot machine's gaming state that has an advantage other than during a bonus. When sections and non-advantageous sections are set, the ratio of the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections is displayed. Good too. In addition, the display monitor displays, as predetermined information, the number of consecutive games in an advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as the "number of games in an advantageous section") and the number of games between an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section, in addition to the Yakuren (renbi) hand ratio. A ratio (hereinafter referred to as "advantageous/unfavorable ratio") may be displayed.
The number of consecutive games in the advantageous section and the advantageous/unfavorable ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor that is different from the Yakuren (Renbi) Waku ratio, or they may be displayed at different times using a common display monitor. good.
For example, using a common display monitor, the number of games in the advantageous section → the advantageous/unfavorable ratio → the short-term combination (
It may be displayed in the following order: (continuous ratio) → short-term winning ratio → cumulative winning ratio (continuous ratio) → cumulative winning ratio → number of games in an advantageous section → etc.

Further, the number of games in an advantageous period may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous period, or may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games played in an advantageous period during a predetermined period, for example, on the same day. The advantageous/unfavorable ratio may be the number of games played over a predetermined number of games, for example, the past 3000G, or may be the advantageous/non-advantageous ratio during a predetermined period, for example, on the current day.

Further, the ratio between the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. In short, the ratio of medals paid out in advantageous sections to medals paid out in non-advantageous sections may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections. By lowering the payout ratio of medals in advantageous sections, it is possible to reduce fluctuations in the amount of medals. In addition, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, predetermined limits may be set on the advantageous section, such as a predetermined number of games, an upper limit on the amount of medals that can be paid out in the advantageous section, and machine discounts during the advantageous section. .

The advantageous section refers to a section in which the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted (machine rate) is higher than the non-advantageous section. This is an advantageous section for players because the machine discount is high. Advantageous periods include during the bonus period when normal accessories and special accessories are activated, during replay time (RT), assist time (AT),
For example, during assisted replay time (ART). The machine split in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but it may be less than 100% (the so-called reduced RT
etc). If the machine split in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more you continue playing the game, the more medals will be consumed, but the rate of consumption of medals will be lower, making it less advantageous for the player than in the non-advantageous section. It will be advantageous.

During the replay time, for example, refers to a state where the probability of winning a replay (winning probability) is higher than in a state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, and the amount of medals consumed can be reduced, so the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During assist time, for example, when a condition device such as a predetermined operating procedure is met and a winning combination is displayed on the active line, it is a state in which the player navigates the operating procedure. . Navigating the operation procedure includes, for example, navigating the stopping order when stopping three reels in a predetermined stopping order, or navigating the symbol when stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol. There are some. During assist time, the operating procedure is not navigated in states other than assist time, so it is uncertain whether the operating procedure will be executed or not.However, during assist time, the operating procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combinations can be aligned on the active line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During assist replay time refers to a state in which replay time and assist time are executed simultaneously. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections to increase or decrease medals. Here, each of the advantageous sections such as during the bonus, during the replay time, during the assist time, and during the assist replay time may be more advantageous than the non-advantageous sections, but the degree of advantage may be smaller.

The advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or part of these sections. For example, in a slot machine in which a plurality of advantageous sections are provided as advantageous sections, the advantageous sections for calculating the ratio to be displayed as predetermined information may be only the advantageous sections in which the machine percentage exceeds 100%. Furthermore, even if the advantageous sections are of the same type, whether or not they are used as advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be changed depending on the transition conditions. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to replay time immediately after the bonus period ends and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games, after the bonus period ends, the replay that transitions immediately after the bonus period ends. The time period is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio to be displayed as predetermined information, and the ratio to be displayed as predetermined information is calculated during the replay time, which transitions after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period. It is also possible not to set it as an advantageous section for this purpose.

During the replay time, which is immediately after the end of the bonus period, the player who has won many medals during the bonus is given a chance to obtain further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time which is transferred after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period, it is a so-called remedial replay time in which a player who has lost many medals is given relief for the lost medals. During such chance replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio to be displayed as predetermined information, and during remedial replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio to be displayed as predetermined information. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, when calculating other numerical values such as the winning ratio, winning ratio, or machine split in a slot machine, for replaying, a predetermined number of medals, for example, 3 medals, are inserted and one game is executed. , the calculation may be performed assuming that three medals are paid out. Alternatively, for re-playing, it is considered that the game was not played and the player's role in the slot machine is
Other numerical values such as , hand ratio, or machine split may also be used.

In addition, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 102 in the pachinko game machine contains 600
The number of prize balls won by winning each winning hole for each number of prize balls of 0 is stored. On the other hand, a ring buffer in a slot machine may store, for example, the number of medals paid out in an advantageous period and a non-advantageous period for each predetermined number of medals paid out, or the number of medals paid out for each predetermined number of games. The number of medals paid out in the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number here is, for example, 50.
The number may be 0 or 1000. Any other suitable number may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals paid out in 400 games is 6000 pieces. Therefore, the maximum number of coins paid out in 400 games is 2.
It can be stored with plenty of space in a byte storage area.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-links, etc., one variation is used when starting the variation. Although an example of transmitting a pattern designation command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the production control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notification is made using two commands, the main board (main side) uses the first command to check the presence or absence of a pseudo link, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. before it becomes a reach (if it is not a reach, the (before the second stop)
A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, the previous fluctuation pattern) is sent, and the second command is used to specify the type of reach, whether there will be a re-lottery effect, etc. If the reach is not reached, a command (eg, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time or variation mode (eg, post-variation pattern) after the so-called second stop may be transmitted.

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. Incidentally, the main board may notify the variation time using each of the two commands, and the production control board may select the specific variation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has passed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt The second command may also be sent. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can also be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern using two or more commands in this manner, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

What is displayed during the variable display of special symbols is only one type of out-of-line symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. . Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the image display operation on the image display device to execute the processing shown in the flowchart, the audio output operation on the speaker, and the lighting operation on the game effect lamp and decorative LED. The various performance operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but rather a payout-type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of a winning. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that provide.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided on a removable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. , the software may be distributed by being preinstalled in a storage device of a computer device or the like. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in the above example, the first starting opening (belly button) and the general winning opening (sode) to be counted are
The number of award balls (general award balls), the number of regular electric award balls (denchu award number), and the special number of award balls (attacker award balls) due to winning will now be recorded in the ring buffer. It has a recording capacity for at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. However, instead of this format, in the present invention, only the total cumulative total is recorded as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 78. It can be of any type. Specifically, RWM10000 for total cumulative storage and RWM1000 for total cumulative storage.
1, and the winning ratio (synonymous with "Yakuren (Renbi)" in the above embodiment), the information regarding the winning of the game (the first starting opening (belly button) and the general winning opening (socket)) to display the winning ratio. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of regular electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls)) due to winning in (D) will be accumulated to RWM 10,000 and 10,001. I will try to remember it. Furthermore, by deleting information regarding winnings in games from the total cumulative storage RWM 10000 at a predetermined timing, the continuous ratio calculated based on the total from the time of deletion to the present,
The winning ratio can be displayed as a short-term consecutive ratio and a short-term winning ratio, and the total cumulative storage RWM 1000
The consecutive ratios and winning ratios calculated based on the total of 1 can be displayed as cumulative consecutive ratios and cumulative winning ratios. With this configuration, it is sufficient to simply have multiple storage areas that accumulate and store information related to winnings in games, and there is no need for processing such as a ring buffer that stores and updates a certain amount of information. Therefore, it is preferable.

Note that the predetermined trigger may be, for example, turning the power on or off.
According to this, information regarding winnings in games from the time the power is turned on can be compiled, that is, the consecutive ratios and winning ratios for one day can be displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios. In addition, in this case, the cumulative value of the total cumulative storage RWM 10000 at the time of deletion is saved.
If an RWM 10002 is provided and the cumulative value of this RWM 10002 is displayed as a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term winning ratio, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and short-term winning ratio for one day before the power is turned on, which is preferable. In addition, by using a real-time clock etc. at a predetermined timing, for example, one day,
It is also possible to accurately tally short-term consecutive ratios such as one hour and short-term winning ratios.

Furthermore, the predetermined trigger can be a trigger related to a game, such as a setting change, opening a door, or detection of a touch sensor on a handle. According to this, short-term continuous ratios and short-term This is preferable because the hand ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained by setting the predetermined trigger as the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of jackpot hits reaches a predetermined number.
Note that instead of having two RWMs like the RWMs 10000 and 10001, two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, there is an area 20,000 for aggregating information regarding winnings in games, an area B1 for storing cumulative results of information regarding winnings in games for the 6,000th game, and an area B1 for storing cumulative results for the 12,000th game. Area B2, 1
Area B1 for storing cumulative results of information regarding winnings of the 8000th...60000th game
Set 0. Then, in the area 20000, information related to winnings of games is added and updated, and on the condition that the number of prize balls reaches 6000, information regarding winnings of games accumulated and stored in area 20000 is added and updated. Information (Number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning in the first starting hole (belly button) and general winning hole (sode), number of regular electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize prize balls (number of balls awarded by the attacker)) is stored in area B1. Furthermore, on the condition that the number of prize balls reaches 12,000, the information stored in area B1 is moved to area B2,
Information regarding winnings of games accumulated and stored in area 20000 is stored in area B1. In this way, the information of area 20,000 is entered into area B1 every 6,000th area, and the information of other areas is shifted. Also, after the number of prize balls reaches 66,000, area B1
Control is performed to erase the information regarding winnings of the game stored in 0 and to move the information in area B9 to area B10.

With this configuration, the consecutive ratios and winning ratios calculated based on the totals in the area 20000 can be displayed as cumulative consecutive ratios and cumulative winning ratios. Furthermore, by subtracting the value of area B10 from area 20,000, the most recent 60,000 consecutive ratios and winning ratios (that is, approximately 10 hours) can be displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios. Furthermore, by subtracting the value of area B1 from area 20000, the most recent 6000 consecutive ratios and winning ratios (that is, approximately one hour) can be displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios.

Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 79, only the region B10 can be provided as shown in FIG. 80. According to this, it is not possible to obtain detailed consecutive ratios and winning ratios for about one hour, but it is possible to display the most recent 60,000 short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios (approximately 10 hours' worth), so the capacity can be reduced. It is preferable that it is small.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has an RWM 30000 for storing total cumulative totals and an RWM 30001 for storing total cumulative totals, and information regarding winnings in games (the first
The number of prize balls that enter the starting hole (belly button) and the general winning hole (sode) (general prize ball number), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize) Number of pitches)) RWM3000
0, 30001 are accumulated and stored.
The total cumulative storage RWM 30000 accumulates and stores the number of prize balls starting from the first prize ball, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM 30001 waits without storing the number of prize balls 1 to 60,000. Then, the number of prize balls is accumulated and stored starting from the 60,001st prize ball. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM 30000 and the total cumulative storage RWM 30001 is 60000.
By subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM 30001 from the total cumulative storage RWM 30000, 60000 consecutive ratios and winning ratios can be displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios. In addition, the consecutive ratios and winning ratios calculated based on the total cumulative storage RWM 30000 are as follows:
It can be displayed as a cumulative consecutive ratio or a cumulative winning ratio.

Further, in the above embodiment, instead of the ring buffer format, a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 82 may be used. Specifically, it includes cumulative total counters 40000, 40001, and a total cumulative total counter 40002, and the total cumulative counter 40002 includes information regarding winnings in games (the first starting opening (belly button) and general The number of prize balls that enter the prize opening (sode) (general prize ball number), the number of regular electric prize balls (denchu prize ball number), the special electric prize prize ball number (attacker prize ball number)) Start accumulating and memorizing the numbers starting from the first number. Total cumulative counter 4
The consecutive ratios and winning ratios calculated based on the total of 0002 can be displayed as cumulative consecutive ratios and cumulative winning ratios.

On the other hand, two counters, 40000 and 40001, give 600
00 consecutive ratios and winning ratios are displayed as short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40,000 starts counting from the first prize ball, and is cleared when the number of prize balls reaches the 60,000th ball. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 40001 starts counting from the 30,000th ball, and is cleared when the number of prize balls reaches the 90,000th ball. When trying to calculate short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios for 60,000 items, for example, from the 30,001st to the 60,000th item, the calculation is based on the total of the cumulative counter 40,000, and from the 60,001st item to the 9,000th item,
For the 0th item, the calculation is made based on the total of the cumulative total counter 40001.
In this way, the cumulative counters 40,000 and 40,001 are tallied so that the number of prize balls differs by 30,000 balls, so when trying to display the short-term consecutive ratio and short-term winning ratio, it is necessary to calculate the number of prize balls by at least 30,000 balls. In other words, the short-term continuous ratio and short-term winning ratio within 5 hours can be displayed. According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and display relatively recent short-term consecutive ratios and short-term winning ratios, which is preferable.

(performance display)
Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to the display of the winning combination (ren ratio) and the winning ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information will also be referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 1, for example, a display monitor provided on the main board 11 (display monitor 1130 shown in FIG.
etc. (described later) performs performance display.

83 and 84 are explanatory diagrams regarding performance information. FIG. 83(A) shows an example of performance information items displayed by the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine 1, the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value can be displayed as performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 83(A). The real-time base value of item number "bL" is the base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60,000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (launched) under normal conditions, up to 60,000 (from 0 to 5).
9999), which is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured. The previous cumulative base value of item number "b6" is the base value (previously measured cumulative value) for every 60,000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (fired) under normal conditions, and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the 60,000 game balls measured last time. .

The normal state in performance display is a state managed or controlled by the above-mentioned gaming state flag. Specifically, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off (excluding the state where the round game flag is on). That is, in the performance display, a state in which all of the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are OFF is called a normal state. The variable probability flag is a flag indicating whether or not the state is in a variable probability state. The time saving flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state is in effect. The round game in progress flag will be described later.

In addition, although it has been explained that the normal state in the performance display is that the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game flag are all off, other displays (main board 11 side and production control board side 12
(Display related to the number of prize balls etc.), the normal state may be the state when all of the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are off. For example, Figure 45
The items B1 to B4 may be counted when all of the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are in an OFF state. Furthermore, for example, in connection with FIG. It is also possible to calculate and display the winning combination (ren ratio) and winning ratio during a round game (all flags are off).

FIG. 83(B) shows values that are aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 100 side for performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 83(A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 83(B). Specifically, the above base value is the number of prize balls from all winning holes (the number of winning balls from the first general winning hole 50A, the number of winning balls from the second general winning hole 50B) with respect to the number of balls hit (60,000 balls). Number of prize balls, number of prize balls won through the third general winning hole 50C, number of prize balls won through the fourth general winning hole 50D, number of prize balls won through the first starting winning hole, number of prize balls winning through the second starting winning hole, This is the percentage (%) of the number of prize balls due to the big winning hole. In other words, in the gaming machine 1, the values shown in FIG. 83(B) are totaled in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. 83(A) are calculated using the totaled values. Calculate and display.

FIG. 83(C) shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 1, performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 11 in the display mode shown in FIG. 83(C). Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 1 displays (flashing or lighting) "bL." indicating the real-time base value in the upper two digits of the total four digits, and ,
Display (light up) a number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" in the lower two digits of the total four digits. Of the total 4 digits, the lower 2 digits are the original real-time base value, but the upper 2 digits are the original real-time base value.
The display of all four digits including digits is sometimes referred to as real-time base value display. In addition, when displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 1 displays (flashing or lighting) "b6." indicating the previous cumulative base value in the top two digits of the total four digits, and Display (light up) a number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "--" in the lower two digits of the total four digits. In addition,
The lower two digits of the total four digits are the original previous cumulative base value, but the display of all four digits including the upper two digits may also be called the display of the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 84(A) shows a section (aggregation section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots fired). The "factory shipment test section" in FIG. 84(A) is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The "first section" is the first section among the sections managed for each of the total number of outs of 60,000 (0 to 59,999). The "second section" is the second section among the above respective sections. The "third section" is the third section among the above respective sections. In FIG. 84(A), subsequent sections are omitted.

FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F) show how performance information is displayed according to each section (and the number of pieces within the section). In each of FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F), the left side shows the display mode of the real-time base value, the right side shows the display mode of the previous cumulative base value, and the bidirectional arrow in the center shows the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value. Indicates that it will be switched.

FIG. 84(B) shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. 84(A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in Figure 84(B), the real-time base value whose upper two digits are "bL. (blinking)" and the lower two digits are "-- (lit)", and the upper The previous cumulative base value whose two digits are "b6. (blinking)" and the lower two digits are "-- (lit)" is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. Note that the radial highlighted display shown in the upper two digits "bL." on the left side and the upper two digits "b6." on the right side of FIG. 84(B) is blinking. It shows that. Figure 84(C), Figure 84(D), Figure 8
The same applies to 4(E), FIG. 105, and FIG. 106.

FIG. 84(C) shows that the total number of outs is 0 to 599 in the first section shown in FIG. 84(A).
This shows the display mode of performance information displayed when there are up to nine pieces of performance information. When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first section, the upper two digits are "bL. (flashing)" and the lower two digits are numerical values, as shown in Figure 84(C). (%) lights up (in the example of Figure 84(C), "32 (lit)") and the upper two digits are "b6. (blinking)".
” and the previous cumulative base value whose lower two digits are “-- (lit)” are displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84(D) shows that the total number of outs in the first section shown in FIG. 84(A) is from 6000 to
The display mode of performance information displayed when the number of pieces of performance information is up to 59,999 is shown. When the total number of outs in the first section is between 6000 and 59999, the
As shown in D), the upper two digits are "bL. (lit)" and the lower two digits are the numerical value (%) lit (in the example of Figure 84 (D), "33 (lit)") in real time. The base value and the previous cumulative base value whose upper two digits are "b6. (flashing)" and lower two digits are "-- (lit)" are
Displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

FIG. 84(E) shows that the total number of outs is 0 to 5 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 84(A).
The display mode of performance information displayed when the number of pieces of performance information is up to 999 is shown. When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (blinking)" and the lower two digits are Numerical value (%) lighting (Figure 84
In the example (E), the real-time base value is "34 (lit)" and the upper two digits are "b6.
(lit)" and the lower two digits are numeric values (%) (in the example in Figure 84 (E), "33 (lit)
'') are displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

In FIG. 84(F), the total number of outs is 600 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 84(A).
The display mode of the performance information displayed when the number is 0 to 59999 is shown. 2
If the total number of outs is between 6000 and 59999 in the interval after the first time,
As shown in FIG. 84(F), the upper two digits are "bL.
) lights up (in the example of Figure 84 (F), "34 (lights on)") is the real-time base value, and the upper two digits are "b6. (lights on)" and the lower two digits light up a numerical value (%) The previous cumulative base value ("33 (lit)" in the example of FIG. 84(F)) is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

The configuration of the gaming machine 1 when displaying performance will be described below. FIG. 85 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 85. The gaming machine 1 for performing the performance display described above may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, for example.

In FIG. 85, reference numeral 700 near the tip of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a shot ball detector including a shot detection sensor 700A (see FIG. 86). Although FIG. 85 shows an example in which the launched ball detector 700 is placed near the exit of the guide rail, other positions on the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, at the same height as the normal symbol display 20) The shot ball detector 700 may be placed at a position closer to the ball launcher (near the entrance, etc.) on the guide rail. Although some of the appearance of the game effect lamp 9, operation button 30, etc. is different,
5, the same components as in FIG. 1 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 1, and the description of the components (same configuration as in FIG. 1) will be omitted.

In FIG. 86, reference numeral 1130 is a display monitor that displays performance information. code 700
A is a firing detection sensor. Note that in FIG. 86, the same configuration as in FIG. 49 is shown in FIG.
The same reference numerals as 9 are given, and the description of the structure (same structure as in FIG. 49) will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 when displaying performance will be explained using FIGS. 87 to 94.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing (also referred to as special symbol process processing). In the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 87, the CPU 103 executes state control processing (step S1101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a starting winning determination process (step S1102). In the starting prize determination process, the CPU
For example, the system 103 determines the presence or absence of a starting prize based on the detection signals from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, determines whether or not a pre-read preview performance is executed, and issues various commands (on hold). Configure the transmission settings for the number of memory notification commands, starting prize winning determination result designation commands, etc.

Following the startup winning determination process in step S1102, the CPU 103 stores the RAM 102 (R
According to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting section in AM102,
One of the processes in steps S1110 to S1117 is selected and executed.

The special symbol normal process in step S1110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, the first
It is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game using the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, random numbers for determining the special symbol display result are used to determine whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot", and when it is determined to be a "jackpot", a random number is used to determine the jackpot type. The jackpot type and the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game are determined. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the variable display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section in the RAM 102) is set to the on state, and the "jackpot" is determined. When it is determined, a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control buffer setting section in the RAM 102). In the special symbol normal processing, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S1111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, a process of determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern is performed. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when a variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S1112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In the special symbol variation process, a process of varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing, etc. are performed. . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S1113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". The special symbol stopping process is a process of stopping and displaying a fixed special symbol, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmed display time) in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. etc. will be carried out. In the special pattern stop process, if the special pattern confirmation display time has passed, refer to the jackpot flag and set the value of the special pattern process flag to "0" or "4".
”.Specifically, if the jackpot flag is on (if the confirmed special symbol is a jackpot symbol), the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off, and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4.
”.On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a losing symbol), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0”.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S1114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In the jackpot release pre-processing, the processing waits until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also referred to as the jackpot start effect) executed on the effect control board 12 side (the waiting time for the effect at the start of the jackpot). Also, settings are made to open the big prize opening after the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has elapsed. In the jackpot opening preprocessing, when settings are made to open the jackpot opening, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

The jackpot opening process in step S1115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The jackpot opening process includes a process of determining whether a condition for returning the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state has been met (elapse of the jackpot opening upper limit time or the upper limit number of prizes won);
After the conditions are met, settings are made to return the grand prize opening to the closed state. In the jackpot opening process, if settings are made to return the jackpot to the closed state, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to “
Update to 6”.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S1116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In the jackpot release post-opening process, processing is performed to determine whether or not the number of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a predetermined number of times. In the process after jackpot release, if the number of rounds executed has not reached the predetermined number of times, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "5", and when the predetermined number of times has been reached, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "7". Update to.

The jackpot end process in step S1117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In the jackpot end process, the process waits until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as the effect at the end of the jackpot) executed on the side of the effect control board 12 (the waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot). will be held. In the jackpot end process, when the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the state control process executed in step S1101A of FIG. 87. In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S2001). Step S2
When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in 001 (step S2001; YES)
, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game in progress flag provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section in the RAM 102) is on (step S2002). As mentioned above, the round game in progress flag is one of the flags that defines the normal state. If the round game flag is on in step S2002 (step S2002; YES),
End state control processing.

On the other hand, if the round game in progress flag is off in step S2002 (step S20
02; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the state change switching wait flag provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section in the RAM 102) is on (step S20
03). The state change switching wait flag is a flag provided for setting the state change switching wait time (described later) only once when the round game flag is off.

If the status change switching wait flag is off in step S2003 (step S2003
; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2004).
Specifically, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 102 (gaming control timer setting section in the RAM 102).
A predetermined state change switching waiting time is set as the timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is the stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer provided in the state change switching waiting time timer. Step S20
The state change switching waiting time set in the process of 04 is shorter than the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 89). Although the details will be described later, time T1 in FIG. 95 is the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot, and time T1 in FIG.
2 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S2004, the CPU 103 sets the status change switching wait flag to the on state (step S2005). Then, the state control process ends.

If the status change switching wait flag is on in step S2003 (step S2003
; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006). In the process of step S2006, for example, it is determined whether the state change switching waiting time timer whose timer initial value was set in step S2004 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Bye. Step S2006
If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed (step S2006; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2006 (step S2006
; YES), the CPU 103 clears the status change switching wait flag to turn it off (step S2007), and sets the round game in progress flag to on (step S2008).
).

Following step S2008, the CPU 103 performs settings for terminating the time saving state and variable probability state (step S2009). In the process of step S2009, the CPU 103
Executes processing such as clearing the time saving flag and variable probability flag to turn them off. In addition, in the process of step S2009, if a value (a value other than 0) is set to the probability variation number count value, which is the stored value of the probability variation number counter provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section in the RAM 102), may execute a process of initializing the probability variable count value to "0".
In addition, in the process of step S2009, if a value (a value other than 0) is set to the time saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time saving number counter provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section in the RAM 102), may execute a process of initializing the time saving count value to "0". Note that the time saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of the special figure game in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the remaining number of times) of the special figure game in which probability variation control is performed.

Following the process of step S2009, the CPU 103 moves the main board 11 to the effect control board 1.
Settings are made to send a gaming state designation command to 2 (step S2015).
Thereby, a change (transition) in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the production control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 88, the gaming state designation command is sent regardless of whether the gaming state changes or not; however, if the gaming state changes (
For example, the gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the state changes from a time saving state or a variable probability state to a normal state. In addition, on the side of the production control board 12, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead of this,
The current gaming state may be specified based on a winning start designation command or the like. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG. 101.

If the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2001 (step S20
01; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (
Step S2010). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2010 (step S2010; NO), the state control process is ended.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2010 (step S201
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game in progress flag is on (
Step S2011). If the round game flag is off in step S2011 (
Step S2002; NO), the state control process ends.

If the round game flag is on in step S2011 (step S2011;
YES), the CPU 103 clears the round game in progress flag to turn it off (step S2013).

Following step S2013, the CPU 103 performs settings for starting the time saving state and the variable probability state (step S2014). In the process of step S2014, the CPU 103
Depending on the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; jackpot type buffer value), set the probability change flag or time saving flag to on state, and set the probability change count value or time saving number count value to the initial value depending on the jackpot type. Set. For example, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state and time saving state continue until the next jackpot after the end of the jackpot, the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to the ON state. For example, after the end of the jackpot, until the next jackpot,
In the case of a probability variable jackpot where the probability variable state and time saving state continue until the special symbol game is played 00 times, set the probability variable flag and time saving flag to the on state, and set the probability variable number count value to 100 as the initial value. , 100 is set as the initial value for the time saving count value. For example, after the jackpot ends, the probability change state and time saving state continue until the next jackpot occurs or until the 30th special map game is played, and then after the 31st special map game, until the next jackpot occurs. 10
In the case of a definite variable jackpot in which the time-saving state continues until the special symbol game is played 0 times, the definite variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to the on state, the definite variable number count value is set to 30 as the initial value, and the time-saving number is set to the ON state. Set the count value to 100 as an initial value. For example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot in which the time-saving state continues after the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot or until the end of 100 special symbol games, the time-saving flag is set to the on state and the time-saving number is Set the count value to 100 as an initial value. For example, in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot that does not enter the probability variable state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, nothing is done (neither the probability variable flag nor the time-saving flag is set to the on state, and the probability variable number count value does not change to the time-saving state. (Do not set a value for the count value.)

Following step S2014, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S2015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process executed in step S1113 of FIG. 87. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the game control flag setting section or the like is on (step S2291). Here, the special symbol confirmed display flag is set in step S22 in response to the derived and displayed confirmed special symbol which becomes a variable display result in the special symbol game.
It is set to the on state by the process 95.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is off in step S2291 (step S22
91; NO), the CPU 103 performs settings for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S2292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control board 12 (step S2293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmed display time which is the stop display time of the confirmed special symbol (step S2294).
Specifically, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 102 (gaming control timer setting section in the RAM 102).
A predetermined special figure confirmed display time is set as the timer initial value of the special figure confirmed display time timer value which is the stored value of the special figure confirmed display time timer provided in the.

Following the process of step S2294, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmed display flag to the on state (step S2295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is on in step S2291 (step S22
91; YES), determine whether the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S2296)
. In the process of step S2296, for example, whether or not the special figure confirmation display time timer whose timer initial value was set in step S2294 has timed out (the special figure fluctuation time timer value is 0
It is only necessary to determine whether the If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S2296 (step S2296; NO), the special symbol stop process is ended.

When the special figure confirmation display time has passed in step S2296 (step S2296;
YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S2297
), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is on (step S2298). If the jackpot flag is on (step S2298; YES), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step S2299). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the timer initial value of the performance waiting time timer value at the start of the jackpot, which is the stored value of the performance waiting time timer at the start of the jackpot provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control timer setting section in the RAM 102). A performance waiting time at the start of a predetermined jackpot is set. Following the process of step S2299, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S2300). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step S2301), and sets the jackpot start flag provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section in the RAM 102) to the on state (step S2302). and,
The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-process (step S2305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S2298 (step S2298; N
O), it is determined whether to end the time saving state or variable probability state (step S2306). In the process of step S2306, the CPU 103 updates the respective count values depending on whether a value (a value other than 0) is set for the variable probability count value or the time saving frequency count value, and changes the time saving state or the variable probability state. Determine whether or not to terminate. For example, if a value is set in the time-saving count value (for example, a special map game played after the end of a non-probable variable jackpot where the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot or until the 100th special chart game is completed) is 100 times or less), the time saving number count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether the updated time saving number count value matches the time saving end judgment value (for example, "0"), and if the updated time saving number count value does not match the time saving end judgment value. It is determined that the time saving state is not to be ended. In addition, for example, if values are set for the variable frequency count value and the time saving frequency count value (for example, the variable probability state and the time saving state continue until the next jackpot or until the special symbol game is played 100 times) If the number of special symbol games played is less than 100 after the end of the jackpot), the probability variation count value is subtracted by 1 and updated, and the time saving count value is updated by subtracting 1. In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated variable frequency count value matches the variable termination determination value (for example, "0"), and if the updated variable frequency count value does not match the variable termination determination value. It is determined that the definite variable state is not to be ended, and if it matches, it is determined that the definite variable state is to be ended, and the time saving number count value after the update is the time saving end judgment value (
For example, "0"), and if the updated time saving number count value does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined that the time saving state is not to be ended. Note that when the CPU 103 determines to end the variable probability state, it clears the variable probability flag and turns it into an off state, and when it determines to end the time saving state, it clears the time saving flag and turns it into an off state.

Following the process of step S2306, settings are made for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S2307). Thereby, a change (transition) in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the production control board 12 side. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S23
08), the special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, in the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. The gaming state designation command may be transmitted only when the state changes from a variable probability state to a normal state, etc.). Note that on the production control board 12 side, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command sent from the main board 11, but instead of this, production control is performed independently from the main board 11 side. The current gaming state may be identified by counting the number of times variable display is executed on the board 12 side.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release preprocessing executed in step S1114 of FIG. 87. In the jackpot release preprocessing shown in FIG. 90, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step S2131). here,
The jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process (step S2302 in FIG. 89).

If the jackpot start flag is not on in step S2131 (step S2131;
NO), execute the big winning opening determination process (see FIG. 92) (step S220), and step S2
Proceed to 138. In this way, in addition to the jackpot opening process in step S1115, step S
By executing the big winning opening determination process also in the post jackpot opening process of 1114, winnings exceeding the winning upper limit determination value (over winnings) can be suitably detected. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected while waiting for the next release (while it is in step S2138 (YES)). The big winning opening determination process will be described later.

Although it has been explained that the addition of the number of prize balls is excluded when more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening per unit time, excessive winnings are not excluded. In other words, even if there is a win that exceeds the above-mentioned "win limit judgment value", if the excess number of wins is within the range that is generally assumed to be an over-win (for example, up to +3 balls), the prize ball (actual payout) , reflection in performance information). The exclusion from the addition of the number of prize balls is due to fraudulent activity, and the excess number of balls won is outside the range that is generally expected to be considered as over winning.

If the jackpot start flag is on in step S2131 (step S2131; Y
ES), determine whether or not the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has elapsed (step S2132)
. In the process of step S2132, for example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance waiting time timer whose timer initial value was set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value has become 0). It is only necessary to determine whether the

If the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has not elapsed (step S2132; NO), the jackpot release preprocessing is ended.

If the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has passed (step S2132; YES), the CPU
103 clears the jackpot start flag (step S2134). Next, CPU1
03 clears the grand prize opening number counter (step S2135). in particular,
Initialize the count value of the number of openings of the grand prize opening to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S2136), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S2137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is set according to the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal processing. In addition, the opening control pattern includes, for example, a maximum winning opening opening time for each round.

Following the process of step S2137 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is waiting for the next release (step S2138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the big prize opening is opened as the next round. Step S2
In the process of 138, for example, it is determined whether the round start waiting time timer whose initial value was set in step S2366 of the jackpot release process has timed out (whether the round start waiting time timer value has become 0 or not). All you have to do is judge. If it is waiting for the next release (step S2138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the jackpot release preprocessing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not on standby for the next opening (step S2138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the start of opening the big winning opening (step S2138;
2139). For example, the CPU 103 sets the opening time for opening the big winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S2137 and the count value in the big winning opening number counter, and also sets the opening time for opening the big winning opening. Set it as follows. in particular,
In the process of step S2139, for example, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 102 (RAM 102
The maximum prize opening time for the corresponding round in the opening control pattern set in step S2137 as the timer initial value of the opening time timer value, which is the stored value of the opening time timer provided in the game control timer setting section in (Upper limit time for open state). In addition, in the process of step S2139, the solenoid 28 for the big prize opening door may be set to be in the ON state by transmitting a solenoid drive signal via the solenoid circuit 111, etc. In addition, in the case of the first round (when the jackpot release pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), so the step In the process of S2138, it is immediately determined that the next release is not on standby.

Following the process of step S2139, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a notification command that the big winning hole is open to the production control board 12 (step S2140). and,
The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" (step S2141), and the jackpot release preprocessing is ended.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process executed in step S1115 of FIG. 87. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 91, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S2121). If the big winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S2121; NO), a big winning opening determination process is executed (step S220).

92 shows the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S1114) in FIG. 90, the jackpot opening processing (step S1115) in FIG. 91, the jackpot opening post-processing (step S1116) in FIG.
4 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot determination process executed in the jackpot end process (step S1117) of No. 4.

In the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 first
It is determined whether the detection signal transmitted from No. 3 is turned on (step S221).
When the count switch 23 is not on (step S221; NO), the big winning opening determination process is ended.

If the count switch 23 is on (step S221; YES), settings are made to send a grand prize opening notification command to the production control board 12 to notify the winning of the game ball to the grand prize opening. (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether the value of the special figure process flag is "5", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not "5", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S223; NO), the jackpot opening determination process is ended.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "5", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S223; YES), the winning number counter provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section in the RAM 102) is stored. The winning prize count value is updated by adding 1 (step S224). Then, the big winning opening determination process ends. In addition, when the process of step S244 is performed in the big prize opening determination process, the payout process of prize balls is executed in the prize ball process. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the probability change flag, the time saving flag,
If all of the round game flags are off, the number of prize balls from the big prize opening is updated in relation to the performance display. However, as shown in FIG. 88, at least during the period from the start of the first round (the closing of the grand prize opening door → opening) to the end of the final round (the opening of the grand prize opening door → closing),
Since the round game flag is not off but on, the number of prize balls from the big prize opening is not updated during the period.

Return to FIG. 91. Following the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, "10") (step S2
126). If the winning upper limit judgment value has not been reached (step S2126; NO), the jackpot opening process is ended.

On the other hand, if the upper limit time for opening the big winning hole has passed in step S2121 or (step S2
121; YES), when the winning upper limit judgment value is reached in step S2126 (step S2126; YES), the end of opening of the big winning opening is controlled (step S2127). That is, the CPU 103 determines to end the current round game, and sets the big prize opening to be closed. For example, the transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 may be set to be stopped. Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the prize winning number counter and initializes the winning prize number count value to "0" (step 2128). Then, set the value of the special figure process flag to “6”.
” (step S2129), and the jackpot opening process ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing executed in step S1116 of FIG. 87. In the jackpot opening post process shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 103 first executes the jackpot opening determination process shown in FIG. 92 (step S220). In this way, in addition to the process during jackpot opening in step S1115, the jackpot opening determination process is also executed in the post-jackpot opening process in step S1116, thereby suitably detecting a win exceeding the upper limit determination value (over-win). be able to.

After executing the big winning hole determination process shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 103 updates the big winning hole opening count value to be incremented by 1 (step S2364). Subsequently, it is determined whether the updated count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening has reached the maximum value (step S2365)
.

In addition, in step S2365, the above-mentioned "maximum value" to be compared with the updated grand prize opening number count value is the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. In other words, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening to be compared with the above-mentioned "maximum value" is the updated one (step S2364).
), the initial value of the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is “1” (S2135 in FIG. 90),
The above-mentioned "maximum value" needs to be the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 6-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 6), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of a 16-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 16), The above "maximum value" is "17". In addition, the count value of the number of times the big winning hole was opened before the update may be compared with the "maximum value" instead of the count value of the number of times the big winning hole was opened after the update, and the count value of the number of times the big winning hole was opened before the update. In this case, the "maximum value" may be used as the upper limit number of rounds.

If the grand prize opening number count value is other than the maximum value (step S2365; NO), a round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S2366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 102 (gaming control timer setting section in the RAM 102).
A predetermined round start waiting time is set as the timer initial value of the round start waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in the round start waiting time timer.

Following step S2366, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a notification command after opening the big prize opening to the production control board 12 (step S2367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S2368), and the jackpot release post-processing is ended. In this way, until it is determined by the process of step S2365 that the updated grand prize opening number count value is the maximum value, steps S1114 to S1116 shown in FIG. 87 etc.
By repeatedly executing the above process, it is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the jackpot is opened in the jackpot game state. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S2366, it is possible to wait until the round start waiting time elapses as shown in FIG.
etc., the next release is on standby in the process of step S114 (step S in FIG. 90).
2138; YES), the next round can be started after a desired interval period.

If the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is the maximum value in step S2365 (step S2
365; YES), the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set (step S2369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 103 uses the timer initial value of the performance waiting time timer value at the end of the jackpot, which is the stored value of the performance waiting time timer at the end of the jackpot provided in the RAM 102 (gaming control timer setting section in the RAM 102). As such, a predetermined performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot is set.

Following step S2369, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a winning end designation command to the production control board 12 (step S2370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" (step S2371), and the jackpot release post-processing is ended. In this way, by setting the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot in the process of step S2369, the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot can be set according to the end of the ending performance executed on the performance control board 12 side (FIG. 94).
(Step S2321; YES), the special symbol normal process of Step S1110 shown in FIG. 87 can be executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process executed in step S1117 of FIG. 87. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 94, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S2321). In the process of step S2321, for example, whether or not the jackpot end effect waiting time timer whose timer initial value was set in step S2369 of the jackpot release post-processing has timed out (the jackpot end effect waiting time timer value becomes 0). It is only necessary to determine whether the Step S2321
If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed (step S2321; NO), the jackpot end determination process shown in FIG. 92 is executed (step S220), and the jackpot end process is ended. In this way, by executing the big winning opening determination process in the jackpot opening process in step S1115 and in the jackpot ending process in step S1117, it is possible to suitably detect winnings that exceed the winning upper limit determination value (over winnings). Can be done.

If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has passed in step S2321 (step S2
321; YES), updates the value of the special figure process flag to “0” (step S2325),
Execution of the jackpot end process is ended.

The operation of the gaming machine 1 when displaying performance has been explained above using FIGS. 87 to 94. According to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. After the symbols are stopped and displayed, it is controlled to a jackpot game state, but 1
The round game in progress flag is turned on before the round is opened. This will be explained in detail below.

(A) End of fanfare performance → first release of special variable winning ball device After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 103 determines the execution time of the fanfare performance in the special symbol stop processing. The waiting time until the end of the game (the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot) is set (step S2299 in FIG. 89), and the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "4". Further, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 opens the jackpot after the waiting time has elapsed (step S2132 in FIG. 90; YES) (step S2139 in FIG. 90). That is, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state before the end of the fanfare performance, and is in the open state for the first time after the end of the fanfare performance.

(B) Set the flag during the round game to ON → end the fanfare performance Also, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 103 sets the state change switching waiting time (see FIG. 88). Step S2004), after the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2006 in FIG. 88; YES), the round game flag is set to the on state (step S2008 in FIG. 88). As described above, the state change switching waiting time is shorter than the jackpot start performance waiting time (execution time of the fanfare performance). That is, before the end of the fanfare performance, the round game flag is turned on.

From (A) and (B) above, the flag during the round game is set to the on state -> the end of the fanfare performance -> the first opening of the special variable prize winning ball device 7. In other words, the round game flag is turned on before the first round is opened.

In addition, as mentioned above, the gaming state in which the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit are collected to display performance is called the normal state, and the normal state specifically includes the probability change flag, time saving flag, round game This is a gaming state in which all of the medium flags are off (see FIG. 83). Therefore, at least when the round game flag is on, it does not correspond to the normal state, so the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit are not collected for performance display, at least when the round game flag is on.
That is, at least when the round game flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit are not reflected in the performance display.

According to (A) and (B) above, since the round game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round, the number of prize balls and the number of batted balls can be determined from a certain stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (or more accurately, it is not reflected). In addition, the expression "at the latest" means that the playing state of the special pattern game before the special pattern game in which the jackpot symbol was stopped and displayed was a variable probability state or a time-saving state (in other words, at least the probability variable flag or the time-saving flag was one of them is on), a stage before the above-mentioned "certain stage before the release of the first round" (for example, a stage during the execution of the special pattern game before the special pattern game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, etc.) ), the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit are no longer reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right shows the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom shows the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 shows, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the shot ball detector 700 (shot detection sensor 700A), the state of the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening door) (open state) , closed state), and the timing of winning a prize in the big winning opening (timing of detection of game balls by the count switch 23).

As shown in FIG. 95, the jackpot symbol (shown as the determined decorative symbol "777" on the image display device 5 in the figure) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol in the special pattern game (more specifically, the determined special symbol shown in FIG. 89) When the special figure confirmation display time has passed) and the waiting time for the performance at the start of the jackpot (shown as a fanfare performance in the same figure) has ended, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for the first time (1Rth release in the same figure). ) is performed. Note that the jackpot performance on the image display device 5 is a performance performed during execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 91). In addition to the performance performed during the process during jackpot release (FIG. 91), the performance performed during the process after jackpot release (FIG. 93) may also be referred to as a jackpot performance.

Timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 95 is the timing when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. Timing t3 is the timing at which the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened for the first time after the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot ends. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop processing (FIG. 89). Furthermore, the timing t
The second prize will be explained later.

Further, FIG. 95 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
It schematically shows how the game ball c) is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A. The game ball a is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at a timing a little earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during a reach performance), and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, when the game ball a is in the closed state of the big prize opening door). A game ball, etc. that has flown down the front side). Game ball b is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at timing t2, and at timing t3 (
The game ball is picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of opening) and detected by the count switch 23. The game ball c is detected by the firing detection sensor 7 at a timing slightly later than timing t2.
It is a game ball that is detected by 00A, picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

The time T2 between timing t1 and timing t2 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88). In addition, the game ball b detected by the launch detection sensor 700A at timing t2 flows down the gaming area 10 at the slowest imaginable flow rate after being detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, and reaches the big prize opening door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the player and detected by the count switch 23.
In other words, the game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 23. In other words, at timing t2, the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of opening is detected by the launch detection sensor 700.
This is the earliest timing that can be detected by A.

In other words, there are game balls detected by the count switch 23 among the game balls detected by the launch detection sensor 700A before the opening of the grand prize opening door (for example, during the execution period of a fanfare performance). Even if a game ball such as ball c is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing during time T3), and a gaming ball is detected by the firing detection sensor 700A before the opening of the big prize opening door, the count switch 23 In order to prevent the game balls that may be detected from being reflected in the performance display, the round game flag is set to the on state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed) (step S2008 in FIG. 88).

In addition, hypothetically, if the round game flag is set to the on state at timing t3 (if it is not reflected in the performance display from the opening timing of the big prize opening door)
, for example, the firing detection sensor 700A at any timing of time T3, such as game ball c.
Game balls detected by the system are reflected in the performance display as the number of balls hit, but inconsistencies occur such that the number of prize balls when they enter the big prize slot is not reflected in the performance display, making it difficult to accurately display performance. become unable to do so. On the other hand, if the round game in progress flag is set to the on state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Although it has been explained that the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big prize door at the moment it is opened is detected by the launch detection sensor 700A, or it may be a timing later than the average timing. You can. In other words, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S2004 of the state control process (FIG. 88) takes into account the falling time of the game ball (launched ball detector 700 → special variable winning ball device 7). That's fine. However, in order to display performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the earliest timing mentioned above to timing t2. The same applies to FIG. 98.

[Modifications related to projectile ball detector]
FIG. 96 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 97 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 96. The gaming machine 1 in which performance is displayed may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, for example.

In FIG. 96, the reference numeral 701 above the first passage gate 41A indicates the first firing detection sensor 7.
01A (see FIG. 97). All game balls passing through the left game area 10A pass through the first shot ball detector 701. In other words, the first projectile ball detector 701 (
The first firing detection sensor 701A) detects all game balls passing through the left game area 10A. Reference numeral 702 above the second passage gate 41B is a second shot ball detector including a second shot detection sensor 702A (see FIG. 97). All the game balls passing through the right game area 10B pass through the second shot ball detector 702. That is, the second shot ball detector 702 (second shot detection sensor 702A) detects all the game balls passing through the right game area 10B.

Although FIG. 96 shows an example in which the launched ball detectors 701 and 702 are placed above the passing gates 41A and 41B, if all the game balls can be detected, they may be placed in other positions (for example, at the passing gates 41A, 41B).
The projectile ball detectors 701, 702 may be placed below the projectors A, 41B, etc.). Note that in FIG. 96, the same components as in FIG. 85 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 85, and descriptions of the components (same components as in FIG. 85) will be omitted.

In FIG. 97, reference numeral 701A indicates a first firing detection sensor. The code 702A is the second
It is a firing detection sensor. Note that in FIG. 97, the same components as in FIG. 86 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 86, and descriptions of the components (same components as in FIG. 86) will be omitted.

Note that the operations shown in FIGS. 87 to 94 are also applied to the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. In other words, the special figure processing when displaying performance in the gaming machine 1 with the configuration shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 and the special symbol processing when displaying the performance in the gaming machine 1 with the configuration shown in FIGS. This is common to diagram processing.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. In FIG. 98, the direction from left to right shows the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom shows the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 includes, in order from the top, launched ball detectors 701 and 7.
Detection timing of game balls by 02 (launch detection sensors 701A, 702A), state (open state, closed state) of special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening door), timing of winning to the big winning opening (by count switch 23) Detection timing of game balls).

Further, FIG. 98 shows three game balls (game ball a, game ball b,
It schematically shows how the game ball c) is detected by the first firing detection sensor 701A (or the second firing detection sensor 702A). The game ball a is detected by the first firing detection sensor 701A (or the second firing detection sensor 702A) at a timing slightly later than timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, if the game ball is in a closed state). Game balls, etc. that have flowed down the front side of the grand prize opening door). Game ball b is detected by the first firing detection sensor 701A (or second firing detection sensor 702A) at timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at timing t3 (the moment it is opened), and detected by the count switch 23. It is a game ball that is played. The game ball c hits the first ball at a timing slightly later than timing t3.
It is a game ball that is detected by the firing detection sensor 701A (or the second firing detection sensor 702A), picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than timing t3, and detected by the count switch 23.

Note that the first shot ball detector 701 (first shot detection sensor 701A) and the second shot ball detector 7
02 (second firing detection sensor 702A) can detect game balls at the same time, but even if game balls are detected at the same time, each game ball detected at the same time is captured (counted) as the number of balls hit. ) is possible. For example, with respect to one side, the execution timing of the process executed after detection (accounting process) may be shifted, and each game ball detected at the same time may be captured as the number of balls hit.

The arrangement position of the launched ball detector 700 shown in FIG. 85 and the first launched ball detector 7 shown in FIG.
01 and the second shot ball detector 702 are different, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the game ball shot by the ball launcher in the configuration of FIGS. 96 and 97 is detected by the first shot ball detector. The time taken until the ball is detected by the ball detector 701 (or the second ball detector 702) is shown in FIG.
In the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the time required for the game ball fired by the ball launcher to be detected by the shot ball detector 700 is longer. In addition, in the configurations of FIGS. 96 and 97, the time it takes for the game ball detected by the first shot ball detector 701 (or second shot ball detector 702) to reach the placement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is as follows: In the configurations shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the time required for the game ball detected by the shot ball detector 700 to reach the placement position of the special variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than the time required.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 98) set in the configurations of FIGS. 96 and 97 is different from the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 98) set in the configurations of FIGS.
5).

Note that the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 (or the part including the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 (referred to as part A)) are installed on the game board 2. It may also be detachable. Further, the game board 2 is composed of part A and one or more parts other than part A, and part A may be detachably attached to one or more parts other than part A. For example, in FIG. 96, a portion including the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 (the portion above the broken line P in the figure) may be removable.

[Modification using out-ball detector]
FIG. 99 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 100 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 99. Gaming machine 1 when displaying performance
may have the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, for example.

In FIG. 99, the reference numeral 710 within the broken line is an out ball detector including an out ball detection sensor 710A. The out-ball detector 710 is arranged at a position that cannot be seen from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated using a broken line in FIG. 99. Further, reference numeral 52 is an outlet. Winning holes (1st general winning hole 50A, 2nd general winning hole 50B, 3rd general winning hole 50C,
Game balls that have not entered the fourth general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, and big winning opening are taken into the out opening 52.

The out ball detector 710 detects all game balls fired into the game area 10 by the ball firing device. In other words, the game ball launched into the gaming area 10 is
A, 2nd general winning opening 50B, 3rd general winning opening 50C, 4th general winning opening 50D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, big winning opening) or do not enter the winning opening. Either it is taken into the out port 52 or it is taken into the out port 52. Both the game balls that have entered the winning hole and the game balls that have been taken into the out hole 52 are finally collected in one path on the back (or inside) of the game board 2. Since the out ball detector 710 is placed on the above-mentioned path, the out ball detector 710 is placed on the above path, so the out ball detector 710
Detect all game balls fired at.

In FIG. 99, an example is shown in which the out ball detector 710 is placed at the center in the left and right direction (below the out port), but if all the game balls can be detected, it can be placed in another position (for example, on the right side in the left and right direction). The out-of-ball detector 710 may be placed closer to the ball, closer to the left side in the left-right direction, etc.). Note that in FIG. 99, the same components as in FIG. 85 are denoted by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 85, and descriptions of the components (same components as in FIG. 85) will be omitted.

In FIG. 100, reference numeral 710A indicates an out ball detection sensor. Note that in FIG. 100, the same configurations as in FIG. 86 are given the same reference numerals as in FIG. 86, and descriptions of the configurations (same configurations as in FIG. 86) will be omitted.

Note that in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the state control process in step S1101B (FIG. 10) is performed in place of the state control process in step S1101A (FIGS. 87 and 88).
Execute 1). Note that other special symbol processing (each processing shown in FIGS. 89 to 94) is also applied to the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. In the state control process shown in FIG.
103 first determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S20
21). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S2021 (step S2021; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game flag is on (step S2022). If the round game flag is off in step S2022 (step S2022; NO), the state control process ends.

On the other hand, if the round game in progress flag is on in step S2022 (step S20
22; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the status change switching wait flag is on (step S2023).

If the status change switching wait flag is off in step S2023 (step S2023
; NO), the CPU 103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S2024).
Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as the timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S2024 is the process after jackpot release (
This is a shorter time than the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot set in step S2369 of FIG. 93). The details will be described later, but time T4 in FIG. 102 is the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot,
Time T5 in FIG. 102 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S2024, the CPU 103 sets the state change switching wait flag to the on state (step S2025). Then, the state control process ends.

If the status change switching wait flag is on in step S2023 (step S2023
; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S2026). In the process of step S2026, for example, it is determined whether the state change switching waiting time timer whose timer initial value was set in step S2024 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Bye. Step S2026
If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed (step S2026; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S2026 (step S2026
; YES), the CPU 103 clears the state change switching wait flag to set it to the off state (step S2027), and clears the round game in progress flag to set it to the off state (step S20).
28).

Following step S2028, the CPU 103 performs settings for starting the time saving state and variable probability state (step S2029). Note that the process in step S2029 is similar to the process in step S2014 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG. 88.

Following step S2029, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S2035). Thereby, a change (transition) in the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the production control board 12 side. Then, the state control process ends.

If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S2021 (step S20
21; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (
Step S2030). When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S2030 (step S2030; NO), the state control process is ended.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S2030 (step S203
0; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round game in progress flag is on (
Step S2031). If the round game in progress flag is on in step S2031 (
Step S2032; YES), the state control process ends.

If the round game flag is off in step S2031 (step S2031;
NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has elapsed (step S2032). In the process of step S2032, the jackpot opening preprocessing (
Similar to the process in step S2132 of step S1114), it is only necessary to determine whether or not the jackpot start production waiting time timer, whose initial value was set in step S2299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 89, has timed out. . If the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S2032 (step S2032; NO), the state control process is ended.

If the production waiting time at the start of the jackpot has passed in step S2032 (step S20
32; YES), the CPU 103 sets the round game in progress flag to the on state (step S2033).

Following step S2033, the CPU 103 performs settings for terminating the time saving state and variable probability state (step S2034). Note that the process in step S2034 is similar to the process in step S2009 of the state control process (step S1101A) shown in FIG. 88.

Following the process in step S2034, the CPU 103 executes the process in step S2035 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 1 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 99 and 100. In FIG. 102, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 5. The lower side of the display of the image display device 5 shows, in order from the top, the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening door), the winning timing to the big winning opening (the game by the count switch 23) (ball detection timing) and the detection timing of a game ball by the out ball detector 710 (out ball detection sensor 710A).

As shown in FIG. 102, the final release (shown as the final R release in the figure) is completed in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the jackpot end effect (shown as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

Timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 102 is the timing when the last opening ends in the special variable winning ball device 7 (timing when the big winning opening door is in the closed state). Moreover, the timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. Timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between timing t4 and timing t6 is
This is the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot, which is set in step S2369 of the jackpot release post-processing (FIG. 93). Note that timing t5 and the like will be described later.

Further, FIG. 102 shows three game balls (game ball d, game ball e) fired by the ball launcher.
, game ball f) is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. The game ball d is picked up by the big prize door at a timing a little earlier than timing t4, detected by the count switch 23 at a timing a little later than timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than timing t5. This is a game ball detected by 710A. The game ball e is picked up by the grand prize opening door at timing t4 (the moment of closing),
This is a game ball that is detected by the count switch 23 at a timing later than timing t4, and detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at timing t5. game ball f
is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 23 (for example, a game ball that has flown down in front of the closed grand prize opening door), and is detected at a timing later than timing t5 (and later than timing t6). This is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

The time T5 between timing t4 and timing t5 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101). In addition, timing t4
After being picked up by the big winning opening door, the game ball e moves at the slowest imaginable speed to the position where it is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A (during the movement, the game ball e is moved by the count switch 23). ) and is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. In other words, the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at a timing later than timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 23. In other words, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A.

In other words, among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the big winning opening door is closed (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect), there are game balls detected by the count switch 23 (for example, Even if it is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A at any timing during time T5, such as game ball d), or a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A after the big winning opening door is closed, the count switch is not activated. In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected by 23 from being reflected in the performance display, the round game flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S2028 in FIG. 101). In other words, until timing t5 (time T5)
During the round game, the flag remains on and is not reflected in the performance display.

In addition, if the flag during the round game is cleared to the off state at timing t4 (if it is reflected in the performance display from the closing timing of the big prize opening door),
The player enters the big winning slot before timing t4, and the out ball detection sensor 71 hits the ball after timing t4.
If the game ball detected by 0A (game ball fired at a timing a little earlier than game ball d) enters the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls will not be reflected in the performance display, but the number of balls struck will be This causes inconsistency in that the performance is reflected in the performance display, making accurate performance display impossible. on the other hand,
If the round game in progress flag is cleared to the OFF state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Although it has been explained that the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the out ball detection sensor 710A can detect the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of closing, the timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be the average timing at which the out ball detection sensor 710A detects a game ball picked up by the big prize opening door at the moment of closing, or it may be an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. In other words, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101) is the moving time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 7 → out ball detector 71
0) should be taken into account. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the latest timing as the timing t5.

FIG. 103 shows an example of the configuration of an out-ball detector. The above-described out-of-ball detector 710 may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A). The out-ball detector 710 shown in FIG. 103(A) includes a main body 720 and a harness 730. The main body 720 includes an opening (passing part) 721 through which a game ball that has entered any winning opening or a game ball taken into the out opening 52 passes, and an out ball detection unit that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 721. sensor 710A,
A connecting portion 722 is provided. The harness 730 includes a signal line 734 to which connecting portions (connecting portions 732 and 733) are connected at both ends, and a connecting portion (connecting portions) for connecting to the connecting portion 722 on the main body 720 side.
connector) 732, and a connecting portion (connector) 733 for connecting to a predetermined connecting portion (not shown) provided on the main board 11 side. Note that FIG. 103(A) (same as FIG. 103(B)) shows a state in which the main body 720 and the harness 730 are connected. In addition, at the connection part (connection part 733, connection part on the main board side 11), the out-ball detector 710 (harness 730
) and the main board 11 are removable. Moreover, in the connection part (connection part 722, 732),
Main body 720 and harness 730 may be detachable.

The game balls that have entered any of the winning ports or the game balls that have been taken into the out port 52 are finally collected in one path and all pass through the opening 721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is outputted to the main board 11 side via the harness 730. In addition, the out ball detector 71
Since the game balls detected by 0 are totaled (counted) as the number of balls hit, the out ball detection sensor 710A is sometimes referred to as a count switch.

Note that the out-ball detector 710 is used when the harness 730 is disconnected from the main body 720 (when the connecting part 722 on the main body 720 side and the connecting part 732 on the harness 730 side are not connected properly), or when the harness 730 etc. is disconnected (disconnection in the middle of the signal line 734, disconnection between the signal line 734 and the connection part 732, disconnection between the signal line 734 and the connection part 734, etc.), the always-on signal is switched on as the main signal. It is configured to output to the board 11 side. Therefore, CPU1
03 is capable of detecting a disconnection of the harness, etc. by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 710 in the error detection process described above. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that a harness disconnection or disconnection has occurred when an on signal is input continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the detection signal output by the out ball detector 710 when the game ball passes through the opening 721 may be composed of a predetermined on/off pattern. When at least a portion of the detection signal consists of a predetermined on/off pattern, the CPU
103 is capable of detecting signal distortion due to noise or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out-of-ball detector 710.

Further, the out-ball detector 710 may include a clasp 740 having a screw hole 741, as shown in FIG. 103(B). Alternatively, the out ball detector 710 (main body 72
0) may be capable of attaching a clasp 740. Note that the clasp 740 is attached to the main body 72.
This is an example of a fixing member for fixing 0 to the gaming machine 1 or the like, and any fixing member may be used as long as the main body 720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 1 or the like.

Further, the harness 730 (at least a portion of the connecting portions 732 and 734 and the signal line 734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Further, the main body 720 and the harness 730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 720 of the out-ball detector 710 is a separate harness 73.
It may be possible to connect to 0.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error notification processing for errors related to performance display. FIG. 105 is an example of a display mode for notifying errors related to performance display. Figure 1
In the error notification process shown in 04, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to reception of the detection signal output from the out-of-ball detector 710 is detected (step S1200).
.

Note that if there is an abnormality in the out ball detector 710 (for example, harness disconnection, disconnection, signal garbled, etc.), the CPU 103 detects the out ball in a process different from the error notification process (the above-mentioned error detection process). A reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the device 710 is detected. For example, the CPU 103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected if the ON signal continues for a predetermined period of time. In addition, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-of-ball detector 710 is made up of a predetermined on/off pattern, and the CPU 103
may determine that the signal is garbled if a received signal different from a predetermined on/off pattern is input.

If no reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; NO)
, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the reception error flag provided in the RAM 102 (eg, game control flag setting section) is on (step S1201). Step S1201
If the reception error flag is on (step S1201; YES), the CPU 103 clears the reception error flag and turns it off (step S1202), and in step S12
Proceed to 05. If the reception error flag is off in step S1201 (step S12
01; NO), the process skips step S1202 and proceeds to step S1205.

If reception abnormality is detected in step S1200 (step S1200; YES),
The CPU 103 determines whether the reception error flag is on (step S1203).
). If the reception error flag is off in step S1203 (step S1203; N
O), the CPU 103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S1204).
, the process advances to step S1205. If the reception error flag is on in step S1203 (step S1203; YES), the process in step S1204 is skipped and step S12
Proceed to 05.

Step S1201 (NO), Step S1202, Step S1203 (YES),
Following any of the processes in step S1204, it is determined whether the reception error flag is on (step S1205).

If the reception error flag is off in step S1205 (step S1205; NO
), the CPU 103 controls the performance to be displayed in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S1206). In the process of step S1206, the CPU 103 executes the process shown in FIG.
) to perform control so that the performance display is performed in the display mode shown in FIG. 84(F). Then, the error notification process ends.

If the reception error flag is on in step S1205 (step S1205; YE
S), the CPU 103 controls the error notification mode to be displayed (step S1
207). In the process of step S1207, for example, the CPU 103 controls the display in the display mode shown in FIG. 105(A). In the display mode of FIG. 105(A), the upper two digits are "-- (blinking)" and the lower two digits are "-- (lighting)." Then, the error notification process ends.

In addition, if there is a reception error related to the reception of the detection signal by the out ball detector 710, the number of balls hit (FIG. 83(B)) will not be updated, but the number of prize balls for each winning hole ( Figure 83 (B
)) is also not updated. In other words, the CPU 103 controls the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, as in the case of the processing related to the winning ratio (ren ratio) and the winning ratio (FIG. 61, etc.).
, the count switch 23, and any one of the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D to obtain winning information by detecting a game ball (
received), but in a situation where the number of balls hit is not updated, the process of adding up the number of prize balls based on winning information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in Figure 104, normally the upper two digits are displayed as "bL. (blinking, lit)" or "b6. (blinking, lit)" (Figure 84 (B) ~Figure 84 (F
)), "-- (lit)" is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 105(A)). That is, when reception is abnormal, the upper two digits are displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it is possible to easily recognize that something is not normal.

Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 105(A) is an example. For example, in the process of step S1207, the display may be controlled to be displayed in the display mode of FIG. 105(B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 105(A). Similar to FIG. 105(A), the upper two digits of FIG. 105(B) are also
This is a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it is possible to easily recognize that something is not normal.

Further, for example, in the process of step S1207, control may be performed so that display is performed in the display mode of FIG. 105(C) or FIG. 105(D). The second highest digit in FIG. 105(C) is “E.
(blinking)" and the upper two digits "Er. (blinking)" in FIG. 105(D) are reminiscent of "Err." Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the second upper digit), it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality.

In addition, in Figures 105(A) to 105(D), the lower two digits are "-- (lit)", but the lower two digits may be "-- (blinking)", or other displays may be used. It may be an aspect.

Note that when it is normal, that is, in the display by the process of step S1206, the display shown in FIG. 84 (
The display contents change as shown in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(F) depending on the interval shown in A) and every 5 seconds, but when there is an abnormality, that is, the display by the process of step S1207 changes. The displayed content does not change at all times (that is, even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84(A), or even if 5 seconds have passed since the start of the display). In other words, the display when something is abnormal is simpler than the display when something is normal. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that something is not normal (or abnormal) without causing confusion or unnecessary burden.

FIG. 106 is an example of a display mode for notifying errors related to performance display. The displays in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(D) described above will not be displayed even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 84(A) or even if 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the display. Even when the content does not change but there is an abnormality, the message is displayed in accordance with the interval shown in FIG. 84(A) or every 5 seconds, for example, in FIG.
The display contents may be changed as shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(E). Figure 106(A)~
In the display mode of FIG. 106(E), the lower two digits are blinking.
) is different from the display mode. According to the error notification mode shown in FIG. 106, the display contents change depending on the section, so in addition to indicating that it is not normal, the section at the time of the abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) (the section shown in FIG. 84(A)), It is also possible to recognize the real-time base value at the time of an abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value.

In addition, in order to prevent players from seeing the real-time base value or the previous cumulative base value when slot 3 for gaming machines is released, the lower two digits and the , the lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value in FIGS. 106(D) and 106(E) may be set to, for example, "Er. (flashing)". That is, in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(E), the lower two digits may be "--(blinking)" or "Er.(blinking)".
According to this display mode, in addition to the abnormality, the section at the time of the abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) (Fig. 84
(A) can be recognized.

Note that in the flowchart shown in FIG. 104, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode (step S1206), but when the error is resolved, the error notification is not returned without returning to the normal display mode. Display of the aspect (step S1207) may be continued. Furthermore, when the error is resolved, the normal mode of display may be restored, but the notification that there has been an error may continue to be provided.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, the normal mode is displayed (Figures 84(A) to 84(F)).
), the lowest (4th digit) dot may be blinked (or lit). Also 2
As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 (for example, a one-digit display monitor) is arranged on the main board 11, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 1130 returns to the normal mode of display, and A display monitor different from the display monitor 1130 may continue to notify that an error has occurred (eg, "E. (flashing)").

To be more precise, in the first example above, when the error is resolved, the display is the same as the normal mode (except for the blinking (lighting up) of the lowest dot to notify that there is an error). However, in the display mode of the first example, in order to provide (display) information that is provided (displayed) in the normal mode display (other than the lowest dot, the display mode is the same as the normal mode display). (because they are the same), the display is returned to the normal mode. In addition, the display monitor (different from the display monitor 1130) that notifies that an error has occurred in the second example above is configured so that the display is not cleared in the event of a power outage such as a power outage, similar to the display monitor 1130. do. In other words, information indicating that an error has occurred is not cleared due to a power cut such as a power outage.

In addition, similar to the mode of displaying the yakuren (ren ratio) and the yaku ratio described above, also in the mode of displaying performance information, a clear switch is connected to the main board 11, and by operating the clear switch, the RAM is
The data used for performance display stored in 102 may be cleared. The clear switch in the form of displaying performance information is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of performance information, etc., and the calculation of the performance display has to be recalculated. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is sent to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data, similar to the mode of displaying the winning ratio (continuous ratio) and hand ratio.

If the clear switch is operated in the mode where performance information is displayed, the
, the warning table is displayed in a different display mode from the error display mode (the display mode shown in FIGS. 105 and 106), similar to when the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the hand ratio (Figures 61 and 62). All you have to do is make sure that this is done. Further, if the clear switch is operated when reception is abnormal, both an error display and a warning display may be displayed. For example, an error display and a warning display may be displayed in sequence. When displaying performance using the display mode shown in FIG. 106, for example, error display (real-time base value), error display (
Previous cumulative base value) and warning displays may be displayed in order.

Further, in the same way as the mode of displaying the yakuren (ren ratio) and the winning ratio described above, also in the mode of displaying performance information, an error indicator may be provided on the main board 11 separately from the display monitor 130. good. When an error indicator is provided on the main board 11 in addition to the display monitor 130, it is preferable that the error indicator is placed at a position away from the display monitor 29. Note that in a configuration in which the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 130 and an error indicator, if a reception error occurs, information indicating the reception error is displayed on the error indicator, and the display monitor 130
may be displayed in the display mode shown in FIGS. 105 and 106.

In addition, if there is a reception error, for example, a predetermined error display is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc., so that it can be recognized that the reception is abnormal. You can also do this. Furthermore, a predetermined error display may be displayed on the image display device 5 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command specifying that a reception abnormality has occurred, and the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, predetermined sounds (including voices) may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R.
In addition, by transmitting information that a reception abnormality has occurred, the information display device (for example,
In the display device of the card unit installed on the side of the pachinko game machine 1, the call lamp device installed above the pachinko game machine 1) and the information management device (such as the hall computer),
It may be possible to recognize that there is a reception abnormality.

In addition, other devices, etc. (error indicator, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, information display device, information management device) display monitor 1, regardless of whether reception abnormalities are recognized in
At 30, the display may be erased. In other words, if a reception error occurs, for example, all four digits on the display monitor 130 are turned off. Alternatively, one digit (or two or three digits) of all four digits on the display monitor 130 may be turned off. In other words, the display when the reception is abnormal (the display by the process in step S1207) is at least limited to the display when the reception is normal (the display by the process in step S1206) (a display that makes it clear that the reception is abnormal). (e.g., restricting the performance display by erasing part or all of the performance display, etc.).

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107, the CPU 103 first executes an error detection process (step S10), and
If detected, an error is notified (step S11). In the processing of steps S10 and S11, the CPU 103 monitors the signal output from the out ball detector 710, for example,
A reception abnormality in the signal output from the out-of-ball detector 710 is detected (step S10), and if a reception abnormality is detected, it is notified on the display monitor 1130 or the like (step S11).

Following step S11, the CPU 103 executes random number update processing (step S12).
). In the random number update process of step S12, the CPU 103 updates, for example, the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot type determination, random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination, etc.). Following step S12, the CPU 103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process processing) (step S13). In the special figure processing of step S13, C
The PU 103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 87 to 94, FIG. 101, etc., for example.

Following step S13, the CPU 103 executes performance information update processing (step S13).
14A, S14B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes performance information display processing (step S15). In the performance information display process of step S15, the CPU 103 displays, for example, the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S14A and S14B) on the display monitor 1130 as shown in FIG.

Following step S15, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing (step S16).
In the prize ball process of step S16, the CPU 103 calculates the number of prize balls based on detection signals from various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Following step S16, the CPU 103 performs normal pattern processing (normal pattern process processing).
(Step S17). In the normal symbol processing in step S17, the CPU 103 controls, for example, the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 and the operation of the movable wings in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Following step S17, the CPU 103 executes information output processing (step S18). In the information output process of step S18, the CPU 103
For example, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit installed on the side of the pachinko game machine 1, a call lamp device installed above the pachinko game machine 1, etc.) or an information management device (a hall computer, etc.) It outputs various information such as information, startup information, probability fluctuation information, and abnormality information. Then, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

Note that the processing from steps S10 to S18 shown in FIG. (For example, switch processing to input (determine) the state of detection signals input from various switches, processing to transmit production control commands from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side, etc.) be.

In addition, in the case of the configuration of FIG. 86, in the above switch processing, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A~
Detection signals from the fourth general prize opening switch 24D, firing detection sensor 700A, etc. are sent to the CPU 103.
is output to. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 97, detection signals from the first firing detection sensor 701A and the second firing detection sensor 702A are output to the CPU 103 instead of the firing detection sensor 700A. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 100, an out ball detection sensor 710 is used instead of the firing detection sensor 700A.
A detection signal is output to the CPU 103.

Further, the execution order of each process of steps S10 to S18 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103 may execute the information output process before the random number update process, or may execute the regular figure process immediately after the special figure process.

Furthermore, the grouping of each process (unit of each process), such as the error detection process (step S10) and the error notification process (step S11), is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 103
As shown in , error notification processing (step S11) and performance information display processing (step 15)
may be executed as one process. Note that the process of step S1206 in the error notification process of FIG. 104 (the process of controlling performance display in the normal mode) is
This corresponds to the performance information display process (step S15) in the game control timer interrupt process in FIG. 107.

The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and performance information display process (step 15) in the game control timer interrupt process in FIG. 107 and the error notification process in FIG. 104 will be supplemented. As mentioned above, the error notification process in FIG. 104 may be considered to be a combination of the error notification process (step S11) and the performance information display process (step 15) in FIG. , for convenience of explanation (to explain that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 1130 differs depending on the presence or absence of an abnormality), it may be considered that they are combined into one. .

Further, although FIG. 107 shows the game control timer interrupt process when displaying performance information, the game control timer interrupt process when displaying the winning combination and winning ratio is also the same.
In other words, the performance information update process (step 14A) in FIG. 107 is a process for updating the role ratio (ren ratio) and the role ratio, and the performance information display process (step 15) is used to display the role ratio (relation ratio) and the role ratio. It may be treated as processing. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11), performance information display process (step 15), etc. in the game control timer interrupt process in FIG. 107 and each process shown in FIGS. 61 to 64 is as follows. The relationship between the error notification process (step S11) and performance information display process (step 15) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process in FIG. 104 is the same.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S14A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 107. Figure 109 shows Figure 1
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process (step S14B) performed in the timer interruption process for game control shown in 07.

The CPU 103 executes the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108 in the mode in which the state control process (step S1101A) in FIG. 88 is executed. In other words, the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 702 (second firing detection sensor 702A). On the other hand, the CPU 103
In the mode in which the state control process (step S1101B) in FIG. 101 is executed, the performance information update process (S14B) in FIG. 109 is executed. In other words, the performance information update process (S1
4B) is executed in a configuration including an out ball detector 710 (out ball detection sensor 710A).

In the performance information update process (S14A) in FIG. 108, the CPU 103 first determines whether the probability change flag is on (step S20). If the probability change flag is not on in step S20 (step S20; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step S21).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S21 (step S21; NO), the CPU 1
03, it is determined whether or not the round game flag is on (step S22). In addition, at the start of the jackpot game state shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the round game in progress flag is
The state change switching waiting time (
In step S2008 after the elapse of time T2) in FIGS. 95 and 98, the state changes from the off state to the on state, so the process in step S22 is performed after the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed at the start of the jackpot gaming state. It can also be said that it is determining whether it is later or not.

If the round game flag is not on in step S22 (step S22; NO)
That is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed, the CPU 103 adds the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit to calculate a base value which is performance information (step S23). In the process of step S23, the CPU 103, for example, adds the number of prize balls according to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 83(B)), and adds the number of prize balls to the firing detection sensor. The number of balls hit is added based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 700A (FIG. 83(B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S14A) ends.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on in step S20 (step S20; YES), or the time saving flag is on in step S21 (step S21; YES), or the round game flag is on in step S22 ( Step S22; YES), the performance information update process (step S14A) is ended without performing the process of step S23.

In the performance information update process (S14B) in FIG. 109, the CPU 103 first determines whether the probability change flag is on (step S30). If the probability change flag is not on in step S30 (step S30; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step S31).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S31 (step S31; NO), the CPU 1
03, it is determined whether or not the round game flag is on (step S32). In addition, when the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 102 ends, the round gaming flag is set to the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 10) set in step S2024 of the state control process (FIG. 101).
In step S2028 after the elapse of time T5) of 2, the state changes from the on state to the off state.
It can be said that the process of step S32 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has not elapsed at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

If the round game flag is not on in step S32 (step S32; NO)
That is, if the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 103 adds the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit to calculate a base value which is performance information (step S33). In the process of step S33, the CPU 103, for example, adds the number of prize balls according to the winning hole specified from the detection results (detection signals) of various switches of the various winning holes (FIG. 83(B)), and detects out balls. The number of balls hit is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 710A (FIG. 83(B)),
After that, the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 83(A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S14B) ends.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on in step S30 (step S30; YES), or the time saving flag is on in step S31 (step S31; YES), or the round game flag is on in step S32 ( Step S32; YES), the performance information update process (step S14B) is ended without performing the process of step S33.

The performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG. 108 and the performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG.
According to step S14B), when the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are all off, the number of prize balls and the number of balls struck, which are the basis of performance display, are added. Furthermore, Figure 1
As shown in FIG. 08 and FIG. 109, the performance information update process (step S14A) in FIG.
The performance information update process (step S14B) in FIG. 109 refers to the states of the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round playing flag, adds the number of prize balls and the number of balls driven, and calculates the base value which is performance information. Although they are the same in that they calculate
In step S14A), the round game in progress flag is off before time T2 elapses, as shown in FIG.
In the performance information update process (step S14B), after the time T5 has elapsed, the round game in progress flag is in an OFF state), as explained using separate drawings.

In addition, the processing shown in FIGS. 107 to 109 is based on the detection results by switch processing (output results of various switches of various winning openings, firing detection sensor 700A, etc.) as performance information (addition),
If at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game flag is on, the detection result by the switch process is not reflected as performance information. That is, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is determined whether or not the detection result is reflected as performance information depending on the state of the flag. However, if the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off, the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit will be reflected as performance information, and the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag will be reflected as performance information. Any other process may be used as long as the number of prize balls and the number of balls hit are not reflected as performance information when at least one is in the on state. For example, when the probability variation flag, time saving flag, and round game flag are all off, switch processing related to the number of balls hit (launch detection sensor 700A, first launch detection sensor 701A, second launch detection sensor 702A, out ball detection Detection by the sensor 710A) may be executed, and if at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, or the round game in progress flag is on, the switch process regarding the number of balls struck may not be executed. In other words, it may be a process of determining whether or not to execute a switch process regarding the number of balls hit depending on the state of the flag. In addition, regarding the switch processing regarding the number of prize balls (detection by the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, first general winning port switch 24A to fourth general winning port switch 24D, etc.), the actual Since it is necessary for the payout of the number of prize balls, the switch processing regarding the number of prize balls is executed regardless of the state of the flag, and as shown in the processing shown in FIGS. The determination may be made depending on the state.

FIG. 110 is an example of the arrangement position of the out-ball detector. FIG. 110(A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 is opened from the outer frame 3A. A main board 11 and the like are mounted on the back side of the game board 2. A base member 1129 is provided on the main board 11, and a display monitor 1130 is provided on the base member 1129. Display monitor 1
130 is housed in the board case 202 together with the base member 1129 and the main board 11.

Note that the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110(A) (the display monitor 11 in FIG. 110(B)
As shown in the figure, the display monitor 1130 is placed at the center in the horizontal direction and at the top in the vertical direction of the back surface of the main board 11, but the display monitor 1130 may be placed at other positions on the back surface. For example, it may be arranged on the back surface of the main board 11, at the center in the horizontal direction and at the bottom in the vertical direction. In addition, when it is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main board 11, it is convenient because the displayed contents are easy to see when a store clerk or the like stands to check the displayed contents. Moreover, when it is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 11, it is convenient because the displayed contents are easy to see when a store clerk or the like sits or bends over to check the displayed contents. Furthermore, various wiring (signal lines) may exist above the main board 11 of the game board 2. It is also conceivable that such wiring may bend or become unbundled and end up covering the main board 11. When the display monitor 1130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 11, compared to the case where it is arranged on the upper side, it is less likely that the display monitor 1130 will be covered by bent wiring, which is convenient. Also, related to the above, the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110(A) (same as the display monitor 1130 shown in FIG. 110(B)) is different from the display monitor 130A shown in FIG. 69 in appearance and main board 11. The aspect of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 1130 and the manner of arrangement on the main board 11 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 110. For example, the display monitor 1130 may be
0 to display monitors 130B, 130C, 130D, 130E, 130F, 1 shown in FIG.
It may have an appearance such as 30G, 130H, or 130I.

In FIG. 110(A), the game board 2 (for example, the bottom, lower part, etc. of the game board) has a winning opening (
Game balls that have entered the first general winning hole 50A, second general winning hole 50B, third general winning hole 50C, fourth general winning hole 50D, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, big winning hole) Out port 52
An opening (game ball exit hole) 2A is provided for discharging the game balls taken in to the outside. Note that the paths a, b, and c shown by broken lines are paths (ball recovery paths) through which game balls that have entered the winning opening and game balls that have been taken into the out opening 52 pass. Whether it is a game ball that has entered the winning port or a game ball that has been taken into the out port 52, it passes through any of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside from the opening 2A. be done.

The out ball detector 710 is provided on the game board 2 side, as shown in FIG. 110(A). Specifically, the out ball detector 710 is provided at a position where it can detect game balls discharged from the opening 2A. That is, like the opening 2A, the out ball detector 710 is provided in a flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning port and the game ball that has been taken into the out port 52.

The game ball detected by the out ball detector 710 is collected by the ball receiving member 1700 provided on the outer frame 3A side (game island side). In addition, the signal line 7 of the out ball detector 710
34 is connected to the main board 11. That is, the game ball ejected from the opening 2A of the game board 2 passes through the opening 721 of the out ball detector 710 and is collected by the ball receiving member 1700 to the game island. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A, and a detection signal is output to the main board 11.

An opening (hole for the exit of the game ball) 1701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 (the part on which the game ball rides), and although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 1701. are doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 1700 from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) passes through the opening 1701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 1700.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the out ball detector 710 is placed on the outer frame 3A side (game island side).
It may also be provided. In the example of FIG. 110(B), the out ball detector 710 is provided at a position where it can detect the game ball discharged from the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700.
In other words, similar to the opening 1701, the out ball detector 710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 52, and the out ball detector 710 is provided at the opening of the ball receiving member 1700. A game ball ejected from 1701 is detected. In addition, in FIG. 110(B), the clasp 7
The illustration of 40 is omitted.

Further, although FIG. 110A shows an example in which the out-of-ball detector 710 is installed using the clasp 740, the out-of-ball detector 710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 740.
The same applies to the example in FIG. 110(B).

Further, in FIGS. 110(A) and 110(B), the out ball detector 710 is an external component, but the game board 2 etc. may be equipped with the out ball detector 710 from the beginning. For example, FIG. 110(A)
Then, an out ball detector 710 may be provided below the opening 2A of the game board 2 (at the same position as in FIG. 110(A)). Furthermore, the out ball detection sensor 710A may be provided in the opening 2A of the game board 2 (the opening 2A of the game board 2 is connected to the opening 721 of the main body 720).
). The same applies to the example in FIG. 110(B).

Although three paths (paths a, b, and c) are shown in FIG. 110(A), the game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 52 will eventually reach the opening 2A. The number and shape of the passages are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 110A. The same applies to the example in FIG. 110(B).

Note that the state change switching waiting time (
Time T5) in FIG. 102 is the time required until the game ball picked up by the big prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23, and the time required until the game ball detected by the count switch 23 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 710A. It is affected by the time required to complete the process. Specifically, the shorter the required time, the shorter the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be (does not necessarily have to be shorter).

Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), as shown in FIG.
In this configuration, the time required for the game balls detected by the count switch 23 to be ejected from the opening 2A may be shortened. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, passage a, etc.) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 23 passes is shortened, and the slope is made so that the game ball that has passed through the passage immediately enters the opening 2A. It is also possible to provide a guide. In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 110(B), instead of or in addition to the above, the time required for the game ball ejected from the gaming machine 1 (opening 721) to reach the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is shortened. All you have to do is make it happen. As an example, the slope of the bottom of the ball receiving member 1700 may be increased.

In addition, in order to prevent the game balls from clogging and to allow the game balls to flow quickly, the opening 2A of the game board 2 and the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 may be made wider, or the game board 2 may be made wider. A plurality of openings may be provided, or the ball receiving member 1700 may be provided with a plurality of openings.

When widening the opening 2A of the game board 2, a plurality of out ball detectors 710 (out ball detection sensors 710
A) may also be provided. The same applies to the case where the opening 1701 of the ball receiving member 1700 is widened. In addition, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 2, a plurality of out ball detectors 710 ( An out ball detection sensor 710A) may be provided. Ball receiver member 1
The same applies to the case where a plurality of openings are provided in 700.

When a plurality of out ball detectors 710 (out ball detection sensors 710A) are provided, game balls can be detected at the same time, but for example, it is possible to shift the execution timing of the process executed after detection for one of the simultaneously detected balls. , each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of balls hit.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 that displays the performance described in FIGS. 83 to 110 has the following features:
A firing device (e.g., a ball ejecting device, etc.) for ejecting a game medium (e.g., a game ball, etc.) to a game area (e.g., the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (e.g., first, second Derivation and display of confirmed special symbols that will become jackpot symbols and small winning symbols on the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation and display of determined decorative symbols that will become a jackpot combination on the image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the
Detection means capable of detecting game media launched into the gaming area (for example, a launched ball detector provided on a guide rail (FIG. 85), launched ball detectors 701, 702 provided in the gaming area (
Figure 96) etc.) and
a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the gaming area can win prizes;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D that become the general winning area, and the big winning hole) A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7);
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 103 that determines whether or not it is in the gaming state based on the probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off) For example, the number of balls hit) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls won in each winning slot, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying performance information (for example, performance information in FIG. 83),
The variable winning means is
Changes to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1, and the jackpot opens at timing t3) (door changes from closed state to open state, etc.),
The determining means is
A predetermined period of time before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, FIGS. 95 and 98)
As shown in FIG. 88, it is determined that the advantageous state is present (for example, in the state control process of FIG. 88) As shown, the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses
(Set the round game in progress flag to on state, etc.)

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 700A or the first launch ball detector 701 (second launch ball detector 702) at any timing during time T3 (for example, the game ball in FIG. c, etc.) in the performance display calculation, an accurate base value can be calculated.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 described above is
Equipped with variable display means (for example, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, image display device 5, etc.) that performs variable display and derives and displays display results,
The state a predetermined period before the change to the open state (for example, the state at timing t2, etc.) is as follows:
A special state after the display result of the variable display performed in the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state in which a fanfare effect is being performed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 98) It is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, the predetermined information is (performance information) can be calculated.

In the above embodiments (FIG. 88, FIG. 95, FIG. 95, etc.), the round game flag is turned from the off state to the on state during the fanfare performance after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The flag during the round game may be turned from the off state to the on state before the execution of (such as execution of the ready-to-win effect). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare performance is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds), a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 will be detected by the firing detection sensor before the start of the fanfare performance. 700A and the first projectile ball detector 701 (
The special variable winning ball device 7
In order not to include game balls that are likely to win prizes in the performance display, the round game flag may be turned from an off state to an on state before executing the fanfare performance. Specifically, for example, with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time, the round game flag may be set to the on state at a timing before the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the round game flag may be turned from an off state to an on state at the start of the execution of the fanfare performance.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is removable (for example, as shown in FIG. 96, the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 are The portion above the broken line P is removable, etc.).

With this, it is possible to cope with the case where the detection means is not provided. Also, maintenance becomes easier.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means includes:
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2, etc.) forming a game area (for example, the first shot ball detector 701 and the second shot ball detector 702 are shown in FIG. 96). (The part above the broken line P is configured as a unit.)

This facilitates maintenance. Also, it can be used in common with different models.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
In the gaming area,
There are a left gaming area (for example, left gaming area 10A, etc.) and a right gaming area (for example, right gaming area 10A, etc.) as areas through which the gaming media fired by the firing device can pass.
The unit (for example, the part above the broken line P in FIG. 96) is
A left side detection means (for example, the first shot ball detector 701, etc.) detects game media passing through the left game area, and a right side detection means (for example,
second projectile ball detector 702, etc.).

Thereby, it can be detected no matter where in the game area the shot is fired.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means includes:
The shot ball detector 700 is provided upstream in the flow path of the game media than any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the fired ball detector 700 is a normal winning ball device 6A, It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning holes 50A to 50D, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, as shown in FIG.
The launched ball detector 702 includes the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the general winning hole 50.
A to 50D, provided above the special variable winning ball device 7).

This allows reliable detection.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described in FIGS. 83 to 110 is
A firing device (e.g., a ball ejecting device, etc.) for ejecting a game medium (e.g., a game ball, etc.) to a game area (e.g., the game area 10, etc.) is provided, and an advantageous condition is satisfied (e.g., first, second Derivation and display of confirmed special symbols that will become jackpot symbols and small winning symbols on the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, derivation and display of determined decorative symbols that will become a jackpot combination on the image display device 5, passage of game balls in specific areas, etc.) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the
a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the gaming area can win prizes;
a variable winning prize control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the special drawing process shown in FIG. 87) capable of playing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the open state a predetermined number of times;
Game media that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the gaming area (first general winning opening 5)
0A, 2nd general winning hole 50B, 3rd general winning hole 50C, 4th general winning hole 50D, 1st starting winning hole, 2nd starting winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) A flow path (for example, the opening 2A of the game board 2A as shown in FIG. 110(A) 110(B), the opening 170 of the ball receiving member 1700
A detecting means (for example, an out ball detector 710, etc.) that is provided at a position where the game balls discharged from the game ball can be detected, and is capable of detecting the game medium passing through the flow path;
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D that become the general winning area, and the big winning hole) A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7);
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous state (for example, a CPU 103 that determines whether or not it is in the gaming state based on the probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off) For example, the number of balls hit) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls won in each winning slot, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying performance information (for example, performance information in FIG. 83),
The variable prize control means is
Starting the round game based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, controlling the jackpot door from a closed state to an open state based on the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed),
The determining means is
Until a predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined number of round games have been completed and the variable winning means changes to the closed state (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, the big prize opening door changes from the open state to the closed state). (e.g., from timing t4 to timing t5 when time T5 has elapsed), the advantageous state is determined (for example, as shown in the state control process in FIG. 101, the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). At t5, the round game in progress flag is cleared to an off state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, by not including the game ball (for example, game ball d in FIG. 102, etc.) detected by the out ball detector 710 at any timing during time T5, the performance display can be accurately calculated. A base value can be calculated.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The state when the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the state at timing t5, etc.) is as follows:
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 102, a state where an ending effect is being executed on the image display device 5, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. In other words, even if the game ball is detected by the out ball detector 710 during the ending performance, the game ball (such as game ball d shown in FIG. 102) that has a possibility of winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 , is not included in the calculation of predetermined information (performance information), so accurate predetermined information can be calculated.

Note that in the above embodiments (FIGS. 101, 102, etc.), the round playing flag is turned from on to off during the execution of the ending effect after the final round; The flag during the round game may be turned from the on state to the off state at the first variable display in the normal jackpot, etc.). For example, if the execution time of the ending performance is short (for example, 2 or 3 seconds, etc.), a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 will be detected by the out ball detector 710 after the ending performance is finished. Therefore, in order to avoid including in the performance display the game balls that may win in the special variable winning ball device 7, the round playing flag is changed from on to off after the ending effect is executed. You can. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S2024 of FIG. 101 may be made longer than the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that the round game flag may be turned off from the on state at the end of the execution of the ending effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is removable (for example, the out-of-ball detector 710 is removable using a clasp 740, as shown in FIG. 103(B)).

With this, it is possible to cope with the case where the detection means is not provided. Also, maintenance becomes easier.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means includes:
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, game board 2, etc.) that forms a game area (for example, as for the out ball detector 710, as shown in FIG. 110(B), (It is configured as a unit that can be placed in

This facilitates maintenance. Also, it can be used in common with different models.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 that performs the performance display described in FIGS. 83 to 110 is
A gaming machine that can execute games and that can be controlled to advantageous states that are advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, a time saving state, etc.),
A detection means (for example, the out ball detector 710 shown in FIGS. 103, 110, etc.) capable of detecting the game medium used in the game (for example, the game area 10, etc.);
A signal line through which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, signal line 7 shown in FIG. 103)
34 etc.) and
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 11, a predetermined connection section provided on the main board 11 side, etc.);
an abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the error notification process in FIG. 104, etc.);
Predetermined conditions are met (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A that becomes the first starting winning hole, the normal variable winning ball device 6B that becomes the second starting winning hole, the general winning holes 50A to 50D that become the general winning area, and the big winning hole) A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, a state in which the probability change flag, time saving flag, and round game in progress flag are all off) For example, the number of balls hit) and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls won in each winning slot, etc.) For example, information display means (for example, display monitor 1130 in FIG. 110) capable of displaying performance information (for example, performance information in FIG. 83),
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106).

Thereby, the information display means can be prevented from performing inaccurate display.
For example, if the harness 730 (connection part 732,
733), at least performance display by the display monitor 1130 is restricted, thereby preventing a situation in which the numbers resulting from the fraudulent act are displayed as if they were valid. be able to.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode by the information display means is changed to indicate that the abnormality in the reception state has been detected (for example, the display mode as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106). (changes, etc.).

This allows confirmation without providing a new display means.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The abnormality detection means is capable of detecting a disconnection of the signal line (for example, detectable by monitoring a signal input from the out-of-ball detector 710),
The detection of the disconnection of the signal line is detected externally (for example, the game effect lamp 9, the speaker 8L).
, 8R, card unit display device, call lamp device, hall computer, etc.).

This allows recognition without having to open the door.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 described above,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, an out ball detector 71
0 is configured as a unit that can be placed on the game board 2 as shown in FIG. 110(B)).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, it can be used in common with different models.

In addition, in FIGS. 83 to 110, a pachinko game machine is shown as a game machine that displays performance, but
A medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated (rotating the reels) in response to the player's operation of the operating lever, and the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ ( The present invention can also be applied to slot machines equipped with one or more of the following (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute games, can be controlled to advantageous conditions (for example, bonuses, etc.) that are advantageous to the player, and is a slot machine that can be controlled to provide advantageous conditions (for example, bonuses, etc.) that are advantageous to the player. etc.), and a signal line (for example, a signal line for transmitting the detection signal from the inserted medal sensor, etc.) to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (e.g., the inserted medal sensor, etc.). a signal line outputting to the main board side of the machine), a receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connection section provided on the main board side, etc.), and the detection signal Anomaly detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state (for example, the CPU of the main board of the slot machine), and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a specific combination (combination) of symbols on each reel stops, etc.). A payout means (for example, a hopper motor for paying out medals stored in a hopper tank from a medal payout port) that pays out game media based on Information capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, information indicating a ratio of the number of coins paid out to the number of coins inserted) calculated based on the number of game media put out and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. display means (for example, a display section provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error may be a slot machine.

1... Pachinko machine
2...Game board
3... Frame for gaming machines
3a...Glass door frame
3A... Outer frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device
5... Image display device
6A… Normal winning ball device
6B… Normal variable winning ball device
7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker
9... Game effect lamp
11... Main board
12... Production control board
13... Voice control board
14...Lamp control board
15... Relay board
20... Normal symbol display
21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port switch
23... Count switch
29...display monitor
30... Operation button 100... Game control microcomputer 101, 121... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control unit 1000...Movable accessory

Claims (1)

An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on a specific display result being displayed as a display result of the special identification information, which is equipped with a firing device for firing game media into a gaming area, and which displays special identification information in a variable manner. A gaming machine that can be controlled to
variable means that can be changed to an open state in which game media ejected into the game area can enter;
Provided in a flow path for discharging game media that have passed through any of the entry areas provided in the gaming area and game media that have not passed through any of the entry areas, and for discharging game media that have passed through the flow path. detectable detection means;
a payout means that pays out game media based on fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state; Predetermined information display means having a display area;
special information display means capable of displaying the special identification information;
A game control means having a variable control means capable of playing a round game for changing the variable means to the open state a predetermined number of times, and a determination means capable of determining whether or not the said variable means is in the advantageous state. ,
The variable control means starts the round game based on the display of the specific display result,
The determining means is configured to detect game media that have entered the variable means but have not yet been detected by the detection means after the predetermined number of round games have been completed and the variable means has changed to a closed state. is determined to be in the advantageous state until a predetermined period of time elapses until it is detected by the detection means,
The state when the predetermined period of time has elapsed is a special state after the predetermined number of round games have been completed,
The predetermined information display means includes:
The display area includes a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
A plurality of types of the predetermined information corresponding to each of a plurality of calculation periods can be displayed as the predetermined information in the first display area,
Period information indicating which calculation period out of a plurality of calculation periods is included can be displayed in the second display area simultaneously with the predetermined information,
when a predetermined error occurs, displaying special information in the first display area and the second display area without displaying the period information and the predetermined information;
The game control means executes a process related to the display of the predetermined information display means and a process related to the display of the special information display means in one interrupt process,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images